WF 761 Mruser

WebFOCUS Managed
Reporting End
User's Manual
Version 7 Release 6.1 and Higher
DN4500811.1208
EDA, EDA/SQL, FIDEL, FOCCALC, FOCUS, FOCUS Fusion, FOCUS Vision, Hospital-Trac, Information Builders, the
Information Builders logo, Parlay, PC/FOCUS, SmartMart, SmartMode, SNAPpack, TableTalk, WALDO, Web390,
WebFOCUS and WorldMART are registered trademarks, and iWay and iWay Software are trademarks of Information
Builders, Inc.
Due to the nature of this material, this document refers to numerous hardware and software products by their
trademarks. In most, if not all cases, these designations are claimed as trademarks or registered trademarks by their
respective companies. It is not this publisher’s intent to use any of these names generically. The reader is therefore
cautioned to investigate all claimed trademark rights before using any of these names other than to refer to the
product described.
Copyright © 2008, by Information Builders, Inc. and iWay Software. All rights reserved. Patent Pending. This manual,
or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form without the written permission of Information Builders, Inc.
WebFOCUS
Contents
Preface..............................................................................................................13
Documentation Conventions............................................................................................15
Related Publications........................................................................................................16
Customer Support...........................................................................................................16
Information You Should Have...........................................................................................17
User Feedback................................................................................................................18
Information Builders Consulting and Training.....................................................................18
1. Introducing WebFOCUS Managed Reporting..................................................19

WebFOCUS and Managed Reporting Overview....................................................................20
Managed Reporting Concepts..........................................................................................20
Managed Reporting Features...........................................................................................21
Lowercase Directory Names and File Names in WebFOCUS From UNIX........................22
Managed Reporting Interface...........................................................................................22
Business Intelligence Dashboard..............................................................................22
Java Applets............................................................................................................23
2. Using Dashboard............................................................................................25
Opening Dashboard.........................................................................................................26
Library Only User Logon............................................................................................29
Required Browser Settings...............................................................................................29
Recommended Browser Settings......................................................................................30
Personalizing Your Dashboard..........................................................................................32
Dashboard Layout...........................................................................................................32
Selecting a Domain.........................................................................................................33
Using Domain Tree Items.................................................................................................35
Loading Domain Tree Folders...................................................................................38
Using Filters in Dashboard.......................................................................................39
Signing on to a Server..............................................................................................40
Creating Reports in Dashboard.........................................................................................40
WebFOCUS Managed Reporting End User's Manual 3

Contents
Working With Shared Reports...................................................................................48

Uploading Data Files................................................................................................52
Amper Auto-Prompting..............................................................................................56
Saving Parameter Selections in a My Report..............................................................59
PowerPoint Integration With Dashboard.............................................................................61
Exporting Reports to PowerPoint From Dashboard......................................................62
Exporting Static Graphs to PowerPoint From Dashboard..............................................62
Exporting Live Graphs to PowerPoint From Dashboard................................................62
Adjusting Browser Security to Use the PowerPoint ActiveX Control...............................64
Running Deferred Reports................................................................................................65
Using Role Trees.............................................................................................................66
Viewing Content Blocks...................................................................................................67
Setting Automatic Refresh for a Content Block...........................................................68
Viewing List and Folder Block Items..........................................................................69
Using Banner Hyperlinks..................................................................................................70
Searching Domains.........................................................................................................71
Basic Search...........................................................................................................72
Advanced Search.....................................................................................................73
Creating a Favorites List..................................................................................................75
Mobile Favorites..............................................................................................................77
Accessing Mobile Favorites......................................................................................78
Viewing Reports in the Report Library................................................................................82
Navigating the Report Library Window........................................................................84
Viewing Recently Run Reports..........................................................................................84
Setting User Options.......................................................................................................85
3. Creating Dashboard Content..........................................................................89

Creating Dashboard Content Overview..............................................................................90
Content Window..............................................................................................................90
Creating Content Pages...................................................................................................92
Adding a Content Block....................................................................................................94
Adding Report Library Content to a Content Block......................................................96
Removing a Content Block........................................................................................97
Editing a Content Block...................................................................................................98
4 WebFOCUS
Contents
Selecting Scrolling Options.....................................................................................101

Hiding the Toolbar in a Content Block......................................................................102
Selecting Content Layout...............................................................................................103
4. Using the Deferred Report Status Interface................................................107

Introducing the Deferred Report Status Interface.............................................................108
Deferred Report Status Interface Features......................................................................109
Sort Controls for the Deferred Report Status Interface..............................................109
Deferred Report Status..........................................................................................110
Deferred Report Expiration Setting..........................................................................112
Saved Deferred Output Subject to Temporary Expiration...........................................113
Special Behavior for Sorting by WebFOCUS Reporting Server User ID.........................113
Setting the Automatic Refresh Interval....................................................................114
Viewing Deferred Reports.......................................................................................115
Reviewing Deferred Report Parameters....................................................................116
Saving Deferred Reports........................................................................................118
Deleting Tickets for All Report Status Types.............................................................119
Deferred Status Delete Confirmation Messages.......................................................120
5. Using Power Painter....................................................................................123

Functionality of Power Painter.........................................................................................124
Selecting and Adding a Data Source...............................................................................124
Using Power Painter Options and Palettes.......................................................................127
Using Palettes in the Canvas..................................................................................129
Using Power Painter Objects..........................................................................................133
Using Standard Reporting Functions...............................................................................160
Importing Values From External Files for WHERE Statements....................................171
Creating Parameters for Use in the Auto Prompting Facility.......................................173
Controlling the Overflow and Relative Positioning of Objects in Power Painter.....................176
Setting Overflow Options in Power Painter...............................................................177
Using Fixed Overflow in Power Painter.....................................................................179
Using Flowing Overflow in Power Painter..................................................................182
Setting a Relative Position Between Objects in Power Painter...................................188
Customizing the Power Painter Environment....................................................................194
Setting Preferences...............................................................................................194

Contents
Setting Field Display Options..................................................................................195

Adjusting the Layout of Objects in the Canvas..........................................................195
Adjusting the Power Painter Work Area....................................................................198
Changing the Theme of the Power Painter Environment.............................................199
Accessing Power Painter................................................................................................200
My Reports From Reporting Objects........................................................................200
Reporting Objects..................................................................................................201
Custom Reports....................................................................................................202
Domain Builder......................................................................................................203
User Management Tree..........................................................................................203
Configuring the Power Painter License Code....................................................................204
6. Creating a Report With Report Assistant....................................................205

Accessing HTML Report Assistant..................................................................................206
Selecting the Master File in Report Assistant...........................................................206
Layout of Report Assistant.............................................................................................207
Building Your Report With Report Assistant.....................................................................209
Selecting Report Fields..................................................................................................210
Fully Qualified Field Names.....................................................................................213
Adding Totals and Grand Totals to a Report.............................................................215
Using the Sort By, Sort Across, and Column Phrases to Organize Data......................215
Using Application Objects.......................................................................................219
Searching Field Lists..............................................................................................219
Creating Temporary Fields..............................................................................................222
Examples of Creating A Virtual Field and Creating a Calculated Value........................224
Changing a Field Format.........................................................................................226
Using Calculated Values From the Master File.........................................................230
Defining Field Characteristics.........................................................................................233
Editing a Field Format............................................................................................239
Styling Fields.........................................................................................................240
Drilling Down to New Procedures............................................................................242
End User Drill-down Capability................................................................................243
Styling Specified Field Values.................................................................................244
Creating Parameters..............................................................................................246
6 WebFOCUS
Contents
Aggregating and Sorting Fields................................................................................249

Displaying Subtotals and Other Summary Values Using Prefix Operators....................251
Applying Predefined and Cascading StyleSheets..............................................................253
Customizing Headings and Footings...............................................................................254
Selecting Records for a Report.......................................................................................258
Creating a Where or Where Total Statement............................................................258
Setting Parameter Properties..................................................................................263
Combining Expressions..........................................................................................265
Grouping Expressions Together With Parentheses....................................................266
Limiting Data With Filters...............................................................................................267
Simple Filtering Criteria..........................................................................................267
Complex Filtering Criteria.......................................................................................268
Selecting Records With LIKE and NOT LIKE Operators..............................................268
Working With Joins........................................................................................................268
Applying Other Report Options........................................................................................274
Displaying Pop-up Field Descriptions for Column Titles.............................................282
Creating an HTML Active Report.....................................................................................283
Formatting an HTML Active Report..........................................................................284
Running a Report..........................................................................................................288
Saving a Report............................................................................................................288
Editing a Report............................................................................................................289
HTML Report Assistant Tab References..........................................................................289
Field Selection Tab........................................................................................................290
Report Headings Tab.....................................................................................................311
Selection Criteria Tab....................................................................................................313
Join Options Tab...........................................................................................................318
Report Options Tab.......................................................................................................323
7. Creating a Graph With Graph Assistant.......................................................329

Graph Overview.............................................................................................................330
Content Analysis: Determining Graphing Objectives..........................................................330
Accessing the Graph Assistant.......................................................................................331
Selecting a Graph Type and Style...................................................................................333

Contents
Graph Types..........................................................................................................334
Graph Styles.........................................................................................................336
Previewing Styling Options for Your Graph................................................................337
Auto Arranging Graph Elements..............................................................................338
Selecting Scales....................................................................................................341
Selecting Values for the X and Y Axes.............................................................................342
Hiding the Display of a Y-Axis Field..........................................................................345
Assigning Characteristics to Y-Axis Values...............................................................346
Selecting Records for a Graph .......................................................................................347
Creating a Where or Where Total Statement............................................................348
Setting Parameter Properties..................................................................................353
Combining Expressions..........................................................................................355
Grouping Expressions Together With Parentheses....................................................356
Limiting Data With Filters.......................................................................................356
Creating Temporary Fields..............................................................................................357
Creating Multiple Graphs...............................................................................................357
Merging Multiple Graphs........................................................................................358
Displaying Multiple Graphs in Columns....................................................................359
Working With Joins........................................................................................................360
Displaying Missing Data Values in a Graph......................................................................365
Applying Conditional Styling to a Graph...........................................................................370
Linking Graphs to Other Resources.................................................................................372
Creating Parameters..............................................................................................373
Adding Labels to a Graph...............................................................................................377
Adding Vertical (Y-axis) and Horizontal (X-axis) Labels to a Graph...............................381
Applying Custom Styling to a Graph................................................................................381
Selecting Graph Orientation and 3D Effects.............................................................382
Using Predefined Templates...................................................................................382
Customizing Fonts in a Graph.................................................................................382
Setting the Graph Height and Width........................................................................386
Running, Saving, and Printing Your Graph........................................................................387
Graph Display Formats...........................................................................................390
Graph Types Tab...........................................................................................................393
8 WebFOCUS
Contents
Field Selection Tab in HTML Graph Assistant...................................................................396

Headings Tab................................................................................................................411
Selection Criteria Tab in HTML Graph Assistant...............................................................415
Join Options Tab...........................................................................................................421
Properties Tab..............................................................................................................426
8. Analyzing Data in an OLAP Report...............................................................443

We Do It Every Day: Typical Web Query...........................................................................444
Running OLAP Examples........................................................................................445
OLAP Reporting Requirements........................................................................................452
OLAP-Enabling Data...............................................................................................453
OLAP-Enabling a Report..........................................................................................453
OLAP Terminology..................................................................................................456
Characteristics of an OLAP Report..................................................................................457
Three Ways of Working With OLAP Data..........................................................................460
The Report............................................................................................................460
Selections Pane....................................................................................................460
OLAP Control Panel................................................................................................462
Drilling Down On Dimensions and Measures...................................................................463
Sorting Data.................................................................................................................475
Sorting Measures..................................................................................................475
Sorting Dimensions...............................................................................................482
Grouping Numeric Data Into Tiles............................................................................499
Performing a Calculation on a Measure...........................................................................502
Limiting Data................................................................................................................507
Applying Selection Criteria to Date Elements............................................................516
Visualizing Trends.........................................................................................................530
Displaying Graphs and Reports......................................................................................531
Controlling the Display of Measures in a Report..............................................................541
Stacking Measures................................................................................................542
Changing the Order of Measure Columns.................................................................545
Hiding and Displaying Measures.............................................................................547
Adding and Removing Dimensions..................................................................................553
Saving OLAP Reports.....................................................................................................560

Contents
Uniform Field Name Referencing in OLAP.................................................................561

Saving and Displaying OLAP Reports and Graphs in Other Formats....................................561
Saving OLAP Reports and Graphs in the My Reports Folder.......................................564
9. Visualizing Trends in Reports......................................................................565

Applying Bar Graphs......................................................................................................566
Associating Bar Graphs With Measures...........................................................................567
Data Visualization Bar Graph Attributes...................................................................568
Applying Bar Graphs to Measures in an OLAP Report................................................568
Applying Bar Graphs to Measures Using the Selections Pane or Control Panel............570
10. Using the WebFOCUS Viewer.....................................................................577

Navigating a Report With the WebFOCUS Viewer..............................................................578
Using the Viewer Control Panel.......................................................................................579
Searching a Report................................................................................................580
Creating On-demand Paging Reports...............................................................................586
11. Using Two-Way Email.................................................................................589

Two-Way Email User Steps.............................................................................................590
Subscribing for the First Time.........................................................................................590
Replying to the Confirmation Message............................................................................593
Receiving Your Templates for the First Time....................................................................594
Requesting a Report......................................................................................................595
Examples of Requesting a Report and Accepting the Default Value of a Parameter.....596
Updating Your Subscription Information..........................................................................598
Responding to an Alert..................................................................................................603
12. Using Java Applet Managed Reporting......................................................607

Accessing Managed Reporting........................................................................................608
Using Domains in Java-based Managed Reporting...........................................................609
Using the Toolbar..................................................................................................610
Running a Report..........................................................................................................612
Running a Deferred Receipt Report.........................................................................615
Saving Deferred Receipt Reports............................................................................618
Reviewing Deferred Request Parameters.................................................................619
Sharing a Report...........................................................................................................620
10 WebFOCUS
Contents
Using the Shared Reports Tab................................................................................620

Designating a Report as Shared.............................................................................621
Sharing a Custom Report.......................................................................................623
Creating a Report or Graph............................................................................................624
Duration of Custom Reports and My Reports Folders................................................629
Creating Procedures With the Text Editor.........................................................................629
Text Editor............................................................................................................630
Editing a My Report.......................................................................................................634
Editing a Custom Report and its Properties.....................................................................634
Execution of a Custom Report Using -INCLUDE................................................................636
Filtering Data................................................................................................................644
Simple Filtering Criteria..........................................................................................644
Complex Filtering Criteria.......................................................................................645
Searching a Domain......................................................................................................649
Reader Comments...........................................................................................671

Contents
12 WebFOCUS
WebFOCUS
Preface
This documentation describes the WebFOCUS Managed Reporting end user’s environment,
which provides easy access to the information that users need, regardless of hardware
platforms, database structures, or application programs. It is intended for users that need
to run and create reports.
How This Manual Is Organized

This manual includes the following chapters:
Chapter/Appendix Contents
1 Introducing WebFOCUS Describes Managed Reporting and the end-user

Managed Reporting components and tools you use to run, view, create,
and edit reports. Also explains how to access
Managed Reporting using the Java™ applet or
Dashboard interfaces.
2 Using Dashboard Describes the Dashboard, which automatically

connects you to WebFOCUS and WebFOCUS Managed
Reporting. From Dashboard you can select a domain,
use the items (reports, graphs, reporting objects, or
URLs) in the Domain Tree and Role Tree, view the
status of a deferred report, search domains, access
reporting tools (InfoAssist, Power Painter, Report
Assistant, Graph Assistant), schedule reports with
ReportCaster, access the Report Library, personalize
content blocks, and much more.
3 Creating Dashboard Content Describes how to create content blocks, which display
when you open the Dashboard. Content blocks can
contain launched reports, links to reports, or links to
Internet resources.

4 Using the Deferred Report Describes the functionality of the Deferred Report
Status Interface Status Interface. Provides specific procedures to
guide you through viewing, saving and deleting
reports, deleting deferred reports that are being
processed but are not yet complete, as well as
reviewing parameters for reports containing amper
variables.
5 Using Power Painter Describes how to use the Power Painter to create
reports, graphs, and page layouts.
6 Creating a Report With Describes how to use the HTML Report Assistant to
Report Assistant create tabular reports.
7 Creating a Graph With Graph Describes how to use the HTML Graph Assistant to
Assistant create graphical reports.
8 Analyzing Data in an OLAP Presents the terminology and benefits of using Online
Report Analytical Processing (OLAP). Describes how to
customize reports with the OLAP selections panel
and the OLAP Control Panel. Describes how to sort
and apply various selection criteria (to restrict your
data) as well as how to troubleshoot an OLAP-enabled
report. Explains how the OLAP Control Panel (OCP)
provides you with a versatile way to gain more insight
from your reports by dynamically manipulating report
data. From the Control Panel, you can perform every
function available to a WebFOCUS OLAP user.
9 Visualizing Trends in Describes how to insert visual representations of

Reports selected data directly into your report output.
10 Using the WebFOCUS Describes how to use the WebFOCUS Viewer to view
Viewer long reports.
11 Using Two-Way Email Explains the steps that a user performs to enable
the Two-Way Email capability. Also describes what a
template looks like, and how to use one to request
a report. Addresses the alert response for those sites
that have licensed and installed both ReportCaster
and Two-Way Email.
14 WebFOCUS
Preface
12 Using Java Applet Managed Describes Java-based Managed Reporting and

Reporting provides procedures for running reports and creating
your own reports using blocks of data your
Administrator has created for you.
Documentation Conventions
The following table lists and describes the conventions that apply in this manual.
Convention Description
THIS TYPEFACE Denotes syntax that you must enter exactly as shown.
or
this typeface
this typeface Represents a placeholder (or variable) in syntax for a value that
you or the system must supply.
underscore Indicates a default setting.
this typeface Represents a placeholder (or variable), a cross-reference, or an

important term. It may also indicate a button, menu item, or
dialog box option you can click or select.
this typeface Highlights a file name or command.
Key + Key Indicates keys that you must press simultaneously.
{ } Indicates two or three choices; type one of them, not the braces.
[ ] Indicates a group of optional parameters. None are required,

but you may select one of them. Type only the parameter in the
brackets, not the brackets.
| Separates mutually exclusive choices in syntax. Type one of

them, not the symbol.
... Indicates that you can enter a parameter multiple times. Type
only the parameter, not the ellipsis points (...).

Related Publications
Convention Description
. Indicates that there are (or could be) intervening or additional

commands.
.
.
Related Publications
To view a current listing of our publications and to place an order, visit our Technical
Documentation Library, http://documentation.informationbuilders.com. You can also contact
the Publications Order Department at (800) 969-4636.
Customer Support
Do you have any questions about this product?
Join the Focal Point community. Focal Point is our online developer center and more than a
message board. It is an interactive network of more than 3,000 developers from almost
every profession and industry, collaborating on solutions and sharing tips and techniques,
http://forums.informationbuilders.com/eve/forums.
You can also access support services electronically, 24 hours a day, with InfoResponse
Online. InfoResponse Online is accessible through our World Wide Web site,
http://www.informationbuilders.com. It connects you to the tracking system and known-
problem database at the Information Builders support center. Registered users can open,
update, and view the status of cases in the tracking system and read descriptions of reported
software issues. New users can register immediately for this service. The technical support
section of www.informationbuilders.com also provides usage techniques, diagnostic tips,
and answers to frequently asked questions.
Call Information Builders Customer Support Service (CSS) at (800) 736-6130 or (212) 736-
6130. Customer Support Consultants are available Monday through Friday between 8:00
a.m. and 8:00 p.m. EST to address all your WebFOCUS Managed Reporting questions.
Information Builders consultants can also give you general guidance regarding product
capabilities and documentation. Please be ready to provide your six-digit site code number
(xxxx.xx) when you call.
To learn about the full range of available support services, ask your Information Builders
representative about InfoResponse Online, or call (800) 969-INFO.
16 WebFOCUS
Preface
Information You Should Have

To help our consultants answer your questions effectively, be prepared to provide the following
information when you call:
Your six-digit site code (xxxx.xx).
Your WebFOCUS configuration:
The front-end you are using, including vendor and release.
The communications protocol (for example, TCP/IP or HLLAPI), including vendor and
release.
The software release.
Your server version and release. You can find this information using the Version option
in the Web Console.
The stored procedure (preferably with line numbers) or SQL statements being used in
server access.
The Master File and Access File.
The exact nature of the problem:
Are the results or the format incorrect? Are the text or calculations missing or
misplaced?
The error message and return code, if applicable.
Is this related to any other problem?
Has the procedure or query ever worked in its present form? Has it been changed recently?
How often does the problem occur?
What release of the operating system are you using? Has it, your security system,
communications protocol, or front-end software changed?
Is this problem reproducible? If so, how?
Have you tried to reproduce your problem in the simplest form possible? For example, if
you are having problems joining two data sources, have you tried executing a query
containing just the code to access the data source?
Do you have a trace file?
How is the problem affecting your business? Is it halting development or production? Do
you just have questions about functionality or documentation?

User Feedback
User Feedback
In an effort to produce effective documentation, the Documentation Services staff welcomes
your opinions regarding this manual. Please use the Reader Comments form at the end of
this manual to communicate suggestions for improving this publication or to alert us to
corrections. You can also use the Documentation Feedback form on our Web site,
http://documentation.informationbuilders.com/feedback.asp.
Thank you, in advance, for your comments.
Information Builders Consulting and Training

Interested in training? Information Builders Education Department offers a wide variety of
training courses for this and other Information Builders products.
For information on course descriptions, locations, and dates, or to register for classes, visit
our World Wide Web site (http://www.informationbuilders.com) or call (800) 969-INFO to
speak to an Education Representative.
18 WebFOCUS
WebFOCUS
1 Introducing WebFOCUS Managed Reporting
This documentation provides an overview

Topics:
of WebFOCUS and Managed Reporting.
It also describes the end-user WebFOCUS and Managed Reporting
components and tools you use to run, Overview
view, create, and edit reports. Use this
documentation to learn about the Managed Reporting Concepts
structure and the capabilities of each Managed Reporting Features
component and tool.
Managed Reporting Interface

WebFOCUS and Managed Reporting Overview
WebFOCUS and Managed Reporting Overview

WebFOCUS is a complete, Web-ready, enterprise data access and reporting system, which
takes advantage of the low-cost, low-maintenance, and wide distribution capabilities of the
World Wide Web and internal corporate Web sites.
WebFOCUS enables application developers and Web designers to create powerful EIS and
decision-support applications that deliver easy access to the information that users need,
regardless of hardware platforms, data source structures, or application programs. Developers
can create sophisticated Web pages that enable end users to view static reports, run dynamic
reports, and create parameterized queries for individual requests.
WebFOCUS Business Intelligence Dashboard enables you to create a personalized view of
WebFOCUS. When you connect to Dashboard you are also connecting to WebFOCUS Managed
Reporting.
WebFOCUS Managed Reporting provides a streamlined reporting environment that virtually
eliminates the complexities of today's corporate data. Your administrator defines the interface
that you use to access your company's data.
Managed Reporting Concepts

Managed Reporting includes the following components:
Domains. Domains are the highest level of organization. Domains provide data on a particular
topic (such as sales, inventory, or personnel). The data is stored in different forms in the
following domain components: predefined reports (Standard Reports), data sources used
to create reports (Reporting Objects), and reports created and saved by users (My Reports,
Custom Reports, and Shared Reports).
Standard Reports. A Standard Report is a pre-defined procedure that your Administrator
creates and stores in a group folder or subgroup folder. You use Standard Reports to retrieve
data that changes on a regular basis, for example, monthly inventory reports or weekly sales
reports. Each time you run a Standard Report the output reflects the most current data,
while the format of the report remains constant.
Reporting Objects. A Reporting Object is a tailored view of a set of data that your
Administrator creates and saves to a group folder. You use the data contained in a Reporting
Object to create personal reports quickly and in compliance with your company's reporting
rules and guidelines.
My Reports. A My Report is a personal report you save while working in a domain. Once
you access a Reporting Object and create a report, you can save the report as a My Report.
Once saved, you can run or edit these reports. No other user has access to your reports.
20 WebFOCUS
1. Introducing WebFOCUS Managed Reporting
Custom Reports. A Custom Report is a report that you create and edit using the HTML
Report Assistant, HTML Graph Assistant, or the Editor. Custom Reports are located in the
Custom Reports folder located under the My Reports tab in the Domains environment.
Custom Reports are available to users who have been granted the Advanced privilege in
Managed Reporting. Administrators automatically have the Advanced privilege and they can
assign this privilege to other users and roles.
Shared Reports. A Shared Report is a My Report or Custom Report that another user has
prepared and saved with the Shared Report capability. You can run a Shared Report from
the Shared Reports tab. You can also copy it to your My Reports tab and then modify it
without affecting the original report.
Note: Although you can share a Custom Report with other users, if the other user does not
have the Advanced privilege, this user can only run and run deferred the report; they cannot
save the report. If the user has the Advanced privilege, the user can run, run deferred, save,
and edit the saved copy.
Static Reports. A Static Report is a type of Standard Report in which the output never
changes. Unlike a regular Standard Report, which always reflects current data, a Static
Report delivers a snapshot of data from a specific time. For example, a Static Report may
be a Web page that contains a report.
Help System. Each domain may also contain a customized help system that you can access
for specific information about your implementation of Managed Reporting.
Managed Reporting Features

In this section:
Lowercase Directory Names and File Names in WebFOCUS From UNIX
Managed Reporting offers you a selection of reporting tools that you use to create and edit
reports, manipulate data in an existing report, submit a report for background processing,
and view a report.
Power Painter. Power Painter is a Web layout and report creation tool that enables you to
create output and page layout formats. It combines reporting, graphs, and page layout design
in a single tool.
Report Assistant. Report Assistant is an HTML-based tool that you use to create tabular
reports. From Report Assistant you select the data that constitute your report, create new
data from existing data, apply screening conditions to the data, as well as format and style
your report.
Graph Assistant. The Graph Assistant is an HTML-based tool that guides you step-by-step
through the creation of a graph. The Graph Assistant enables you to create and style your
graphs.

Graph Editor. The Graph Editor enables you to change the style or formatting of graph output
after it appears. The Graph Editor may not be available with the graph that you run. Your
Administrator will decide which graphs you can edit.
OLAP Selections Panel and OLAP Control Panel. The Online Analytical Processing (OLAP)
selections panel and OLAP Control Panel enable you to view and manipulate data in your
report. With these tools you can make changes "on demand" and immediately see the output
that results from your selections. OLAP offers you many analytical features to help you
interpret the data in your report.
ReportCaster. ReportCaster is a tool that allows you to manage and schedule the distribution
of your reports. Using ReportCaster you can distribute your reports at scheduled intervals
via e-mail, FTP, or to a printer.
WebFOCUS Viewer. The WebFOCUS Viewer displays report output one page at a time. This
tool is useful for reports that contain a large number of pages. Only the first page is sent
from the Web server to your browser. The WebFOCUS Viewer enables you to page through
the output, as well as search for a specific string of text.
Deferred Receipt. Deferred Receipt allows you to submit a report for background processing.
Once you submit a report, you can continue working in Managed Reporting while WebFOCUS
processes the report. You then use the Deferred Report Status Interface to view the report
output and save the report as a My Report.
Lowercase Directory Names and File Names in WebFOCUS From UNIX

When working with WebFOCUS GUI tools that access directories and files from a UNIX system,
the WebFOCUS Reporting Server returns lowercase directory names and files, by default.
The WebFOCUS GUI tools also create directories and files in lowercase, regardless of the
text case specified (for example, lowercase, uppercase, or mixed case). If the user creates
directories or files at the UNIX command level, they must create them in lowercase.

In this section:
Business Intelligence Dashboard
Java Applets
The following options are available for accessing Managed Reporting.
Business Intelligence Dashboard

The Dashboard interface is ideal for users who quickly need to run Standard Reports. Check
your WebFOCUS Installation manual for information about browser compatibility.
22 WebFOCUS
1. Introducing WebFOCUS Managed Reporting
Dashboard offers you the ability to:

Personalize the content displayed in your Dashboard view.
Advanced search within domains.
Access reporting tools such as Power Painter, Report Assistant, Graph Assistant,
ReportCaster, and Library.
Dynamically access non-WebFOCUS documents.
When you connect to Dashboard you are also connecting to Managed Reporting, which
means all of the Standard Reports and Reporting Objects that are available to you in Managed
Reporting are also be available in Dashboard.
Managed Reporting is accessed by the Dashboard interface. The interface is a customizable
HTML-based front-end that allows you to:
Run Standard Reports and My Reports, either immediately or in deferred mode.
Create reports and graphs using Reporting Objects and Report Assistant or Graph
Assistant.
Save the reports and graphs as My Reports.
Share reports with other users.
Edit My Reports.
Access the OLAP selections panel and OLAP Control Panel to manipulate the data in a
report.
View reports with the WebFOCUS Viewer.
The following additional features are available depending on whether your site is licensed
and your Administrator has granted you the capability to use these features:
Schedule My Reports (ReportCaster).
Respond to a Two-Way Email from any e-mail capable device, including pagers, laptops,
desktops, and PDAs (Two-Way Email).
Java Applets
Java-based Managed Reporting is an alternative to the Dashboard. For more information,
see Using Java Applet Managed Reporting on page 607.

24 WebFOCUS
WebFOCUS
2 Using Dashboard
When you enter WebFOCUS Business Intelligence Dashboard you are automatically connected to WebFOCUS
and WebFOCUS Managed Reporting.
From Dashboard you can perform the following tasks and more:
Search for and select a domain, view the status of a deferred report, and personalize content blocks.
Use items (reports, graphs, objects, URLs) in the Domain Tree and Role Tree.
Access reporting tools such as InfoAssist, Power Painter (if applicable), Report Assistant, Graph
Assistant, ReportCaster, and Report Library.
Note:
Depending on how your view of Dashboard was set up, some features may not be available.
The browser Back and Forward buttons cannot be used to navigate between Dashboard pages, or from
a Dashboard View back to a page viewed before connecting to Dashboard. This applies to Public,
Group, and Personal Dashboard Views.
Topics:
Running Deferred Reports
Opening Dashboard Using Role Trees
Required Browser Settings Viewing Content Blocks
Recommended Browser Settings Using Banner Hyperlinks
Personalizing Your Dashboard Searching Domains
Dashboard Layout Creating a Favorites List
Selecting a Domain Mobile Favorites
Using Domain Tree Items Viewing Reports in the Report Library
Creating Reports in Dashboard Viewing Recently Run Reports
PowerPoint Integration With Dashboard Setting User Options

Opening Dashboard
Opening Dashboard
In this section:
Library Only User Logon
How to:
Open a Public or Group View
Log On to a Personalized View of Dashboard
Change Your Password
Reference:
Considerations When Logging On to Dashboard
There are several views in the Dashboard environment:

Public. A public view is accessible to public users and cannot be personalized. Public
users have execute-only access; they cannot save report requests or report output to a
domain. See How to Open a Public or Group View on page 27.
Group. A group view is accessible to users with a valid Managed Reporting user ID and
password. The user must be a member of the group to gain access to the view. Group
views cannot be personalized by users.
Private. The private view is accessible to users with a valid Managed Reporting user ID
and password. From this view, you can add to or edit the content blocks your Administrator
has set up. See How to Log On to a Personalized View of Dashboard on page 28.
Library Only. The Library Only view is accessible to users with a valid Managed Reporting
user ID and password who have been assigned the Library Only User role. From this view,
you can view content stored in the Report Library. See Library Only User Logon on page
29.
The first time you log on to the Dashboard, you inherit the look and content of the Dashboard
view that you log on from. This happens only the first time you log on; each time you log on
after that, Dashboard will look the same. For example, if you log on for the first time from
a:
Public View, you inherit the look and the content from that Public view.
Group View, you inherit the look and content from that Group View.
Login Page, you inherit the look and content from the General Public View.
For more information on view inheritance, see the Managing Dashboard chapter in the
WebFOCUS Managed Reporting Administrator’s Manual.
26 WebFOCUS
2. Using Dashboard
Reference: Considerations When Logging On to Dashboard

When you log on to Dashboard, you are prompted to enter your Managed Reporting user ID
and password. Your administrator may have set up your environment so that you are also
prompted for a WebFOCUS server user ID and password.
Multiple logons for a single user are available using the Dashboard main logon page and
View Builder.
The URL for accessing the Dashboard logon page is:
http://hostname[:port]/wf_context_root/bid-login?
where:
hostname[:port]
Is the host name and optional port number (specified only if you are not using the default
port number) where the WebFOCUS Web application is deployed.
wf_context_root
Is the site-customized context root for the WebFOCUS Web application deployed on your
Application Server. The default value is ibi_apps.
Note: Information Builders recommends that users do not share user IDs when using features
that assign ownership of content or access to information based on the Managed Reporting
user ID. The features that fall into this area are Deferred Reporting and ReportCaster. Within
ReportCaster there are many considerations in the area of ownership of schedules,
distribution lists, access lists, Report Library access to view reports, and distribution of
reports to Managed Reporting. Another area of consideration is tracing and debugging
because when you are looking for the actions of a user that has multiple users using the
same user ID, isolating the problem becomes more difficult.
Procedure: How to Open a Public or Group View

1. Enter the following URL in your browser to open the WebFOCUS Business Intelligence
Dashboard index page:
http://hostname[:port]/wf_context_root/bid
or
If you know the name of the page you want to go to enter:
For public views: http://hostname[:port]/wf_context_root/bid/viewname_mpv
For group views: http://hostname[:port]/wf_context_root/bid/viewname_gbv

Opening Dashboard
where:
hostname[:port]
Is the host name and optional port number (specified only if you are not using the
default port number) where the WebFOCUS Web application is deployed.
wf_context_root
Is the site-customized context root for the WebFOCUS Web application deployed on
your Application Server. The default value is ibi_apps.
viewname
Is the name of the view given to you by your administrator.
mpv
Indicates a public view.
gbv
Indicates a group view.
2. Click Public Views or Group Views.

3. Click the public or group view you want to view.
Procedure: How to Log On to a Personalized View of Dashboard

1. From a Dashboard public view, click Login or enter the following URL in your Web browser:
http://hostname[:port]/wf_context_root/bid/login
where:
hostname[:port]
default port number) where the WebFOCUS Web application is deployed.
wf_context_root
2. Enter a valid Managed Reporting user ID and password.

3. Click Submit. Your personalized view of Dashboard opens.
Procedure: How to Change Your Password

1. On the Dashboard logon page, click Change Password.
28 WebFOCUS
2. Using Dashboard
The Password Change dialog box opens.

a. In the User ID input box, type your user ID.
b. In the Password input box, type your current password.
c. In the New Password input box, type your new password.
d. In the Confirm Password input box, retype your new password.
2. Click Submit.
A confirmation window displays a message indicating that your password was successfully
changed.
Note: If you change your password in Dashboard, it also changes for Managed Reporting.
Library Only User Logon

Library Only Users and other Managed Reporting users log on to their respective Group Views
using the same URL. The Library Only Group View is only accessible to a named user and
only through a Group View.
Each Library Only User should be a member of only one group. Library content is retrieved
based on user ID, not based on Group membership, and access to Library content by a
Library Only User is the same for all groups of which the user is a member.
Note: In some applications, it may be important to differentiate the Library content that is
available in Dashboard Content blocks using different Group Views. In this case, the Library
Only User can use the Views banner link to navigate from one Group View to another.
Library Only Users do not have access to the Managed Reporting interface.
Required Browser Settings

How to:
Set the Temporary Internet Files Option
Set Advanced Browsing Options
The following Internet Explorer browser settings are required for use with Dashboard:
Temporary Internet files option to check for newer versions of stored pages with every
visit to the page.
Advanced browsing options to reuse windows for launching shortcuts.

Recommended Browser Settings
Procedure: How to Set the Temporary Internet Files Option

1. From the Tools menu in Internet Explorer, select Internet Options. The Internet Options
dialog box opens.
2. Click the General tab.
3. Click Settings beneath Temporary Internet files. The Settings dialog box opens.
4. Click the Every visit to the page option button.
5. Click OK to clear the Settings dialog box.
6. Click OK to clear the Internet Options dialog box.
Procedure: How to Set Advanced Browsing Options

dialog box opens.
2. Click the Advanced tab.
3. Under Browsing, deselect Reuse windows for launching shortcuts.
4. Click Apply.
5. Click OK.
Recommended Browser Settings

How to:
Change Your Browser Colors
Change Your Browser Font
Change the Text Size in Your Browser
Override Web Page Formatting and Style Sheets
We recommend that you change the following Internet Explorer browser settings for use with
Dashboard:
Browser colors to Windows colors.
Web page font to Arial.
Browser text size to medium.
In addition, we recommend you override Web page formatting and Style Sheets.
30 WebFOCUS
2. Using Dashboard
Procedure: How to Change Your Browser Colors

dialog box opens.
3. Click Colors. The Colors dialog box opens.
4. Click the Use Windows colors check box.
or
Deselect the Use Windows colors check box and select black for the text color and white
for the background color.
5. Click OK to clear the Colors dialog box.

Procedure: How to Change Your Browser Font

dialog box opens.
3. Click Fonts. The Fonts dialog box opens.
4. Select Arial for the Web page font.
5. Click OK to clear the Fonts dialog box.
Procedure: How to Change the Text Size in Your Browser

1. From the View menu in Internet Explorer, select Text size.
2. From the pop-up menu, select Medium.
Procedure: How to Override Web Page Formatting and Style Sheets

dialog box opens.
3. Click Accessibility. The Accessibility dialog box opens.
4. Deselect all of the options.

Personalizing Your Dashboard
5. Click OK to clear the Accessibility dialog box.

Personalizing Your Dashboard

You can personalize the content blocks that appear when you open a private view of
Dashboard. Content blocks can contain launched reports, hyperlinks to reports, or hyperlinks
to Internet resources. The following are the types of content blocks:
Launch blocks contain only one item, which is launched when you open Dashboard.
List blocks can contain many items and display a list of hyperlinks to reports or to
Internet resources.
Folder blocks are similar to list blocks and contain the entire contents of a folder.
Output blocks may or may not contain information when Dashboard is launched. When
you run a report or access an Internet resource, the output block refreshes and displays
the new contents rather than open a separate browser window.
Tree blocks add a Domain Tree, without the sidebar frame, to a Public View or Group
View page.
Watch List blocks add a Report Library Watch List interface.
You can also create content pages that contain your content blocks, or content pages that
contain the ReportCaster or Report Library user interfaces. For details, see Creating Dashboard
Content on page 89.
Dashboard Layout
Dashboard contains the following areas:
Banner. Contains hyperlinks that allow you to access various functions of Dashboard.
Content area. Contains the content blocks and content pages that were set up by you
or your Administrator.
Domain Tree. Contains the list of reports, reporting objects, and Internet hyperlinks you
can access. You can expand the Domain Tree to view the entire name of an item by
dragging the control bar that separates the Domain Tree from the content area.
Role Tree. Contains lists of hyperlinks to items (reports, graphs, launch pages, and
URLs) in the User Groups to which you belong. You can expand the Role Tree to view the
entire name of an item by dragging the control bar that separates the Role Tree from the
content area.
32 WebFOCUS
2. Using Dashboard
Toolbars. Toolbars are set up by your administrator and can contain hyperlinks to Web
sites, other tools, applications, and documents. Hyperlinks accessed from a toolbar open
in separate browser window.
These areas may appear differently depending on how your Administrator has set up your
view of Dashboard. The items may be displayed in different locations, and the Domain Tree,
Role Tree, and toolbars may be hidden. The Domain Tree, Role Tree, and content blocks
may appear with scrolling buttons or scroll bars.
In the Dashboard layout, the banner is on the top right of the window, the content area is
on the lower right of the window, and the Domain Tree is on the left side of the window.
As shown in the following image, scroll bars appear in the launch block (Product Orders
Shipped by Manufacturing Plant) and scroll buttons appear in the toolbar for the folder block
(Product Analysis). If your view of Dashboard contains a Role Tree, it appears in the same
area as the Domain Tree. You can toggle between the Domain Tree and Role Tree by clicking
the button to the left of the Refresh Contents icon in the Domain Tree/Role Tree title bar.
Selecting a Domain
All of the domains that a user is authorized to access are displayed in the Domain Tree by
default. A user can limit the number of domains displayed in the Domain Tree by selecting
a subset (Favorite Domains) of the available domains in the Domain Tree section of the
Personalize Options window. For details, see Personalize Options Window on page 86.

Selecting a Domain
Depending on how your Administrator has set up your view of Dashboard, you may not have
access to the Domain Tree. There may also be a banner hyperlink called Tree, which you
can select to display a floating Domain Tree in a separate browser window.
The following image shows an example of a Domain Tree displaying multiple domains,
including the Sales Support domain which contains Standard Reports, Reporting Objects,
My Reports, and Shared Reports folders, as well as subfolders and report icons.
A list of the domain’s folders and objects, populated from the Managed Reporting Domain,
appear in a tree structure. You can access any of the items contained in the domain. When
the contents of a Domain Tree change, such as when a My Report is added, the contents
are automatically updated. You can also use the Refresh button (circle with arrow) in the
toolbar to update the Domain Tree contents.
34 WebFOCUS
2. Using Dashboard
The icons located next to each item represent the item type. In the following table, the first
column lists the icons, and the second column describes what they represent.
Icon Identifies...
Reports and reporting objects in a domain.

- Reports
Web pages and reports run from launch pages.

- Internet hyperlinks
Using Domain Tree Items

In this section:
Loading Domain Tree Folders
Using Filters in Dashboard
Signing on to a Server
Reference:
Dashboard Properties
A domain can contain reports, reporting objects, and Internet hyperlinks. These items are
located in the Standard Reports, My Reports, Custom Reports (located within My Reports),
Shared Reports, and Reporting Objects folders of a domain.
When you right-click an item from one of these folders, a menu appears that enables you
to select one of the options available for that item type. Note that the Schedule, Library
Version, and Filter options are available only when applicable. The options for:
Standard Reports (identified by the Report icon) include Run, Run Deferred, Open, Edit
Source, Cut, Copy, Delete, Schedule, Library Version, Add to Favorites, Add to Mobile
Favorites, Filter, and Properties. The Run function does not appear if your Administrator
defined the report as deferred-only.
Note: When viewing the details of a drill-down report, use the Back button in your browser
to return to the original report.

My Reports (identified by the Report icon) include Run, Run Deferred, the tool used to
create the report (InfoAssist, Power Painter, Report Assistant, or Graph Assistant), Delete,
Schedule, Library Version, Add to Favorites, Add to Mobile Favorites, and Properties.
When you delete a report, if the report is the only item in the folder, the folder is also
deleted. You also have the option of deleting a folder including all of its contents. For
details about creating My Reports, see Creating Reports in Dashboard on page 40.
Custom Reports (identified by the Report icon and located in the My Reports folder)
include Run, Run Deferred, the tool used to create the report (InfoAssist, Power Painter,
Report Assistant, or Graph Assistant), Editor, Cut, Copy, Paste, Delete, Schedule, Library
Version, Add to Favorites, Add to Mobile Favorites, and Properties. For details about
creating Custom Reports, see Creating Reports in Dashboard on page 40.
Shared Reports (identified by the Report icon) can include Run, Run Deferred, Save as
My Report, Schedule, Library Version, Add to Favorites, Add to Mobile Favorites, and
Properties. For details about Shared Reports, see Working With Shared Reports on page
48.
Reporting Objects (located in the Reporting Objects folder and identified by the Report
icon) include InfoAssist, Power Painter (if applicable), Report Assistant, Graph Assistant,
and Properties. Any reports created from a Reporting Object are saved within the My
Reports folder in a subfolder named for the group folder where the Reporting Object is
located. For details about creating a report, see Creating Reports in Dashboard on page
40.
Reporting Objects are the basis for creating My Reports and contain the data source
fields that you can select in a reporting tool to build a report or graph. Reporting Objects
are designed by a developer or administrator and are organized within group folders. You
can open a Reporting Object with any of the available reporting tools, which include
InfoAssist, Power Painter (if applicable), Report Assistant, and Graph Assistant. Using
the desired tool, you can select fields for your report or graph, manipulate and style the
data, and save the procedure, which is automatically saved in a My Report subfolder
named for the group folder where the Reporting Object is located.
Internet hyperlinks (identified by the Internet hyperlink icon) include Go To, Add to
Favorites, Add to Mobile Favorites, and Properties.
For details about using the Library Version option to view Report Library content, see Viewing
Reports in the Report Library on page 82. For details about using the Schedule option to
schedule reports, see your ReportCaster documentation.
Note:
If you are running very large reports, you may need to increase the virtual memory on
your machine. See your System Administrator for details.
36 WebFOCUS
2. Using Dashboard
A menu does not appear if you are accessing a public view of Dashboard. Only the default
action is allowed for the list items in a public view.
The following image shows the public view of the Dashboard containing the Century
Corporation domain. In the Domain Tree panel, right-clicking an item within the Standard
Reports folder displays a pop-up menu with options that include Run, Run Deferred, Schedule
(if applicable), Library Version (if applicable), Add to Favorites, Add to Mobile Favorites, and
Properties.
Reference: Dashboard Properties

The Dashboard Properties dialog box displays General properties for all items plus Detail
properties for reports (procedures). General properties include Name, Folder, Folder Href,
Domain, Domain Href, Last Modified On, Size, Run, File Name, Created On, Created By, and
Last Modified By. The Created By and Last Modified By properties are not displayed by
default, but can be displayed when set by the Dashboard administrator.
If you click the Detail link at the top of the Dashboard Properties dialog box, details for the
procedure associated with the selected report are parsed and displayed in folders that
include Master Files, Data Elements, Sorts, Conditions, Expressions, Output Format, and
Join Type.

The following image shows General properties displayed in the Dashboard Properties dialog.
Loading Domain Tree Folders

When a user opens one of the default folders in the Domain Tree, (Standard Reports,
Reporting Objects, My Reports, Shared Reports), a request is sent back to Managed Reporting
to retrieve subfolders directly under the top-level folder. As each node of the tree is expanded
only that section of the tree is populated. This reduces the time needed to create the tree
when a Domain is selected.
When reports from a folder are loaded into the Domain Tree, only a maximum of 25 report
items are loaded each time. A link labeled View More is displayed in the tree to enable users
to retrieve up to 25 additional items.
When you create a list, launch, or output block, clicking a folder expands the tree one level
at a time.
38 WebFOCUS
2. Using Dashboard
Using Filters in Dashboard
How to:
Use Filters
You can apply filters to Standard Reports if filters have been set up for you by the Dashboard
administrator. Filters enable you to quickly select predefined criteria to limit the data that
is included in the report or graph you are running.
Filter selections stay in effect only for the Dashboard session. Once you log off the Dashboard,
all Filter selections are cleared.
Procedure: How to Use Filters

1. Click a Standard Report.
2. From the menu, select Filter.
If the Filter option is not available on the menu, this means filters have not been set up
for this report.
The Filter Selection window opens.
Note: The Filter Selection window depends on how your administrator set up the filters.
The window shown here has three check boxes for Year, 1998, 1999, and 2000; three
check boxes for Geographic Areas, East, Midwest, and West; and four check boxes for
Quarters, first through fourth.

Creating Reports in Dashboard
3. Select the filtering options you want to use and click Save.
Your selections are saved, and the Filter Selection window closes.
4. Click the report and select Run or Run Deferred to execute the report.
Signing on to a Server
When running a report request, or using InfoAssist, Power Painter (if applicable), Report
Assistant, or Graph Assistant in the Dashboard, you may be prompted for credentials to
connect to the WebFOCUS server, depending on how the Dashboard has been configured.
If you have questions, contact your administrator.
Once you enter these credentials, the system remembers them for the duration of your
browser session, or the duration set by your WebFOCUS administrator. These credentials
are not stored on your computer, and are not encrypted in the WebFOCUS cookie. Your
browser must be configured to accept cookies in this case.

In this section:
Working With Shared Reports
Uploading Data Files
Amper Auto-Prompting
Saving Parameter Selections in a My Report
How to:
Create or Delete a My Report in Dashboard
Copy a Shared Report and Save it as a My Report
Create a Custom Report in Dashboard
Copy or Move a Custom Report in Dashboard
Create or Delete New Custom Report Folders
Edit a Custom Report
Reference:
Dashboard Text Editor
You can create My Reports using Reporting Objects. You can also copy a Shared Report and
save and modify it as your own My Report.
40 WebFOCUS
2. Using Dashboard
In addition, you can create new reports from scratch in the Custom Reports folder. Custom
Reports enable you to create your own reports using one of the reporting tools or the text
editor. Reporting tools include InfoAssist, Report Assistant, Graph Assistant, and Power
Painter (if the user is assigned the Advanced privilege). Depending on which tool you use to
create your report, you can edit your report using the same tool or the text editor. You can
change the name of your Custom Report from the Properties window, and you can create
new folders in the Custom Reports folder.
From Custom Reports, you can also upload (import) an external data file for use in one of
the available reporting tools. For details, see Uploading Data Files on page 52.
You can insert a procedure within another procedure when creating a custom report. For
details, see Execution of a Custom Report Using -INCLUDE on page 636.
Note:
You may not be able to create reports or Custom Reports in Dashboard if you do not
have privileges to do so.
If the heading in a procedure contains a single quote character (') and the procedure is
run in a Dashboard that is configured with SiteMinder, a message appears. This occurs
because SiteMinder is configured by default to block single quotes in a query string.

Procedure: How to Create or Delete a My Report in Dashboard

1. In the Domain Tree, expand the Reporting Objects folder, then expand the desired
subfolder.
2. Right-click a Reporting Object and select InfoAssist, Power Painter, Report Assistant, or
Graph Assistant.
3. Create and save your report.
The report is saved with the name you provide in a subfolder within the My Reports
folder. The subfolder is named for the group folder where the selected Reporting Object
is located.
For details on using:
InfoAssist, see the WebFOCUS InfoAssist User’s Manual.
Power Painter, see Using Power Painter on page 123.
Report Assistant see Creating a Report With Report Assistant on page 205.
Graph Assistant see Creating a Graph With Graph Assistant on page 329.
To delete a report or folder in My Reports, right-click the report or folder and select Delete
from the menu.
Note:
Create or edit only one report at a time when using InfoAssist, Power Painter, Report
Assistant, or Graph Assistant.
If you log off Dashboard without first closing the Report or Graph Assistant, you must
manually close the tools.
Procedure: How to Copy a Shared Report and Save it as a My Report

Copying a Shared Report and saving it as a My Report enables you to edit the report or graph
without affecting the original. For details, see How to Copy a Shared Report on page 51.
42 WebFOCUS
2. Using Dashboard
Procedure: How to Create a Custom Report in Dashboard

1. In the Domain Tree, expand the My Reports folder.
2. Right-click the Custom Reports folder and select one of the following:
InfoAssist to create a report or chart using InfoAssist.
Power Painter to create a report, graph, or page layout using Power Painter.
Report Assistant to create a report using the Report Assistant.
Graph Assistant to create a graph using the Graph Assistant.
Editor to create a report or graph using the Dashboard text editor.
New Folder to create a new folder in Custom Reports.
If you have selected InfoAssist, Power Painter, Report Assistant, or Graph Assistant,
you will be prompted to select a data source from which you want to report, then click
OK to continue.
The selected tool opens.
3. Design and then save your Custom Report.

Report Assistant, see Creating a Report With Report Assistant on page 205.
Graph Assistant, see Creating a Graph With Graph Assistant on page 329.
Editor, see Dashboard Text Editor on page 45.
Procedure: How to Copy or Move a Custom Report in Dashboard

1. In the Domain Tree, expand the My Reports folder, then expand the Custom Reports
folder.
2. Right-click the existing report that you want to copy or move.
3. Perform one of the following:
To copy a report, select Copy.

To move a report, select Cut.
4. Right-click a Custom Reports folder.

5. Select Paste.
If you copied a report to the same Custom Reports folder, the copied report has (Copy
1) appended to the original report name. If you make multiple copies of the report, each
additional copy increments the numeric value listed after Copy.
If you copied or moved a report to a different Custom Reports folder, the copied report
uses the original report name. If the same report name already exists, a confirmation
dialog box appears where you can select to overwrite the existing report or not.
Procedure: How to Create or Delete New Custom Report Folders

1. In the Domain Tree, expand the My Reports folder.
2. Right-click Custom Reports and select New Folder.
3. Enter a name for the new folder in the New Folder dialog box and click Save.
4. The new folder appears in the Custom Reports folder.
To delete a folder in Custom Reports, right-click the folder and select Delete.
44 WebFOCUS
2. Using Dashboard
Procedure: How to Edit a Custom Report

Edit only one report at a time when using InfoAssist, Power Painter, Report Assistant, or
Graph Assistant.
1. In the Domain Tree, expand the My Reports folder, then expand the Custom Reports
folder.
2. Right-click the desired Custom Report and select the tool you created the report with
(InfoAssist, Power Painter, Report Assistant or Graph Assistant) or select Editor to edit
the report code manually in the Dashboard text editor.
Note: After editing with the Dashboard text editor, you will not be able to use reporting
or graphing tools to open reports created using InfoAssist, Power Painter, Report
Assistant, or Graph Assistant because the tools cannot read some user-added syntax.
3. Edit the report as necessary and save any changes.

4. To change the name of the custom report, click the report and select Properties.
5. Edit the name in the Description text box.
6. Click OK.
Reference: Dashboard Text Editor

You can use the text editor to create, view, edit, and run the source code for Custom Reports
in Dashboard. The text editor enables you to use familiar editing techniques, such as cut,
copy, and paste. You can also find and replace text and specify case.
Note: After editing with the Dashboard text editor, you will not be able to use reporting or
graphing tools to open reports created with InfoAssist, Power Painter, Report Assistant, or
Graph Assistant because the tools cannot read some user-added syntax.

The following image shows the text editor with a sample file in the editing window.
The following table describes all of the functions available in the Dashboard text editor. The
first column lists the buttons, and the second column lists the actions they produce.
Button Action...
- Save button Saves the report. Acts as "Save As" the first time you
save the report.
Saves the report in the Custom Reports folder with a

- Save As button
name you specify.
Runs the current report.

- Run button
Exits the Editor window. If you made changes to the

- Quit button
original report, a window prompts you to save or cancel
the changes.
Opens the online help.

- Help button
Cuts, copys, or pastes the highlighted text.

- Cut, Copy and
Paste buttons
Deletes, selects all, undoes, and redoes.

- Delete, Select
All, Undo, and Redo buttons
46 WebFOCUS
2. Using Dashboard
Button Action...
Finds and replaces text.

- Find and Replace button
Enables you to go to a particular line number in the

- Go to line button report.
Converts highlighted text to uppercase.

- Uppercase button
Converts highlighted text to lowercase.

- Lowercase button
Sets the text color in the editor.

- Text color button
Sets the background color of the editor.

- Background color
button Note: The text color and background colors are for the
current session only.
Enables you to change the font of the editor.

- Font
drop-down menu
Enables you to change the font size of the text in the

- Font size drop-down editor.
menu
Note:
If you create a Custom Report using InfoAssist, Power Painter, Report Assistant, or Graph
Assistant, and then edit the report with the text editor, you can only open and edit the
report using the text editor.
If you use a Firefox browser, the editing toolbar, which begins with the cut, copy, paste
features listed in the table, does not appear. Use the standard control keys (Ctrl+X,
Ctrl+C, Ctrl+V) to cut, copy, and paste.
When you click the X in the upper right corner of the text editor, the procedure is saved,
however the Domain Tree does not refresh. To refresh the Domain Tree contents, click
the refresh button (circle with arrow) in the toolbar.

Working With Shared Reports
How to:
Share a My Report
Share a New Report
Copy a Shared Report
Edit a Shared Report
When you create reports and graphs, you may want to share them with others in your
organization. The Shared Reports feature addresses this need by enabling you to create
reports and graphs and make them available to other users who access the same domain.
By designating a report as shared, you allow other users to run it from the Shared Reports
folder in the Domain Tree. Other users cannot edit a Shared Report in the Shared Reports
folder, but they can copy a Shared Report to their own My Reports folder and then edit the
copied report without affecting the original. All users who access the Domain Tree have the
ability to view, run, and copy Shared Reports. Note that users with the User role cannot copy
Shared Reports.
Only users who have been granted the Shared privilege by their Administrator can share a
My Report. The My Reports that you contribute appear in the Shared Reports folder of other
users and display the Shared Report icon. These reports also appear in your My Reports
folder displaying the same Shared Report icon to denote that they have been made available
to others. Note that Custom Reports can be shared in the same manner as My Reports.
The Shared Reports folder in the Domain Tree consists of folders named for other users
who contributed Shared Reports. All the reports contributed by a particular user appear under
the Shared Reports folder in a subfolder named for the Reporting Objects group folder,
Custom Reports folder, or Custom Reports subfolder where the report was created. Shared
Reports are available to all other Managed Reporting users who can access the same domain.
Note that reports that you share are not listed in your own Shared Reports folder.
48 WebFOCUS
2. Using Dashboard
The following image shows three Shared Reports contributed by a user named Jeff who
created and shared the reports from three different locations: the Custom Reports folder,
a Custom Reports subfolder, and a Reporting Objects group folder named Test IA.
The Shared Reports folder enables you to:

Run a Shared Report immediately by clicking the report.
Run a Shared Report at a later time by right-clicking the report and selecting Run Deferred.
Save the Shared Report to your My Reports folder by right-clicking the report and selecting
Save As My Report. For details, see How to Copy a Shared Report on page 51.
View the information about the Shared Report by right-clicking the report and selecting
Properties. For details, see Dashboard Properties on page 37.
View Report Library content (if applicable) by right-clicking the report and selecting Library
Versions. For details about using the Library Versions option to view Report Library content,
see Viewing Reports in the Report Library on page 82.
Schedule the distribution of the Shared Report (if applicable) by right-clicking the report
and selecting Schedule. For details about using the Schedule option, see your
ReportCaster documentation.
Add a Shared Report to your Favorites list by right-clicking the report and selecting Add
to Favorites.

Add a Shared Report to your Mobile Favorites list by right-clicking the report and selecting
Add to Mobile Favorites.
Ensure that you are viewing the most current list of Shared Reports by clicking the Refresh
Contents icon, located in the top right corner of the Domain Tree panel.
Check the status of a Shared Report that has been run deferred by clicking Utilities in
the Dashboard banner and selecting Deferred Status in the menu to open the Deferred
Report Status Interface window.
Procedure: How to Share a My Report

To make an existing My Report available to other users:
1. In the Domain Tree, expand the My Reports folder, then expand the Reporting Object or
Custom Reports subfolder where the desired My Report is located.
2. Right-click the report that you want to share and select Properties.
The Properties dialog box opens.
3. Select the Share Report check box and click OK.

The Properties dialog box closes and the report becomes available to all users who access
the domain.
Procedure: How to Share a New Report

To make a new report or graph that you are creating available to every user who accesses
the domain:
1. Create and save a report or graph using the InfoAssist, Power Painter, Report Assistant,
or Graph Assistant tool.
You can create and save a report or graph from either the Custom Reports folder, a
Custom Reports subfolder, or a Reporting Objects group folder.
2. Locate the saved report or graph in the corresponding folder of the Domain Tree, right-click
the report or graph, and select Properties.
The Properties dialog box opens.
3. Select the Share Report check box and click OK.

Tip: Alternatively, if you are using Report Assistant or Graph Assistant, when you are finished
creating the desired report or graph, you can click Save As in the File menu, select the Share
Report check box in the dialog box that appears, type a descriptive name, and click OK.
50 WebFOCUS
2. Using Dashboard
Procedure: How to Copy a Shared Report

To copy a Shared Report to your My Reports folder:
1. In the Domain Tree, expand the Shared Reports folder.
The Shared Report folder displays folders with the names of users who have contributed
reports.
2. Expand the desired user folder.

The expanded user folder displays subfolders that were used to create the Shared
Reports.
3. Expand the desired subfolder that contains the Shared Report you want to copy.
4. Right-click the Shared Report and select Save As My Report.
The Save As My Report dialog box opens.
You can keep the original name or change the name of the report by deleting the original
and typing a new name in the Description field.
5. Click OK.
WebFOCUS copies the report to your My Reports folder.
After you copy a Shared Report to your My Reports folder, you can edit the report without
affecting the original.
Procedure: How to Edit a Shared Report

1. In the Domain Tree, expand the My Reports folder, then expand the subfolder that
contains the Shared Report you previously saved as a My Report.
2. Right-click the desired report or graph and select the reporting tool option (InfoAssist,
Power Painter, Report Assistant, Graph Assistant).
WebFOCUS opens the reporting tool used to create the Shared Report and displays the
report or graph you copied from the Shared Reports folder.
3. Edit the report or graph and save your changes.


Uploading Data Files
How to:
Upload a Data File
Reference:
Upload Data File Considerations
In Dashboard, you can upload (import) external data files for use in WebFOCUS reporting
tools. This functionality enables you to easily create a WebFOCUS file description and data
file for use in your reporting application. The Upload Data File option is enabled by default
and is available to all users with access to the Custom Reports folder of the Domain Tree.
Procedure: How to Upload a Data File

1. In the Domain Tree, Right-click the Custom Reports folder and select Upload Data File
as shown in the following image.
The first page of the Upload Data File dialog opens displaying three sections that require
you to make a selection:
Select a file
File Format
52 WebFOCUS
2. Using Dashboard
Field Names
2. Click the Browse button to the right of the Select a file section.
A Choose file dialog opens.
3. Navigate to where the file is located and select Open.

The following image shows the first page of the Upload Data File dialog.
4. In the File Format section, select one of the following supported formats for the file you
want to import:
Excel Spreadsheet (XLS)
Comma-separated values (CSV)
Tab-separated values
Pipe-separated values

5. In the Field Names section, select one of the following supported methods for how you
want the field names created:
Auto-generate field names
First row contains field names
6. Click Next at the bottom of the Upload Data File dialog.

The second page of the Upload Data File dialog, as shown in the following image, appears
for you to review and customize the file conversion options.
7. For each field in the file you imported, you can select the field column heading and then
edit the following attributes for that field:
Field Name
Alias
(Data) Type
54 WebFOCUS
2. Using Dashboard
Format
If you change any of the attributes for a field, click the Apply button to apply the changes
and refresh the data.
8. When all fields have been reviewed, enter a valid name in the File Name input box
(spaces are not allowed) and use the Application Directory menu to select where you
want the file created.
9. Click Next to upload the file.
Two files are created:
Master File
Comma delimited data file (.DAT)
Note: If a file with the same file name already exists, a dialog is displayed prompting
you to allow file replacement.
Reference: Upload Data File Considerations

When uploading data from a supported text file, the file must have the same type of data
in each field and the same fields in every row.
When uploading data from an Excel spreadsheet:
The data must be arranged in an appropriate tabular format and the spreadsheet
must have the same type of data in each column and the same fields in every row.
The data must be stored in the first worksheet of the workbook.
Cells with formulas and special characters are not supported. For example, if
percentages are used the cells should be formatted using the percentage data type
and should not have the percentage special character "%" in the cell.
Excel files must be saved in a binary format. To ensure this, open an Excel file, select
File, select Save As, use the Save as type drop-down list to select either Microsoft
Office Excel Workbook (*.xls) or CSV (Comma Delimited)(*.csv), then click Save.

Amper Auto-Prompting
In this section:
Customizing the Amper Auto-Prompting Facility
Reference:
Parameter Report Options
The amper auto-prompting facility enables you to select parameters and run the report while
still being able to view and change your parameter selections. You can also display and hide
parameters to widen the screen as needed. For example, the following image shows a report
that requires parameter selection.
56 WebFOCUS
2. Using Dashboard
After you run the report, the output appears as shown in the following image:
Reference: Parameter Report Options

From the amper auto-prompting launch page, you have the following options:
Button Description
Run Click this button to run the report.
Reset Click this button to reset the parameter selections.
Save Some reports provide the save parameters option.
Clear Output Click this button to clear the report output area.

Button Description
Run in a new window Select this check box to open the report in a new browser
window.
Double-click splitter bar to hide parameters for full screen

report view. Double-click splitter bar again to return to the
Show/Hide Parameters original parameters and report view.
Customizing the Amper Auto-Prompting Facility

You can customize the look and feel of the amper auto-prompting facility by editing the
launch page template file you are using. All of the available launch page templates are
located in the ibi\WebFOCUS76\ibi_html\javaassist\ibi\html\describe directory. The default
template is autoprompt_top.css.
If you want to customize the banner, create an image, save it in the describe directory, and
change the background-image property, which is shown in bold type in the following Cascading
Style Sheet (CSS) code:
#idBannerDiv {
height:45px;
background-image: url(logo_banner.gif);
background-position: top left;
background-repeat: no-repeat;
margin: 0;
margin-top:2px;
cursor:hand;}
The option to select different launch page templates can be set in the WebFOCUS
Administration Console using the Parameter Prompting selection under Client Settings, where
you can set the IBIF_describe_xsl value to one of the launch page templates.
You can also enter the name of the desired launch page template in a FOCEXEC using the
following code:
<describe_xsl>template</describe_xsl>
where:
template
Is set to one of the following launch page template values:
autoprompt_top - Displays the parameters horizontally at the top of the page and is
the default template value.
autoprompt_top_checked - Same as autoprompt_top, but the Run in a new window
check box is pre-selected.
58 WebFOCUS
2. Using Dashboard
autoprompt - Displays the parameters vertically at the left side of the page.
autoprompt_checked - Same as autoprompt, but the Run in a new window check box
is pre-selected.
autoprompt_simple - Basic input form.
Saving Parameter Selections in a My Report
How to:
Save Parameter Values to a My Report
You can save parameter selection values as a My Report for reports that run immediately
or run deferred. By default these reports are saved in the Saved Parameter Reports folder
which is automatically created under the My Reports folder, but you can save parameter
reports anywhere in the My Reports folder structure.
When you select Run from the menu options for Saved Parameter Reports, the saved values
are used to run the report and the prompt form does not display. When you select Edit
Parameters, the prompt form appears so you can make changes to the values before running
the request. You can Run Deferred, which also shows the prompt form before running the
request. Additional menu items for Saved Parameter Reports that are available from
Dashboard are Delete, Add to Favorites, Add to Mobile Favorites, and Properties. You can
also schedule the report for later execution if you have scheduling capabilities.
Note:
Saving parameter selections is only available if you have been assigned the Save entered
values privilege by your administrator.
Multi-select drop-down list values are not selected when you view the launch form for the
My Report with saved parameters.
The Saved Parameter report and the report it was created from must reside in the same
Managed Reporting Domain. If you copy a Saved Parameter report from one domain to
another, you must also copy the original report to the target domain.
If you are a Developer and are working in the Managed Reporting Java Applet environment
you can save Saved Parameter reports to the Standard Reports or Other Files folders.
Note that the Edit Parameters menu option is not available for auto prompt reports that
are saved with parameter values in the Standard Reports or Other Files folders. You can
edit parameter values from the launch form or edit the –DEFAULT values for the procedure
using the text editor. When you run a Saved Parameter report from these folders, the
auto prompt form launches with the saved parameter values selected.

When creating multiple saved parameter reports for the same report or graph, if the report
or graph was created in Version 7 Release 6 and earlier, it is recommended that you
create all of the saved parameter reports from the same procedure that contains the
report or graph request. This is recommended because prior to Version 7 Release 6.1,
a saved parameter report has a reference to the procedure (FOCEXEC) from which it was
created. If you create a saved parameter report from an existing saved parameter report,
the new saved parameter report has a reference to the prior saved parameter report,
which has a reference to the original report or graph procedure. This creates a series of
chained dependent procedures, and if one of the chained procedures is deleted, the
reports with references to the deleted procedure will no longer run successfully.
Procedure: How to Save Parameter Values to a My Report

1. Run a report that has parameters.
2. Select your parameter values and then click the Save the Parameter selections as a My
Report button.
Note: The appearance of this button may be different depending on your application.
The Save Parameters dialog box opens.
3. Type a name for the report and click OK. The report is saved in the Saved Parameter
Reports folder under My Reports.
Note: You may need to click the refresh button (circle with arrow) in the toolbar to refresh
the domain and view the new report.
60 WebFOCUS
2. Using Dashboard
PowerPoint Integration With Dashboard

In this section:
Exporting Reports to PowerPoint From Dashboard
Exporting Static Graphs to PowerPoint From Dashboard
Exporting Live Graphs to PowerPoint From Dashboard
Adjusting Browser Security to Use the PowerPoint ActiveX Control
PowerPoint integration with WebFOCUS provides users with a method of exporting Dashboard
reports and graphs into the PowerPoint application. PowerPoint options appear as an icon
in a Launch block and present users with choices for exporting reports and graphs into new
and existing PowerPoint presentations. When exporting to PowerPoint, reports retain their
styling, and graphs can be output as a static image or a live graph, which is an MSChart
object.
From the Add Block or Edit Block page, a developer can add the MS Office output options
only to a Launch block. The MS Office output options check box, which represents the
PowerPoint options, is grayed out (unavailable) for other block types and when the Launch
block contains Report Library content. The PowerPoint options are available for any Launch
block created for a Public View, Group View, or a user's My View. The Dashboard page where
you can add the MS Office output options is shown in the following image:

Note:
You cannot export multiple reports and graphs that are embedded in a single HTML page
to PowerPoint.
PowerPoint (MS Office output option) is only supported with an Internet Explorer browser.
Firefox and other browser types are not supported.
Exporting Reports to PowerPoint From Dashboard

A report can be exported from Dashboard to PowerPoint as a new presentation. A new file
is created, the report is placed in the first slide, and the styling is retained.
Exporting Static Graphs to PowerPoint From Dashboard

A static graph can be exported from Dashboard to PowerPoint as a new presentation. A new
file is created and the graph is placed in the first slide as an image of the graph output.
Note that the datasheet object is not populated with graph data.
Exporting Live Graphs to PowerPoint From Dashboard
How to:
Export Live Graphs to PowerPoint From Dashboard
A live graph is the term used to describe an MSChart object that stores data in the datasheet
object, which makes it possible to manipulate data in a graph. Live graphs can be exported
from Dashboard to PowerPoint with the following menu options:
New PowerPoint presentation. A new presentation is created, the graph is placed in
the first slide, basic graph type styling is retained, and the datasheet object is populated
with the data for the graph.
Open existing presentation. A dialog presents the user with an option to browse the
desktop for an existing PowerPoint file. The selected presentation is parsed and the
dialogue shows a listing of the current slides in the presentation. The user has the option
of overlaying the graph (placed on top of existing content) in any existing slide or placing
the graph in a new slide at the end of the presentation. The datasheet object is populated
with the data for the graph.
When you export a live graph, you can select from the following list of graph types: Clustered
Column, 3D Clustered Column, Clustered Bar, 3D Clustered Bar, Line, Line with Markers,
3D Line, Pie, 3D Pie, Clustered Cylinder Column, Clustered Cylinder Bar, Clustered Cone,
Clustered Cone Bar, Clustered Pyramid, and Clustered Pyramid Bar.
62 WebFOCUS
2. Using Dashboard
Procedure: How to Export Live Graphs to PowerPoint From Dashboard

The following procedure assumes that a developer has already added the MS Office output
options to the launch block where your live graph is stored in Dashboard.
1. From the Dashboard launch block, click the PowerPoint icon in the title bar above the
graph, as shown in the following image.
The PowerPoint Options pop-up menu appears, as shown in the following image.
2. Select either New PowerPoint presentation or Open existing presentation.

3. Select the desired Graph Type from the drop-down list.

4. If you selected New PowerPoint presentation, a new PowerPoint file is created, and the
graph is placed in the first slide of the new presentation.
If you selected Open existing presentation, use the dialog that appears to browse your
desktop and select an existing PowerPoint file, then in the dialog that appears, use the
Object Insertion Position drop-down list to select New Slide, or an existing slide if you
want to overlay existing content, and click OK.
Adjusting Browser Security to Use the PowerPoint ActiveX Control
How to:
Adjust ActiveX Browser Security Settings
Because WebFOCUS utilizes ActiveX to integrate PowerPoint and Internet Explorer, you have
to adjust your browser security settings to use the PowerPoint ActiveX control.
Procedure: How to Adjust ActiveX Browser Security Settings

1. In Internet Explorer, from the main menu at the top of the browser, Select Tools, then
Internet Options.
2. Select the Security tab and click the Custom Level button.
3. Set each of the following security settings to Prompt or Enable:
Download signed ActiveX controls
Download unsigned ActiveX controls
Initialize and script ActiveX controls not marked as safe
Note: PowerPoint (MS Office output option) is only supported with an Internet Explorer
browser. Firefox and other browser types are not supported.
64 WebFOCUS
2. Using Dashboard
Running Deferred Reports

How to:
Run a Deferred Report
A deferred report is a report that you can run as a background task, while continuing other
work. You can view information about a deferred report in the Deferred Report Status interface
window. The window indicates the time the report was submitted and whether the report
was completed, and provides Delete, View, Save, and Parameters options. For additional
information on deferred reports, see Using the Deferred Report Status Interface on page 107.
Any output from a deferred report can be saved. When you save output from a deferred
report, it will be saved in the My Reports folder of the respective domain.
Note: When accessing a public view of Dashboard, the deferred reports option is not
available.
Procedure: How to Run a Deferred Report

1. Select an item in the Domain Tree, Role Tree, Folder or List block.
2. Select Run Deferred from the menu. A notification window displays indicating that the
report was successfully submitted for deferred execution, as shown in the following
image.
3. To view the status of the deferred report, click Utilities from the Dashboard banner and
then Deferred Status from the menu. The Deferred Report Status interface window opens.
For additional information on deferred reports, see Using the Deferred Report Status Interface
on page 107.

Using Role Trees
Using Role Trees

How to:
Select a Role Tree
Role Trees contain items (reports, graphs, launch pages, and URLs) that have been
associated with the User Groups to which you belong. For example, if you belong to the
Public, Century Corporation and Sales Support groups, you have access to the items in the
respective Role Trees.
Items in a Role Tree have the same functionality as items in a Domain Tree. When you select
an item in a Role Tree, reports provide options that include Run, Run Deferred, Add to
Favorites, Add to Mobile Favorites, and Properties, and Internet resources provide options
that include Go To, Add to Favorites, Add to Mobile Favorites, and Properties.
The following image of the sample Role Tree has Century Corp., Public, and Sales Supports
groups. The Century Corporation group contains a domain with three reports, Human
Resources Main View, Information Builders, and Orders Shipped by Plant.
Depending on how your administrator has set up your view of the Dashboard, you may or
may not have access to the Role Tree. If the sidebar showing the Role Tree is not displayed
in your Dashboard view, the Role Tree may be accessible by selecting the Tree banner
hyperlink. Selecting the Tree banner hyperlink opens a new browser window that contains a
floating Domain/Role Tree.
Procedure: How to Select a Role Tree

1. From Dashboard, click the arrow in the Groups For drop-down list and highlight the
desired Role Tree. You can view all Role Trees associated with your group by selecting
All Groups from the list.
66 WebFOCUS
2. Using Dashboard
Note: If Role Tree is not displayed by default, click the Role Tree button in the Domain
Tree toolbar.
2. Click Submit. The Role Tree refreshes.

To expand a domain folder and display its contents, click the plus sign (+) located next
to the folder icon.
To collapse a folder and hide its contents, click the minus sign (-) located next to the
folder icon.
Viewing Content Blocks

In this section:
Setting Automatic Refresh for a Content Block
Viewing List and Folder Block Items
When viewing content in Dashboard, the following options and information are available:
Content page name. If your Dashboard view contains multiple content pages, tabs with
the content page name appear along the top of the content area.
Block name. Appears on the left side of the content block toolbar.
Refresh button. Refreshes the contents of the block.
Refresh check box and time interval field. Appears on the right side of the content
block toolbar if an administrator has enabled automatic block refresh functionality. For
details, see Setting Automatic Refresh for a Content Block on page 68.
Edit button. Displays the Edit window in the View Builder. This allows you to change the
block type, the contents of the block, and the block name. For details, see Creating
Dashboard Content on page 89.
Scrolling. Click any of the arrows in the content block toolbar to scroll through a report
or a hyperlink list. If scrolling arrows do not appear, you can browse the block using the
scroll bar.
Maximize button. Allows you to maximize the content block. When you maximize a
content block, it displays in a new browser window.
Note: For Active Reports in a content or launch block, if you edit a field column and then
maximize the block, you will not see the modifications you just made.

Viewing Content Blocks
Setting Automatic Refresh for a Content Block
How to:
Set Automatic Refresh for a Content Block
After an administrator enables automatic block refresh functionality for a content block, a
Refresh check box and refresh time interval field are displayed in the block toolbar. You can
set automatic refresh functionality to have the data in your content block automatically
refreshed at regular intervals. The Refresh check box is unselected by default every time
you log in to the view. The refresh time interval field is populated with the minimum allowable
refresh value (in seconds) by default. The refresh value represents the amount of elapsed
time between recurring instances of the block being automatically refreshed when the Refresh
check box is selected.
Note: Selecting the Refresh check box disables the refresh time interval field, which prevents
the value from being changed. Deselecting the Refresh check box enables the refresh time
interval field again.
Procedure: How to Set Automatic Refresh for a Content Block

1. You have the option of using the default refresh value displayed in the block toolbar.
or
You can type a value in seconds that is greater than or equal to the default value
displayed in the seconds refresh time interval field (located to the right of the Refresh
check box in the block toolbar). Entering a non-integer value or a value less than the
default value generates an error message.
68 WebFOCUS
2. Using Dashboard
2. Select the Refresh check box in the block toolbar as shown in the following image:
Tip: If you want to edit the refresh value, deselect the Refresh check box, type a new
value, then select the check box again.
Viewing List and Folder Block Items

List and folder block items appear as hyperlinks in Dashboard. To view a list or folder block
item, click the hyperlink or select the Run or Go To option from the menu. The output appears
in a separate browser window unless an Output block window has been created in the content
page you are viewing. If an Output block has been created, the output appears there.
When a list or folder block appears, an icon precedes each report. The following table shows
a list of icons with its corresponding descriptions.
Icon For...
Hyperlinks and launch forms.

- Internet
hyperlinks
Procedures that do not require input or launch forms, and for

- Report
procedures designated "Run Only as a Deferred Report".

Using Banner Hyperlinks
The following image shows a sample Human Resources folder, with two procedures and two
launch forms.
Note: The menu that opens when you right-click an item is not valid for items in list or folder
blocks.
Using Banner Hyperlinks

The hyperlinks in the banner provide a way to easily navigate the Dashboard:
Logon/Logoff. Enables you to logon or logoff the Dashboard.
Accessibility On/Off. Enables you to turn accessibility on or off in the current browser
session. The link is customizable and can be removed by an administrator in View Builder.
For non-section 508 users, accessibility is disabled by default and clicking the Accessibility
On link enables accessibility in the current browser session. For section 508 users,
including Public users, accessibility is enabled by default and clicking the Accessibility
Off link disables accessibility in the current browser session.
Tree. Displays the Domain Tree and/or Role Tree as a separate window. This is useful
when the Domain Tree or Role Tree is not automatically displayed for you, or when you
need to maximize your Dashboard space and still have access to the Domain Tree and/or
Role Tree.
Tools. Opens a menu where you can select:
Watch List, which opens the Watch List interface in a separate window.
Library, which opens the Report Library user interface in a separate window.
ReportCaster, which opens the ReportCaster user interface in a separate window.
70 WebFOCUS
2. Using Dashboard
Recent. Shows the most recently run reports. See Viewing Recently Run Reports on page
84.
Favorites. Shows the reports you have added to your Favorites list. See Creating a
Favorites List on page 75.
Views. Provides hyperlinks to the Group views you have access to. The last view displayed
is My View, which brings you to your personal view that you can update.
Personalize. Takes you to the Content window where you can personalize your Dashboard
content. See Creating Dashboard Content on page 89. You can also personalize Dashboard
Options from this menu.
Utilities. Opens a menu where you can select:
Deferred Status, which opens the Deferred Report Status interface. See Running
Deferred Reports on page 65.
Domain Search, which opens the Domain Search window. See Searching Domains on
page 71.
Help. Opens a menu where you can select:
Contents and Index, which opens the WebFOCUS BI Dashboard online help.
About WebFOCUS BI Dashboard, which provides release information.
Language. Enables the user to display Dashboard in one of the available languages.
This hyperlink only appears in Public Views that are configured to run in more than one
language.
Note: Depending on how your view of Dashboard has been set up you may not have access
to all of the banner hyperlinks.
Searching Domains
In this section:
Basic Search
Advanced Search
The domain search allows you to perform specific searches of the domains available to you.
You can perform basic and advanced searches, and combine the available search options.
You can add items from a domain search to your favorites list directly from the search results
window. You can also use domain search when creating content blocks to quickly find items.

Searching Domains
Access the domain search by selecting the Utilities hyperlink in the banner and then Domain
Search from the menu.
Basic Search
Basic searches allow you to search for items within a domain. Search options include:
Select a domain. Select the domain you want to search. To search across all available
domains, select the All Domains item.
Enter search query. Enter a text string for which you want to search. The search looks
for matching values within the title of the domain. If you leave this value blank, all available
items from the selected domain are returned to the output panel on the right side of the
window.
Search option. Select from the following:
All searches for the text string anywhere within the titles.
Exact match searches for a title that exactly matches the string entered.
Starts with searches for a title that starts with the search string.
Ends with searches for a title that ends with the search string.
Search preference. Select from the following:
Return first item only. Returns only the first matching value.
Return every item. Returns all matching values.
Items per page. Allows you to restrict the number of returns displayed on one browser
page. The default number of hits is 20.
Sort preference. Sort results by title, type, or date the item was last updated. You can
also sort in ascending (low-to-high) or descending (high-to-low) order.
Look in. Specify the type of folder you want to search in. This option is not available
when accessing a public view of Dashboard. Select from:
Standard Reports. Searches for the value only in the Standard Reports folder.
Reporting Objects. Searches for the value only in the Reporting Objects folder.
My Reports. Searches for the value only in the My Reports folder belonging to the
user performing the search.
Shared Reports. Searches for the value only in the Shared Reports folder.
All. Does not restrict the type of domain folder to search.
72 WebFOCUS
2. Using Dashboard
The following image shows a sample search window. The search options are on the left,
and the search results are on the right.
Advanced Search
How to:
Search a Domain
Advanced searches allow you to specify additional search criteria. You can specify the
following in an advanced search (in addition to all of the basic search options):
Look for. Restricts the search to a particular file type. You may select more than one
file type. Select from:
Report. Searches only for reports.
Web Address. Searches only for hyperlinks.
Web Page. Searches only HTML pages.
Folder. Searches only for folders.
All. Does not restrict the type of domain object to search.

Searching Domains
Date Modified. Enables you to search for items in a specific date range. Select from:
All. Searches without date restrictions.
During the previous (number of) days. Searches only those reports that were
created or modified in the past number of days you specify.
During the previous (number of) months. Searches only those reports that were
created or modified in the past number of months you specify.
Between (date 1) and (date 2). Searches only those reports that were created or
modified between the set of dates you specify.
The format of the date and time shown in the Domain Search Results window, and in the
Modified since panel, are based on your system setting.
Procedure: How to Search a Domain

1. From Dashboard, click Utilities.
2. Select Domain Search. The search window displays in a separate browser window.
3. If necessary, click Advanced Search for more options.
4. Select the domain you wish to search from the drop-down list, or select All Domains.
5. Enter the text string you wish to search for in the text box.
6. Click the option buttons and check boxes next to the desired search options. For details
on basic search options, see Basic Search on page 72. For details on advanced search
options, see Advanced Search on page 73.
7. Click Search to search your domains, or Reset to reset all of the search options to the
default values.
74 WebFOCUS
2. Using Dashboard
As shown in the following image, search results are returned in a list block on the right
side of the window. The list contains the item title, item type, the date, and the path
information. You can sort the results using the arrows in the title bars. You can add
items from the search results window directly to your favorites list.
8. Close the window to exit the search.
Creating a Favorites List

In Dashboard, you can populate your Favorites list with reports, graphs, hyperlinks, and any
other item type except reporting objects. The Favorites list contains two tabs, Dashboard
and Mobile, and is easily accessible from the Favorites hyperlink in the banner. For information
about Mobile Favorites, see Mobile Favorites on page 77.

Creating a Favorites List
The following image shows the Favorites dialog box displaying a sample list of saved reports
in the Dashboard tab.
Report items stored in the Dashboard tab of the Favorites list are sorted alphabetically by
title. All of the options that are normally available for an item are available from the Favorites
list including Run, Run Deferred, and Schedule.
You can add an item to the Dashboard tab in the Favorites list from a Domain Tree, Role
Tree, List block, Folder block, Tree block, or Domains search result. To add an item to your
Favorites list from any of these areas, right-click the item and select Add to Favorites.
If you want to remove an item in your Favorites list, select the check box next to the item
and click Remove. You can remove all items by clicking Select All and then clicking Remove.
If you want to copy an item to the Mobile tab from the Dashboard tab of the Favorites list,
select the check box next to the item and click Copy to Mobile. You can refresh the list of
report items by clicking Refresh. To close the Favorites dialog box, click Close.
76 WebFOCUS
2. Using Dashboard
Mobile Favorites
In this section:
Accessing Mobile Favorites
Mobile Favorites are reports, graphs, hyperlinks, and any other item type, except Reporting
Objects, that are added to the Mobile tab in the Favorites list in Dashboard. Adding items
to Mobile Favorites enables you to display the items on mobile devices. Items can be added
to Mobile Favorites from a Domain Tree, Role Tree, List block, Folder block, Tree block, or
Domains search result. To add items to your Mobile Favorites list, right-click the item and
select Add to Mobile Favorites. All items that are listed in the Mobile tab of your Favorites
list will be displayed on the Mobile Favorites launch page when you log in from a mobile
device. Note that you can only view Mobile Favorites for the Managed Reporting user ID and
password you use to log in.
The following image shows the Favorites dialog box displaying a sample list of saved report
items in the Mobile tab.
Report items stored in the Mobile tab of the Favorites list are sorted alphabetically by title.
All of the options that are normally available for an item are available from the Mobile
Favorites list including Run, Run Deferred, and Schedule.
If you want to remove an item in your Mobile Favorites list, select the check box next to the
item and click Remove. You can remove all items by clicking Select All and then clicking
Remove.

Mobile Favorites
To send an e-mail containing the URL to your Mobile Favorites list so the items in the list
can be viewed in a mobile device, click the Send Email button. For more information, see
How to E-mail Mobile Favorites on page 78.
You can refresh the list of report items by clicking Refresh, and close the Favorites dialog
box by clicking Close.
Accessing Mobile Favorites
How to:
E-mail Mobile Favorites
Access Mobile Favorites from a Mobile Device
Reference:
Mobile Favorites Considerations
You can access your Mobile Favorites by typing the URL in the browser of a mobile device,
or by sending an e-mail from Dashboard that contains the URL to your Mobile Favorites list
and then opening that e-mail using a mobile device.
Procedure: How to E-mail Mobile Favorites

1. Log in to Dashboard.
2. Find report items you want to view in a mobile device, right-click each item, and select
Add to Mobile Favorites.
3. Click Favorites in the Dashboard banner.
The Favorites dialog box opens.
4. Select the Mobile tab.

5. Click Send Email.
78 WebFOCUS
2. Using Dashboard
A dialog box opens for you to type the desired e-mail address, as shown in the following
image:
The e-mail address associated with your Managed Reporting user ID is populated in the
Email Address field by default.
6. Click Send.
The e-mail you are sending contains a link for accessing the Mobile Favorites URL.
Procedure: How to Access Mobile Favorites from a Mobile Device

1. Open the e-mail sent from Mobile Favorites and click the link. For more information about
e-mailing Mobile Favorites, see How to E-mail Mobile Favorites on page 78.
or
Type the following Mobile Favorites URL in the browser of a mobile device.
http://hostname[:port]/wf_context_root/mobile
where:
hostname[:port]
Is the name of the Web Server and optional port number (specified only if you are
not using the default port number) where the WebFOCUS application is deployed.
wf_context_root

Mobile Favorites
2. In the pop-up form that appears, as shown in the following image, type your Managed
Reporting user ID and password.
Note: When a valid user ID and password is accepted, a non-expiring cookie is written
to the mobile device unless you deselect the Remember me check box, which is selected
by default. This cookie is valid for the duration of the browser session to provide direct
access to the Mobile Favorites launch page without having to provide log in credentials
again. If you close the browser, you will have to enter a valid user ID and password to
log in again.
The Mobile Favorites launch page opens with the available report items displayed as
links, as shown in the following image:
80 WebFOCUS
2. Using Dashboard
3. Click the desired link to view that report item.

The report item opens as shown in the following image:
4. You can navigate back to the Mobile Favorites launch page to view additional report
items.
Reference: Mobile Favorites Considerations

Mobile Favorites functionality is supported for most mobile devices with browser
capabilities.
Browser settings on a mobile device should be set to support JavaScript, HTML tables,
and CSS style sheets.
Active Reports, Parameter Prompting reports using static WHERE statements, and reports
in HTML format are best suited for viewing on a mobile device. Additionally, PDF and
Excel formats can be viewed on some mobile devices.
The SMTP server used to send e-mails containing a link to your Mobile Favorites page is
specified by the WF_EMAIL_SERVER setting in the Client Settings General panel in the
Configuration area of the WebFOCUS Administration Console. The setting can also be
specified in the \ibi\webfocus76\client\wfc\etc\cgivars.wfs file.

Viewing Reports in the Report Library
Viewing Reports in the Report Library

In this section:
Navigating the Report Library Window
In Dashboard, you can click a report and access the Library Versions menu option that
enables you to view the report in the Report Library for that Managed Reporting (MR)
procedure. Note that a single MR procedure can be scheduled for ReportCaster distribution
multiple times, and that there can be multiple reports within a single schedule due to
ReportCaster's burst feature.
The primary benefits of using the Library Versions option include:
Better integration between Report Library and Dashboard through a unified interface.
Faster, easier access to reports stored in the Report Library.
Reduced overhead of running the same report multiple times by multiple users.
82 WebFOCUS
2. Using Dashboard
The Library Versions option is available in the Dashboard Domain Tree pop-up menu to users
who have Library privileges to view output. This option is only shown if the Library Access
Options permit the user to view the report. When you select the Library Versions option, a
new Report Library window opens. The following image shows the Library Versions option
selected in the pop-up menu.
You can also access the Report Library by selecting the Tools link in the banner, and then
selecting Library from the submenu that appears.
Additionally, you can view Watch List reports in the Report Library or in a separate Watch
List window. Watch List reports are reports of particular interest that you subscribe to in the
Report Library, and each time a new version of the report is distributed, you receive an e-
mail notification. Only the most recent version of reports designated as Watch List reports
are displayed. To access Watch List reports in the Report Library, select the Tools link in
the banner, select Library from the submenu that appears, and click the Watch List tab in
the Report Library window that opens. To access Watch List reports in a separate Watch
List window, select the Tools link in the banner, then select Watch List from the submenu
that appears.

Viewing Recently Run Reports
Navigating the Report Library Window

The Report Library window contains two tabs, Library Reports and Watch List. Each tab
provides a collapsible navigation tree for objects displayed in the left pane. A view of the
contents of the selected object displays in the right pane. The following image shows an
example of the Report Library window.
The content displayed in the right pane is determined by the folder or report item that you
select in the left (or right) pane. When you select a folder in the left pane, column titles are
displayed across the top of the right pane with subfolders or report items listed below.
Clicking a column title sorts the data displayed in the pane, and clicking the same column
title again reverses the sort order of the data. When you select a report item in the left pane,
or double-click a report item in the right-pane, the contents of the report are displayed in
the right pane.
For more information about the Report Library, including the Watch List, see the Report
Library chapter in the ReportCaster End User's Manual.
Viewing Recently Run Reports

A most recently used reports list is automatically generated when you use Dashboard. By
default, the recent report list holds a maximum of 25 reports. You can change this number
from the Options window. You can access the recent reports list from the Recent hyperlink
in the banner.
84 WebFOCUS
2. Using Dashboard
This image shows all of the options available for this report type from the Recent dialog box,
for example, Run, Run Deferred, Remove, and so on. You can also view when the report was
last requested by hovering over the report.
You can clear all items from the Recent list by clicking Remove All from the Recent dialog
box. To remove an individual item, right-click the item in the Recent list and select Remove.
Setting User Options

Reference:
Personalize Options Window
Establishing Site Defaults for Personalize Options
You can set personal options for your Dashboard view from the Personalize Options window
where you can choose which domains are displayed when you log on to Dashboard, how to
display and implement popup menu functionality, and select from several other user options.
Setting user options is not available for Public or Group views.

Reference: Personalize Options Window

To personalize your Dashboard view, access the Personalize Options window, shown in the
following image, by selecting the Personalize link in the banner, and then selecting Options
from the submenu that appears.
The Personalize Options window contains the following three sections: General Settings,
Domain Tree, and Popup Menu.
The General Settings section enables you to set the following:
Maximum number of recent report items that can be displayed (default is 25).
Maximum number of domain search items that can be displayed (default is 10).
Allow multiple reports execution window. When set to No (the default), if you are not
using an Output block, a new browser window opens when a report is run. When set
to Yes, additional reports open in and reuse any existing browser windows.
Mobile Favorites Email Sent. When set to No (the default), if you right-click a report
item and select Add to Mobile Favorites, a dialog box opens where you can send an
e-mail containing a link to your Mobile Favorites (which changes the setting to Yes).
When set to Yes, you have to click Send Email in the Mobile tab of the Favorites
window to send an e-mail with a link to your Mobile Favorites.
86 WebFOCUS
2. Using Dashboard
The Domain Tree section enables you to select the domains to be displayed when you
log on to Dashboard. By default, all of the domains available to you are displayed in the
Domain Tree and listed in the Available Domains box. You can move domains to the
Favorite Domains box to limit the display of domains in the Domain Tree to a subset of
the domains available to you. Use the arrows between the boxes or double-click a domain
to move it from one box to the other. If the Favorite Domains box is empty, all domains
are displayed in the Domain Tree.
The Popup Menu section has two options, an option to enable menu and an option to
select the menu event type. The enable menu option determines if the popup menu is
displayed or not. When the enable menu option is set to the default value of Yes, popup
menu behavior is the same as in previous releases. If the enable menu option is set to
No, the popup menu does not display, and the first (default) action that normally appears
in the popup menu is taken when a user clicks an item. For Standard Reports, the default
action is Run. Other non-default actions, for example, Run Deferred, are not available
when the enable menu option is set to No. The No setting does not affect the popup
menu shown for Banner links.
If the enable menu option is set to Yes, a user can select menu event type options that
control how the popup menu is displayed. The menu event type options available in the
drop-down list are On Right Click and On Hover. On Right Click is the default setting which
causes the popup menu to be displayed using the right mouse button instead of the left
mouse button. Additionally, selecting this option enables a user to perform the default
option when left clicking the mouse while also viewing the popup menu with a right click.
The On Hover setting enables a user to view the popup menu when the mouse pointer
hovers over an item that yields a menu.
Note: Popup Menu settings affect how the popup menu is displayed for the Domain Tree
and the Role Tree. The Banner Link items, which include Tools, Personalize, Utilities,
and Help, are accessed only by Left Click. Popup Menu settings also affect the display
of Domain items in a List or Folder block.
At the bottom of the Personalize Options window, there are buttons you can use to Save,
Set Defaults, Reset, and Cancel.
Reference: Establishing Site Defaults for Personalize Options

The Personalize Options settings can be changed for a specific site by editing the bid-user-
preferences.xml file located in the worp/conf directory. After making changes to this file,
the WebFOCUS web application must be reloaded.
Each user inherits a copy of the bid-user-preferences.xml file the first time they connect to
Dashboard. Each user's personal settings are stored in the user-prefernces.xml file of their
own directory in worp_users. Any changes to the original bid-user-preferences.xml file does
not affect users' preferences that are stored in their own personal files.

88 WebFOCUS
WebFOCUS
3 Creating Dashboard Content
When opening Dashboard, content blocks

Topics:
display and contain launched reports,
hyperlinks to reports, hyperlinks to Creating Dashboard Content Overview
Internet resources, or output. The
following are the types of content blocks: Content Window
Launch blocks. Creating Content Pages
List blocks. Adding a Content Block
Folder blocks. Editing a Content Block
Output blocks. Selecting Content Layout
Watch list blocks.

Creating Dashboard Content Overview
Creating Dashboard Content Overview

When creating a content block, select the block type, the block contents, and the block
layout, and for administrators, the public or group view to which the block is associated.
You can create content pages in order to increase content space, organize Dashboard
content, and add pages that display the ReportCaster, Report Library, Watch List, or Deferred
Status user interfaces. For details, see Creating Content Pages on page 92.
Content Window
How to:
Access the Content Window
Exit the Content Window
From the Content window, you create the content blocks that appear when Dashboard opens.
You can:
Create content pages that contain content blocks, or the ReportCaster, Report Library,
or Deferred Status user interfaces.
Add, remove, and edit content blocks.
Select the content layout.
When you open the Content window, a list of the current content blocks appears. When you
place your cursor over a content item, the full path of the procedure appears, including the
domain name and folder name.
If you are opening the Content window for the first time, the content list displays the content
blocks and pages your administrator has set up for you. You can edit or remove these.
90 WebFOCUS
3. Creating Dashboard Content
The following image shows a sample Content window with three distinct panes. The first two
sections provide a description text box and buttons to add and create content pages, and
the third section contains buttons for adding, editing, or removing content blocks.
Procedure: How to Access the Content Window

1. From the Dashboard banner, click Personalize.
2. Select Content from the menu. The Content window opens.
Procedure: How to Exit the Content Window

For users, after you have created all of your content blocks, click Done on the Content window
to save all changes and exit the Content window. Dashboard automatically refreshes to
include your changes, and you return to the Dashboard view.

Creating Content Pages
Creating Content Pages

How to:
Create Content Pages
You can create content pages for Dashboard that contain content blocks, and the
ReportCaster, Report Library, Watch List, or Deferred Status user interfaces. Adding the
ReportCaster, Report Library, Watch List, or Deferred Status interfaces to a content page is
different than accessing them from banner hyperlinks, which open a new browser window
when the hyperlink is clicked. Each interface appears in its own content page directly in the
Dashboard.
Content pages appear as tabs that display the name of the content page across the top of
the content area. Pages can be viewed by clicking the appropriate tab.
Using content pages enables you to:
Expand the amount of space you have to display content in Dashboard.
Organize Dashboard content.
Keep the default view that was set up by the Dashboard Administrator while simultaneously
create personalized content pages.
Content pages are optional. If you have only one content page, tabs do not appear in the
actual Dashboard view when you add content blocks.
Users can create as many content pages as they need and design the page layout.
Administrators can also customize the color of content page tabs (background and text
color). For details, see Selecting Content Layout on page 103.
When creating content pages, note that:
You can rearrange the order of the pages using the Move Left, Move Right, and Set
Default buttons in the Content window. The Set Default button promotes the current page
to the first page.
Only one output block is allowed per page.
When Dashboard opens, only the reports on the current content page execute. All other
reports execute when you click the respective content page tab.
Reports on content pages do not automatically refresh when tabbing from one page to
another. To refresh a report, click the Refresh button in the toolbar for that report.
92 WebFOCUS
Procedure: How to Create Content Pages

Note: When creating a content page, wait until all page items appear before using the
buttons on the page. If an error occurs due to premature use of the buttons, refresh the
page using your browser's Refresh button.
1. Select the Personalize link in the banner, then select Content from the submenu that
appears.
The Content window opens.
2. From the Content window, click:

Add Page to add a page that contains content blocks.
Add Library Page to add a page that contains the Report Library user interface. You
can also add the Watch List interface after adding a library page.
Add Schedules Page to add a page that contains the ReportCaster user interface.
Add Deferred Status Page to add a page that contains the Deferred Status user
interface.
Note: You will not be able to view Library or Schedule pages if you do not have access
to ReportCaster or the Report Library.
3. Enter the tab name in the Page Description text box.

Adding a Content Block
4. Click Update.
When a page is added, it is added as the last page. You can rearrange the order of the
content pages using the Move Left, Move Right, or Set Default buttons. The Set Default
button promotes the current page to the first page.

In this section:
Adding Report Library Content to a Content Block
Removing a Content Block
How to:
Add a Content Block
Add Items to a Content Block Using Domain Search
Launch blocks can contain only one item. When Dashboard opens, the item automatically
launches.
A launch block that is created to display a report in EXL2K, EXCEL, or DOC formats should
use scroll bars instead of scroll buttons.
List blocks can contain many items from one or many domains. The items can be from
any folder in any domain to which a user has access. Users can run a report or access
an Internet resource by clicking a hyperlink from the list.
Folder blocks list the entire contents of a folder (including its subfolders) that have
been created in Managed Reporting. Only one folder can be added to a folder block.
When the contents of a Managed Reporting folder are modified outside of Dashboard,
the folder block in Dashboard automatically updates to reflect any changes. You can add
folders from the Standard Reports, My Reports, and Shared Reports folders.
Output blocks may or may not contain default content. They are blocks where reports,
graphs, or Web pages appear. When a report is run or an Internet resource is accessed,
the report output or Web page appears in the output block. This is useful because a new
browser window does not open each time a report or graph is executed, or a Web page
is launched from a Domain Tree, Role Tree, List, or Folder block. Instead, the output
block refreshes with the new content.
When you create an output block, scrolling options are not available. Scroll bars appear
when necessary.
Tree blocks provide a way to add a Domain Tree to a Public or Group View page. The
Domain Tree is displayed without the sidebar frame.
94 WebFOCUS
Watch list blocks add the Report Library Watch List interface to a page. The watch list
block type is available only when the Library tab is selected from the Add Block page.
Note: Some Web sites bring their page to the top of a frameset when launched and take
over the browser session. When these sites are opened in a launch or output block,
Dashboard content is lost. It is recommended that these types of Web sites not be selected
for a launch or output block.
When you add items to a content block, you can use the Domain Search from the Add Block
and Edit Block windows. For details, see How to Add Items to a Content Block Using Domain
Search on page 96.
Across the top of the Add Block window is a drop-down menu for selecting a domain, a
Domain Search button, and option buttons to select from Launch, List, Folder, Output, or
Tree for the Block Type. At the left side of the window is a tree view of the selected domain.
The right side of the window contains the Content List showing selected items with up and
down arrows to the right, and Remove and Clear buttons at the bottom.
Below the Content List is a text box for entering the Block Name and a series of check boxes
that are available to enable the following functionality:
Deactivate Block
Lock Block (available to administrators only)
Hide Block Toolbar
MS Office output options
Automatic Block Refresh (available to administrators only)
There are also option buttons to enable Scroll Buttons or Scroll Bars, and Save and Cancel
buttons. The following image shows the Add Block window.
Procedure: How to Add a Content Block

1. From the Content window, select the content page in which to add content. If you need
to add content pages, see How to Create Content Pages on page 93.
2. Click Add Block. The Add Block window opens.
3. Select the Launch block, List block, Folder block, Output block, or Tree block option
button.
4. Select a domain from the drop-down list. You can also add items to a content block
using Domain Search. See How to Add Items to a Content Block Using Domain Search
on page 96.
Note: If you are creating an Output block, adding domain items is optional since Output
blocks do not require default output.

5. Click Submit to retrieve the contents of the selected domain.

6. Expand the domain folders you want to select items from by clicking the plus sign (+)
located next to the folder icon.
Note: Only one report in EXL2K PIVOT format can be active at a time. Therefore, it is
not recommended to place output of this format type into a content block. Subsequent
attempts to execute a report in this format will fail, since the original report will still be
active.
7. Click the items in the domain folders to populate the Content List.
If you are creating a List block you can position the items using the arrows next to the
Content List.
8. Accept the default Block name or change the name in the Block name text box.
Note:
If you name your content block before you select content, the block name may be
overwritten with the name of the Domain item you select. You can change the name
after selecting content.
If you create an empty launch, list, or folder block and enter a Block name, when you
click Save the name is overwritten with Empty Block. This occurs only with launch,
list, and folder blocks. Output blocks retain the name you enter.
9. Select the Enable Scroll Buttons or Enable Scroll Bar option button.
10. Click Save when you have finished selecting the content for your block.
Procedure: How to Add Items to a Content Block Using Domain Search

1. From the Add Block or Edit Block window, click Domain Search.
2. Enter the criteria for your search and then click Search.
3. From the results on the right side of the window, click on an item to add it to your content
block. View your content block to see the items you have added.
Adding Report Library Content to a Content Block

Dashboard administrators and authenticated users can place Report Library content in a
content block using the View Builder or Personalize option. You can add Report Library
content to a launch, list, output, or watch list block. The latest available version of the report
always appears in the content block.
96 WebFOCUS
A tree of Library reports is available for selection when creating content blocks. The tree
consists of the top level domain or category. Below the domain or category is the report. In
the case of a bursted report, an intermediate level also appears.
The Report Library has two sets of reports. Dashboard can access both, the domain for
Managed Reporting users and the category for non-Managed Reporting users.
Note:
If you are adding Report Library content from the Manage Users or Group Views areas in
the View Builder, you also need to be a ReportCaster administrator.
To view Report Library content, you must have Report Library access.
Removing a Content Block
How to:
Remove a Content Block
From the Content window, you can remove a content block. Note that you can remove more
than one content block at a time.
Procedure: How to Remove a Content Block

1. From the Content window, select the content page where the content block is located.
2. Click the check box(es) next to the block(s) you want to remove.
3. Click Remove. An alert window appears to confirm the removal.
4. Click OK.

Editing a Content Block

In this section:
Selecting Scrolling Options
Hiding the Toolbar in a Content Block
How to:
Change the Content Block Type
Remove Items From a Block
Change the Block Contents
Change the Name of a Content Block
Temporarily Remove a Content Block
From the Edit Block window, you can edit existing content blocks. When you select the edit
option, the name of the content block and its attributes appear in the Edit Block window.
You can edit the block type, block contents, block name, scrolling options, and several
optional features.
You can also deactivate a content block. This is useful when you want to temporarily remove
a content block from a Dashboard view. When a content block is deactivated, it is designated
in the Content window with a red icon. Green designates an active content block.
Across the top of the Edit Block window is a drop-down menu for selecting a domain, a
Domain Search button, and option buttons to select from Launch, List, Folder, Output, or
Tree for the Block Type. At the left side of the window is a tree view of the selected domain.
The right side of the window contains the Content List showing selected items with up and
down arrows to the right, and Remove and Clear buttons at the bottom.
Below the Content List is a text box for entering the Block Name and a series of check boxes
that are available to enable the following functionality:
Deactivate Block
Lock Block (available to administrators only)
Hide Block Toolbar
MS Office output options
Automatic Block Refresh (available to administrators only)
98 WebFOCUS
There are also option buttons to enable Scroll Buttons or Scroll Bars, and Save and Cancel
buttons. The following image shows the Edit Block window.
Procedure: How to Change the Content Block Type

Note: When you change the content block type, all of the items in the block are removed
and the block name clears.
2. Click the check box next to the block you want to edit.
3. Click Edit Block. The Edit Block window opens.
You can also access the Edit Block window directly from Dashboard by clicking the Edit
icon for the content block you wish to edit.
4. Select the block type option button.

5. Click Save.

Procedure: How to Remove Items From a Block

1. From the Content window, select the content page where the block is located.
2. Click the check box next to the list block you want to edit.
4. In the Content List highlight the item you want to remove.

5. Click Remove.
6. Click Save.
Procedure: How to Change the Block Contents

1. From the Content window, select the content page where the block is located.
4. Select a domain from the drop-down list and click Submit.

You can also add items to a content block using Domain Search. For details, see How
to Add Items to a Content Block Using Domain Search on page 96.
5. Navigate to the item you want to add in the Domain Tree.

6. Click the item or folder to add it to the Content List.
Note: The block name may be overwritten with the name of the Domain item you select.
You can change the block name after selecting content.
7. Click Save.
Procedure: How to Change the Name of a Content Block

100 WebFOCUS
4. In the Block name text box, type the new name for the block. This must be a unique
name within Dashboard.
5. Click Save.
Procedure: How to Temporarily Remove a Content Block

4. Select the Deactivate Block check box.

5. Click Save.
Selecting Scrolling Options
How to:
Select Scrolling Options for a Content Block
You can select either scroll buttons or scroll bars for launch blocks, list blocks, and folder
blocks. Scroll buttons cannot be selected for output blocks and launch blocks that launch
Web pages. Output blocks automatically contain scroll bars when necessary.
When scroll buttons are enabled, up, down, left, and right arrows display in the toolbar
allowing you to navigate the content block. Up and down arrows display for all content block
types. Left and right arrows only display for launch blocks. In folder blocks and list blocks
information automatically wraps, therefore eliminating the need to scroll to the left or right.
When scroll bars are enabled, scroll bars display when content exists that cannot be viewed
within the displayed window. When this option is selected, scroll buttons do not display in
the toolbar.
Note: A launch block that is created to display a report in EXL2K, EXCEL, or DOC formats
should use scroll bars instead of scroll buttons.

Procedure: How to Select Scrolling Options for a Content Block

1. From the Content window, select the content block you want to add scrolling options for
and click Edit Block. The Edit Block window opens.
2. Select the Enable Scroll Buttons or Enable Scroll Bars option button.
3. Click Save.
Hiding the Toolbar in a Content Block
How to:
Hide the Toolbar in a Content Block
When you hide the content block toolbar, automatic block refresh functionality is not available.
Additionally, scrolling is automatically set to use scroll bars because scroll buttons are not
available when the block toolbar is hidden.
102 WebFOCUS
Procedure: How to Hide the Toolbar in a Content Block

1. From the Add Block or Edit Block window, select the Hide Block Toolbar check box.
Note: The Lock Block and Automatic Block Refresh check boxes are available to
administrators only.
2. Click Save.
Selecting Content Layout

How to:
Add a Column
Adjust Column Width
From the Layout window, you can change the content block layout. You can select a different
layout for each content page. When selecting the layout for your content page, you can:
Add/remove columns.
Specify column width.
Rearrange column order.

The following image shows a sample Layout window. There are list boxes for the contents
of Column 1 and Column 2 with up/down and right/left arrows. The Column 1 list box includes
a text box and plus (+) and minus (-) controls to adjust column width. There are buttons to
Add Column, Remove Column, Move Column Left and Move Column Right, as well a Content
button to return to the Content window.
Note: If you remove all content blocks from a column, the column is not automatically
removed from the Dashboard View. If there are no content blocks in a column, empty space
is shown in the Dashboard View.
Procedure: How to Add a Column

1. From the Content window, select a content page and then click Page Layout.
2. Click Add Column. To move:
Items from one column to another, highlight the item and use the left and right arrows
between the columns.
The position of a column, select the column and click Move Column Left or Move
Column Right.
3. Click Content to return to the Content window.
104 WebFOCUS
Procedure: How to Adjust Column Width

1. From the Content window, select a content page and click Page Layout.
2. Click the plus (+) or minus (-) signs in the column to adjust column width.
Note that you cannot adjust the width for the last column. Since column width total must
equal 100%, the last column is always the remainder of all the other columns. For
example, if you have 3 columns and column 1 is 50% and column 2 is 25%, column 3
is 25%.
Note: If you make your content blocks too small, the popup menu may not fully display.
3. Click Content to return to the Content window.

106 WebFOCUS
WebFOCUS
4 Using the Deferred Report Status Interface
The following topics provide an overview

Topics:
of the Deferred Report Status interface
including a detailed description of its Introducing the Deferred Report Status
appearance and functions. Specific Interface
procedures guide you through viewing,
saving and deleting reports, deleting Deferred Report Status Interface
deferred reports that are being Features
processed but are not yet complete, and
reviewing parameters for reports
containing amper variables.

Introducing the Deferred Report Status Interface
Introducing the Deferred Report Status Interface

The Deferred Report Status interface enables you to obtain information about deferred
reports. You can open this interface to view the status of deferred reports at any time by
selecting the Deferred Status option. From this interface, you can perform the following
actions on a deferred report:
Sort deferred report output by date, description, domain, and server ID.
View deferred report output.
Delete a deferred report from the WebFOCUS Reporting Server.
Save the report output as a My Report.
Review or change parameters associated with a deferred report.
View the number of days remaining prior to expiration (deletion) on the server.
Terminate a deferred request that is in the deferred report queue.
Terminate a deferred report that is running.
Delete all expired, unknown, completed, running, and queued tickets.
108 WebFOCUS
4. Using the Deferred Report Status Interface
Deferred Report Status Interface Features

In this section:
Sort Controls for the Deferred Report Status Interface
Deferred Report Status
Deferred Report Expiration Setting
Saved Deferred Output Subject to Temporary Expiration
Special Behavior for Sorting by WebFOCUS Reporting Server User ID
Setting the Automatic Refresh Interval
Viewing Deferred Reports
Reviewing Deferred Report Parameters
Saving Deferred Reports
Deleting Tickets for All Report Status Types
Deferred Status Delete Confirmation Messages
The Deferred Report Status interface includes:

A banner at the top of the window that lists the date and time of the request.
A gray toolbar below the banner that contains Refresh and Help options, a Sort By
drop-down list to select sort values, a sort order button to toggle between ascending and
descending order, and a Delete drop-down list. The Delete drop-down list has options to
delete All, All Completed, All Running, All Queued, All Expired, or All Unknown reports,
depending on which report status types exist in the interface.
The status of each report within the interface.
Sort Controls for the Deferred Report Status Interface

The sorting feature pertains to the entire report. When the default sort value (Date/Time
Submitted) is changed, the new primary sort becomes your choice, but the secondary sort
is always fixed as Date/Time Submitted. To resort the list, select the Sort by option:
Date (default)
Description
Domain

Server ID (This does not actually appear as a column. For more information, see Special
Behavior for Sorting by WebFOCUS Reporting Server User ID on page 113.)
You can optionally change the sort order (ascending or descending) by clicking the Reverse
Sort Order button, which toggles between A to Z and Z to A.

Note: When the sort value is Date, the sort order option A to Z means from new to old and
not alphabetical from A to Z.
To see the results of the new sort options, click Refresh.
Deferred Report Status

The status of deferred requests are organized under the following sections within the
interface:
Completed. Indicates that the Deferred Receipt request has finished processing.
Running. Indicates that the Deferred Receipt request is processing.
Queued. Indicates that the Deferred Receipt request is queued for processing.
Unknown. Indicates that the Deferred Receipt request cannot be identified. This can
occur when the file containing the deferred report results cannot be found. For more
information, see Deferred Report Expiration Setting on page 112.
The following image shows a sample Deferred Report Status window with one completed
report and two Queued reports.
Column headings provide information about the Standard Report including the date and time
the Standard Report was submitted, the domain of origin, a description of the report (the
report name), an expiration indicator, and an Options heading for options within the Deferred
Report Status interface.
110 WebFOCUS
When you select the Deferred Status option, the status for all the deferred requests submitted
by your Managed Reporting user ID is retrieved. Depending on how Managed Reporting is
configured, deferred status may be coming from multiple WebFOCUS Reporting Servers on
various platforms. If credentials are required for the connections, you are prompted by the
WebFOCUS Dynamic Server System Signon feature. You can view the status of all the deferred
requests submitted by your Managed Reporting user ID, but can only delete, view, save,
stop, or review parameters for deferred requests submitted with an identical WebFOCUS
Reporting Server user ID.
Caution: Sharing Managed Reporting user IDs is not recommended. For more information,
see Considerations When Logging On to Dashboard on page 27.
The options available in the Deferred Report Status interface are based upon the status of
the report request and security validation. You can perform various functions by clicking the
buttons under Options:
Delete. Available for all report status types. The Delete option deletes the deferred
request according to the report status, as follows:
Queued. When a deferred request is listed in the Queued tab, the Delete option
removes the deferred report from the WebFOCUS Reporting Server and deletes the
deferred request ticket from the WebFOCUS Repository.
Unknown. When a deferred request is listed in the Unknown tab, the Delete option
deletes the deferred request ticket from the WebFOCUS Repository.
Completed. When a deferred request is listed in the Completed tab, the Delete option
removes the report from the window, deletes the deferred report results from the
WebFOCUS Reporting Server, and deletes the deferred request ticket from the
WebFOCUS Repository.
Running. When a deferred request is listed in the Running tab, the Delete option
deletes the deferred request ticket from the WebFOCUS Repository and cancels the
job on the WebFOCUS Reporting Server.
Note: The Delete drop-down list in the toolbar at the top of the interface provides options
to delete All, All Completed, All Running, All Queued, All Expired, or All Unknown reports,
depending on which report status types exist in the interface.
View. Available when the report status is Completed.
The View option displays the completed report in a new browser session, or the report
format may result in the opening of a Windows dialog box that prompts you to save the
report to disk or open the report within an application (such as Microsoft Excel, Microsoft
Word, or Adobe Acrobat).
Save. Available when the report status is Completed.

The Save option saves the My Report or Custom Report to a special folder, Deferred
Reports Output, in the Domains My Reports tab. The description of the My Report or
Custom Report is the description that appears in the Deferred Report Status interface,
along with the date and time the My Report or Custom Report was created.
Note: This option does not appear for users with the User role. Users with the User role
cannot save report results to the Managed Reporting Repository.
Run. Available for reports without parameters when the report status is completed or
queued. The Run option runs the report deferred again.
Parameters. Available for reports with parameters when the report status is completed
or queued. The Parameters option allows you to review or change report variables.
Changing report variables generates a new report that does not overwrite the original
request.
Note: Deferred reports run from within any report development tool do not have an option
to view or change amper variable parameter values in the Deferred Status Interface
window.
Under certain circumstances, WebFOCUS is unable to submit the request to run in deferred
mode. This can occur, for example, when the WebFOCUS Reporting Server is unavailable.
When WebFOCUS is unable to submit a deferred request, a Deferred Receipt Notification
window opens, notifying you of the failure.
Deferred Report Expiration Setting

The number of days until expiration appears next to each report. On the last day, the value
Today appears.
112 WebFOCUS
The following image shows the results of a deferred status request, run on the afternoon of
Friday, April 29. (The current date appears in the status bar at the top of the page.) Each
report is listed with the time remaining before it is deleted from the WebFOCUS Reporting
Server. The time remaining is based on 24-hour intervals (rather than whole days), beginning
with the time that the report was submitted. For example, the last report shown on the list
will be deleted shortly after 1:10 pm on April 30, not at midnight on April 29.
If a deferred report is not saved or deleted prior to its expiration, the output is automatically
deleted from the WebFOCUS Reporting Server's dfm_dir directory and the deferred report is
moved to the Unknown status tab in the Deferred Report Status interface. From here, you
can only delete the orphaned report.
If deferred output expiration is not configured on your WebFOCUS Reporting Server, then the
value Never appears next to each report under the Expires In column.
Note: This setting does not affect deferred output saved to your My Report area.
Saved Deferred Output Subject to Temporary Expiration

Saved Deferred Reports that utilize WebFOCUS features which create temporary files such
as OLAP, On-demand paging, and redirected formats are subject to expiration as defined by
the WebFOCUS Client parameter, EXPIRE_REPORTS (located in cgivars.wfs). See the
WebFOCUS Security and Administration manual for information on the EXPIRE_REPORTS
parameter that controls temporary file expiration and the mime.wfs file that defines reports
formats and whether they use redirection.
Special Behavior for Sorting by WebFOCUS Reporting Server User ID

Sorting by WebFOCUS Reporting Server user ID enables you to bring deferred reports you
want to interact with to the top of the list. At the same time, the deferred reports that you
cannot interact with are pushed to the bottom of the list and sorted alphabetically.

This is a special sort. Regardless of the setting for a>z or z>a when the sort value is Server
ID, deferred reports for the current ID appear at the top. These are followed, in sort order,
by deferred reports for other Server IDs, if any exist. The Server ID automatically appears in
the Options column.
Example: Sorting by Server ID

You may see deferred reports listed that you are not allowed to interact with if they:
Are inconsistent with the case that you use when you log on with your WebFOCUS
Reporting Server ID.
Connect to different WebFOCUS Reporting Servers, or to the same WebFOCUS Reporting
Server at different times with different WebFOCUS Reporting Server user IDs.
The following image shows a sample Deferred Report Status window with three reports that
have no options for interaction.
Setting the Automatic Refresh Interval
How to:
Set the Automatic Refresh Interval
You can set the automatic refresh interval to any value. The default is 5 seconds and there
is no maximum value.
114 WebFOCUS
Procedure: How to Set the Automatic Refresh Interval

1. Enter a time interval (in seconds) in the input box below the gray toolbar.
The default value is 5 seconds. There is no maximum value.
2. Check the box to enable automatic refresh.
Viewing Deferred Reports
How to:
View a Deferred Status Report
You must access the Deferred Report Status interface to view deferred reports.
Procedure: How to View a Deferred Status Report

1. Open the Deferred Report Status interface.
2. To view the output of a deferred report:
a. Locate the report's description under the Completed tab.
b. Click View, under the Options column, to view the report.
The output appears in a new window.
3. The Deferred Report Status interface remains open until closed.

a. To return to the Deferred Report Status interface, close or minimize the report output
window.
b. To return to your reporting environment, close or minimize the report output window,
then close the Deferred Report Status interface.
4. Click Refresh to obtain the most current status of deferred requests.

Reviewing Deferred Report Parameters
How to:
Retrieve Deferred Request Parameters
The Deferred Report Status interface enables you to retrieve parameters submitted with a
deferred request. You access parameters by opening the Deferred Report Status interface
and clicking the parameters button for the report of your choice. The parameters button is
not available when the deferred request is submitted from within a report development tool
such as Report Assistant or Graph Assistant.
You can also change the parameters associated with a report and submit the report to run
deferred with the new parameters you specified. WebFOCUS generates your report again
using the new parameters and does not overwrite your original report request.
Procedure: How to Retrieve Deferred Request Parameters

2. In the Completed or Unknown tabs, identify the report containing the parameters to
review.
3. Click Parameter under the Options column heading.
An intermediate window (HTML form) opens.
a. To review and accept the original parameters, close the browser window.
b. To change the parameters, enter a new value in the input box.
The original request runs in addition to the newly submitted request.
4. Click Submit.
The Deferred Report Notification window opens.
5. Close the Deferred Report Notification window to return to the Deferred Report Status
interface.
Example: Using Deferred Report Status Interface Options

In the following example, you will manipulate a report called Current Salary Report that has
been submitted as a deferred request. This example is based on a report developed using
the Employee Master File and is intended to offer a practical demonstration of some of the
options available in the Deferred Report Status interface. You should note that an
Administrator can develop a similar file for training purposes.
116 WebFOCUS

2. Under the Completed tab, locate Current Salary Report, as shown in the following image.
3. Under the Options column heading, click Parameters.

An intermediate window (HTML form) opens.
4. In the input box, enter the value "A17", and click Submit.
The Deferred Report Notification window opens confirming receipt of your request.
interface.
To view Current Salary Report:
1. Under the Completed tab, locate Current Salary Report again.
2. Click View.
WebFOCUS displays Current Salary Report in a separate browser window as shown in
the following image.
3. Close the window to return to the Deferred Report Status interface.

4. Under the Options column, click Save.
WebFOCUS saves Current Salary Report to the Managed Reporting Repository as a My
Report.

5. Close the Deferred Report Status interface to return to your reporting environment.
Saving Deferred Reports
How to:
Save a Deferred Report
You can save Deferred Receipt reports to the Managed Reporting Repository, if your
administrator has set the run-only privilege for you. The report output is saved to your directory
in the Managed Reporting Repository by domain. When your deferred report is saved to the
Managed Reporting Repository, it is removed from the Deferred Report Status interface.
When you save a deferred report, a new group folder, Deferred Reports Output, is created
under the My Reports tab within the Domain of origin as shown in this image. There is one
group folder, Deferred Reports Output, for each domain. WebFOCUS lists your saved deferred
reports (including Custom Reports) under the Deferred Reports Output group folder and adds
"Output of" as well as the date and time the My Report or Custom Report was saved to the
report name.
Procedure: How to Save a Deferred Report

2. Under the Completed tab, locate the report you want to save.
3. Under the Options column, click Save located to the right of the deferred report
description.
Note: Run-only users will not see the Save button.
WebFOCUS saves the deferred report results, including deferred Custom Reports, to
your My Reports tab in the Deferred Output group folder.
4. To return to your reporting environment, close the Deferred Report Status interface.
118 WebFOCUS
Deleting Tickets for All Report Status Types
How to:
Delete Tickets for All Report Status Types
From the Deferred Status Interface, you can delete tickets for all report status types using
the Delete drop-down list located in the toolbar at the top of the interface. The drop-down
list provides options to delete All, All Completed, All Running, All Queued, All Expired, and
All Unknown reports, but only when one or more reports exist for that status type in the
Deferred Status Interface. If a report status type is not displayed in the interface, the
corresponding status option does not appear in the Delete drop-down list.
You can also delete individual tickets using the Delete button located in the Options column
next to each report.
The following image shows the Deferred Status Interface with the Delete drop-down list
expanded showing the available options.

For unknown tickets, the status column shows:

Expired if the report has expired and is no longer stored on the Server.
Unknown for cases where the status can not be determined, including situations where
the server is not running so a connection could not be made to determine the status.
Note: For Unknown reports, the Options column displays the Server ID that submitted
the report along with the Current ID.
Procedure: How to Delete Tickets for All Report Status Types

1. Open the Deferred Status Interface.
2. Click the down-arrow next to Delete and select one of the following from the drop-down
list that opens:
All
Completed
Running
Queued
Expired
Unknown
You are prompted to confirm the deletion.
3. Click OK to delete all tickets for the selected status type or click Cancel to cancel the
request.
Deferred Status Delete Confirmation Messages

The Deferred Status interface presents the user with a delete confirmation message before
deleting a deferred report that is in Completed, Running, or Queued states. (A confirmation
message is already displayed for deferred reports in Unknown status.)
When you click the delete button from the Deferred Status page, you are prompted to confirm
the delete before the deferred report is actually deleted. A similar confirmation message is
used for all deferred reports, but the message varies depending on the conditions.
120 WebFOCUS
The following list shows confirmation messages and the associated conditions:
If the report is expired or was deleted from the server, the message recommends deletion
and indicates that there is no report output on the specific WebFOCUS server, as shown
in the following image.
If the WebFOCUS server is unavailable, the message indicates there is an error attaching
to the specific WebFOCUS server, as shown in the following image.
If there is no entry for the server in the WebFOCUS client configuration, the message
recommends deletion and indicates that the specific WebFOCUS server is not defined
in the WebFOCUS client configuration file, as shown in the following image.
Each of the deletion confirmation messages also displays the date and time the deferred
report was submitted, and the description that is displayed in the Deferred Status interface.

122 WebFOCUS
WebFOCUS
5 Using Power Painter
Power Painter is a Web layout and report

Topics:
creation tool (available with Managed
Reporting), built using AJAX technology, Functionality of Power Painter
that enables you to create output
formats and page layout formats. It Selecting and Adding a Data Source
combines reporting, graphs, and page Using Power Painter Options and
layout design in a single tool. Palettes
Note: This tool is only available with
Using Power Painter Objects
Managed Reporting and has multiple
access points. Using Standard Reporting Functions
Power Painter is accessible from MR Controlling the Overflow and Relative
Dashboard, MR Domain Builder applet, Positioning of Objects in Power Painter
and the MR User Management tree in
MR Domain Builder. Customizing the Power Painter
Environment
Accessing Power Painter
Configuring the Power Painter License
Code

Functionality of Power Painter
Functionality of Power Painter

You can accomplish the following tasks and functions using the Power Painter tool:
Create a Compound Report, which is a reporting document with multiple reports and
charts.
Create a Coordinated Compound Report, which is a compound document where the report
is collectively sorted and collated by a common sort group.
Create exact positioning requirements by adjusting the layout properties in the canvas.
Position report objects and elements relative to each other and the page.
Style reporting elements individually by applying a Style Sheet, theme, or conditional
styling rules.
Access and create Compound Reports using multiple data sources to build reports and
perform ad hoc analysis.
Develop reports using real-time data or sample data and limit the number of records for
the entire report, individual reports, or individual graphs.
Selecting and Adding a Data Source

How to:
Open a Data Source
Close a Data Source
You can use Power Painter to access a Data Source to build reports and perform ad hoc
analysis. You can open and work with Master Files by using the Data Sources palette in
Power Painter.
124 WebFOCUS
5. Using Power Painter
Procedure: How to Open a Data Source

1. Upon opening the Power Painter tool, you are prompted to select a Data Source. Select
a Master File and click OK.
The fields from the Data Source are available in the Data Sources palette.
Note: This step is optional. You can open or close Data Sources in Power Painter at
any time.
2. To open a new Data Source, click the Open a new data source button from the Data
Sources palette toolbar.
The Open dialog box appears prompting you to select a Data Source.

Selecting and Adding a Data Source
Procedure: How to Close a Data Source

Note: If there is a report or graph object on the canvas that is referencing data from an
open Data Source, you will not be able to close the Data Source unless you delete the
associated object.
To close an open Data Source, click the Close current data source button from the Data
Sources palette toolbar.
The fields are removed from the Data Source palette.
126 WebFOCUS
Using Power Painter Options and Palettes

In this section:
Using Palettes in the Canvas
The following image is an example of the Power Painter tool with multiple objects displayed
in the canvas. Several options and palettes enable you to customize the layout for the Power
Painter tool.

The following options are available in Power Painter:

Menu bar
Standard browser menu bar options such as File, View, Tools, and so on.
Toolbar
Power Painter toolbar options such as Layout, Run, View, Alignment, Palettes, and so
on.
Canvas
The canvas where you drop objects and paint the reporting document. The reporting
document can be made up of text elements, images, tabular report objects, charts, and
lines.
The following palettes are available in Power Painter:
Toolbox palette
Contains the tabular report, chart, text, image, and line objects for painting your
document.
Query palette
Enables you to build and customize queries for tabular reports and charts.
Data Sources palette
Contains your Data Source information.
Properties palette
Contains the property settings for the objects in the canvas.
128 WebFOCUS
Using Palettes in the Canvas
How to:
Dock and Undock a Palette
Stack Palettes
Pin a Palette
Show a Palette
Close a Palette
Reset the Power Painter Layout
Upon opening the Power Painter tool, the canvas appears with all of the palettes minimized
and pinned in the Power Painter margins. You can show, hide, or move these palettes as
needed. Power Painter retains these settings.
Power Painter is able to store information so that the options you set in a single session
are remembered and applied the next time you use the tool. Examples of the settings that
can be saved are how the palettes are displayed, the theme selected, field display options,
and so on. The information for these settings is stored under each user's directory in the
Managed Reporting repository.
Note: Reusing stored settings is only available if you access the same Managed Reporting
environment.
Palettes in Power Painter:
Resizable. You can change the height and width by dragging the sides of the palette.
Dockable. You can dock the palettes to the sides of the screen (top, bottom, left, right)
or float them anywhere in the work area.
Stackable. If multiple palettes are docked on the same side of the canvas, they become
stacked.
Pinnable. You can minimize the palettes and pin them in the Power Painter margins.

Procedure: How to Dock and Undock a Palette

1. Double-click a palette to dock it on the canvas.
or
Drag a palette within 10 pixels of the edge (top, bottom, left, right) of the canvas.
Note: A palette is docked when both the pin and close button are available from the
palette toolbar.
2. To undock a palette (float it), click the palette toolbar, left-click and hold your mouse,
and drag the palette to a new location on the canvas.
Procedure: How to Stack Palettes

Drag and dock multiple palettes to one side of the canvas to create vertical or stacked
palettes. You can adjust the height/width of each palette in the docking area.
Note: Resizing any palette automatically resizes the rest of the palettes so that they can
fit into the docking area.
The following image is an example of vertically stacked palettes in the Power Painter tool.
130 WebFOCUS
Procedure: How to Pin a Palette
1. Click the pin button located on the toolbar of an open palette.

The palette is pinned and minimized.
2. You can perform the following actions with pinned palettes:

Hover your mouse over the palette to show its contents.
Hover your mouse out of the palette to minimize it again.
Double-click a palette to dock it on the canvas.
Procedure: How to Show a Palette

1. Select Palettes from the View menu.
Palettes that are checked are shown in the canvas.
2. Select an unchecked palette name.

The palette is shown maximized on the canvas. You can move or resize the palette as
needed.

Procedure: How to Close a Palette

1. Select Palettes from the View menu.
2. Select a checked palette name from the list.
The palette is closed and removed from the canvas.
Note: You can also close an open palette by clicking the Close button from the palette
toolbar.
Procedure: How to Reset the Power Painter Layout

From the View menu, select Reset Layout from the Palettes submenu.
The Power Painter layout resets with the default palettes shown (Toolbox, Properties, Data
Sources) in the canvas.
132 WebFOCUS

How to:
Insert a Report Object in Power Painter
Insert a Graph Object in Power Painter
Insert a Text Object in Power Painter
Insert an Image Object in Power Painter
Insert a Line Object in Power Painter
Display Subtotals and Other Summary Values Using Prefix Operators
Reference:
Report Properties
Right-click Report Properties
Field Properties
Chart Properties
Chart Editor Dialog Box
Text Properties
Right-click Image Properties
Image Properties
Line Properties
The available objects in Power Painter are Report, Graph, Image, Text, and Line. You can
select these objects from the Toolbox palette or use the Insert menu on the main toolbar.
Each object is associated with corresponding properties that you can set using the properties
palette for the selected object.
The following image shows the Toolbox palette displaying the Report, Graph, Image, Text,
and Line object buttons.

Procedure: How to Insert a Report Object in Power Painter

1. Double-click a field in the Data Sources palette and (by default) a report object is
automatically inserted in the canvas.
2. Make sure the desired report object is selected in the canvas.
The selected object appears with black squares around the perimeter of the object, as
shown in the following image.
3. To automatically add fields to the selected report object, double-click a field in the Data
Sources palette.
Numeric fields, such as decimal and floating point, are automatically added to the Sum
folder. Non-numeric fields, such as alphanumeric and date fields, are automatically
added to the By folder.
4. To manually add fields to the selected report object, select a field in the Data Sources
palette and drag it to the Query button, which is located above the top left corner
of the selected report object.
134 WebFOCUS
The Query pop-up dialog box opens, as shown in the following image.
Continue to drag the field and drop it on the Sum, By, Across, or Coordinated folder.
Note: By and Across folders are for sorting, Sum folders are for aggregating and
displaying, and Coordinated folders contain a common sort field for creating multiple
reports and graphs that are burst into separate page layouts. Each value for a coordinated
sort field displays on a separate page.

5. To edit or delete fields in a report, select the desired report object in the canvas, then
open the Query pop-up dialog box or Query palette.
To open the Query pop-up dialog box, click the Query button above the selected report
object (or right-click the report object and select Query from the context menu).
To open the Query palette, from the View menu, select Palettes, then select Query
from the Palettes submenu.
The By, Sum, Across, and Coordinated folders appear with the selected fields in the
report. You can drag and drop fields into different folders, delete fields, add and edit
compute fields, and view report properties for a selected field. You can also select Print
to display all of the values found in the data source for a selected field, or select Sum
to sum the values of a selected numeric field.
6. To customize the properties of a field in the report, select the desired field in the Query
pop-up dialog box or Query palette, then modify the properties in the Field properties
palette, as shown in the following image.
For details, see Field Properties on page 140.
7. To customize the properties of the entire report, select the desired report object and
modify the properties for the report in the Report properties palette. For details, see
Report Properties on page 137.
136 WebFOCUS
8. Select Save from the File menu to save the report.
Reference: Report Properties

When a report object is selected, the following properties are available from the Report
properties palette.
Position: Top
Indicates the starting position for the top edge of the report. You can type in a different
value to change the position or manually drag the report on the canvas.

Position: Left
Indicates the starting position for the left edge of the report. You can type in a different
value to change the position or manually drag the report on the canvas.
Height
Indicates the height of the report object. You can type in a different value to change the
height or manually drag the report object on the canvas.
Width
Indicates the width of the report object. You can type in a different value to change the
width or manually drag the report object on the canvas.
Stylesheet: reference
Click the browse (...) button to select an external stylesheet. The report references the
selected stylesheet which controls the global level styling of the report. You can choose
from a predefined set of stylesheets, or a stylesheet from the Import directory.
Font
Shows the default global font for the report.
Column title styling
Click the browse (...) button to open the font dialog box. Select the font, style, size, text,
and background color for the column titles in the report.
Column data styling
Click the browse (...) button to open the font dialog box. Select the font, style, size, text,
and multiple background colors for the data in the report.
Heading
Adds a heading to the report. Click the browse (...) button to open the Heading dialog
box.
You can use the Headings toolbar to customize and modify the font, style, size, text
color, background color, and so on.
You can use the Data Sources area to add fields from the Master File as your heading.
Footing
Adds a footing to the report. Click the browse (...) button to open the Footing dialog box.
You can use the Footings toolbar to customize and modify the font, style, size, text
You can use the Data Sources area to add fields from the Master File as your footing.
138 WebFOCUS
Column totals
Shows columns totals in the report. No is selected by default. To show column totals,
use the drop-down list to select Yes.
Row totals
Shows row totals in the report. No is selected by default. To show row totals, use the
drop-down list to select Yes.
Display every sort value
Determines when all instances of a vertical sort (By) field are displayed in the report.
No is selected by default to omit duplicates. To display every instance of a vertical sort
field value, use the drop-down list to select Yes.
Sizing and Overflow
Determines the vertical sizing of the report by setting fixed or flowing overflow. For more
information about sizing and overflow, see Setting Overflow Options in Power Painter on
page 177.
Minimize Column Width
Shrinks the column width to fit the widest value in the report. Yes is selected by default.
Select No from the drop-down list to expand all of the columns.
Record Limit
Limits the number of records used to retrieve data at run time.
Page numbering
Select On, Off, or No lead from the list box.
Currency symbol
Overrides the default currency symbol for the reporting server. Use the drop-down list to
select from Default, USD, GBP, JPY, EUR, or $. You can also type a one-character custom
symbol directly in the value column adjacent to the Currency symbol property.

Reference: Right-click Report Properties

When you right-click a report object, the following options are available from the dialog box
that appears:
Query
Opens the query dialog box.
Size to Fit
Resizes the report as fields are added and deleted.
Delete
Deletes the report.
Properties
Displays the Report properties dialog box.
Reference: Field Properties

When a report is selected, the following properties are available from the Field properties
palette.
140 WebFOCUS
Note: The field properties available vary depending on the type of sort field selected.
Visible
Controls whether a field appears in the report graph, or is hidden. If Visible is set to No,
the column is hidden, but is still used in calculations.
Title
Enables you to enter a title for the field in the report graph.
Sorting
Sorts the column data in ascending or descending order.
Total
Applies aggregation and sorting to numeric columns in one pass of the data and is
available for Sort by and Sort across fields. You must have an aggregating display field,
such as Sum, in the report.

Page break
Starts a new page when the value of a selected sort field changes.
Subtotal
Enables you to display subtotals for numeric data whenever the value of the selected
sort (By) field changes. By default, numeric field values are summed and displayed as
subtotals. Additionally, you can display other summary values by applying prefix operators
to numeric fields, including computed fields, by clicking the browse (...) button to open
the Sub Total Options dialog box. For more information, see How to Display Subtotals
and Other Summary Values Using Prefix Operators on page 158.
Underline
Includes a horizontal line across the width of a report after the value of the selected sort
field changes.
Include missing instances
Displays missing instances of data for related fields in the report.
Drill down
Enables you to supply information to another report by using a hyperlink, procedure, or
parameter.
Conditional Styling
Enables you to assign a conditional style to a report element. Conditional styling enables
you to define conditions that determine when to apply particular fonts, text style, and
so on. For more information about conditional styling, see How to Create Conditional
Styling Rules on page 164.
Subheading
Adds a subheading to the report at sort breaks. Click the browse (...) button to open the
subheading dialog box.
You can use the subheadings toolbar to customize and modify the font, style, size,
text color, background color, and so on.
You can use the Data Sources area to add fields from the Master File as your
subheading.
142 WebFOCUS
Subfooting
Adds a subfooting to the report at sort breaks. Click the browse (...) button to open the
subfooting dialog box.
You can use the Footings toolbar to customize and modify the font, style, size, text
You can use the Data Sources area to add fields from the Master File as your footing.
Ranking
Includes a column with a numeric rank for each row in a vertically sorted report.
Ranking limit
If specified, this value limits the number of ranked values to be retrieved.
Ranking title
Displays a default column title as RANK with the sort field. You can type in a unique title
name for the ranked field.
Ranking title font
Click the browse (...) button to open the font dialog box. Select the font, style, and size
for the ranking title.
Ranking data font
Click the browse (...) button to open the font dialog box. Select the font, style, and size
for the ranking data.
Title font
Click the browse (...) button to open the font dialog box. Select the font, style, size, text
and multiple background colors for the column title.
Data font
Click the browse (...) button to open the font dialog box. Select the font, style, size, text
and multiple background colors for the data column.
Table of Contents
Enables you to generate a Table of Contents (TOC) page which shows a summary of the
document's contents, along with page numbers, and can be printed with the document.
The entries in the Table of Contents enable you to easily navigate to a particular section
while viewing the document.
Note: The Table of Contents only appears as a field option if you are using a coordinated
report.

Procedure: How to Insert a Graph Object in Power Painter

1. Select the Graph button from the Toolbox palette and drag it onto the canvas.
or
Select Graph from the Insert menu.
The New Chart dialog box appears.
2. Select a chart type and click Finish.

The graph appears on the canvas.
Tip: To view the New Chart dialog box after the graph has been added to the canvas,
select Show Chart Types from the right-click context menu of the graph.
3. From the Data Sources palette, select a field and drag it to the graph object.
144 WebFOCUS
When you drag a field into the graph, drop the field on the Y axis, X group axis,
Coordinated, or other specialized field container in the Query pop-up dialog box that
appears, as shown in the following image.
You can also double-click a field to automatically add it to the graph. Numeric fields,
such as decimal and floating point, are added to the Y axis (or other specialized)
container. Non-numeric fields, such as alphanumeric and date fields, are added to the
X group axis (or other specialized) container.
Note: The Coordinated field container contains a common sort field for creating multiple
reports and graphs that are burst into separate page layouts. Each value for a coordinated
sort field displays on a separate page.

4. To edit or delete fields in a graph, select the desired graph object in the canvas, then
open the Query pop-up dialog box or Query palette.
To open the Query pop-up dialog box, click the Query button above the selected report
object (or right-click the report object and select Query from the context menu).
The Y axis, X group axis, and Coordinated field containers appear with the selected
fields in the graph. Note that some specialized graphs have other field containers. You
can drag and drop fields into different containers, delete fields, add and edit compute
fields, and view properties for a selected field from this dialog box. You can also select
Print to display all of the values found in the data source for a selected field, or select
Sum to sum the values of a selected numeric field.
5. To customize the properties of a field in the graph, right-click the desired field in the
Query pop-up dialog box or Query palette, select Properties, then modify the properties
in the Field properties palette. For details, see Field Properties on page 140.
6. To customize the properties of the entire graph, right-click the desired graph object,
select Properties, and modify the properties in the Chart properties palette. For details,
see Chart Properties on page 147.
7. To further customize the chart titles, legends, axes, and other properties, from the View
menu, select Palettes, then select Chart Editor from the Palettes submenu.
8. Select Save from the File menu to save the graph.
146 WebFOCUS
Reference: Chart Properties

For most chart types, when a graph object is selected, the following properties are available
from the Chart properties palette. Note: Some chart types with unique properties, such as
pie and three dimensional charts, have specialized properties not shown below.
Crosstab Mode
Select from Yes or No. Displays the Series-legend icon and enables secondary X-axis
functionality.
Record limit
Type a number to edit the record limit value.
Top
Indicates the starting position for the top edge of the graph. You can type in a different
value to change the position or manually drag the graph on the canvas.

Left
Indicates the starting position for the left edge of the graph. You can type in a different
value to change the position or manually drag the graph on the canvas.
Height
Indicates the height of the graph object. You can type in a different value to change the
height or manually drag the graph object on the canvas.
Width
Indicates the width of the graph object. You can type in a different value to change the
width or manually drag the graph object on the canvas.
Apply template
Select from any of the available templates to apply a predefined color scheme to change
the appearance of your chart.
Chart title
Type the desired title text.
Chart subtitle
Type the desired subtitle text.
Chart footnote
Type the desired footnote text.
Use 3D effect
Select from Yes or No to apply or not apply a three dimensional effect on the graph.
Legend position
Select the desired option for positioning the chart's legend.
Show data values
Select from Yes or No to display or not display data values on the graph.
X-axis Major grid
Select from Yes or No to display or not display X-axis major gridlines on the graph.
Y-axis Major grid
Select from Yes or No to display or not display Y-axis major gridlines on the graph.
Fit to Chart area
Select from Yes or No to turn auto placement on or off.
148 WebFOCUS
Reference: Chart Editor Dialog Box

When the Chart Editor dialog box is open in Power Painter, properties are available for each
object in the chart editor. The following image is an example of the Chart Editor and the Data
labels properties palette in Power Painter.
For details about the chart editor and its object properties, see the Creating Graphs With
Advanced Graph Assistant chapter in the WebFOCUS Managed Reporting Developer's Manual.

Procedure: How to Insert a Text Object in Power Painter

1. Select the Text button from the Toolbox palette and drag it onto the canvas.
or
Select Text from the Insert menu.
The Text Component dialog box appears on the canvas.
2. Manually type text into the text box area to use the default font.
150 WebFOCUS
3. Click the Font Properties button to open the Font dialog box.
You can customize the font, style, size, and text color of the text.
4. Click OK to close the Font dialog box.

5. Click OK to close the dialog box.

The text is inserted into the canvas.
6. You can select the text object to view or edit the properties for the text in the Text
properties palette.
7. Select Save from the File menu to save the text.
Reference: Text Properties

When a text object is selected, the following properties are available from the Text properties
palette.
Height
Indicates the height of the text object. You can type in a different value to change the
height or manually drag the text object on the canvas.
Position: Left
Indicates the starting position for the left edge of the text.
Position: Top
Indicates the starting position for the top edge of the text.
152 WebFOCUS
Width
Indicates the width of the text object. You can type in a different value to change the
width or manually drag the text object on the canvas.
Procedure: How to Insert an Image Object in Power Painter

1. Select the Image button from the Toolbox palette and drag it onto the canvas.
or
Select Image from the Insert menu.
The Open dialog box appears on the canvas.
2. Select from the list of image files available.

Note: The Reporting Server is the default location for all stored images.
Images need to be copied to the appropriate directories by your administrator.

3. Click OK to insert the image.

The image is added to the canvas, and the size defaults to the size of the image.
4. You can select the image object to view or edit the properties for the image in the Image
properties palette.
5. Select Save from the File menu to save the image.
Reference: Right-click Image Properties

When you right-click an image, the following options are available from the dialog box that
appears:
Reset to original size
Resets the image to the original size.
Deletes
Deletes the image.
Properties
Opens the Image properties dialog box.
Note: Hover over an image to view the file name.
154 WebFOCUS
Reference: Image Properties

When an image object is selected, the following properties are available from the Image
properties palette.
Height
Indicates the height of the image object. You can type in a different value to change the
height or manually drag the image object on the canvas.
Position: Left
Indicates the starting position for the left edge of the image.
Position: Top
Indicates the starting position for the top edge of the image.
Width
Indicates the width of the image object. You can type in a different value to change the
width or manually drag the image object on the canvas.

Procedure: How to Insert a Line Object in Power Painter

1. Select the Line button from the Toolbox palette and drag it onto the canvas.
or
Select Line from the Insert menu.
The line object is added to the canvas as a positioned horizontal line.
Note: To insert a vertical line, use the Line properties palette to change the orientation
to vertical.
2. You can select the line object to view or edit the properties for the line in the Line
properties palette.
3. Select Save from the File menu to save the line.
156 WebFOCUS
Reference: Line Properties

When a line object is selected, the following properties are available from the Line properties
palette.
Color
Sets the color of the line. Click in the color value field to open the color dialog box.
Height
Indicates the height of the line object. You can type in a different value to change the
height or manually drag the line object on the canvas.
Orientation
Indicates the horizontal or vertical orientation of the line on the canvas.
Position: Left
Indicates the starting position for the left edge of the line.
Style
Sets the style of the line. Use the drop-down list to select from solid, dotted, dashed,
and so on.
Weight
Sets the thickness of the line to light, medium, or heavy.

Width
Indicates the width of the line object. You can type in a different value to change the
width or manually drag the line object on the canvas.
Procedure: How to Display Subtotals and Other Summary Values Using Prefix Operators
The Subtotal property in the Field properties palette enables you to display subtotals, and
other summary values using prefix operators, for any or all of the numeric fields, including
computed fields, in a report query. From the Field Properties dialog, when you click the
browse (...) button to the right of the Subtotals property, the Sub Total Options dialog box
opens.
1. Select the Sub Totals option to replace the default setting of None.
If you are using computed fields, select the Recomputed Sub Totals option instead.
2. Numeric field values are summed and displayed as subtotals in the report by default.
To display summary values other than the default subtotals, select prefix operators
using the drop-down lists in the Prefix area that are adjacent to each of the selections
in the Columns area.
Note that the Sum prefix produces the same subtotal results as not selecting a prefix
operator.
All of the available prefix operators are listed and described in the following table.
Prefix Description Displayed in Prefix List

SUM. Compute the sum of values Sum
ASQ. Compute the average sum of squares Average Square
AVE. Compute the average value Average
CNT. Count the items Count
FST. Select the first value only Show first in group
LST. Select the last value only Show last in group
MAX. Select the maximum value only Maximum
MIN. Select the minimum value only Minimum
3. To display all numeric field values as subtotals or other summary values in the report,
select the Apply totals to all columns check box in the Columns area.
158 WebFOCUS
4. To display subtotals or other summary values for a subset of the numeric fields in the
report, make sure the Apply totals to all columns check box is de-selected, then select
check boxes for the individual numeric fields in the Columns area of the Subtotal tab.
When Apply totals to all columns is selected, options for all individual fields in the Columns
area are inactive by default.
5. To modify the default subtotal title, which is set to *TOTAL, type the desired text you
want to display as the title for all subtotals and any other selected summary values in
the Current Subtotal Text field.
6. To hide subtotals for sort fields that have only a single value, select the Suppress for
single lines check box.
The following image shows the Sub Total Options dialog box.

Using Standard Reporting Functions

In this section:
Importing Values From External Files for WHERE Statements
Creating Parameters for Use in the Auto Prompting Facility
How to:
Create a DEFINE Statement
Create a COMPUTE Statement
Create a JOIN Between Data Sources
Create Conditional Styling Rules
Create a WHERE Statement
The following standard reporting functions are available within the Data Sources palette of
the Power Painter tool:
Create a virtual field (DEFINE) for your report.
Create a report level calculation (COMPUTE) for your report.
Add a JOIN relationship by using the Joins tab in the Data Sources palette.
Create conditional styling rules by using the Create Conditional Style Rule dialog box.
Create filters (WHERE/WHERE TOTAL statements) using the Selection Criteria palette.
Use the Auto Prompting Facility to select parameters for your report.
Procedure: How to Create a DEFINE Statement
1. Click the Define button from the Data Sources palette.

The Field creator dialog box opens.
2. Type the name of the virtual field in the Field input box.
3. Enter an expression in the expressions box.
4. Click OK to close the Define field creator dialog box.
The DEFINE field is added to the report field list.
5. Drag and drop the DEFINE field into the report.
160 WebFOCUS
Procedure: How to Create a COMPUTE Statement
1. Click the Compute button from the Query palette.

The Field creator dialog box opens.
2. Type the name of the computes field in the Field input box.
3. Enter an expression in the expressions box.
4. Click OK to close the Compute field creator dialog box and apply the COMPUTE statement.
The COMPUTE field is added to the report.
Procedure: How to Create a JOIN Between Data Sources

1. Click the Joins tab in the Data Sources palette.
2. Click the Add Join button from the Data Sources palette toolbar.

3. Select a target Master File and click OK.

The Create Join dialog box opens.
Note: Joins can also be created on defined fields. For more information about defined
fields, see How to Create a DEFINE Statement on page 160.
4. Type a name for the Join in the Description field.

5. Select the Type and Instances for the Join or use the default selections.
6. Click the Select a source field browse (...) button to select the Join source field.
7. Click the Select a target field browse (...) button to select the target fields.
Note: If no target fields are available, you are notified that there are no fields found.
8. Click Save & Create to save the Join relationship.
162 WebFOCUS
The joined field is added to the Joins tab.
9. Click the Fields tab in the Data Source palette to view the joined data.

10. Drag and drop joined fields onto the canvas as you would any other field.
Note: To edit a join, double-click the join.
Procedure: How to Create Conditional Styling Rules

1. Open the Query pop-up dialog box or Query palette in the canvas.
To open the Query pop-up dialog box, click the Query button above the selected object
(or right-click the object and select Query from the context menu).
2. Select the field name in the Query pop-up dialog box or Query palette.
When fields are selected, properties for each field are available in the Field properties
palette.
3. Click the Field properties palette and scroll down until you see Conditional styling.
164 WebFOCUS
4. Click in the Conditional styling value field and select the New styling rule button.

The Create Conditional Style Rule dialog box opens, as shown in the following image.
166 WebFOCUS
5. Create the style conditions for the field.

a. Type a name for the condition or accept the default.
b. Select a relationship for the condition from the Relationship drop-down list.
c. Specify a value by doing one of the following:
Type a literal value in the Value input field.
or
Click Values from the Compare type section to display existing data source values.
d. Click Done to save and apply the conditional style rule.

The condition is added to the Field properties palette and the condition is applied
to the data on the Power Painter canvas.
The following image is an example of the Field properties palette with a Low Balance condition
rule. The report object shows red text where the conditional styling rule was applied.

Procedure: How to Create a WHERE Statement

1. Select a report or graph object in the Power Painter canvas.
2. From the View menu, select Selection Criteria from the Palettes submenu.
The Selection Criteria palette appears on the bottom of the canvas.
3. Drag a field name from the Data Sources palette to the Selection Criteria palette.
The WHERE statement is added to the Selection Criteria palette.
168 WebFOCUS
4. Specify the condition by using the drop-down list.
5. Click Select Value to open the Select Value dialog box.

6. Select a Constant, Parameter, Field or Value selection button.

If creating a constant, manually type in a value for the WHERE statement.
If creating a parameter, click the browse (...) button to open the Variable Editor dialog
box. For details, see How to Create Parameters and Run in the Auto Prompting Facility
on page 173.
Select the name, selection, a value options for the WHERE statement.
If creating a Field or Value, select a value from the list supplied.
170 WebFOCUS
7. Click OK to close the Select Value dialog box.

The value is added to the Selection Criteria palette and the report or graph reflects the
WHERE statement as soon as the value is selected.
Note: To delete the WHERE statement, select the WHERE statement check box and
click the red X on the blue highlighted line in the Selection Criteria palette.
How to:
Create a Value List From an External File
When developing a query, you can use a locally saved, external file as selection criteria to
limit query results. This enables you to quickly build a query containing a large number of
WHERE statement values without having to manually enter repetitive or readily available
data.

Procedure: How to Create a Value List From an External File

1. Navigate to the Selection criteria area.
2. Begin creating a WHERE statement by selecting a field from the list of available fields.
3. Select a data comparison option that can accept multiple values.
Valid options include EQUAL to, NOT EQUAL to, IN literal list, NOT IN literal list, EXCLUDES
literal list, and INCLUDES literal list.
4. Click Select values.

The Values dialog opens.
5. Click the import button as shown in the following image.
A dialog box opens as shown in the following image.
6. Select either the Flat file or Excel Spreadsheet (XLS) File Format option.
7. Click the Browse button.
172 WebFOCUS
A standard file selection dialog opens.
8. Select an external file to import from your local machine or network.

Note: The external file must only contain text with new line delimiters.
9. Click OK.
The values contained in the file are displayed in the Multiple values entered list in the
right pane of the dialog.
10. Optionally, you can remove specific values from the Multiple values entered list or move
values up or down within the list.
11. Click OK.
You can save the query for future use and reopen the query to append new or remove
existing values.
Creating Parameters for Use in the Auto Prompting Facility
How to:
Create Parameters and Run in the Auto Prompting Facility
When a parameter selection criteria is added in Power Painter, the auto prompting facility
appears at run time.
For more information about creating and applying auto prompting templates, see the Changing
WebFOCUS Client Settings in the WebFOCUS Administration Console section of the WebFOCUS
Security and Administration manual.
Procedure: How to Create Parameters and Run in the Auto Prompting Facility
1. From the Selection Criteria palette, create a WHERE statement.
2. Click the Select Value button.
The Select Value dialog box opens.
3. From the Select Value dialog box, select Parameters and click the Edit Parameter
Properties button.

The Variable Editor dialog box opens.
4. In the Variable Editor dialog box, verify the Name and Description fields, which are
automatically populated based on the field you selected to create the WHERE statement.
You can edit the populated values as needed.
174 WebFOCUS
5. Choose from the following Selection options:

Dynamic. This is the default option. The Data Source and Field values are selected
automatically based on the field used to create the WHERE statement and can be
changed as needed.
Note: When working with a Reporting Object, you can only select fields from data
sources that the Reporting Object is defined to access.
Static. Select the Constant or Value option. For Constant, enter one or more values.
For the Value option, all of the values for the selected field appear in the Value list
box. Move the values you want to the Multiple Values Entered list box using the plus
button.
For either the Dynamic or Static option, you can select the Select multiple values at
runtime check box to provide more than one value to the report from the auto prompt
page. In addition, the user will be able to select all values from the values list.
6. Click OK to exit the Variable Editor.

The parameter is added to the Select Value dialog box.
7. Click OK to close the Select Value dialog box.

8. Click Run from the File menu in Power Painter.
The Auto Prompting facility appears.

Controlling the Overflow and Relative Positioning of Objects in Power Painter
Controlling the Overflow and Relative Positioning of Objects in Power

Painter
In this section:
Setting Overflow Options in Power Painter
Using Fixed Overflow in Power Painter
Using Flowing Overflow in Power Painter
Setting a Relative Position Between Objects in Power Painter
In Power Painter, you can control the overflow of reports, and relative vertical positioning of
reports and graphs, so they fill an entire page and maintain their relative positions in the
document. The Sizing and Overflow property in the Report properties palette is used to control
overflow and relative positioning.
Overflow is defined as the area of a report that exceeds its defined space in the page layout.
For example, a multi-page report and a graph can both be added to a single page layout with
the graph positioned beneath the report. The report can flow to fill the page and the graph
can be relatively positioned to the report so it is placed at the end of the document following
the complete rendering of the report.
Note: There is currently no method of controlling horizontal overflow.
176 WebFOCUS
Setting Overflow Options in Power Painter

When executing a report, the area that flows outside of the allocated space for the report
is considered the overflow. The following image is an example of the canvas in Power Painter.
You can set the size and overflow of a report object to control the overflow at run time. Sizing
and overflow options are available through the Report properties palette.
Fixed. When Sizing and Overflow is set to Fixed, the report is confined to the dimensions
of the canvas at run time and continues to output on multiple pages within the same
fixed dimensions until all of the data is shown.
Flowing. When Sizing and Overflow is set to Flowing, the report fills the page at run time
and automatically pushes surrounding objects down the page until the report is finished.
This enables other objects such as repeating images and text (headers and footers) to
be shown and not overlapped by the flowing report.
Note: These options only apply to report objects. There are no size and overflow properties
for graphs, images, text, or lines.

The following image is an example of a report with Sizing and Overflow set to Fixed. Note
how the report output maintains the size of the report object in the Power Painter canvas,
spreading the report across 6 pages.
178 WebFOCUS
The following image is the same report with Sizing and Overflow set to Flowing. Note how
the report expands to fill the page at run time.
Using Fixed Overflow in Power Painter
How to:
Customize the Fixed Position and Size of an Object
Reports using fixed overflow maintain the size and position of the report object from the
Power Painter canvas in the report output. You can customize and maintain the fixed position
of the report output by adjusting the position and size options from the Report properties
palette.

Procedure: How to Customize the Fixed Position and Size of an Object

1. Select an object from the Power Painter canvas.
The Report properties palette shows the available properties for the selected object.
2. Select Fixed from the Sizing and Overflow drop-down list.
3. To adjust the position and size of the object at run time, edit the Position Left, Position
Top, Height, and Width properties in the Report properties palette.
or
To adjust the position, hover the mouse pointer over the object until a four-way arrow
appears, then click and drag the object in any direction. To adjust the size, hover the
mouse pointer over any of the square corners or midpoints along the border of the object
until a two-way arrow appears, then click and drag the square in any direction.
4. Run the report.
180 WebFOCUS
Note: If the document contains multiple fixed reports, the report output maintains the same
size and position as the report objects in the Power Painter canvas, as shown in the image
below.

Note: If the document contains a fixed report and a graph, the report may be broken up
around the graph object. You can set the relationship between the graph and the report to
have the graph display after the report. For more information about setting relationships,
see How to Relate Surrounding Objects to a Report on page 188.
Using Flowing Overflow in Power Painter
How to:
Set the Flowing Report Property
Set Flow Margins for the Power Painter Canvas
Reports using flowing overflow begin the report output at the upper left corner of the report
object and fill the page with the report results. Flow margins are available which enable you
to adjust the canvas so that flowing objects fill the page.
Note: Flowing overflow is not available for graphs, images, text, or lines. For example, if a
graph is included in the document and the graph overlaps the report at run time, you must
set a relationship between the graph and the report so the graph flows after the report at
run time.
182 WebFOCUS
Procedure: How to Set the Flowing Report Property

1. Select an object from the Power Painter canvas.
The properties palette shows the available properties for the selected object.
2. Select Flowing from the Sizing and Overflow drop-down list.
Tip: Flow margins are available for the canvas which further enable you to adjust the
page so that the report fills each page between the flow margins. For more information
about flow margins, see How to Set Flow Margins for the Power Painter Canvas on page
185.
3. Run the document.

Note: If the document contains multiple flowing reports and the reports overlap at run time,
you must set the relationship between the reports. For more information about setting
relationships, see How to Relate Surrounding Objects to a Report on page 188.
184 WebFOCUS
Note: If the document contains a flowing report and a graph, and the graph overlaps the
report at run time, you must set the relationship between the graph and the report. For more
information, see How to Relate Surrounding Objects to a Report on page 188.
Procedure: How to Set Flow Margins for the Power Painter Canvas
You can set the flow margins for the document, which become page margins in the report
output when Sizing and Overflow is set to Flowing for the report. Flow margins are set through
the top and bottom margins, and flowing reports utilize flow margins to ensure that header
and footer information is preserved in the output.
Note: There is currently no method of controlling horizontal overflow.
1. Select the canvas from Power Painter.
2. From the Document properties palette, manually type in the Flow margin: bottom value.
The flow margin bottom value sets the ending vertical coordinate where a flowing report
ends on each page.
3. From the Properties window, manually type in the Flow margin: top value.

The flow margin top value sets the beginning vertical coordinate where a flowing report
starts on each new page.
or
You can also set flow margins on the canvas. To display flow margins, select Layout
from the toolbar menu and select Show Flow Margins.
Note: Flow margins are indicated by blue lines that appear on the top and bottom of
the Power Painter canvas.
4. Adjust the objects on the canvas between the flow margins and run the report.
186 WebFOCUS
The report fills each page between the flow margins until it reaches the end. For example,
in the image below the flow margin was adjusted so that an image could be used as a
header.

Setting a Relative Position Between Objects in Power Painter
How to:
Relate Surrounding Objects to a Report
Reference:
Rules for Setting Relationships Between Objects
You can set a relative (vertical) relationship between objects. Similar to the flowing report
option, you can select multiple report and graph objects and set a relationship. The following
relationship options are available from the main toolbar, or from the Layout menu in Power
Painter:
Relate objects. Sets the relative relationship or distance between two objects; a
surrounding object (below) and the primary object (above) that precedes it.
Show relationships. Shows or hides all relationships on the canvas.
Relative positioning is determined by setting where a surrounding object's upper left corner
is positioned relative to the lower left corner of the preceding primary object.
Note: There is currently no method of setting horizontal relationships.
Procedure: How to Relate Surrounding Objects to a Report

A surrounding object can only be related to one flowing report. However, a flowing report can
have multiple surrounding objects related to itself.
1. Select a report or graph (surrounding) object from the Power Painter canvas.
188 WebFOCUS
2. Hold down the Ctrl key while selecting a flowing report (primary) object that precedes or
is above the first selected object.
Note: The primary object is indicated by solid black squares around the edges, when
selected. The surrounding object is indicated by clear squares around the edges, when
selected.
3. Set the relationship between the objects by selecting the Relate objects
button from the main toolbar.
Note: The relationship buttons are only available from the main toolbar when multiple
objects are selected.
An arrow appears on the canvas, indicating that the relationship has been set.

In the following image, the graph is the surrounding object to the report.
Tip: To break the relationship, click the same surrounding objects using the Shift key
and click the Relate objects button from the main toolbar. The arrow is removed and the
relationship is broken.
4. Run the report.
190 WebFOCUS
Note: If the document contains multiple reports, and the relationships have been set, the
first report runs until it is complete, followed by the surrounding reports, at run time.

Note: If the document contains a report and a graph, and the relationship has been set,
the report runs until complete, followed by the graph, at run time.
192 WebFOCUS
Reference: Rules for Setting Relationships Between Objects

The following rules apply when setting relationships between objects:
Setting Relationships
This sets a relative distance between the flowing report and a surrounding object. The
surrounding object is rendered immediately following the end of a flowing report with the
related distance between the end of the flowing report and the beginning of the
surrounding object.
Fixed objects
A fixed object cannot be broken across a page break, it needs enough vertical space
to fit on the last page of the flowing report.
Flowing object (reports)
If a surrounding object is another flowing report, then the required space does not
need to be set. A flowing report can be broken across pages. The reporting server
determines if there is enough room to begin rendering the surrounding flowing report.
Draw object
Relationships do not apply to draw objects such as images, lines, and text. Draw
objects can be placed above flowing reports in a page layout, but draw objects placed
below a flowing report should be placed outside of the bottom flow margin.
Setting a relationship between a report and a graph
If the overflow property of the report is set to flowing and there is no set relationship
between the graph and report, then the report will overlap and display on top of the graph
at run time. There is no way for Power Painter to automatically set relationships, so you
must set the relationship between the report and the graph.
Note: A surrounding object can only be related to one flowing report; however, a flowing
report can have multiple surrounding objects related to itself.

Customizing the Power Painter Environment

In this section:
Setting Preferences
Setting Field Display Options
Adjusting the Layout of Objects in the Canvas
Adjusting the Power Painter Work Area
Changing the Theme of the Power Painter Environment
After the objects are in the canvas, you can customize the layout properties, alignment
options, and page to configure the canvas for precise output. You can also adjust the work
area and change the theme of the Power Painter environment.
Setting Preferences
When you access the Edit menu and select Preferences, the following dialog box appears
where you can set preferences for various defaults.
194 WebFOCUS
The Preferences dialog contains a General tab and a Reports and Graphs tab. The General
tab enables you to select Output Format, Page Orientation, and Page Size options. The
Reports and Graphs tab enables you to select a Preview option and set a Record Limit for
both reports and graphs, select a Default Stylesheet for reports, and select a Default
Template for graphs.
Note: These settings do not affect the current Power Painter session. The new settings are
applied the next time Power Painter is opened.
Setting Field Display Options

When you access the View menu and select Field Display Options, another menu opens
providing you with options to display fields as a Name, Alias, Title, or Description. You can
also choose the Prefix with option to prefix fields with a filename or segment name.
Adjusting the Layout of Objects in the Canvas
Reference:
Showing Grids, Rulers, and Guides in the Canvas
Aligning and Sizing Objects in the Canvas
You can use the main toolbar and the Layout menu to adjust the layout of objects in the
Power Painter canvas. The following layout options are available:
Show grids, rulers, and guides in the canvas to fulfill pixel-perfect positioning requirements.
Align and size objects in the canvas.
Reference: Showing Grids, Rulers, and Guides in the Canvas

To show grids in the canvas, select Show Grid from the Layout menu or click the Toggle
Grid icon from the main toolbar.
The following image is an example of how the canvas appears with grids showing.

To show rulers in the canvas, select Show Rulers from the Layout menu.
The following image is an example of how the canvas appears with rulers showing.
To show guides in the canvas, select Show Guides from the Layout menu.
The following image is an example of how the canvas appears with guides showing.
Tip: Use the ruler to click and drag guides onto the canvas. Guides are indicated by the
aqua line.
To show flow margins in canvas, select Show Flow Margins from the Layout menu.
The following image is an example of how the canvas appears with flow margins showing.
Flow margins are indicated by the light blue line.
Tip: You can left-click on the horizontal ruler or the vertical ruler and drag the flow margins
up and down the canvas.
196 WebFOCUS
The following image shows the Layout menu in Power Painter.
Reference: Aligning and Sizing Objects in the Canvas

You can align objects relative to one another or to the canvas. Alignment options are available
from the Layout menu or from the main toolbar.
Align objects to the page by using the align options from the main toolbar.
Align multiple objects to each other using the Align Items option from the Layout menu.
Size objects to be the same size by using the Size Items option from the Layout menu.
Use the Relative Positioning options to maintain the relative position of the objects to
each other at run time. The Relative Positioning options are Relate Objects, and Show
Relationships-available from the main toolbar or Layout menu.
The following image shows the main toolbar in Power Painter.

Adjusting the Power Painter Work Area

Click anywhere on the canvas and select the Document properties palette to adjust the
document properties.
Data preview
Shows live data or sample data for reports and graphs.
Note: By default, sample data is shown in the Power Painter canvas.
Design Record Limit
Sets the number or records to be shown when gathering data for reports and graphs.
Note: The default record limit value for the report is 500.
Flow margin: bottom
Sets the bottom margin for flowing reports.
Flow margin: top
Sets the top margin for flowing reports.
Output format
Enables you to select the output format from the following options: PDF, DHTML, Power
Point, Active Report, or Excel.
Page orientation
Sets the page orientation of the document. Select either Portrait or Landscape.
Note: Portrait is the default page orientation.
198 WebFOCUS
Page size
Sets the page size of the document. Use the drop-down list to select a page orientation
option.
Note: Letter is the default page orientation.
Units
Specifies the unit of measurements for the tool. Select Inches, Centimeters, or Points.
Note: Inches is the default unit of measurement.
Changing the Theme of the Power Painter Environment

Power Painter enables you to customize your environment for seamless integration with your
organization's color scheme.
From the View menu, select Theme to access the available skins to choose from.
The Power Painter environment changes to the theme of the environment that you have
selected.


In this section:
My Reports From Reporting Objects
Reporting Objects
Custom Reports
Domain Builder
User Management Tree
You can access Power Painter in many ways from several WebFOCUS environments, including:
Dashboard:
A My Report created and saved from a Reporting Object.
A Reporting Object in the Domains tree.
A Custom Report.
A banner link or toolbar.
Managed Reporting:
The Domain Builder applet.
The User Management tree.
Note: A Power Painter report can be opened in the Text Editor in the User Management area
of Developer Studio. The actual Power Painter tool is only accessible through Managed
Reporting.
My Reports From Reporting Objects

Analytical Users who have the capability to create My Reports can save the item created
from a Reporting Object for editing or running at a later time. When you select Power Painter
from the pop-up menu, the report you previously saved from the Reporting Object opens in
Power Painter.
200 WebFOCUS
Reporting Objects
Analytical Users can access Power Painter to create a new report based on a Reporting
Object in the Domains tree. From a Reporting Objects folder, click a Reporting Object and
select Power Painter from the pop-up menu, as shown in the following image.

Custom Reports
Analytical Users who have Advanced capability can create new forms through the Power
Painter link, which is a new capability in Dashboard. Previously, users could create individual
reports or graphs but they could not create a new form or link reports and graphs together
as a single entity. The Power Painter link appears as shown in the following image.
202 WebFOCUS
Domain Builder
You can access Power Painter from the Domain Builder in the MR Applet interface for the
purpose of creating Standard Reports. Right-click a Standard Report Group, select New
Standard Report, and then click Power Painter, as shown in the following image.
If you created the report in Power Painter, when you open the report (by double-clicking it or
selecting Open from the right-click pop-up menu) it will open in Power Painter.
User Management Tree

Power Painter can be accessed from the User Management tree in the MR Applet interface
or Developer Studio so that MR Administrators can modify reports created by users. Since
the domain is known, the application opens without the user selecting a Master File.

Configuring the Power Painter License Code
Configuring the Power Painter License Code

How to:
Configure the Power Painter License Code
Administrators can use the Utilities section of the WebFOCUS Administration Console to
configure the Power Painter license code that enables Managed Reporting users to access
Power Painter.
Procedure: How to Configure the Power Painter License Code

1. Click Utilities and then License Management. The License Management window appears.
The value you specified for the Power Painter License Code during installation is displayed
in the Power Painter field. If you did not specify a value during installation, no value
appears in the field, as shown in the following image.
Note: The License Management menu option only appears if you have purchased the
Comprehensive User Services license for Managed Reporting.
2. Type the Power Painter license code in the Power Painter field.
3. Click Save to save your changes.
You must reload your WebFOCUS Web application in order for your changes to take effect.
In addition, users must log out of Managed Reporting and log back in.
204 WebFOCUS
WebFOCUS
6 Creating a Report With Report Assistant
WebFOCUS Report Assistant is an HTML-based graphical tool that enables you to select a data source,
specify any sorting or grouping information, and display the report in your browser or another desktop
application. When you use Report Assistant, WebFOCUS creates a styled report that you can deploy on
the Web without the necessity of learning the complexities of any reporting language. You can then take
full advantage of the capabilities of the reporting language to efficiently display your company's data.
At the end of the chapter, reference topics provide details for every field in every tab and sub-tab.
Note: If you are using the HTML Report Assistant with a Firefox browser, the display may be slightly
different than Internet Explorer. These differences do not effect functionality.
Topics:
Applying Other Report Options
Accessing HTML Report Assistant Creating an HTML Active Report
Layout of Report Assistant Running a Report
Building Your Report With Report Assistant Saving a Report
Selecting Report Fields Editing a Report
Creating Temporary Fields HTML Report Assistant Tab References
Defining Field Characteristics Field Selection Tab
Applying Predefined and Cascading Report Headings Tab
StyleSheets
Selection Criteria Tab
Customizing Headings and Footings
Join Options Tab
Selecting Records for a Report
Report Options Tab
Limiting Data With Filters
Working With Joins

Accessing HTML Report Assistant
Accessing HTML Report Assistant

In this section:
Selecting the Master File in Report Assistant
You can access the HTML Report Assistant through Dashboard, Managed Reporting, or as
a self-service application.
HTML Report Assistant is accessible:
Through Dashboard when creating or editing a My Report.
During the creation of a new Standard Report.
When a report is selected during the creation of a Reporting Object.
When editing a Reporting Object within Domains.
When editing a My Report within Domains.
As a self-service application.
Before Report Assistant opens, you may be prompted to supply a WebFOCUS Reporting
Server ID. For more information, see Signing on to a Server on page 40.
For information about running the HTML Report Assistant outside of Managed Reporting,
see Report Assistant Parameters and Methods in the WebFOCUS Managed Reporting
Developer's Manual.
Selecting the Master File in Report Assistant

To choose the Master File to work with, select the file and click OK. To search for a specific
Master File, use the scroll bar.
206 WebFOCUS
6. Creating a Report With Report Assistant
The following image shows the Browse Data dialog box containing available data descriptions
for selection.
In a self-service version, you can also type the first character of the name of the Master File
anywhere in the list to jump to the name of that Master File.
Layout of Report Assistant

Report Assistant builds your report as you select graphical options by internally constructing
a procedure according to the rules of the WebFOCUS reporting language. For more information
on WebFOCUS syntax, see the Creating Reports With WebFOCUS Language manual.
The following image shows the Report Assistant which is divided into these sections or tabs:
Field selection
Report headings
Selection criteria
Join options
Report options

Layout of Report Assistant
Each tab contains explanatory text designed to guide you on using the specific features
accessed within the tab.
Each tab contains a set of options that enable you to customize both the content and
appearance of your report. To toggle between tabs, select each tab at the top of the window.
Click About under the Help button to display the version and release number of Report
Assistant.
Above the tabs there are buttons for:
Save/Save As
Click Save to save your report.
Click Save As to open the Save New Report dialog box.
Run/Run Deferred
Click Run to run your report. Click Run deferred to run your report at a later time.
208 WebFOCUS
Help/About
Click the icon to access help about the area of the tab in which you are working.
Click About to open a window describing the version of Report Assistant in which you
are working.
Quit
Click to quit the application.
Availability of tabs and buttons depends on the type of user logging on to Dashboard or
WebFOCUS. Self-service users do not have access to the Join tab, or the Run Deferred,
Save, or Save As buttons. If you are creating a report using a Reporting Object as a template,
you do not have access to the Join tab.
Building Your Report With Report Assistant

The most basic report you can construct is a tabular report. Other report types build on the
basic design of the tabular report. A tabular report is a report whose information is arranged
vertically in columns. Internally, WebFOCUS constructs your report with a series of simple
commands that mark the beginning of the request, identify the data source, and mark the
end of the request. Other aspects of the request, such as styling information, are not
necessary to produce a valid report request.
Use the following basic steps in constructing your report:
Design your presentation. How would you like to organize the information in your report?
See Selecting Report Fields on page 210 for more information about establishing basic
organizational criteria for your report.
Identify the information you would like to present. Is it a full data set, or do you want
to construct a subset of some larger set?
See Selecting Records for a Report on page 258 for more information about establishing
selection criteria for your data.
Style your presentation. Do you want to apply customized headings or footings to your
report to make it more dynamic?

Selecting Report Fields

In this section:
Fully Qualified Field Names
Adding Totals and Grand Totals to a Report
Using the Sort By, Sort Across, and Column Phrases to Organize Data
Using Application Objects
Searching Field Lists
Reference:
Notes on the Fields List
Begin building your report in the Field selection tab by selecting fields to include. A field is
the smallest meaningful element of data in a file. WebFOCUS lists available fields in several
formats:
As a list of fields shown in the following image.
210 WebFOCUS
List is the default. To enable List mode, you click the List icon in the Available Fields
box. You can view one or more options by clicking the Options arrow and selecting: Name,
Alias, Title, Format, Description, Segment, and Filename. In List mode, you can sort any
list of variables alphabetically from a to z or from z to a by clicking the attribute, for
example, Name or Alias.
Note: If you choose an option, such as alias, it does not appear with a DEFINE, COMPUTE,
or drill-down.
As a tree separated by segments (the Field Tree) when expanded, as shown in the following
image.

As a tree separated by Dimensions (the Dimension Tree), as shown in the following

image.
Note: If you are viewing a Fields List in the Dimension Tree mode and you create a
recursive join (joining a file to itself), you will not be able to view the Dimensions in the
Fields List after the join is created. This is due to duplication of field names in a recursive
join. If you delete the join, you will be able to view dimensions again.
To enable Tree mode, you click the Tree icon in the Available Fields box. Click the arrow next
to the Tree icon to select the Field Tree or the Dimension Tree. The following options appear
in a pop-up as you mouse over each field: Segment, Name, Alias, Title, Description, and
Format. You can change the field attributes that appear in the tree by selecting from the list
shown when clicking on the tree icon. Select from: Name, Alias, Title or Description.
The Report fields section enables you to use the prefix with the segment name or filename.
You can also show the field's alias instead of the name. You can show the field's title or
description instead of name or alias, but title and description cannot be prefixed with the
segment name or filename. The qualified field identification cannot exceed 66 characters.
Your selections in the Report Fields menu remain in effect for your current browser session
and are automatically saved with your request.
Note: Field names that contain a hyphen "-" cannot be used in the HTML Report Assistant.
212 WebFOCUS
Reference: Notes on the Fields List

Joined fields are differentiated by color when the join is performed outside of the HTML
Report Assistant, for example in the Join of a Reporting Object. The field list shows fields
in different colors based on the Master File they originate from. If you save and then
re-open the HTML Report Assistant, the color assigned to the data may be different than
was previously assigned. Note that if a join is in the Master File, joined fields do not
show in different colors in the fields list.
Key fields are represented with a key icon in all field lists (tree and list displays) in the
HTML Report and Graph Assistant.
The number of fields that are currently displayed shows at the bottom of the fields list.
If a field list contains more than 200 fields, the first 200 fields display initially. Additional
fields are retrieved and displayed when you select the next set of fields.
To select the next set of fields, scroll to the bottom of the field list and select the Next
option that appears. The Next option describes which fields will be returned, for example
in the following image it shows that the next 201-400 fields of 417 will be retrieved:
To go back, scroll to the top of the field list and select the previous set of fields. For
example, the following image shows the Previous option to select the previous 1-200 of
417 fields:
Fully Qualified Field Names

The HTML Report Assistant always saves a procedure with its fully qualified field name. If
you want to view this information, click the Prefix with the segment name and Prefix with the
filename options in the Report Fields section of the Field selection tab.
Example: Viewing Fully Qualified Field Names

Prefix with the segment name and Prefix with the filename are checked. Note that the fields
under Sort by demonstrate the field, segment, and file names.

The following image shows the result after selecting both the prefix with segment name and
prefix with the filename.
If you open a report procedure in the Editor, the fields appear with their qualifiers prefixed
to the field name or alias.
The information for the highlighted field appears. If multiple fields are selected, the
information that appears applies to the last field chosen.
Example: Using Sample Code With Field Qualifiers

The following procedure shows the underlying code generated by Report Assistant. Note that
the fields referenced in the request—SALES, COUNTRY, CAR, and MODE—are prefixed with
file and segment qualifiers.
TABLE FILE CAR
SUM CAR.BODY.SALES
BY CAR.ORIGIN.COUNTRY AS 'COUNTRY'
BY CAR.COMP.CAR AS 'CAR'
BY CAR.CARREC.MODEL AS 'MODEL'
Once you have qualified a field with an alias, segment name, or file name, the field will
appear with these prefixes in any windows in which that field is referenced in a request. You
can vary the qualifiers you select for individual fields.
214 WebFOCUS
Adding Totals and Grand Totals to a Report

You can add grand total values to the end of your report and add a row total column by
checking the appropriate boxes under Report fields as shown in the following image. The
Add grand totals drop-down list provides two options. The Totals option displays grand total
values for each column in your report. The Recompute Totals option recalculates computed
fields before displaying the grand total values. Selecting the Add a row total column check
box adds a column to display the totals for each row.
Using the Sort By, Sort Across, and Column Phrases to Organize Data
How to:
Add Report Fields in Tree or List View
Multi-Select Fields in List View
Select a Report Type
Delete Report Fields
Select fields for a report by highlighting a field in the Available fields list and clicking the
Add icon above the Sort by, Sort across, or Sum/Print field box. From either the List or Tree
view, you can also drag and drop a field on the desired field box, or double-click a field to
add it automatically.
Note: When you double-click fields, numeric fields are added to the Sum/Print field box,
and non-numeric and date fields are added to the Sort by field box. Numeric fields include
decimal, floating point, and other formats, and non-numeric fields are usually in alphanumeric
format.

The following image shows a field selected in each of the data field boxes, the COUNTRY
field in the Sort across data field box, the CAR in the Sort by data field box, and the SALES
field in the Sum/Print display field list.
Specifying sort phrases enables you to organize the presentation of information in a desired
sequence. Adding fields to the Sort across fields box establishes the field you selected as
a column in your report. You can create a matrix report by combining sort and across phrases.
You can include a maximum of five ACROSS fields in each report. If you try to enter a sixth
ACROSS field, the following message appears:
The Maximum number of horizontal dimensions is 5.
Adding fields to the Sort by fields box establishes your field as a sort field in your report.
Sort fields (also known as BY fields) are rows in your report. Any field can be a sort field and
you can include up to 32 sort fields in a report.
The Column data fields box designates the selected field as Sum or Print (Detail). After
selecting the field, you must also decide if you want WebFOCUS to add the values together
(Sum) or print the values individually (Print). WebFOCUS displays the field you select in the
last column of your report and performs the requested operation on the data (Sum or Print).
The default selection is Sum.
You must select at least one field for the Sort or Sum/Print field lists to create a report. For
more information on WebFOCUS syntax used in requesting reports, see the Creating Reports
With WebFOCUS Language manual.
216 WebFOCUS
Procedure: How to Add Report Fields in Tree or List View

1. Click the Tree or List icon.
2. Select a field from the Available fields list and click the Add icon above the Sort by, Sort
across, or Sum/Print field box to add the chosen field.
or
Click and hold the left mouse button, and drag the field to the desired field box.
or
Double-click a:
Numeric field to add it to the Sum/Print field box.
Non-numeric or date field to add it to the Sort by field box.
3. Optionally, you can use shortcut keys to quickly go to one of the field boxes.
In the following table, the first column (Field Box) describes where you go when using
the shortcut keys and the second column (Shortcut Keys) defines the shortcut key
combination.
Field Box Shortcut Keys
Sort across Alt+A
Sort by Alt+S
Column Alt+C
Press Alt+M to go to the Available Fields list, tab to the field and press Enter to add the
chosen field.
Procedure: How to Multi-Select Fields in List View

1. Click the List icon.

2. If the fields are:

Adjacent to each other, click the first field you want to select and hold down the Shift
key while clicking the last field you want to include in the report.
Not adjacent to each other, hold down the Ctrl key while clicking the fields you want
to include in the report.
3. Click the Add icon to the Sort across, Sort by, or Column fields box to add the chosen
fields.
Note: Multi-select of fields is only possible when in List mode. You must drag and drop or
use the Add icon to add individual fields when in Tree mode.
Procedure: How to Select a Report Type

To select a report type, click one of the following buttons in the Sum/Print display field list:
Sum. A summary report shows the summarized values of the selected data source fields.
Print. A detailed report shows all selected records from a data source.
Procedure: How to Delete Report Fields

1. Select the field in the Sort Across, Sort by, or Column fields box.
or
Use the shortcut keys to quickly go to one of the field boxes. In the following table the
first column (Field Box) describes where you go when using the shortcut keys and the
second column (Shortcut Keys) defines the shortcut key combination.
Sort across Alt+A
Sort by Alt+S
Column Alt+C
Use the arrow keys to move to the field you wish to delete.
2. Click the Delete button or press the Delete key.
218 WebFOCUS
Using Application Objects

Application Objects enable you to add fields to your report that have been customized for
your use. For example, if you are creating a sales report, an Application Object may have
been set up for you that enables you to easily add a sort field to your report that lists the
top 5 highest sellers for a certain year.
Note: Application Objects are only available when you are building a report using a Reporting
Object as a template. If you do not see Application Objects, this means they have not been
developed for this Reporting Object.
The following image shows a few sample Application Objects as they appear in the Field
selection tab of the HTML Report Assistant. They are listed by Name and Type.
You add Application Objects to your report from the Field selection tab in the HTML Report
Assistant. When you double-click the object you want to add to your report, it is automatically
added to the appropriate list in the Field selection tab. For example, if it is a BY sort object
it is added to the Sort by list.
Field options are not available for Application Objects. If you open the Field Options pane
for an Application Object, the following message appears: No options are available for
Application Objects. You can use Global Styling for these fields, which is available on the
Report options tab.
Searching Field Lists
How to:
Search a Field List
Reset the Field List After a Search
You can search the field list on the Field selection tab, Report Headings tab, Selection
criteria tab, and Join options tab (for the host Master File) in the HTML Report Assistant and
HTML Graph Assistant. You can search by the following Master File attributes: Name, Alias,
Title, Format, Description, Segment, and Filename.

When you apply a search to a field list, your search results appear in all other areas of the
tool, until you reset the field list. Your search results are saved when you exit the tool, so
when you open the procedure again, you only see the results of your search in the field list.
Note:
The field list that appears for conditional styling is already restricted to the fields selected
for the report and is not further restricted by the search string.
Search options are available when viewing fields in List mode. It is not available when
viewing fields in Tree mode.
Procedure: How to Search a Field List

1. In the Field selection tab, Headings tab, or Selection criteria tab in the HTML Report
Assistant or HTML Graph Assistant, click Show - Field list searching.
If you are searching for a field name from the Join options tab, click the Field list searching
icon.
The Field list searching dialog box opens.
The following image shows the Field list searching dialog box. It contains a drop-down
list for what pattern you want to search by, a text box, and a submit button.
2. Select the Master File attribute for which you want to search. The following table lists
the pattern attributes and a description of each.
Attribute Description DSPFFD

Equivalent
Filename Name of the data source. File
Name Name of the field. Field
Alias Alias for the field. Alternative Name
Title Display title for the field, as defined in Column Heading

the Master File.
220 WebFOCUS
Attribute Description DSPFFD

Equivalent
Format Field format, for example A4. Data Type
Description Field description, as defined in the N/A

Master File.
Segment A segment of fields in the Master File. N/A
3. Type your search string. You can use an asterisk (*) as a wildcard. For example, type
c* to find all fields that begin with the letter "c". The character string is not case
sensitive.
4. Click the right arrow and results appear in the field list.
Procedure: How to Reset the Field List After a Search

1. In the Field selection tab, Headings tab, or Selection criteria tab in the HTML Report
Assistant or HTML Graph Assistant, click Show - Field list searching.
If you are searching for a field name from the Join options tab, click the Field list searching
icon.
The Field list searching dialog box opens.
2. Enter a blank value (space bar) or an asterisk (*) and click the arrow .
The field list is reset to the default display, which is to show all fields.

Creating Temporary Fields

In this section:
Examples of Creating A Virtual Field and Creating a Calculated Value
Changing a Field Format
Using Calculated Values From the Master File
How to:
Create a Temporary Field
Edit a Temporary Field
Delete a Temporary Field
A temporary field is a field whose value is not stored in the data source, but can be calculated
from the data that is there, or assigned an absolute value. When you create a temporary
field, you determine its value by writing an expression. You can combine fields, constants,
and operators in an expression to produce a single value. For example, if your data contains
salary and deduction amounts, you can calculate the ratio of deductions to salaries using
the following expression: deduction / salary.
You can specify the expression yourself, or you can use one of the many supplied functions
that perform specific calculations or manipulations. In addition, you can use expressions
and functions as building blocks for more complex expressions, as well as use one temporary
field to evaluate another.
There are two types of temporary fields—a virtual field and a calculated value—which differ
in how they are evaluated:
A virtual field (Define) is evaluated as each record that meets the selection criteria is
retrieved from the data source. The result of the expression is treated as though it were
a real field stored in the data source.
A calculated value (Compute) is evaluated after all the data that meets the selection
criteria is retrieved, sorted, and summed. Therefore, the calculation is performed using
the aggregated values of the fields.
You can create temporary fields from the Field selection tab.
222 WebFOCUS
Procedure: How to Create a Temporary Field

1. On the Field selection tab, click one of the following:
New define field icon (located above the fields list)
New computed field icon (located with the Sum/Print fields)

The Field Creator dialog box opens.
2. Enter the name for the field in the Field box. Field names for temporary fields cannot
exceed 66 characters.
3. Enter the format for the field in the Format box. Click the Format button for assistance
in selecting a format. See Change Format Dialog Box on page 310.
4. Click in the expression box to enter an expression.
If you are familiar with coding Compute and Define expressions, you can type the
expression in the text box. Otherwise, you can use the keypad to assist you in creating
the expression. To use the keypad:
a. Click the Tree or List button to open the fields list, or click the Functions button to
open the WebFOCUS functions list.
The functions list displays predefined functions grouped into categories that include
Character, Data Source and Decoding, Date and Time, Format Conversion, Numeric,
and System. If you hover your cursor over a function, a brief description appears.
b. Double-click a field or function to add it to the expression box.

c. If you select one or more fields, complete the expression by typing directly in the
expression box or using the Field Creator keypad. See Field Selection Tab: Field
Creator Dialog Box on page 306 for details on keypad operations.
If you select a function, replace each of the function’s arguments with the desired
value or field name. Note that each function is a program that returns a value.
See the Using Functions manual for complete information on functions.
5. Click OK. New calculated values (Compute) are added to your report's column (Sum/Print)
list. New virtual (Define) fields are added to the fields list, where you can select them
as if they were real fields.
Note: When you create a defined field in Report Assistant, if you want that field value to be
blank, the blank must be contained in quotation marks.

Procedure: How to Edit a Temporary Field

1. Select the temporary field.
2. Click the down arrow next to the Define icon and select Edit define field.
or
Above the Sum/Print display field list, click the Edit computed field menu item.
3. Make your desired edits and click OK.
Procedure: How to Delete a Temporary Field

Select a field in the Sum/Print display field list and click the Delete icon (or press the Delete
key).
or
Perform the following steps:
1. Select a virtual field in the Available fields box.
2. Click the down arrow next to the Define icon.
3. Click Delete define field.
Examples of Creating A Virtual Field and Creating a Calculated Value

The following are examples of creating a virtual field and creating a calculated value.
224 WebFOCUS
Example: Creating a Virtual (Defined) Field Using a Function

The following image shows the Define Field Creator dialog box with a defined field that uses
a function (ARGLEN). This field uses the EMPLOYEE sample data source.
Example: Creating a Calculated (Computed) Value

The following image shows a computed field created using the SALES sample data source.
The expression creates the computed field REVENUE based on the product of the existing
fields UNIT_SOLD and RETAIL_PRICE.

Changing a Field Format
How to:
Assign an Alphanumeric Format
Assign a Numeric Format
Assign a Date Format
Add a Percent Sign to a Numeric Field
The following image shows the Change Format Dialog box, which you use to assign a format
to a virtual or column field. Refer to the following procedures for the step-by-step instructions.
226 WebFOCUS
Procedure: How to Assign an Alphanumeric Format

1. Select the virtual or column field.
or
Click the New computed field icon.
3. Click Format. The Change Format dialog box opens.

4. Select the Alphanumeric option button in the Format Types option button group.
5. To assign a different length, specify a number between 1 and 256 in the Length spin
box.
6. Click OK twice to close the Change Format dialog box and return to the Field selection
window. The new format appears in the Format column in the Available fields list.
Procedure: How to Assign a Numeric Format

or

4. Select one of the following option buttons in the Format Types option button group:
Floating Point (default length 7.2)
Integer (default length 5)
Decimal (default length 12.2)
Packed (default length 12.2)
If the selected field matches the selected format type, its current length appears in the
Length spin box. Otherwise, the default length appears in the Length spin box. The
Decimal spin box shows the number of decimal places for Floating Point, Decimal, and
Packed.
5. To assign a different length, specify numbers in the Length spin box for format types as
follows: 1- 9 for Floating Point, 1- 11 for Integer, 1- 20 for Decimal, and 1- 33 for Packed.

6. To assign a different number of decimal places for Floating Point, Decimal, or Packed,
specify the number in the Decimal spin box.
Procedure: How to Assign a Date Format

or

4. Select the Date option button in the Format Types option button group. The default date
display format is MDY.
5. To assign a different date display format, click the down arrow to the right of the Date
Format list box.
6. Choose a date format.
Procedure: How to Add a Percent Sign to a Numeric Field

You can add a percent sign to the end of a numeric value (Decimal, Integer, Floating Point
format types). This numeric display option includes a percent sign along with the numeric
data, but does not calculate the percent.
or

4. Click the down arrow in the Select options list box to choose Percent sign - %.
228 WebFOCUS
Example: Using the Percent Sign Edit Option

The following table consists of a Format column for each numeric format, a Data column for
its actual data value, and a Display column for how it appears.
Format Data Display
I2% 21 21%
D7% 97 97%
F3.2% 48 48.00%

Using Calculated Values From the Master File
Reference:
Support for Calculated Values From the Master File
Calculated Value Dependencies
In the HTML Report and Graph Assistants, calculated values (COMPUTEs) that exist in the
Master File appear in the fields list with all other temporary virtual fields and calculated
values. The following image shows the fields list in the HTML Report Assistant with a
calculated value from the Master File (PROFIT).
Calculated values from the Master File are available in all fields lists in the HTML Report
and Graph Assistant except for the fields lists that appear for Define fields and Joins.
Reference: Support for Calculated Values From the Master File

You can use a calculated value from the Master File:
As a Sum/Print field.
As a Sort by field. You can also use a temporary calculated value as a Sort by field.
230 WebFOCUS
Note: The By sort is automatically converted to a Total field since calculated values are
calculated after data has been sorted and aggregated, but before the report is displayed.
Since sorting (BY) has already been done, the phrase BY TOTAL is used to indicate that
this sort is performed after any BY sorting. This applies to calculated values from the
Master File and temporary calculated values.
For conditional styling.
In a temporary calculated value.
In a page heading or page footing (Report headings tab).
In selection criteria statements. You can also use a temporary calculated value in selection
criteria.
Note: When you use calculated values for selection criteria, the Where is automatically
converted to Where Total. This occurs because the Where Total is added after the data
is retrieved and sorted, but before the report is finalized. This applies to selection criteria
created with calculated values from the Master File and temporary calculated values.
Calculated fields from the Master File are not supported:
As Across sort fields.
As the X-axis in a graph. This means that you will not be able to add a calculated value
to the Field value plotted on X axis or Create a separate graph for each value of this field
fields on the Field selection tab of the HTML Graph Assistant.
In a Join statement or Defined field.
With prefix operators, for example MAX.
Reference: Calculated Value Dependencies

These dependencies apply to calculated values from the Master File and to temporary
calculated values.
When you include a calculated value in selection criteria or in a page heading/footing, the
field must exist in the report as either a By sort field or a Sum/Print field. If you create a
selection criteria statement with a calculated value or add a calculated value to a page
heading/footing and the field does not already exist in the report, then it is automatically
added to the Sum/Print display field list. The Make this field invisible option is automatically
selected in the Field options dialog box so that the calculated value does not appear in the
output. When this occurs, a message appears stating:
"The field has been added to the list of fields in the report."

Note: You do not see this message for temporary calculated values (those that do not come
from the Master File) that are added to a page heading/footing since these already appear
in the Report headings fields list.
You can change the attributes of the calculated value from the Field options dialog box on
the Field selection tab. If you attempt to delete the calculated value from the Sum/Print
display list and the same field exists in either selection criteria or in a page heading/footing,
you receive a one of the following messages:
or
You must remove the field from the page heading/footing or selection criteria before you
can remove it from the Sum/Print display list.
232 WebFOCUS
Defining Field Characteristics

In this section:
Editing a Field Format
Styling Fields
Drilling Down to New Procedures
End User Drill-down Capability
Styling Specified Field Values
Creating Parameters
Aggregating and Sorting Fields
Displaying Subtotals and Other Summary Values Using Prefix Operators
How to:
Change the Field's Display Title
Suppress the Display of a Field
Include References to Missing Instances in Reports: The ALL. Prefix
Arrange Fields in Ascending or Descending Order
Include Page Breaks
Include Subtotals
Include Display Titles for Subtotals
Include Subheads/Subfoots for Sort Fields
To choose field options, select the field in the Sort across, Sort by, or Column (Sum/Print)
box in the Field selection tab. Click Show field options to style each field in your report.

The following table lists and describes the available Field options in the Display, Sorting,
Ranking, Subhead, and Subfoot tabs that appear for each selected field type. The ability to
create a title in the Title tab is available for all field types. If a Field option tab is not available
for a selected field type, "n/a" appears in the table.
Field Display Sorting Ranking Subhead &

Type Subfoot
Sort Make this field invisible Ascending/ n/a n/a

across check box Descending
options
Font button that opens
styles dialog Total check box
Drill down button that
opens Drill down dialog
Sort by Make this field invisible Ascending/ Add Ranking Select Font
check box Descending column type, size,
options check box and style.
(activates
styles dialog Total check box Select text
the 'Limit
alignment.
Conditional styling button Create a page the number
that opens conditional break check box of ranked Set text and
styling dialog (activates the 'And values to' background
reset page number check box, colors.
to 1' check box) and the Font
button that
Separate with
Include missing opens styles
underline check
instances check box dialog)
box
Subtotal numeric
sum/print fields
check box
(activates the
Subtotal tab, and
the 'And higher
level sort fields'
and 'Recalculate
computed fields
with subtotals'
check boxes)
234 WebFOCUS
Field Display Sorting Ranking Subhead &

Type Subfoot
Column Make this field invisible n/a n/a n/a

(Sum/ check box
Print)
styles dialog
Conditional styling button
that opens conditional
styling dialog
Format in report as
button opens change
format dialog
'Calculated as' drop-
down list adds prefix to
column
Include missing
instances check box
You can use this table to determine which of the following options are available for a selected
field in the Field selection tab:
Suppress the display of a field (make a field invisible).
Apply font options with the styles dialog box.
Apply conditional styling with the conditional styling dialog box.
Create drill down parameters with the Drill down dialog box.
Select format options in the report with the change format dialog box.
Specify how the field will be calculated by choosing an option from a drop-down list box.
Include references to missing instances in reports.
Specify field display titles, subheads, subfoots, and subtotals.
Specify ascending or descending field sorting.
Include the Sort by options for page breaks.

Include the Sort by options for subtotals, sub-totals, and recalculated subtotals.
Note:
Subtotal numeric sum/print fields is not checked by default. If checked, numeric values
are summed and a subtotal is displayed when the selected Sort by field value changes.
If you select And higher level sort fields, SUB-TOTAL syntax is used to display subtotals
for numeric values when the selected Sort by field value changes and when any higher-level
Sort by field value changes.
If you are using computed fields, select Recalculate computed fields using subtotal values.
Procedure: How to Change the Field's Display Title

1. Select the field whose title you want to change.
2. If hidden, click Show report field options for the selected field.
3. Click the Title tab.
4. Enter the title you want to display in the report output.
Note: When using HTML output, leading spaces in the field title do not display.
Procedure: How to Suppress the Display of a Field

The Field selections tab enables you to conceal the data of a selected field in a report. To
suppress the display of a field:
2. Check the Make this field invisible check box.
Procedure: How to Include References to Missing Instances in Reports: The ALL. Prefix
In a report, you can include parent segment instances that lack descendants by attaching
the ALL. prefix to one or more column fields, as follows:
2. Check the Include missing instances check box.
Note:
The ALL. prefix and an additional prefix operator from the Column Options drop-down list
may be applied to the same field.
The ALL. prefix can be applied to multiple fields.
The ALL. prefix can be applied to both column fields and sort fields.
236 WebFOCUS
Procedure: How to Arrange Fields in Ascending or Descending Order

To list sort field data in the report from greatest to smallest (descending) or from smallest
to greatest (ascending):
2. Select the Sorting tab.
3. Select the Ascending or Descending option button.
4. Click Save.
If you have multiple sort fields, you can specify a different order for each one.
Procedure: How to Include Page Breaks

To start a new report page when the value of a selected sort field changes:
3. Check the Create a page break check box.
4. Click Save.
Procedure: How to Include Subtotals

To display a subtotal for numeric data when a selected sort field changes:
3. Check the Subtotal numeric sum/print fields check box.
Subtotals are activated for this report and the Subtotal tab appears to the right of the
Subfoot tab. Note that the default *TOTAL title is displayed next to each subtotal value.
For more information, see How to Include Display Titles for Subtotals on page 238.
Additionally, the following options are activated:
And subtotal all higher level sort fields. Displays subtotals for numeric values when
the Sort by field value changes and when any higher-level Sort by field value changes.
Recalculate computed fields with subtotal values.

4. Optionally, select the Subtotal tab to:

Modify the default subtotal title text in the Current Subtotal Text field.
Suppress subtotals for sort fields that have only a single value.
Apply subtotals to a subset of the numeric fields in a report.
Apply prefix operators, which enables you to display the sum, average, average
square, count, first in group, last in group, minimum, or maximum value for any or
all of the numeric fields, including Computes, in a report.
For more information, see Displaying Subtotals and Other Summary Values Using Prefix
Operators on page 251.
5. Click Save.
Procedure: How to Include Display Titles for Subtotals

When including subtotals, you can also specify display titles for them. These titles appear
next to each subtotal in the report. The default subtotal display title is *TOTAL. To edit the
default display title:
2. Click the Sorting tab.
3. Check the Subtotal numeric sum/print fields check box.
The Subtotal tab appears to the right of the Subfoot tab.
4. Click the Subtotal tab.

5. Type the desired display title in the Current Subtotal Text field in the Subtotal tab.
6. Click Save.
Note: If the Subtotal numeric sum/print fields check box is not selected, subtotals are not
displayed in the report.
Procedure: How to Include Subheads/Subfoots for Sort Fields

The Fields Options tab enables you to include subheads (which appear above) and subfoots
(which appear below) for each of the sort field's records in the report.
2. Click the Subhead or Subfoot tab.
3. Click in the text box or press Alt+T to enter a subhead or subfoot title.
4. Style the subhead/subfoot using the formatting toolbar.
238 WebFOCUS
5. Click Save.
Editing a Field Format
How to:
Change the Field Format for a Column Field
Use the report field options section on the Field selection tab to change the field format for
the Column field. The following image shows the Field selection tab with a field selected
and the Field Options pane open.

Procedure: How to Change the Field Format for a Column Field

1. If hidden, click Show report field options.
2. Select a field in the Sum/Print display field list.
3. Click the browse (...) button next to the Format in report as field to open the Change
Format dialog box.
Note: You can also edit the format by typing directly in the Format in report as field.
This is not recommended unless you know the exact format because validation is not
performed until run time.
4. Select a Format type and the desired options for the field, then click OK.
For more information, see Changing a Field Format on page 226.
Styling Fields
How to:
Style Sort by, Sort Across, or Column Fields
Use the styling options on the Field selection tab to style report fields.
Procedure: How to Style Sort by, Sort Across, or Column Fields

1. If hidden, click Show report field options.
2. Select a field and click the Display tab in the report field options section.
240 WebFOCUS
The following image shows the Display tab of the Field Options pane.
3. Click the Font button.

4. Select the desired styling options from the Font, Style, and Size boxes.
5. In the Set Styles for box, select the Title & Data, Title Only, or the Data Only option
button, depending on the report element you wish to style.
Note: If you select a font property (font, style, size, text color, background color, or
justification) and select the Title & Data option button, the changes will be reflected in
both the Title Style and Data Style boxes.

However, if you then select a different parameter for a given property using the Title Only
option button, the Title Style will change while the Data Style will not reflect this change.
To change the Data Style, you must click the Data Only option button and then make
your change. Likewise, if you select the Data Only option button and make a change,
this change will not be reflected in the Title Style. You must click the Title Only option
button to make your change.
6. Choose a text color from the list box.

7. Choose a background color from the list box.
8. Choose a justification (left, center, or right) from the list box.
9. Click OK.
Note: Clicking Reset returns the styling options to the following default settings:
Font: Times New Roman
Style: Normal
Size: 13
Text Color: Black
Background Color: Transparent
Justification: Left
Drilling Down to New Procedures

When you click Drill Down in the report fields options section on the Field selection tab, the
No action option button is the default. When you select Execute Procedure, a list of
procedures contained within the Standard Reports folder displays. You can also select
procedures from different domains. Analytical users creating Custom Reports also see a list
of My Reports to select from.
242 WebFOCUS
The following image shows the drill down dialog box.
For more information, see Drill Down Dialog Box on page 303.
End User Drill-down Capability

Along with Managed Reporting Administrators and Developers, end users can drill down to
Standard Reports from within Reporting Objects and My Reports. End users can also drill
down from My Reports to My Reports. However, the following limitations apply to the end
user drill-down capability:
End users can create drill-downs to Standard Reports from Reporting Objects.
End users can run or delete drill-downs created by Administrators or Developers to
Standard Reports from My Reports. Delete does not alter the Reporting Object, since it
only applies to ad hoc requests.
Note: The default functionality exists for all users.

Styling Specified Field Values
How to:
Style Records Based on Specified Field Values
Use the Conditional Styling dialog box to style records based on specified field values.
Conditional styling, also referred to as stoplighting, enables you to define conditions that
determine when to apply particular fonts, point size, text style, foreground and background
color, and drill-down procedures to your report's data when the report is run.
You can style specified values for one or several column and sort fields. However, you cannot
style values for sort across fields.
Procedure: How to Style Records Based on Specified Field Values

1. In the HTML Report or Graph Assistant, if hidden, click Graph Field Options.
2. Click the Display tab in the report field options section.
3. Click the Conditional styling button.
The Conditional Styling dialog box opens.
4. Click the Add button and create a new condition.
244 WebFOCUS
The following image shows the edit condition dialog box that opens where you begin to
set the conditional styling.
5. Provide a meaningful and unique file name in the Condition input box.
6. Select a field name from the Field list box and a relation from the Relations list box.
7. To specify a value that completes the relation, first select one of the following in the
Compare Type option button group:
Value, to compare the selected report field to a data source value or literal value.
Another Field, to compare the selected report field to the value of another field. The
list of report fields appears in the possible values area. Select one of the report
fields to compare to.
8. If you select Value under Compare Type, perform one of the following to complete the
relation:
Click Values to display existing data source values in the Value list box, and select
a value.
Type a literal value in the Value input box.
9. Click OK.
You return to the Conditional Styling dialog box.

Creating Parameters
How to:
Create a Parameter in the Main and Drill Down Procedures
Parameters enable you to specify criteria and conditions for drill-down reports. By defining
parameters, you can control the amount and type of information to retrieve when you click
a hotspot.
Procedure: How to Create a Parameter in the Main and Drill Down Procedures
1. Select the Selection criteria tab.
2. Create an expression (WHERE statement) that defines a parameter. For more information,
see Creating a Where or Where Total Statement on page 258.
3. If hidden, click the Show report field options section.
4. Select the field that you want to drill down on.
5. Click Drill Down. The WebFOCUS Drill Down Dialog opens.
6. Click Execute Procedure (FOCEXEC) or Execute URL.
246 WebFOCUS
The following image shows the Execute Procedure option button selected and the location
and procedure name of the drill-down report (app/css.fex) in the Execute procedure
field.
7. Click Add. The Drill Down Parameter Dialog box opens where you create the drill down
parameter.

The following image shows the Drill Down Parameter dialog box, which contains a text
box where you enter the name of the parameter, and option buttons to select the
parameter as a field or a constant value.
8. Enter the name of the parameter you created in the drill down procedure in the Parameter
Name text box, for example, Classes.
Note: When passing parameters to a drill-down procedure, you must use local amper
variables (&variables). Global amper variables (&&variables) cannot be used as drill-
down parameters. Also, when entering your parameter name it is not necessary to type
an ampersand (&) before the parameter name. This will create a global amper variable
that cannot be used as a drill-down parameter.
9. When you pass the parameter to the drill down procedure, you must set a value for it
in the Drill Down Parameter dialog box. If you select:
Field. The parameter will be set to the corresponding value of the object the user
drills down on in the specified field.
Constant value. The parameter is set to the specified value.
Note: If the drill-down report contains a -DEFAULTS statement that sets a default value
to the same amper variable passed from the main report, the amper variable value
passed down overwrites the -DEFAULTS statement in the target procedure.
10. Once a value has been supplied, click OK to return to the Drill Down Dialog box.
248 WebFOCUS
The parameter is added to the With Parameters list box as shown in the following image.
Aggregating and Sorting Fields
How to:
Rank Data With the Total Sort Option
You can apply aggregation and sorting simultaneously to numeric columns in your report in
one pass of the data using the Total sort option. The Total option is available for Sort by
and Sort across fields. For the Total sort option to work correctly, you must have an
aggregating display field, such as Sum, in the report. A non-aggregating display field, such
as Print, simply retrieves the data without aggregating it.
Note: When you add a computed field to the Sort by field, it is automatically given the Total
property.

The following image shows the PRICE field with the Total option selected in the Field options.
Procedure: How to Rank Data With the Total Sort Option

To rank report data using the Total option on the Sorting tab, perform the following steps:
1. Add multiple fields to the Sort by data field box, and highlight the Sort by field you want
to rank.
2. Add any other desired fields to the Sum/Print field box.
3. If hidden, click Show field options for the selected field.
4. Click the Sorting tab.
5. Select the Total check box.
Tip: Select the Descending option to make the largest number the first row of ranked
data in the report. The default sorting option is Ascending, which ranks the smallest
number first.
6. Click the Ranking tab.

7. Select the Adding Ranking column check box.
Optionally, in the text box, type a custom title for the ranking column. The default title
is RANK.
250 WebFOCUS
8. Run the report.

Note: For the Total sort option to work correctly, you must have an aggregating (numeric)
display field, such as Sum.
Displaying Subtotals and Other Summary Values Using Prefix Operators
How to:
Display Subtotals and Other Summary Values Using Prefix Operators
The Subtotal tab enables you to display subtotals, and other summary values using prefix
operators, for any or all of the numeric fields, including computed fields, for a selected Sort
by field in a report query. You can choose to display subtotals for all numeric fields whenever
a selected Sort by field value changes, or you can select to display subtotal and other
summary values for a subset of the numeric fields.
In the Subtotal tab, as shown in the following image, you can customize the title text used
to display subtotals and other summary values, and suppress subtotals for sort fields that
have only a single value, in addition to working with prefix operators.
Procedure: How to Display Subtotals and Other Summary Values Using Prefix Operators
To access the Subtotal tab to apply subtotals, prefix operators, and modify other subtotal
text and settings, perform the following steps:
3. Select the Subtotal numeric sum/print fields check box.
The Subtotal tab appears to the right of the Subfoot tab.

4. Select the Subtotal tab.

5. Numeric field values are summed and displayed as subtotals in the report by default.
To display summary values other than the default subtotals, select prefix operators
using the drop-down lists in the Prefix area that are adjacent to each of the selections
in the Columns area.
Note that the Sum prefix produces the same subtotal results as not selecting a prefix
operator.
All of the available prefix operators are listed and described in the following table:
Prefix Description Displayed in Prefix List

SUM. Compute the sum of values Sum
ASQ. Compute the average sum of squares Average Square
AVE. Compute the average value Average
CNT. Count the items Count
FST. Select the first value only Show first in group
LST. Select the last value only Show last in group
MAX. Select the maximum value only Maximum
MIN. Select the minimum value only Minimum
6. To display all numeric field values as subtotals or other summary values in the report,
select the Apply totals to all columns check box in the Columns area.
7. To display subtotals or other summary values for a subset of the numeric fields in the
report, make sure the Apply totals to all columns check box is de-selected, then select
check boxes for the individual numeric fields in the Columns area of the Subtotal tab.
When Apply totals to all columns is selected, options for all individual fields in the Columns
area are inactive by default.
8. To modify the default subtotal title, which is set to *TOTAL, type the desired text you
want to display as the title for all subtotals and any other selected summary values in
the Current Subtotal Text field.
9. To hide subtotals for sort fields that have only a single value, select the Suppress for
single lines check box.
10. Click Save to save your settings and selections in the report query in which you are
working.
252 WebFOCUS
Applying Predefined and Cascading StyleSheets

You can select a predefined StyleSheet from Report Assistant, instead of applying custom
styling. A predefined StyleSheet is a StyleSheet that a WebFOCUS Administrator creates or
imports and stores in a domain. Any user who then accesses Report Assistant from the
domain can apply the predefined StyleSheet to their report.
When a new procedure is created, Report Assistant sets a default StyleSheet. You can apply
a different StyleSheet to a report using the StyleSheet drop-down menus in the Global report
styling area of the Report options tab.
The following image shows the report styling options in the Report options tab.
The Global report styling section includes the Apply an existing WebFOCUS Style Sheet and
Apply an existing Cascading Style Sheet list boxes. To apply a StyleSheet to a report, select
a StyleSheet from the appropriate list box. The list box for WebFOCUS StyleSheets includes
all StyleSheet files stored in the domain.

When a predefined StyleSheet is applied to a report, Report Assistant disables all

customizable styling options and does not apply any previous styling selections for the entire
report. These settings are not lost. If you decide not to apply a predefined StyleSheet, Report
Assistant restores the report's original styling settings and enables you to further customize
a report's styling.
Note: When applying a StyleSheet, if you select the Format HTML Output check box, use
only the Full or Paged setting. The Fixed setting is not supported with StyleSheets.

How to:
Add and Align a Heading in a Report
Add and Align a Footing in a Report
Include a Field in a Heading or Footing
Style a Heading or Footing
Use the Report headings tab to specify the content, style, and placement of headings and
footings in your report. Headings and footings can be customized only if a StyleSheet has
not been applied. Since Report Assistant applies a StyleSheet by default, you must set the
StyleSheet in the Report Options tab to None.
254 WebFOCUS
The following image shows the Report headings tab opened with a formatting tool bar, the
Page heading and the Page footing text boxes.
Note: Dragging and dropping items, including images, is not supported in the Report
Assistant.
Procedure: How to Add and Align a Heading in a Report

1. In the Report headings tab, click in the text box or press Alt+H to enter a page heading
title.
2. Click the Center icon to center the heading in the report. The heading is left-aligned by
default.
Procedure: How to Add and Align a Footing in a Report

1. In the Report headings tab, click in the text box or press Alt+F to enter a page footing
title.
2. Click the Center icon to center the footing on the report. The footing is left-aligned by
default.

3. Click the Bottom icon to place the footing at the bottom of the report.
Procedure: How to Include a Field in a Heading or Footing

You can include a specified field in a heading or footing. When you run the report, the data
value for the field will be included in the heading or footing.
1. Click the Show fields list icon to the left of the Report headings box to display the Available
Fields window.
2. Select a field from the Available Fields window and drag the field to the Page heading
or Page footing box.
or
Click and hold the left mouse button, and drag the field to the fields box you chose.
or
Use the shortcut keys to quickly go to one of the field boxes.
In the following table, the first column (Field Box) describes where you go when you use
the shortcut key combination described in the second column (Shortcut Keys).
Page Heading Alt+H
Page Footing Alt+F
Press Alt+M to go to the Available Fields window, tab to the field and press Enter to add
the chosen field in the page heading or footing text box.
Note:
You can add more than one field name to either the Page heading or Page footing box
by selecting one field at a time.
The report's heading or footing will contain the first value retrieved for the field in the
heading or footing.
Procedure: How to Style a Heading or Footing

To style a heading or footing:
1. Select the field you want to style in the Page heading or the Page footing text box in the
Report headings tab.
256 WebFOCUS
2. Click the Cut, Copy, Paste, Select all, and Remove formatting icons to format the text of
your choice.
3. Click the appropriate icons to bold, italicize, or underline your text.
4. Click the icons for left, center, or right alignment to specify justification.
5. Click the Bottom icon to move your text to the bottom of the report.
6. Click the Font list box or press Alt+N to specify your selections.
Note: When selecting a font, be sure to click in the text box before you select the font
name, otherwise the font may return to the original font selection.
7. Click the Font Size list box or press Alt+S to specify your selections.
8. Click the Text Color icon or press Alt+C and Enter to open the Color palette window.
Choose a color from the color list.
9. Click the Background Color icon or press Alt+B and Enter to open the Color palette
window. Choose a color from the color list.
10. Click Save or Save As to save your settings.
Note: The default styling settings are as follows:
Size: 13 (If you change the font size of your heading, which is a FOCUS title, the code
may not properly reflect the font size you specified when you open the procedure in a
text editor. This does not affect functionality. You can edit the procedure manually to
correct the size.)
Style: Normal
Text Color: Black
Justify: Left


In this section:
Creating a Where or Where Total Statement
Setting Parameter Properties
Combining Expressions
Grouping Expressions Together With Parentheses
When generating a report and specifying which fields to display, you may not want to show
every instance of a field. By including selection criteria, you can display only those field
values that meet your needs. In effect, you can select a subset of the data, which you can
easily redefine each time you issue the report request.
When developing a report request, you can define criteria to select records based on:
The values of an individual field (using a Where statement).
The aggregate value of a field, for example, the sum or average of a field's values (using
a WHERE TOTAL statement).
The Selection criteria tab enables you to create Where or Where Total statements for record
selection.
How to:
Select Records Based on Values, Parameters, Fields, or a Constant
Create a Where Statement Using Date and Time Values
Where and Where Total statements enable you to display only those records that pass your
selection criteria. These statements select the data source records to be included in a
report. The data is evaluated according to the selection criteria before it is retrieved from
the data source. Use the Selection criteria tab to create a new Where or Where Total
statement.
Note: In the Report Assistant, when you create a Where statement in the Selection criteria
tab for a range of dates using FROM - TO, you will not be alerted if the TO field is
chronologically before the FROM field. For example, if you enter something like "from
12/31/05 to 1/1/05", there will be no records in the resulting report.
258 WebFOCUS
Procedure: How to Select Records Based on Values, Parameters, Fields, or a Constant

1. In the Report Assistant, click the Selection criteria tab.
2. Select a field from the Available Fields window and drag the field to the Screening
conditions pane.
or
the chosen field.
The field name and EQUAL to and Select values appear in the Screening conditions
pane.
3. Select WHERE or WHERE TOTAL.

4. Select an operator from the drop-down list (for example, EQUAL to) in the right pane.
5. Click Select values to complete the expression.
6. Select one of the following compare type option buttons:
Constant. Enter a value that will serve as a constant (a value that will not change).
For example, enter vehicle.
After you click OK, the constant, vehicle, appears in the WHERE statement which
reads BODYTYPE EQUAL to vehicle.

Parameter. Enter the name of the variable. For example, moped as shown in the
following image with the Parameter option button selected and the variable name
entered as moped.
You can set parameter properties, for details see Setting Parameter Properties on
page 263.
After you click OK, the parameter, &moped, appears in the WHERE statement which
reads BODYTYPE EQUAL to &moped.
Note: The ampersand is automatically added by WebFOCUS.

Fields. Select a field from the list.
After you click OK, the field BHP appears in the Where statement which reads
CAR.COMP.CAR EQUAL to CAR.SPECS.BHP.
Values. Select a value for the field you initially chose (in this case, car).
260 WebFOCUS
After you click OK, the value, Audi, appears in the Where statement which reads
CAR.COMP.CAR EQUAL to AUDI.
Procedure: How to Create a Where Statement Using Date and Time Values
In the Report Assistant,
1. Click the Selection criteria tab.
conditions pane.
or
the chosen field.
3. Click EQUAL to in the right pane to display a list of operators. Click the operator of your
choice.
5. Click Field to access date and time values for that field. For example, EYEAR.
6. Click Values and click the value of your choice. For example, 1989/01/18.
After you click OK, the value, 1989/01/18, appears in the WHERE statement which
reads START_DATE EQUAL to 19890118.
How to:
data.



262 WebFOCUS

9. Click OK.
11. Click OK.
existing values.
How to:
Set Parameter Properties
Reference:
Supported Operators for the Variable Editor
When you create parameters for Selection Criteria (WHERE statements) you can set the
properties for the parameter. For example, you can create a dynamic or static list of values
to choose from at run time.
Procedure: How to Set Parameter Properties

1. In the Report Assistant, click the Selection criteria tab.
2. Create a WHERE or WHERE TOTAL expression.
3. Select an operator. Some operators are not supported with the Variable Editor, see
Supported Operators for the Variable Editor on page 264 for details.
5. Select the Parameter option.

6. Click the Auto Prompt button.

The Parameter Properties dialog box opens.
7. Verify the Name and Description fields, which are automatically populated based on the
field you selected for the WHERE clause. You can edit the populated values as needed.
Note:
If the Description is a single word and the parameter is for a numeric field, you must
add a space at the end of the description to avoid a parsing error.
The Description cannot contain a period (.) because a period is the delimiter to specify
the beginning and end of the description value.
8. Choose the Selection type, Dynamic or Static.

The Dynamic option is selected by default.
Optionally, choose the Select multiple values at runtime check box to provide multiple
values to the report from the auto prompt page at run time.
9. Set the parameter values.

For the Dynamic selection type, the Data Source and Field values are selected by
default based on the field you are screening on and can be changed as needed.
If you want to see the fully qualified Field name, select the Display fully qualified field
name check box. This setting is for display purposes only and is not preserved.
Note: When working with a Reporting Object, you can select only fields from data
For the Static selection type, select the Constant or Show field values option. For
Constant, enter one or more values. For Show field values, all of the values for the
selected field appear in the list box. Move the values you want from the selection
list to the Prompt values list.
10. Click OK to exit the Parameter Properties dialog box.
Reference: Supported Operators for the Variable Editor
Operator Enabled for the Variable editor?
Equal to Yes
Not equal to Yes
Greater than Yes
264 WebFOCUS
Less than Yes
Greater than or equal to Yes
Less than or equal to Yes
In literal list No
Not in literal list No
Missing No
Not missing No
From - to No
Not-from - to No
Includes literal list Yes
Excludes literal list Yes
Contains characters Yes
Omits characters Yes
Like character mask Yes
Not like character mask Yes
How to:
Combine Expressions
Delete an Active Expression
Use the right pane of the Selection criteria tab to use or delete existing Where statements
and to combine expressions.

Procedure: How to Combine Expressions

1. Create an expression.
2. When you create additional expressions, they are combined with the default operator
AND, as shown in the following image with two statements, the first a WHERE and the
second an AND statement.
3. Use the drop-down list to select from AND, OR, WHERE, and WHERE TOTAL.
Procedure: How to Delete an Active Expression

1. Select the check box next to the expression you want to delete. Click the Delete icon
above the box.
2. You are prompted to delete the expression. Click OK to delete.
How to:
Group Where Statements Together Using Parentheses
You can use parentheses to group expressions together to optimize the Where statement.
Procedure: How to Group Where Statements Together Using Parentheses

Click the grayed out parentheses to activate the parentheses and group expressions together.
266 WebFOCUS

In this section:
Simple Filtering Criteria
Complex Filtering Criteria
Selecting Records With LIKE and NOT LIKE Operators
Filters enable you to quickly select predefined criteria that limit data included in a report.
Filters are selection criteria (Where statements) that an Administrator creates for you to
apply as needed, without having to create your own selection criteria.
WebFOCUS displays filters in filter groups. Each filter group can contain multiple filters.
Selecting a single filter within one group creates a report with simple filtering criteria. By
selecting multiple filters within a group or combining filters from different groups, you can
create complex filtering expressions.
Note: Filters are only available when you are creating a report using a Reporting Object as
a template. If you do not see filters, this means they have not been developed for this
Reporting Object. Filters are not available when building a Standard Report or a Custom
Report.
The following image shows a few sample filters as they appear in the Selection criteria tab
of the HTML Report Assistant. They are listed by Group and Name.

Simple filtering criteria consists of one or more filters from the same filter group. If you
select only one filter, the data must match that filter to be included in the report. If you
select multiple filters from the same filter group, the data must match only one filter to be
included in the report. This type of criteria is an OR criterion.

Working With Joins

Complex filtering criteria consists of one or more filters from multiple filter groups. Data
must match one filter from each filter group to be included in the report. This type of criteria
is an AND criterion.
Selecting Records With LIKE and NOT LIKE Operators

Alphanumeric fields include the following operators:
LIKE the character mask. This means that the value for the field you selected will be
included in the report. All other values for that field will not be included in the report. For
example, if you select the Plant field and specify Boston with LIKE the character mask,
only values for Boston will appear in the report. Values for plants in all other locations
will not be included.
NOT LIKE the character mask. This means that all values except the one you specify
for the field you selected will be included in the report. For example, if you specify Boston
with the NOT LIKE character mask, data for Dallas, Los Angeles, New Orleans, Seattle,
and St. Louis will display and no data will display for Boston.
These operators generate the appropriate LIKE and NOT LIKE expressions using the character
mask available in the expressions list when creating a WHERE statement.
Working With Joins

How to:
Create a Join
Create a Define-based Join
Create Multi-field Joins
Delete a Join
Edit a Join
A join is a temporary connection between two or more data sources that share at least one
common field. Once you join two data sources, each time WebFOCUS retrieves a record from
the first data source (host file), it also retrieves the matching records from the second data
source (target file).
You use the Join tool to link data sources in both Report Assistant and Graph Assistant.
The Join tool provides a graphical method for creating and manipulating joins. You can also
create define-based joins and multi-field joins.
268 WebFOCUS
When you access the Join tool, the window displays a field list for the host data source
(which you specified when you created the Standard Report or Reporting Object), and a field
list for any target data source you add to the window.
Important:
Only Managed Reporting Administrators and Developers have access to the Join options
tab. The Join options tab is only available to Analytical Users with the Advanced privilege
when creating a Custom Report. The Join options tab is not available in self-service mode.
The Join options tab is not available in the HTML Report Assistant or Graph Assistant.
You can only create joins using the Join tool available in Reporting Objects.
Procedure: How to Create a Join

1. Click the Join options tab in Report Assistant or Graph Assistant and click New.
The WebFOCUS masters list dialog box opens where you select a target data source.
2. Select a data source and click OK.

The following image shows the Join settings window where you select fields from the
Host field and the Target field lists to create a join.

Working With Joins
3. Select the fields you want to join from the Host field list and the Target field list and
add them to their respective Selected Fields boxes.
or
Press Alt+M to go to the Host field list.
or
Press Alt+T to go to the Target field list.
Then, tab to the field and press Enter to add the chosen field to the corresponding
Selected Fields box.
Note: Fields must have the same format and be indexed fields in order to use them to
create joins.
4. Select your join properties:

Unspecified. This option is selected in the Join properties when a join that was
created in a release earlier than Version 7, Release 1 is opened in the Join tool. In
versions prior to Version 7 Release 1, the defaults for join type and other operators
were assumed and not specified in the generated code. Since the Join tool cannot
determine the type of join that was created and if there were other commands set
to control the join, select the appropriate options (Inner Join, Left Outer Join, Multiple
Instances, Single Instances) from the Join tool to upgrade the generated code.
Inner Join. A join that results when a report includes host rows that have
corresponding cross-referenced rows.
Left Outer Join. Extends the results of an Inner Join and retrieves records from both
host and cross-referenced tables, including all records from the left table (host) and
any records from the right table (cross-referenced) where the condition values match.
If there are no matching values in the cross-referenced table, the join still retrieves
records from the host table.
Multiple Instance (formerly Non Unique). A one-to-many join structure that matches
one value in the host data source to multiple values in the cross-referenced field.
Joining employee ID in a company's employee data source to employee ID in a data
source that lists all the training classes offered by that company would result in a
listing of all courses taken by each employee, or a joining of the one instance of
each ID in the host file to the multiple instances of that ID in the cross-referenced
file. The default join type is inner.
Single Instance (formerly Unique). A one-to-one join structure that matches one
value in the host data source to one value in the cross-referenced data source. Joining
an employee ID in an employee data source to an employee ID in a salary data source
is an example of a unique join.
270 WebFOCUS
5. To see the join syntax, click View.

6. Click OK.
7. In the Description box, give the join a meaningful and unique name.
8. Click Save & Create and the new join appears in the Joins list.
Procedure: How to Create a Define-based Join


3. Click the down arrow of the Define icon and then click New define field.
The following image shows the list of Define field options.

Working With Joins
The following image shows the Define Field Creator dialog box where you create the
Define expression.
4. Create the defined field. The new define field appears in the Available fields list. The
field is prefixed with the define symbol.

5. Add the defined field and the target field to their respective Selected Fields boxes.
create joins.
6. If you want to see the syntax, click View to display the define-based join syntax.
7. Give the join a meaningful and unique name in the Description box.
8. Click Save & Create. The new join appears in the Joins list.
Procedure: How to Create Multi-field Joins


3. Enter multiple fields in the Host field list box and one field in the Target field list box.
4. If you want to see the syntax, click View to display the multi-field join syntax.
272 WebFOCUS
6. Click Save & Create.
The new join appears in the Joins list.
Procedure: How to Delete a Join

1. Select a join from the Select an existing join list box.
2. Click Delete.
Procedure: How to Edit a Join

2. Make your desired changes.


In this section:
Displaying Pop-up Field Descriptions for Column Titles
How to:
Save a Report to an Output Format That Supports Styling Options
Save a Report to an Output Format That Supports CSS
Specify Page Numbering Format
Set a Record Limit or Read Limit
Include a Report Title
Include Summary Text for a Report
Style the Entire Report
Style a PDF or PostScript Report
Justify an Entire Report
Enable On-Demand Paging and Grid Lines
Optimize Output With Cascading Style Sheets
Use the Accessibility Feature
Reference:
Setting OLAP Reporting Options
The Report options tab enables you to select from a variety of options for the output of your
report.
274 WebFOCUS
The features of the Report options tab are shown in the following image.
The following is a list of the Report options tab features:

Save a report to an output format that supports styling options.
Save a report to an output format that supports CSS.
Specify the page-numbering format.
Set record/read limits.
Enter a report title.
Enter summary text.
Style the entire report.
Style a PDF or PS report.
Justify an entire report.
Enable On-demand Paging and grid lines.

Display pop-up field descriptions for column titles.

Optimize output with internal Cascading Style Sheets (CSS).
Use accessibility features.
Enable OLAP features.
Enable the Automatic Drill Down features.
Procedure: How to Save a Report to an Output Format That Supports Styling Options
1. Check the Show styled formats check box.
2. The Generate report as list box offers a choice of file types for the report output. Select
one of the following formats from this list:
HTML. Creates the report in HTML, sending the output to the Web browser, with or
without grid lines.
AHTML (Active Report). Creates an HTML report that is designed for offline analysis.
Users can interact with the data, using analysis options similar to those found in an
Excel workbook, without any connection to a server. See Creating an HTML Active
Report on page 283.
PDF. Captures the entire report and creates a Portable Document Format (.PDF) file,
which can be opened in the Adobe Acrobat Reader (Adobe's PDF viewer).
EXL97. Generates a report in Excel97 format.
EXL2K. Generates fully styled reports in the Excel 2000 HTML format. Excel 2000
provides full support for HTML files with embedded XML.
EXL2KFORMULA. Excel with Formula.
PS. Creates the report as a postscript file.
Procedure: How to Save a Report to an Output Format That Supports CSS

1. Uncheck the Show styled formats check box.
2. The Generate report as list box offers a choice of file types for the report output. Select
one of the following formats:
EXCEL. Excel 95.
DOC. Plain text with page breaks.
WP. Plain text without page breaks.
276 WebFOCUS
WK1. Import to Lotus 1-2-3. See Notes on Using Lotus Format on page 328.
DIF. Import to Spreadsheet.
LOTUS. Import to Lotus 1-2-3. See Notes on Using Lotus Format on page 328.
TABT. Tab delimited.
XML. eXtensible Markup Language.
Procedure: How to Specify Page Numbering Format

The Page Numbering list box offers several options for page numbering. Select one of the
following from the list box:
Default. Numbers each page of the report in the format PAGE 1, PAGE 2, and so on.
The default value is ON.
ON. Numbers each page of the report in the format PAGE 1, PAGE 2, and so on.
OFF. Suppresses the display of page numbers.
NOLEAD. Suppresses the two leading blank lines included on each page by default.
Procedure: How to Set a Record Limit or Read Limit

To limit the number of records retrieved when reporting from a non-FOCUS data source, enter
a number greater than zero in the Read Limit box. A read limit specification is ignored when
reporting from a FOCUS data source.
To limit the number of records retrieved when reporting from a FOCUS data source, enter a
number greater than zero in the Record Limit box.
These options are for development only.
Note:
A warning is issued to indicate to the user that the report they are viewing is only a subset
of the actual data. This occurs when either Record limits or Read limits are checked in
the Properties tab, under Warning message displayed in Heading.
The This report is only a subset of the data edit box is checked by default. You can deselect
the check box for this message or design a new message. Either message will appear
in the heading of the report.

Procedure: How to Include a Report Title

You can specify a report title in the Report Title field that will appear in the title bar of your
report. This option is not available for reports generated in PDF or PS format or for reports
that utilize on-demand paging.
Procedure: How to Include Summary Text for a Report

You can specify summary text for your report in the Summary Text for Report field. This will
place a description of the output into a SUMMARY object inside the output HTML TABLE.
The length limit of this summary is 500 characters. If you try to set the SUMMARY to more
than 500 characters, you receive the following message:
Limit on length of summary is 500 characters.
Note: You can only specify summary text when the Use Accessibility features (Section 508)
option is checked.
Procedure: How to Style the Entire Report

To style the entire report:
1. Click Font and Settings in the Global report styling section on the Report options tab.
The Styles dialog box opens where you can select report style options.
2. Select the font styling options from the Font, Style, and Size boxes.
3. Select a text color from the Text color list box.
278 WebFOCUS
4. Select a background color from the Background color list box.

5. Select a justification from the Justification list box.
6. Select a different currency symbol to override the currency symbol set on the reporting
server. Choose from Default, USD, GBP, JPY, EUR, $, or Custom in the Currency Symbol
menu. When you select Custom, replace “Custom” with the desired one-character custom
currency symbol in the Currency Symbol field.
7. Click OK.
8. To specify an existing WebFOCUS Style Sheet or Cascading Style Sheet, make your
choice from the relevant list box.
Note: Clicking Reset returns the styling options to the following default settings:
Style: Normal
Size: 13
Text Color: Black
Justification: Left
Procedure: How to Style a PDF or PostScript Report

When you select PDF or PostScript (PS) as the display format for a report, WebFOCUS offers
several additional styling features.
1. Select PDF or PS from the Generate report as list box.
2. Click Font and Settings. The Styles dialog box opens.
3. Select a font.
4. Click the Page Orientation list box to select either Portrait or Landscape.
5. Click the Page size list box to select the page size for the report.
6. Select a different currency symbol to override the currency symbol set on the reporting
server. Choose from Default, USD, GBP, JPY, EUR, $, or Custom in the Currency Symbol
menu. When you select Custom, replace “Custom” with the desired one-character custom
currency symbol in the Currency Symbol field.
7. Click OK.

Procedure: How to Justify an Entire Report

The following procedure describes how to justify an entire report. This affects headers,
footers, fields, and field headings.
1. Click Font and Settings. The Styles dialog box opens.
2. In the Justification list box, select Left, Right, or Center.
3. Click OK.
Procedure: How to Enable On-Demand Paging and Grid Lines

1. Select HTML - Web browser or HTML - Web browser (with grid) in the Generate report as
list box.
Note: The latter option provides grid lines that separate cells of data in your report.
You can only use On-demand Paging for reports that use the HTML format.
2. Click the On-demand Paging check box.

3. Save and run the report.
WebFOCUS displays the first page of the report in the WebFOCUS Viewer.
Procedure: How to Optimize Output With Cascading Style Sheets

When you check Optimize output with Cascading Style Sheets in the Report options tab of
Report Assistant, your report will reflect the styling options you select, and generate Internal
Cascading Style Sheet code in the HEAD tag of HTML reports. This feature is available only
if you select HTML in the Generate report as drop-down list.
Procedure: How to Use the Accessibility Feature

If you check this box, the output will be 508 compliant. See How to Include Summary Text
for a Report on page 278.
Reference: Setting OLAP Reporting Options

OLAP options are available in the Interactive options section of the Report options tab in
Report Assistant. The relevant options—Enable OLAP and Automatic Drill Down—are located
here.
Enable OLAP Options
The Enable OLAP options in the Report Assistant control how users can interact with an
OLAP report and access OLAP tools.
280 WebFOCUS
For Standard Reports delivered to Managed Reporting users, these decisions are made by
Managed Reporting Developers. However, users who are creating their own reports can
OLAP-enable them and control the following OLAP interfaces and drill down options.
OFF. OLAP is off when off is selected, OLAP options are not available for the report.
Columns only. Turns off the OLAP Control Panel and the OLAP Selections pane, but
enables OLAP functionality from the report itself. You can access options on right-click
menus, drag and drop columns within the report, and use up and down arrows to sort
columns from high to low or vice versa. This is the default.
Columns with panel. Provides access to the OLAP Selections pane from a square button
to the left of the column titles.
Show filters on top. Opens the OLAP Selections pane above the report. The Measures,
Graph, and Dimension controls, as well as the band containing the OLAP, Run, and Reset
buttons appear above the report output. You can open the Control Panel by clicking the
OLAP button on the Selection pane.
Show filters on bottom. Opens the OLAP Selections pane below the report. The
Measures, Graph, and Dimension controls, as well as the band containing the OLAP,
Run, and Reset buttons appear below the report output. You can open the Control Panel
by clicking the OLAP button on the Selection pane.
Show Panel in Report. Opens the OLAP report with the OLAP Selections pane hidden.
You can perform a variety of analytic tasks from the report itself. Selection Criteria is
shown next to the OLAP button.
Show Tabbed. For OLAP reports that have multiple dimensions, this option groups the
dimension elements under a tab labeled with the dimension name.
Automatic Drill Down Options
These options enable you to sort instantly from high to low or low to high for selected report
columns:
Off. Disables automatic drill downs.
Dimensions only. Enables automatic drill downs on dimensions in reports and graphs.
Measures and Dimensions. Enables automatic drill downs on dimensions in both
reports and graphs and on measures in reports.

Displaying Pop-up Field Descriptions for Column Titles
How to:
Display Pop-up Field Descriptions in an HTML Report
Reference:
JavaScript Requirements for Pop-up Field Descriptions
You can have pop-up field descriptions display in an HTML report when the mouse pointer
is positioned over column titles. Field description text displays in a pop-up box near the
column title using the default font for the report. Pop-up text appears for report column titles
including titles created with ACROSS phrases and stacked column titles created with OVER
phrases.
The pop-up text displayed for a column title is defined by the Description attribute in the
Master File for the corresponding field. If a column title has no Description entry in the
Master File, then no pop-up box is generated when your mouse is positioned over the title.
This feature is not supported in the HTML Graph Assistant.
Procedure: How to Display Pop-up Field Descriptions in an HTML Report

1. Open the HTML Report Assistant.
2. In the HTML Report Assistant window, select the Report options tab.
3. In the Interactive Options area, select the Show pop-up field description check box.
4. Click Save to save this option in your report.
Reference: JavaScript Requirements for Pop-up Field Descriptions

Distributing an HTML report containing pop-up field descriptions with ReportCaster requires
the use of JavaScript components located on the WebFOCUS Client. To access these
components in a report distributed by ReportCaster, the scheduled procedure must contain
the SET FOCHTMLURL command, which must be set to an absolute URL instead of the
default value. For example,
SET FOCHTMLURL = http://hostname[:port]/ibi_html
where:
hostname[:port]
Is the host name and optional port number (specified only if you are not using the default
port number) where the WebFOCUS Web application is deployed.
282 WebFOCUS
ibi_html
Is the site-customized Web server alias pointing to the WebFOCUS76/ibi_html directory
(where ibi_html is the default value).
Creating an HTML Active Report

In this section:
Formatting an HTML Active Report
How to:
Create an HTML Active Report With HTML Report Assistant
An HTML Active Report is a report that is designed for offline analysis.

When using an HTML Active report you can:
Interact with the data, using analysis options similar to those found in an Excel workbook,
without any connection to a server.
Work offline without any additional plug-ins or programs. HTML Active Reports are
self-contained reports, meaning they contain all of the data and JavaScript within the
HTML output file. Packaging the data and the interactive functions in the HTML file also
makes the output highly compressible for e-mail and transparent to security systems.
Save the report on a local machine with Active Report functionality. Since no connection
to a server is required to view the data or use the analysis options, you can save and
use the report anywhere.
Active Reports using Adobe® Flex® include most of the capabilities available in the HTML
version of Active Reports in a visually enhanced user-friendly report format. An Active
Report delivered as a self-contained Adobe Flash file (.swf) allows for faster analysis of
large data sets and interaction with the Active Report.
For more information about using Active Reports with Adobe Flex, see Active Reports
Integration With Adobe Flex in the Using an HTML Active Report chapter of the Creating
Reports With Graphical Tools manual.

The following image shows a simple HTML Active Report. The record status and page
navigation bar appears at the top of the report.
Procedure: How to Create an HTML Active Report With HTML Report Assistant
1. In the HTML Report Assistant, click the Report options tab.
2. Ensure the Show styled formats check box is selected.
3. From the Generate report as drop-down list, select AHTML - Active Report.
4. Click the Active Report Styling button.
The Active Report Styling dialog box opens.
5. Select styling options for the Active Report.

For details, see Formatting an HTML Active Report on page 284.
Formatting an HTML Active Report
Reference:
WebFOCUS Active Report Styling Dialog Box
You can apply the following custom formatting to an HTML Active Report:
Report view. You can set the report view as a standard table or as an expandable report.
An expandable report is a collapsed report that can be fully expanded for sorting and
other purposes.
284 WebFOCUS
Pagination. You can set the justification for the information that appears in the record
status and page navigation bar and set the number of records that appear per page.
Pagination options are not available for expandable report views.
Calculations. You can set certain calculations for fields in the report. You set calculation
results to show in a row that appears either above or below the report.
Color. You can set the color for data visualization graphs, the text and background for
the record status and page navigation bar, selected rows, the value and background for
calculations, and the text, background, and border for the menu.
Freeze columns. Enables you to freeze the report at a particular point so that columns
to the left of the freeze point remain in view while the user scrolls through the other report
columns.
Reference: WebFOCUS Active Report Styling Dialog Box
The Active Report styling options are:

Report view
Sets the report view as a standard table (Tabular) or as an Accordion report. Users can
fully expand accordion reports for sorting and other purposes.

Pagination options
Following are the pagination options for HTML Active Reports. Pagination options are
not available for Accordion report views.
Justification
Justifies the text that appears in the record status and page navigation bar. Options
are Left, Center, and Right. Left is the default.
Records per page
Sets the number of records that appear per page. Options are: Default, 10, 20, 30,
40, 50, Show All. The default is 57 lines per page.
Text
Sets the color for the text in the record status and page navigation bar. The default
is black.
Background
Sets the background color for the record status and page navigation bar. The default
color is silver.
Row selection colors
An HTML Active Report offers visual assistance for viewing data in the report. For example,
when a user hovers over a row of data the row is highlighted with a background color
and when they click a row of data it is also highlighted with a background color. You can
set the colors for these options, Hover and Selected. The default color for Hover is
RGB(255 252 204), which is a shade of yellow, and the default color for Selected is
RGB(51 255 204), which is a mix of green and blue.
Visualization colors
Users can apply data visualization to numeric fields in an HTML Active Report. Here you
can designate the colors of the bars. You can set different colors for positive and negative
values. The default color for positive and negative values is black.
Freeze columns
Enables you to freeze the report at a particular point so that columns to the left of the
freeze point remain in view while the user scrolls through the other report columns.
Options include:
None turns off the freeze option. This is the default.
The fields in the request. If the report can be viewed fully viewed in the browser
window, then freeze is not applied.
286 WebFOCUS
Calculations
Set options for calculations:
Colors
Specifies the colors for the values in a calculation:
Values sets the font color of the calculation results. This color defaults to
black.
Background sets the background color of the calculation results. This color
defaults white.
Location
Sets the location of the calculations. Options are Top row or Bottom row. Top row
is the default.
Menu options
Set options for the menu.
Font color
Enables you to set the colors for the menu text:
Text sets the color of the text
The default is black.
Hover sets the color of the text when the mouse hovers over it
The default color is black (text hover does not show).
Menu color
Set the colors for the menu:
Background sets the background color of the menu. The default color is silver.
Hover sets the background hover color of an individual item on the menu. For
example, if the background color of the menu is black, the hover color can be set to
white to visually show which option on the menu the mouse is currently hovering over.
The default color is white.
Border sets the color of the menu border. The default color is white.
Active Cache
Select to enable the Active Cache option.

Running a Report
Because all post-retrieval processing is performed in the Web browser’s memory, an

Active Report has a processing limit of approximately 5,000 records or 100 pages of
output. To create answer sets in excess of 5,000 records, the Active Cache option
enables you to send only the first page of Active Report output to the browser and retrieve
subsequent pages from a temporary cache on the WebFOCUS Reporting Server. The
server also becomes the resource for performing all calculations, sorting, and filtering
when Active Cache is enabled.
Running a Report
How to:
Run a Report
You may periodically run a report as you create it as well as when you have finished creating
it.
Procedure: How to Run a Report

1. Click the Run icon in the Report Assistant or click the Run Deferred option in the Run
drop-down list.
If you click Run, the report appears in a separate browser session. If you click Run
Deferred, the report does not immediately display but runs in deferred mode. For more
details on deferred reporting, see Using the Deferred Report Status Interface on page
107.
2. To return to the Report Assistant, close the browser window displaying the report.
Note: You can continue to make changes to your existing report procedure or create another
report by clicking Save As.
Saving a Report
When you click the Save or Save As buttons you save your report (procedure). If you make
changes in your report without subsequently saving them and then click Quit, you are
prompted with the following options:
Yes. Click to save your changes and exit the report.
No. Click to discard your changes and exit the report.
Cancel. Click to return to your report to continue working or use Save or Save As to save
your changes and then click Quit to exit your report.
288 WebFOCUS
Editing a Report
When you create a report using Report Assistant and you add a new comment as the first
line of the report code, the report no longer opens in Report Assistant. Instead, the report
opens in the Editor.
Also, if you edit a Custom Report in the editor, you will not be able to open the report in
Report Assistant or Graph Assistant.
When there is an error in a procedure that HTML Report Assistant cannot identify, the code
in the procedure appears in a window. At the top of the window, a message appears that
describes what line of code the error is occurring on. You must reopen the procedure in the
editor and correct the error before the procedure can be reopened in HTML Report Assistant.
HTML Report Assistant Tab References

The topics in this section provide reference information for all of the fields in the various
tabs in the HTML Report Assistant.
Field Selection Tab on page 290.
Report Headings Tab on page 311.
Selection Criteria Tab on page 313.
Join Options Tab on page 318.
Report Options Tab on page 323.

Field Selection Tab
Field Selection Tab

Reference:
Field Selection Tab: Available Fields Window
Field Selection Tab: Report Fields Window
Field Selection Tab: Field List Searching
Field Selection Tab: Available Objects
Field Selection Tab: Show Report Field Options for Sort By
Field Selection Tab: Show Report Field Options for Sort Across
Field Selection Tab: Show Report Field Options for Column
Drill Down Dialog Box
Font Dialog Box
Field Selection Tab: Field Creator Dialog Box
Order of Evaluation for Expressions
Change Format Dialog Box
The Field selection tab is used to select fields for a report.
290 WebFOCUS
Reference: Field Selection Tab: Available Fields Window

The following image shows the Available Fields window on the Field selection tab. The fields
are sorted by the Name column with corresponding columns containing their Alias, Format,
and Segment information.
Available Fields window

Displays a list of field names from the selected data source.
Define icon
Click the Define (calculator) icon to select: New define field, Edit define field, or Delete
define field. If you select the New define field or Edit define field, the Define Field Creator
dialog box opens where you can create or edit a defined field.
Tree icon
Displays a tree structure of field names by segment with segment, alias, title, description,
and format information below the tree. Individual field information appears when you
click on the field.

Field Selection Tab
List icon
Displays a list of all field names with information that you select from the adjacent arrow
that opens a list box: name, alias, title, format, description, segment, and file name.
You can also choose to sort by file order.
Reference: Field Selection Tab: Report Fields Window

The following image shows the Report fields section on the Field selection tab. You can view
the selected fields with the following options:
Selected field display options

Lists the following field display options:
Prefix with the Segment Name
Prefixes the field name with the segment name.
Prefix with the Filename
Prefixes the field name with the name of the data source.
Show the field's alias instead of name
Uses the alias defined in the Master File as the field name.
Show field's title
Uses the title in the Master File instead of the field name.
292 WebFOCUS
Show field's description

Uses the description in the Master File instead of the field name.
Add grand totals
The Add grand totals drop-down list provides two options. The Totals option displays the
totals for each column. The Recompute Totals option recalculates computed fields before
displaying the totals for each column.
Add a row total column
Displays the total for each row.
Sort By
Lists the vertical field that you have selected from the Available Fields window.
Add icon
Adds a field to the Sort By window.
Remove icon
Removes a field from the Sort By window.
Move Up or Move Down icons
Moves the position of the field within the report.
Sort Across
Lists the horizontal field you have selected from the Available Fields window.
Add icon
Adds a field to the Sort Across window.
Remove icon
Removes a field from the Sort Across window.
Sum
Indicates a report that aggregates data by the horizontal field.

Field Selection Tab
Print
Prints each value on a record-by-record basis.
New Computed Field icon
Opens the Computed Field Creator dialog box where you can define the parameters
for a new computed field. For more information on the Field Creator dialog box, see
Field Selection Tab: Field Creator Dialog Box on page 306.
Add icon
Adds a field to the report fields.
Remove icon
Removes a field from the report fields.
Reference: Field Selection Tab: Field List Searching

The following image shows the Field List Searching options that you can use to search for
a field in the Fields List. For more details, see Searching Field Lists on page 219.
Pattern Search
Select the Master File attribute for which you want to search. The following table lists
the pattern attributes and a description of each.
Attribute Description
Name Name of the field.
Alias Alias for the field.
Title Display title for the field, as defined in the Master File.
Format Field format, for example A4.
294 WebFOCUS
Attribute Description
Description Field description, as defined in the Master File.
Segment A segment of fields in the Master File.
Filename Name of the data source.
Text Box
Type your search string. You can use an asterisk (*) as a wildcard. For example, type
c* to find all fields that begin with the letter "c". The character string is not case
sensitive.
Reference: Field Selection Tab: Available Objects

The following image shows the Available Objects that you can include in your report from
the Field selection tab. For more details, see Using Application Objects on page 219.
Name
Is the name of the application object.
Type
Is the type of application object. For example, if the Type is BY it is a vertical sort field.

Field Selection Tab
Reference: Field Selection Tab: Show Report Field Options for Sort By
The following image shows the Show report field options where you choose various styles
and functions for a selected field.
The Display subtab for a Sort by field has these options:

Make this field invisible
Check to hide the display of a Sort By field.
Font button
Opens the font styling dialog box. See Font Dialog Box on page 305.
Conditional Styling button
Opens the conditional styling dialog box where you use to add conditional styling in a
report.
Drill Down button
Opens the drill-down dialog box. See Drill Down Dialog Box on page 303.
Format in report as
Is grayed out and unavailable.
Calculated as
Inserts '.' when no field value exists.
296 WebFOCUS
The Title subtab for a Sort by field has this option:

Title
Is the name of the field in the Sort By list box.
The Sorting subtab shown in the following image for a Sort by field has these options:
Ascending
Click to arrange fields in ascending order.
Descending
Click to arrange fields in descending order.
Total
Applies aggregation and sorting simultaneously to numeric columns in your report in one
pass of the data. See Aggregating and Sorting Fields on page 249.
On vertical sort value change (By)
Select:
Create a page break (on value change).
Separate (from next) with underline.
Subtotal numeric sum/print fields.
Note:
When you select the Create a page break check box, the And reset page number to
1 check box is activated.
When you select the Subtotal numeric sum/print fields check box, the Subtotal tab
appears and the And higher level sort fields and the Recalculate computed fields using
subtotal values check boxes are activated. For more information about subtotals, see
How to Include Subtotals on page 237.

Field Selection Tab
The Ranking subtab, shown in the following image for a Sort by field has these options:
Add Ranking column

This check box is unselected by default and enables a user to add a Ranking column.
Limit the number of ranked values to
This check box is grayed out by default and activated only if the Add Ranking column
check box is selected. It enables a user to enter an integer value to select the number
of ranked values to display in the report (5 is the default value).
Text Box
The title of the ranking column can be changed from the default of RANK.
Font button
298 WebFOCUS
The Subhead/Subfoot subtab, shown in the following image for a Sort by field has these
options:
Formatting toolbar
Specify the font, font size, font style, text alignment, text color, and background color
of the subhead or subfoot.
Text box
Enter a subhead/subfoot in the text box.
The Subtotal subtab for a Sort by field has:
Text box
Enter text to display for the subtotal.
Note: This sub tab appears when you select the Subtotal numeric sum/print fields option
on the Sorting sub tab.

Field Selection Tab
Reference: Field Selection Tab: Show Report Field Options for Sort Across
The Display subtab for a Sort across field has these options:
Check to hide the display of a Sort Across field.
Font button
Drill Down button
Format in report as
Calculated as
The Title subtab for a Sort across field has this option:
Title
Is the name of the field in the Sort Across list box.
300 WebFOCUS
The Sorting subtab for a Sort across field has these options:
Ascending
Click to arrange fields in ascending order.
Descending
Click to arrange fields in descending order.
Note: Other options are grayed out and unavailable.
Reference: Field Selection Tab: Show Report Field Options for Column
The Display subtab for a Column field has these options:

Check to temporarily hide the display of a Column field.
Font button
Opens the conditional styling dialog box where you use to add conditional styling in a
report.
Drill Down button

Field Selection Tab
Format in report as
Click ... to open the change format dialog where you can edit the field format. See Change
Format Dialog Box on page 310.
Calculated as
Make a selection from the drop-down list.
Inserts '.' when no field value exists.
The Title subtab for a Column field has this option:
Title
Is the name of the field in the Columns list box.
302 WebFOCUS
Reference: Drill Down Dialog Box

The following image shows the drill down dialog box, where you can add drill down capability
to a report.
Execute procedure (FOCEXEC)

Lists the domains and procedures that are available as drill-down reports. Click the
procedure you want to execute.
Show all domains
When Execute procedure (FOCEXEC) is selected, click this check box to gain access
to procedures in the Standard Reports folders of all available domains.
No action
Is the default.
Execute procedure
The procedure you selected appears in this text box.

Field Selection Tab
Execute URL
Enter the URL of a Web page that will open when a user drills down.
With parameters
Once a parameter is created using the Add button, it is automatically added to this area.
Alternate comment for hyperlink
You can place comments here.
Add button
Opens the drill-down parameter dialog shown in the following image.
Parameter name
Enter the parameter name you created in the drill down procedure.
Parameter value: Field
Select the field the user can drill down.
Parameter value: Constant value
The parameter is set to the specified value.
OK button
Returns to the drill down dialog. The parameter is added to the With parameters list
box.
304 WebFOCUS
Reference: Font Dialog Box

The following images shows the font dialog box.
Font
Select from the list box.
Style
Select from normal or bold, italic, underline, and various combinations.
Size
Select a font size from the list box.
Set Style for Title & Data, Title only, or Data only option buttons
Set the style for Title & Data, Title only, or Data only.
Text color
Select a color from the color palette.
Background color
Justification
Select left, right, or center from the list box.

Field Selection Tab
Apply these styling conditions to all report fields check box

Apply these styling conditions to all report fields.
Reference: Field Selection Tab: Field Creator Dialog Box

Use the Field Creator dialog box to create or edit temporary fields, as shown in the following
image.
Field
Enter a name for the temporary field. Note that field names cannot exceed 66 characters.
Format button
Displays the Change Format dialog box where you can modify the data formats. See
Change Format Dialog Box on page 310.
Tree or List mode buttons
Opens the field list in either tree or list mode.
306 WebFOCUS
Functions button
Displays a list of predefined functions grouped into categories that include Character,
Data Source and Decoding, Date and Time, Format Conversion, Numeric, and System.
If you hover your cursor over a function, a brief description appears. The following image
shows the list of predefined functions that populate the Field Creator dialog box when
you select the Functions button.
Double-click the desired function to add it to the expression box in the Field Creator
dialog box. In the expression box, replace each of the function’s arguments with the
desired value or field name. Note that each of the available functions is a program that
returns a value. For more information about functions, see the Using Functions manual.
Expression box
To create an expression, double-click fields or functions, select items (operators,
numbers, characters) from the Field Creator keypad, or type directly in the expression
box.
Concatenation operators
Concatenates two or more alphanumeric constants and/or fields into a single character
string. The concatenation operator has two forms: | (weak concatenation, which preserves
trailing blanks) and || (strong concatenation, which moves trailing blanks to the end of
a concatenated string).

Field Selection Tab
IF... THEN... ELSE... operators

Creates a conditional expression. A conditional expression assigns a value based on
the result of a logical expression. The assigned value can be numeric or alphanumeric.
IF, THEN, ELSE logic expressions take this form:
IF expression1 THEN expression2 ELSE expression3
ELSE is an optional operator. All alphanumeric values in conditional expressions must
be enclosed in single quotation marks. For example, IF REGION EQ 'West'.
Logical operators
Used to create relational and Boolean expressions. A relational expression returns a
value based on a comparison of two individual values (either field values or constants)
and a Boolean expression returns a value based on the outcome of two or more relational
expressions.
The following logical operators are available:
adds the less than (LT) operator to the expression. This operator returns a value
if the value on the left is less than the value on the right.
adds the greater than (GT) operator to the expression. This operator returns a
value if the value on the left is greater than the value on the right.
adds the less than or equal to (LE) operator to the expression. This operator
returns a value if the value on the left is less than or equal to the value on the right.
adds the greater than or equal to (GE) operator to the expression. This operator
returns a value if the value on the left is greater than or equal to the value on the
right.
adds the equal (EQ) operator to the expression. This operator returns a value if
the value on the left is equal to the value on the right.
adds the not equal to (NE) operator to the expression. This operator returns a
value if the value on the left is not equal to the value on the right.
AND returns a value if both operands are true.
OR returns a value if either operand is true.
NOT returns a value if the operand is false.
308 WebFOCUS
Arithmetic operators
Click any of the arithmetic operators to use them in your expression: + (addition), -
(subtraction), * (multiplication), / (division), ** (exponentiation).
Two operators cannot appear consecutively. The following expression is invalid:
a* -1
To make it valid, you must add parentheses:
a* (-1)
Parentheses
Adds parentheses to the expression box. Parentheses affect the order in which the
specified operations are performed. For information on when to use parentheses, see
Order of Evaluation for Expressions on page 309.
Quotation marks
Adds quotation marks to the expression box. Use single quotation marks to enclose
alphanumeric and date literals.
Uppercase (U key)
Converts entries in the expression box to uppercase. Note that field names are case-
sensitive.
Reference: Order of Evaluation for Expressions

WebFOCUS performs numeric operations in the following order:
1. Parentheses
2. Exponentiation
3. Division and multiplication
4. Addition and subtraction
When operators are at the same level, they are evaluated from left to right. Because
expressions in parentheses are evaluated before any other expression, you can use
parentheses to change this predefined order. For example, the following expressions yield
different results because of parentheses:
COMPUTE PROFIT/D12.2 = RETAIL_PRICE - UNIT_COST * UNIT_SOLD ;
COMPUTE PROFIT/D12.2 = (RETAIL_PRICE - UNIT_COST) * UNIT_SOLD ;

Field Selection Tab
In the first expression, UNIT_SOLD is first multiplied by UNIT_COST, and the result is
subtracted from RETAIL_PRICE. In the second expression, UNIT_COST is first subtracted
from RETAIL_PRICE, and that result is multiplied by UNIT_SOLD.gives an incorrect result
because UNIT_SOLD is first multiplied by UNIT_COST, and then the result is subtracted from
RETAIL_PRICE.
Reference: Change Format Dialog Box

The following image shows the Change Format dialog box.
Format types
Choose:
Alphanumeric
Floating point
Integer
Decimal
Packed
Date
310 WebFOCUS
Date-Time
Length
Choose an available number based on the format type you chose.
Select options
Choose options based on the format type you chose.
Report Headings Tab

Reference:
Report Headings Tab
The Report headings tab is used to select and style headings and footings for a report.
Reference: Report Headings Tab

The following image shows the Report headings tab where you enter and style a page title
heading and/or footing. You can also include a field value from the Available fields list in
the page heading and/or footing.

Report Headings Tab
Formatting tool bar

Cut, copy, paste.
Select all.
Remove formatting.
Note: The above icons are not available for Firefox users. You must use the standard key
combinations Ctrl+C, Ctrl+V, Ctrl+X, and so on.
Font styles. Select from bold, italic, and underline.
Alignment. Select left, center, right, or bottom alignment.
Font. Select a different font from the list box.
Font size. Select a font size from the list box.
Text color. Select the text color from the color menu.
Background color. Select the background color from the color menu.
Show/Hide Fields list
Show or hide the Available Fields window.
Available Fields window
Insert a field in your heading or footing from the fields list.
Define icon
Click the Define (calculator) icon to select: New define field, Edit define field, or Delete
define field. If you select the New define field or Edit define field, the Define Field Creator
dialog box opens where you can create or edit a defined field.
Tree icon
click on the field.
List icon
that opens a drop-down list: name, alias, title, format, description, segment, and file
name. You can also choose to sort by file order.
Page Heading
Enter the text for the heading in the Page Heading box.
312 WebFOCUS
Page Footing
Enter the text for the footing in the Page Footing box.

Reference:
Selection Criteria Tab: Screening Conditions
Parameter Properties Dialog Box (Dynamic Parameters)
Parameter Properties Dialog Box (Static Parameters)
The Selection criteria tab is used to create WHERE and WHERE TOTAL statements for a
report.
Reference: Selection Criteria Tab: Screening Conditions

The following image shows the Screening conditions section on the Selection criteria tab
where you create a WHERE statement by dragging and dropping a field from the Available
Fields window.
WHERE/WHERE TOTAL
Use WHERE to select records based on the values of an individual field.
Use WHERE TOTAL to select records based on the aggregate value of a field, for example,
the sum or average of a field's values.
Fieldname
Is the field you initially chose.
Operator Expression
Select an operator from the drop-down list, for example, EQUAL to.

Select Values
Click to open the Values dialog box, which is shown in the following image.
Constant
Type a constant value. To use multiple constant values, click the plus sign in the
Multiple values entered list box after each constant value that you type.
Select from file (Import) button
Opens the Select file dialog box. For more information, see Importing Values From
External Files for WHERE Statements on page 261.
Parameter
Type a parameter name. To use multiple parameter values, click the plus sign in the
Multiple values entered list box after each parameter name that you type.
Auto Prompt button
Opens the Parameter Properties dialog box. See Parameter Properties Dialog Box
(Dynamic Parameters) on page 315 and Parameter Properties Dialog Box (Static
Parameters) on page 317 for details.
Field
Select a field from the Field list box.
314 WebFOCUS
Values
Select a field value from the Values list box. To use multiple field values, click the
plus sign in the Multiple values entered list box after each field value that you select.
Multiple values entered
Displays the constants, imported values, parameters, or field values you added to
the Multiple values list box. Use the available buttons to add, remove, and change
the order of the selected values.
Reference: Parameter Properties Dialog Box (Dynamic Parameters)

The following image shows the Parameter Properties dialog box with the Dynamic option
selected.
Name
Name is the parameter name. This field is automatically filled in with information from
the selected field. You can change the name if desired.
Description
Text that appears in the Auto prompt page as a prompt for the selection list. This field
is automatically filled in with information from the selected field. You can change the
description if desired.

Note:
Selection
Select the type of parameter:
Dynamic retrieves values from the specified data source when the request is run.
This is the default selection.
Static contains a list of values you supply. These values do not change unless you
change them.
Select multiple values at runtime
Selecting this check box enables you to provide more than one value to the report from
the auto prompt page. In addition, the user is able to select all values from the values
list.
Data Source
Select a data source that contains the values for the parameter. The data source must
be on your APP PATH.
Field
Select the field from the data source whose values will populate the selection list.
316 WebFOCUS
Reference: Parameter Properties Dialog Box (Static Parameters)

The following image shows the Parameter Properties dialog box with the Static option
selected.
Name
Is the parameter name. This field is automatically filled in with information from the
selected field. You can change the name if desired.
Description
Note:

Join Options Tab
Selection
change them.
list.
Constant
Enter one or more constant values.
Show field values
Shows the values in the selected field. Move the values you want in the selection list
to the Prompt values list.
Prompt values
Prompt Values are the values that appear in the selection list. You can use the available
buttons to add, remove, and change the order of the Prompt values.
Join Options Tab

Reference:
Join Options Tab: Add or New
The Join options tab is used to create joins for a report.
318 WebFOCUS
Reference: Join Options Tab: Add or New

The following image shows the Join options tab where you create joins for a report.
Select an existing join

Use the list box to select the join with which you want to work.
New
Opens the Masters List dialog box where you select the target data source.
Delete
Click to delete the join.
OK button
Click to select a Master File.
Cancel button
Click to return to the Add/New Join window.

Join Options Tab
When you select a target data source you have multiple join related settings and options,
as shown in the following image.
The Join Settings section provides the following fields and buttons for creating joins:
Description
Enter a description for your join.
Internal name
WebFOCUS assigns an alphanumeric name for the join, for example J001.
Save & Create
Once you have selected your host and target fields, click Save & Create to create the
join.
View
Click to view the syntax of your join, which displays the code sent to the WebFOCUS
Reporting Server to validate the join, but may not be the same code required to run the
report. This is the case for a DEFINE based JOIN where only the JOIN statement is
displayed for validation, but both the JOIN and DEFINE statements are needed when the
report is run.
320 WebFOCUS
The Join Type drop-down list provides the following join type options:
Inner Join
A join that results when a report omits host rows that lack corresponding cross-referenced
rows.
Unspecified
This option is selected in the Join properties when a join that was created in an earlier
release is opened. In prior versions, the defaults for join type and other operators were
assumed and not specified in the generated code. Since the HTML Report Assistant
cannot determine the type of join that was created and if there were other commands
set to control the join, select the appropriate options (Inner Join, Left Outer Join, Multiple
Instances, Single Instances) from to upgrade the generated code.
Left Outer Join
Extends the results of an Inner Join and retrieves records from both host and cross-
referenced tables, including all records from the left table (host) and any records from
the right table (cross-referenced) where the condition values match. If there are no
matching values in the cross-referenced table, the join still retrieves records from the
host table.
The Instances drop-down list provides the following join instance options:
Multiple Instance (formerly Non Unique)
A one-to-many join structure that matches one value in the host data source to multiple
values in the cross-referenced field. Joining employee ID in a company's employee data
source to employee ID in a data source that lists all the training classes offered by that
company would result in a listing of all courses taken by each employee, or a joining of
the one instance of each ID in the host file to the multiple instances of that ID in the
cross-referenced file.
Single Instance (formerly Unique)
A one-to-one join structure that matches one value in the host data source to one value
in the cross-referenced data source. Joining an employee ID in an employee data source
to an employee ID in a salary data source is an example of a unique join.
The Host Field List contains:
Search (binoculars) icon
Opens the Field List Searching dialog box. See Searching Field Lists on page 219 for
details.

Join Options Tab
Define icon
Click the Define icon to select: New define field, Edit define field, or Delete define field.
If you select the New define field or Edit define field, the Define Field Creator dialog box
opens where you can create or edit a defined field.
Tree icon
click the field.
List icon
Available fields
Lists of fields from the host data source for creating a join.
The Target Field List contains:
Select a target button
Click to select a target Master File.
Tree icon
click the field.
List icon
Fields
Lists of fields from the target data source for creating a join.
For both the Host and Target field lists, each has its own Selected Fields window that has:
Selected Fields window
Shows the fields selected from the data source for a join.
Add icon
Adds a field.
322 WebFOCUS
Remove icon
Removes a field.
Moves the position of the field within the join.
Report Options Tab

Reference:
Report Options Dialog Box
Notes on Using Lotus Format
The Report options tab is used to select options for a report.

Report Options Tab
Reference: Report Options Dialog Box

The following image shows the Report options tab where you select report output formats.
Generate report as list box (when check box is selected)

When the Show styled formats check box is selected, choose from the following formats:
HTML - Web browser
HTML - Web browser (with grid)
AHTML - Active Report
PDF - Portable Document Format
EXL97 - Excel 97
EXL2K - Excel 2000
EXL2KFORMULA - Excel 2000 with FORMULA
PS - Postscript
324 WebFOCUS
Generate report as list box (when check box is not selected)

When the Show styled formats check box is not selected, choose from the following
formats:
EXCEL 95 - Excel 95
DOC - Plain text with page breaks
WP - Plain text without page breaks
WK1 - Import to Lotus 1-2-3. See Notes on Using Lotus Format on page 328.
DIF - Import to spreadsheet
LOTUS - Import to Lotus 1-2-3. See Notes on Using Lotus Format on page 328.
TABT - Tab-delimited
XML - eXtensible Markup Language
Show styled formats check box
Check to show output formats that support styling options.
The Output format specific section has these options:
Report title
Enter the report title in the text box.
Optimize output with Cascading Style Sheets
Check to optimize output with Cascading Style Sheets.
Use accessibility features (Section 508)
Check to use accessibility features (Section 508).
Summary text for report
Add summary text in the text box. See How to Include Summary Text for a Report on page
278.
The Interactive options subsection has these options:
Enable OLAP
Choose:
OFF
Columns only
Columns with panel

Report Options Tab
Show filters on top

Show filters on bottom
Show panel in report
Show Tabbed
Automatic drill down
Choose:
Off
Dimensions only
Dimensions and Measures
On-demand paging
Check to initiate on-demand paging.
Show pop-up field description
Check to display pop-up field descriptions for column titles. See Displaying Pop-up Field
Descriptions for Column Titles on page 282.
326 WebFOCUS
The Global report styling section has these options:

Font and Settings button
Opens the Styles dialog box.
Font
Select from the list box.
Style
Select from normal or bold, italic, underline, and various combinations.
Size
Select a font size from the list box.
Text color
Background color
Justification
Select left, right, or center from the list box.
Currency Symbol
Select a different currency symbol to override the currency symbol set on the reporting
server. Choose from Default, USD, GBP, JPY, EUR, $, or Custom in the Currency
Symbol menu. When you select Custom, replace “Custom” with the desired one-
character custom currency symbol in the Currency Symbol field.
Active Report Styling
Opens the Active Report Styling dialog box. This button is only active when you select
the AHTML - Active Report output format. See Creating an HTML Active Report on page
283.
Apply an existing WebFOCUS Style Sheet
Select None or a Style Sheet from the list box.
Apply an existing Cascading Style Sheet
Select None or a Style Sheet from the list box.
The Content and generation section has these options:
Page numbering
Select Default, On, Off, or No lead from the list box.

Report Options Tab
Limit the number of read operations performed during report generation

Enter a number in the text box.
Stop retrieving reports after the specified number have been included in the report
Reference: Notes on Using Lotus Format

The Display Format selection box on the Report options tab lists Lotus as a display format.
This format, however, does not create a valid Lotus™ spreadsheet. To work around this
limitation, follow these steps:
1. Select the Excel display format.
2. When the request is run, WebFOCUS prompts you to save or open the file, select Save.
3. Save the file with an .xls extension to a valid directory.
Lotus Release 5.0 or higher can open files with an .xls extension.
328 WebFOCUS
WebFOCUS
7 Creating a Graph With Graph Assistant
This chapter provides information on graphs and how to use the Graph Assistant.
Topics:
Applying Conditional Styling to a Graph
Graph Overview Linking Graphs to Other Resources
Content Analysis: Determining Graphing Adding Labels to a Graph
Objectives
Applying Custom Styling to a Graph
Accessing the Graph Assistant
Running, Saving, and Printing Your Graph
Selecting a Graph Type and Style
Graph Types Tab
Selecting Values for the X and Y Axes
Field Selection Tab in HTML Graph Assistant
Selecting Records for a Graph
Headings Tab
Selection Criteria Tab in HTML Graph Assistant
Creating Multiple Graphs
Join Options Tab
Working With Joins
Properties Tab
Displaying Missing Data Values in a Graph

Graph Overview
Graph Overview
Graphs often convey meaning more clearly than data listed in tabular format. Using the
Graph Assistant, you can easily transform almost any type of data into an effective graph
that you can customize to suit your needs.
You can link your graph to other resources. You may also select from a multitude of graph
styles, which include the standard graph formats bar, line, pie, and scatter as well as many
variations on these types.
You can also represent data graphically using data visualization. For details, see Visualizing
Trends in Reports on page 565.
The Graph Assistant is available from the following development areas of Developer Studio:
Projects, Data Servers, and while performing development using Managed Reporting (MR)
in the Standard Reports area. While using MR to create Reporting Objects for MR users, the
HTML Graph Assistant is available. This enables MR users to use the graphs created by
Administrators and open them to make changes through the HTML Graph Assistant, which
is also available from the browser editions of WebFOCUS.
All of the windows of the HTML Graph Assistant when accessed by Developer Studio and in
Managed Reporting are the same, except there is no Join Options tab. To create Joins in
Developer Studio, you must open a Reporting Object and then select the Join tool from there.
Note that the Graph Assistant windows in Developer Studio are slightly different than the
MR HTML Graph Assistant. These differences are shown throughout this topic.
Content Analysis: Determining Graphing Objectives

WebFOCUS offers a range of reporting tools that allow you to create reports that deliver
critical information to your users. By selecting a tool that is well suited to your particular
needs, you can design the information you deliver to users. One effective option with almost
any type of data is a graphical presentation.
Graphs enable you to display multivariate or complex data efficiently, precisely, and in a way
that a viewer can intuitively grasp. A graph is an effective presentation tool because it
presents a visual idea, communicating meaningful changes in data to a user in a memorable
way. By viewing your graph, a user can identify and track a change that you want them to
notice.
Creating a meaningful graph is not simply a matter of applying aesthetics to your data.
Instead, graphs allow you to design your presentation to capture the essential information
in your data.
330 WebFOCUS
7. Creating a Graph With Graph Assistant
The first step in creating excellent graphs is determining your graphing objectives. You can
break this process into several stages.
1. Assess your data.
Look for meaningful patterns or changes in the data. Does your data change most
dramatically over time or in relationship to some other value? Are there two sets of data
that you would like to compare to each other?
Determine what movement or changes you would like to highlight. Which of the patterns
in the data would you most want the viewer to picture?
2. Select the graph type and style that best suits your argument and the overall shape of
your data. Determine what will lead viewers to the cognitive task/connection that you
want them to make.
3. Begin developing your graph.
4. Refine your graph.
Are the labels meaningful/useful?
How can the data be organized in a meaningful way? Consider customizing the scales
you use with your graph.

Reference:
Options Available on All Tabs
HTML Graph Assistant is accessible:

Through Dashboard.
During the creation of a new Standard Report.
When a graph is selected during the creation of a Reporting Object.
When editing a Reporting Object within Domains.
When editing a My Report within Domains.
To use HTML Graph Assistant, you must have ServletExec 4.1 configured to include the
IBIRPASSTBean.jar file and you must have JDK 1.3.1 or higher. JRE alone is not sufficient.
The HTML Graph Assistant is best viewed using a resolution of 1024 x 768.
You may be prompted for a WebFOCUS Reporting Server ID.

Note:
If you are using the HTML Graph Assistant with a Firefox browser, the display may be
slightly different than Internet Explorer. These differences do not effect functionality.
To open a procedure that was created with the Applet Graph Assistant in a previous
version of WebFOCUS, open the procedure in a text editor and delete the following line:
-* HTML Tool
Reference: Options Available on All Tabs

The following options are available from any tab in the Graph Assistant:
Save/Save As
Click Save to save your graph. Click Save As to open the Save New Standard Report
dialog box.
Run/Run Deferred
Click run to run your graph. Click run deferred to run your graph at a later time.
Help
Click the icon to access help about the area of the tab in which you are working. Click
About to open a window describing the version of Graph Assistant in which you are
working.
Quit
Click to quit the application.
332 WebFOCUS

In this section:
Graph Types
Graph Styles
Previewing Styling Options for Your Graph
Auto Arranging Graph Elements
Selecting Scales
When creating a graph, it is important to select the appropriate graph type with which to
display your data. You may select from a number of basic graph types, as well as refinements
on these types, known as graph styles. Basic graph types include line graphs (connected
point plots), bar graphs, pie graphs, and scatter graphs. Use the brief descriptions (see
Graph Types on page 334) to select a graph type that suits the data set you are displaying
and the change you want to highlight. Keep in mind that the data are the sets of numbers
that you are displaying, and the scales are the numbers or variable measures that appear
along the axes of the graph.
The Graph types tab of the Graph Assistant provides a list and brief descriptions of the many
graph types and graph styles available in WebFOCUS.
Note: When using a stacked chart of any type at least 2 series are required. Negative values
are not supported in stacked charts.

The following image shows the Graph types tab with a sample cluster bar chart.
Graph Types
Following are descriptions of the types of graphs you can create:
Line graphs. Line graphs are useful for emphasizing the movement or trend of numerical
data over time, since they allow a viewer to trace the evolution of a particular point by
working backwards or interpolating. Highs and lows, rapid or slow movement, or a tendency
towards stability are all types of trends that are well suited to a line graph.
Line graphs can also be plotted with two or more scales to suggest a comparison of the
same value, or set of values, in different time periods. The number of scales your graph
has depends on the type of graph you select. There is a description of each available
graph type on the Graph types tab of the Graph Assistant.
Bar graphs. Bar graphs plot numerical data by displaying rectangular blocks against a
scale. The length of a bar corresponds to a value or amount. Viewers can develop a clear
mental image of comparisons among data series by distinguishing the relative heights
of the bars. Use a bar graph to display numerical data when you want to present
distributions of data. You can create horizontal as well as vertical bar graphs.
334 WebFOCUS
Pie graphs. Pie graphs emphasize where your data fits in relation to a larger whole.
Keep in mind that pie graphs work best when your data consists of several large sets.
Too many variables divide the pie into small segments that are difficult to see. Use color
or texture on individual segments to create visual contrast.
Scatter graphs. Scatter graphs share many of the characteristics of basic line graphs.
Data can be plotted using variable scales on both axes. When you use a scatter graph,
your data is plotted using a basic line pattern. Use a scatter graph to visualize the density
of individual data values around particular points or to demonstrate patterns in your data.
A numeric X-axis, or sort field, will always yield a scatter graph by default.
It is important to note that scatter graphs and line graphs are distinguishable from one
another only by virtue of their X-axis format. Line graphs can appear without connecting
lines (making them look like scatter graphs) and scatter graphs can appear with connecting
lines (making them look like line graphs).
Area graphs. Area graphs are similar to line graphs except that the area between the
data line and the zero line (or axis) is usually colored or textured. Area graphs allow you
to stack data on top of each other. Stacking enables you to highlight the relationship
between data series, showing how some data series approach or shadow a second
series.
3D graphs. 3D graphs add dimension to your graphing presentation. Dimensionality
enables your viewers to recognize trends based on two or more data sets easily. 3D
graphs also add impact to your presentation.
Bubble charts. Bubble charts are used to display three dimensions, requiring only three
COLUMN fields representing X, Y, and Z data values in that order. The data points can
be either opaque or transparent bubbles. If you want to visualize the precise data point,
you can add a dot in the center of the bubble. The size of the bubbles are proportional
to the values they represent.
Polar graphs. The Graph Assistant supports two styles of Polar graphs: an XY Polar
Chart or a polar coordinate scatter chart and an XY Polar Dual-Axis Chart or a Dual-Y polar
coordinate chart. In both styles, only one Column field is allowed in the following order:
X (degree) for the Column field and Y (distance from the center) for the Across/By field.
Radar graphs. Radar graphs are used to compare two or more data sets. You can use
axes or polygons to represent values in a star or spider configuration. They are essentially
analogous to a line chart, except that the scale wraps around. Radar graphs work well
with any data that are cyclical, such as the months of a year.
Stock Chart. Stock charts are used to track the trend of a particular stock. Stock charts
show the stock's volume, opening and closing values as well as the stock's high and
low values over a specific time period. The data is represented by sets of bars and/or
lines.

Histogram. Histograms depict the distribution of a data set by grouping all of the data
together and assigning it to buckets based on their value. You only measure one variable
in histograms. After the data is sorted by this variable, you count the number of instances
of this data. This determines the height of each bar. For example, if a company wanted
to measure how many franchises there are in each class of annual revenue, a histogram
would show the number of franchises that have 1,000,000 to 2,000,000; 2,000,000
to 5,000,000; 5,000,000 to 10,000,000; and 10,000,000 to 15,000,000.
Multi-y. A Multi-y is a vertical, triple/quadruple/quintuple-Y-axis clustered bar chart. Any
series can be assigned to any of the triple/quadruple/quintuple axes.
Waterfall. A Waterfall chart is a cumulative stacked chart. The waterfall chart will
automatically perform the cumulative sum when using Subtotal or Total. Waterfall charts
essentially require one data value for each series or group marker to be drawn in a chart.
Miscellaneous. The Miscellaneous Graph Type includes a variety of Graph Styles:
Default (Circular Gauge). A Gauge Chart usually indicates the current position of a
value within a given spectrum.
Funnel. A Funnel Chart is basically a pie chart displaying only one group of data at a
time from the first series to the last series at the bottom of the funnel.
Pareto. The X-axis scale is for the group members. The Y-axis scale is the percent
of the total accumulation for each selected series.
Product Position. A Product Position chart provides a visual representation of market
share and growth versus revenue and measurement (past, present, and future).
Product Position charts require a set of three display fields.
Resource Return. Resource charts plot X- and Y-axis data cumulatively. They are
useful for plotting two independent variables against each other, particularly in cases
where one or both of the axes specify percentages and the user wants to examine
issues such as capacity utilization.
Spectral Map. This is a Spectral Map Chart. This is a chart with row or column matrix
of markers that are colored according to data values.
Graph Styles
You can choose among several graph styles for each graph type. First you select the graph
type with which you want to work in the Graph Type drop-down list box, and then you select
the graph style from the Graph Styles drop-down list box. A thumbnail graph with a graph
type and style definition appears to the right on the Graph types tab.
336 WebFOCUS
Previewing Styling Options for Your Graph

The graph in the Graph Preview window displays the graph type and style you chose as well
as any styling information you specified from the template drop-down list or in the Properties
tab. The Preview does not open by default for other resolutions. In this case, you have to
click the Show Preview button.
The following image is of a bar graph that uses the 3DBAR graph style. This generic chart
is a two-dimensional chart with three-dimensional type bars.
The data used for this Graph Preview is built with the selected data sources' field format
types and lengths of the data. In this case, the X-axis field (car) is alphanumeric (A16) and
will be displayed as Axxxxxxxxxxxxxxx as the series label
where:
A
Represents the data type alphanumeric.

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Indicates the number of characters or digits allowed.

The Y-axis (dealer cost and retail cost) scale is based on a data range of selected Y-axis
fields.
You can manually update the Graph Preview by clicking the Update button to see how your
changes will look in a graph. You can choose to have the Graph Preview updated automatically
any time you make changes by selecting the Automatic update check box.
Important:
The graphical representation in the Graph Preview is based on an internal algorithm to
help show the type and style of the graph. It is not a true representation of your particular
data. However, legends and axis labels will reflect selected fields, formats and positioning.
An X11 Server is necessary when using Graph Preview on Unix installations.
Merged graphs are not supported in the Preview panel.
Auto Arranging Graph Elements
How to:
Arrange the Elements of a Graph Efficiently
Select a Graph Type and Style
The auto arrange feature enables the Graph Preview to arrange all the elements in a graph
report efficiently. The auto arrange feature is checked by default.
Procedure: How to Arrange the Elements of a Graph Efficiently

Check the Automatically arrange the chart elements so that they make the best use of the
available space option.
Note: This option is checked by default. If you uncheck this feature, WebFOCUS will arrange
the elements.
Example: Comparing the Arrangement of the Elements of a Graph

In the Graph types tab:
1. Uncheck the Automatically arrange the chart elements so that they make the best use of
the available space option.
2. Click Show Graph Preview.
338 WebFOCUS
The Graph preview window opens. The following image shows the Graph types tab with
a sample bi-polar stacked bar chart of a sales report with sales and mpg dimensions.
Note how the MPG symbol partially blocks the data along the right Y-axis.

3. Now check the Automatically arrange the chart elements so that they make the best use
of the available space option.
A new Graph preview window opens. The following image shows the same bi-polar stacked
bar chart with the elements arranged automatically.
Note how the Y-axes labels and X-axis labels fit within the size of the report.
Procedure: How to Select a Graph Type and Style

1. Highlight a graph type from the Graph Type list on the Graph types tab of the Graph
Assistant. Next, highlight a graph style from the Graph Styles drop-down list.
A thumbnail image and a brief description of the graph are provided when you highlight
a graph type and style. Be sure to read the description of the graph before selecting a
graph type and style. Certain graph types require a particular number and/or type of
data values; therefore, if your data does not satisfy the requirements, your graph will
not accurately represent your data.
2. After you have found the graph type and style you desire, click the next tab to continue
creating your graph.
340 WebFOCUS
Selecting Scales
How to:
Select Scales
After you have chosen a graph type, you should select an appropriate scale. A scale is a
classification scheme or series of measures that you select for application to the axes of
your graph. The scale provides the framework against which your data are plotted. When
you choose an appropriate scale for your data, meaningful patterns can emerge, and when
you modify a scale, the overall shape of your graph changes.
Steps or measures in the scale are represented along the axes of your graph by marks. The
type of scale you choose determines the number of divisions along the scale. There are two
general types of scales you can apply to the y-axis of your graph:
Linear scales
Logarithmic scales
A linear scale is a scale in which the values increase arithmetically. Each measure along
the scale is one unit higher than the one that precedes it. Linear scales are useful when
the data you are plotting are relatively small in range.
A logarithmic scale is a scale in which the values increase logarithmically. Each measure
along the scale represents an exponential increase in the data value. Logarithmic scales
are useful when you need to accommodate a large range of numbers.
Procedure: How to Select Scales

1. Click the Properties tab of the Graph Assistant.
2. Click the Y-Axis subtab.
3. Find the Log Scale check box. When this option is checked, the Y-axis scale uses
logarithmic scaling. When unchecked, the Y-axis scale uses linear scaling.


In this section:
Hiding the Display of a Y-Axis Field
Assigning Characteristics to Y-Axis Values
How to:
Select Values for the Y-Axis
Select Values for the X-Axis
Reference:
Notes on the Fields List
The values you select for the X- and Y-axes determine what data is included in the graph you
are creating, and how it appears.
You can also:
Select a second horizontal category (X-axis), which will produce multiple graphs. For
details, see Creating Multiple Graphs on page 357.
Temporarily hide the display of a Y-axis field. For details, see Hiding the Display of a Y-Axis
Field on page 345.
Interpolate X and Y-axis values using linear regression.
You can search fields lists. For details, see Searching Field Lists on page 219.
342 WebFOCUS
Note: Field names that contain a hyphen "-" cannot be used in the HTML Graph Assistant.
Reference: Notes on the Fields List

Joined fields are differentiated by color when the join is performed outside of the HTML
Graph Assistant, for example in the Join of a Reporting Object. The field list shows fields
in different colors based on the Master File they originate from. If you save and then
re-open the HTML Graph Assistant, the color assigned to the data may be different than
was previously assigned. Note that if a join is in the Master File, joined fields do not
show in different colors in the fields list.
Key fields are represented with a key icon in all field lists (tree and list displays) in the
HTML Report and Graph Assistant.
The number of fields that are currently displayed shows at the bottom of the fields list.
If a field list contains more than 200 fields, the first 200 fields display initially. Additional
fields are retrieved and displayed when you select the next set of fields.

To select the next set of fields, scroll to the bottom of the field list and select the Next
option that appears. The Next option describes which fields will be returned, for example
in the following image it shows that the next 201-400 fields of 417 will be retrieved:
To go back, scroll to the top of the field list and select the previous set of fields. For
example, the following image shows the Previous option to select the previous 1-200 of
417 fields:
If you are viewing a Fields List in the Dimension Tree mode and you create a recursive
join (joining a file to itself), you will not be able to view the Dimensions in the Fields List
after the join is created. This is due to duplication of field names in a recursive join. If
you delete the join, you will be able to view dimensions again.
Procedure: How to Select Values for the Y-Axis

1. Click the Field selection tab from the Graph Assistant.
2. If available, click the List or Tree icon.
3. Select the field from the Available Fields window and click the Add icon above the Field
value(s) plotted on Y-axis fields box.
or
Click and hold the left mouse button, and drag the field to the Field value(s) plotted on
Y-axis fields box.
or
Double-click a numeric field to automatically add it to the Y-axis fields box. Note that
only numeric fields, which include decimal, floating point, and other formats, are added
to the Y-axis.
4. Optionally, you can use shortcut keys.

Press Alt+C to go the Field value(s) plotted on Y-axis fields box. Then press Alt+M to go
to the Available Fields window, tab to the field, and press Enter to add the chosen field.
To add more than one field name at a time:

1. Ensure the List icon is selected.
344 WebFOCUS
2. Click the field names you wish to include. The fields will highlight as you click on them.
3. Drag and drop or use the Add icon to add all the selected fields to the Field value(s)
plotted on Y-axis fields box.
Note: The display field(s) determines the vertical Y-axis of the graph. When the number of
Y-axis labels is greater than one, the labels do not appear along the Y-axis. Instead, they
appear in a legend that provides the names of the fields being graphed.
Procedure: How to Select Values for the X-Axis

1. Click the Field selection tab from the Graph Assistant.
2. Select the field from the Available Fields window and click the Add icon above the Field
value(s) plotted on X-axis fields box.
or
Click and hold the left mouse button, and drag the field to the Field value(s) plotted on
X-axis fields box.
or
Double-click a non-numeric or date field to automatically add it to the X-axis fields box.
Note that only non-numeric fields, which are typically in alphanumeric format, and date
fields are added to the X-axis.
3. Optionally, you can use shortcut keys.

Press Alt+S to go the Field value(s) plotted on X-axis fields box. Then press Alt+M to go
to the Available Fields window, tab to the field, and press Enter to add the chosen field.
Hiding the Display of a Y-Axis Field
How to:
Hide the Display of a Y-Axis Field
You can hide the display of a Y-axis field in a graph. This option is useful when you want to
temporarily remove a particular Y-axis field while retaining all of the original graph properties.
To hide a Y-axis field temporarily, use the Make this field invisible check box located on the
subtab of the Show graph field options of the Field Selection tab. By default, the check box
is not selected for each Y-axis field. If there are no Y-axis fields, the Show graph field options
subtab is disabled.

Procedure: How to Hide the Display of a Y-Axis Field

On the Field selection tab:
1. From the Field value(s) plotted on Y-axis fields box, highlight the Y-axis field you want to
hide.
2. If hidden, click Show graph field options.
3. Check the Make this field invisible check box.
Assigning Characteristics to Y-Axis Values
How to:
Assign Characteristics to Y-Axis Values
You can assign a characteristic for each Y-axis field in your graph. In the following table, the
first column lists the prefix operators or characteristics, and the second column lists their
descriptions.
Summary Type Description
Field_Name (Plain field value)
ASQ Average Square
AVE Average
CNT Count
FST Show first in group
LST Show last in group
MAX Maximum
MIN Minimum
PCT Percentage
PCT.CNT Count Percentage
RPCT Row Percentage
TOT Total
346 WebFOCUS
Procedure: How to Assign Characteristics to Y-Axis Values

1. From the Field selection tab, select Summary Type under Y-axis values.
2. From the Field value(s) plotted on Y-axis fields box, select the field you would like to
assign a characteristic (or prefix operator) to.
4. Select the characteristic from the Summary Type list box.
The field name in the Field value(s) plotted on Y-axis fields box is updated with the appropriate
prefix. For example, if you have a field named SEQ_NO, and you select the Average Square
summary type, the field name changes to ASQ.SEQ_NO.

In this section:
When generating a report and specifying which fields to display, you may not want to show
every instance of a field. By including selection criteria, you can display only those field
values that meet your needs. In effect, you can select a subset of the data, which you can
easily redefine each time you issue the report request.
When developing a report request, you can define criteria to select records based on:
The values of an individual field (using a Where statement).
The aggregate value of a field, for example, the sum or average of a field's values (using
a WHERE TOTAL statement).
The Selection criteria tab enables you to create Where or Where Total statements for record
selection.

How to:
Select Records Based on Values, Parameters, Fields, or a Constant
Create a Where Statement Using Date and Time Values
Where and Where Total statements enable you to display only those records that pass your
selection criteria. These statements select the data source records to be included in a
report. The data is evaluated according to the selection criteria before it is retrieved from
the data source. Use the Selection criteria tab to create a new Where or Where Total
statement.
Note: In the Graph Assistant, when you create a Where statement in the Selection Criteria
tab for a range of dates using FROM - TO, you will not be alerted if the TO field is
chronologically before the FROM field. For example, if you enter something like "from
12/31/05 to 1/1/05". There will be no records in the resulting report.
Procedure: How to Select Records Based on Values, Parameters, Fields, or a Constant

1. In the Graph Assistant, click the Selection criteria tab.
conditions pane.
or
the chosen field.
The field name and EQUAL to and Select values appear in the Screening conditions
pane.
3. Select WHERE or WHERE TOTAL.

4. Select an operator from the drop-down list (for example, EQUAL to) in the right pane.
348 WebFOCUS
6. Select one of the following compare type option buttons:

Constant. Enter a value that will serve as a constant (a value that will not change).
For example, enter vehicle.
After you click OK, the constant, vehicle, appears in the WHERE statement which
reads BODYTYPE EQUAL to vehicle.
Parameter. Enter the name of the variable. For example, moped as shown in the
following image with the Parameter option button selected and the variable name
entered as moped.
You can set parameter properties, for details see Setting Parameter Properties on
page 353.
After you click OK, the parameter, &moped, appears in the WHERE statement which
reads BODYTYPE EQUAL to &moped.
Note: The ampersand is automatically added by WebFOCUS.

Fields. Select a field from the list.

After you click OK, the field BHP appears in the Where statement which reads
CAR.COMP.CAR EQUAL to CAR.SPECS.BHP.
Values. Select a value for the field you initially chose (in this case, car).
After you click OK, the value, Audi, appears in the Where statement which reads
CAR.COMP.CAR EQUAL to AUDI.
Procedure: How to Create a Where Statement Using Date and Time Values
In the Graph Assistant,
conditions pane.
or
the chosen field.
3. Click EQUAL to in the right pane to display a list of operators. Click the operator of your
choice.
5. Click Field to access date and time values for that field. For example, EYEAR.
350 WebFOCUS
6. Click Values and click the value of your choice. For example, 1989/01/18.
After you click OK, the value, 1989/01/18, appears in the WHERE statement which
reads START_DATE EQUAL to 19890118.
How to:
data.




9. Click OK.
11. Click OK.
352 WebFOCUS
existing values.
How to:
Set Parameter Properties
Reference:
Supported Operators for the Variable Editor
When you create parameters for Selection Criteria (WHERE statements) you can set the
properties for the parameter. For example, you can create a dynamic or static list of values
to choose from at run time.
Procedure: How to Set Parameter Properties

1. In the Graph Assistant, click the Selection criteria tab.
2. Create a WHERE or WHERE TOTAL expression.
3. Select an operator. Some operators are not supported with the Variable Editor, see
Supported Operators for the Variable Editor on page 354 for details.
5. Select the Parameter option.

6. Click the Auto Prompt button.
The Parameter Properties dialog box opens.
7. Verify the Name and Description fields, which are automatically populated based on the
field you are screening on. You can edit the populated values as needed.
Note:

8. Choose the Selection type, Dynamic or Static.

The Dynamic option is selected by default.
Optionally, choose the Select multiple values at runtime check box to provide multiple
values to the report from the auto prompt page at run time.
9. Set the parameter values.

For the Dynamic selection type, the Data Source and Field values are selected by
default based on the field you are screening on and can be changed as needed.
If you want to see the fully qualified Field name, select the Display fully qualified field
name check box. This setting is for display purposes only and is not preserved.
Note: When working with a Reporting Object, you can select only fields from data
For the Static selection type, select the Constant or Show field values option. For
Constant, enter one or more values. For Show field values, all of the values for the
selected field appear in the list box. Move the values you want from the selection
list to the Prompt values list.
10. Click OK to exit the Parameter Properties dialog box.
Reference: Supported Operators for the Variable Editor
Equal to Yes
Not equal to Yes
Greater than Yes
Less than Yes
Greater than or equal to Yes
Less than or equal to Yes
In literal list No
Not in literal list No
Missing No
354 WebFOCUS
Not missing No
From - to No
Not-from - to No
Includes literal list Yes
Excludes literal list Yes
Contains characters Yes
Omits characters Yes
Like character mask Yes
Not like character mask Yes
How to:
Combine Expressions
Delete an Active Expression
Use the right pane of the Selection Criteria tab to use or delete existing Where statements
and to combine expressions.
Procedure: How to Combine Expressions

1. Create an expression.

2. When you create additional expressions, they are combined with the default operator
AND as shown in the following image with two statements, the first a WHERE and the
second an AND statement.
3. Toggle between AND, OR, WHERE, and WHERE TOTAL by clicking the AND to make your
choice.
Procedure: How to Delete an Active Expression

1. Select the check box next to the expression you want to delete. Click the Delete icon
above the box.
2. You are prompted to delete the expression. Click OK to delete.
How to:
Group Where Statements Together Using Parentheses
You can use parentheses to group expressions together to optimize the Where statement.
Procedure: How to Group Where Statements Together Using Parentheses

Click the grayed out parentheses to activate the parentheses and group expressions together.

Filters enable you to quickly select predefined criteria that limit data included in a graph.
Filters are selection criteria (WHERE statements) that an Administrator creates for you to
apply as needed, without having to create your own selection criteria.
356 WebFOCUS
WebFOCUS displays filters in filter groups. Each filter group can contain multiple filters.
Selecting a single filter within one group creates a report with simple filtering criteria. By
selecting multiple filters within a group or combining filters from different groups, you can
create complex filtering expressions.
Note: Filters are only available when you are creating a graph using a Reporting Object as
a template. If you do not see filters, this means they have not been developed for this
Reporting Object. Filters are not available when building a Standard Report or a Custom
Report.
The following image shows a few sample filters as they appear in the Selection Criteria tab
of the HTML Graph Assistant. They are listed by Group and Name.

You can create temporary fields from the HTML Graph Assistant. Temporary fields are created
the same way in the HTML Report and Graph Assistant. For complete details, see Creating
Temporary Fields on page 222.

In this section:
Merging Multiple Graphs
Displaying Multiple Graphs in Columns
How to:
Create Multiple Graphs
You can create multiple graphs by selecting a second horizontal category (X-axis).

The number of graphs created depends on the number of values in the field you select. For
example, if you select a field with two values, two graphs are generated. If you select a field
with ten values, ten graphs are generated.
You can select the second horizontal category from the Field selection tab in the Graph
Assistant.
Multiple graphs can appear in either merged format or in columns. For details, see Merging
Multiple Graphs on page 358 and Displaying Multiple Graphs in Columns on page 359.
Procedure: How to Create Multiple Graphs

1. Click the Field selection tab of the Graph Assistant.
2. Select the field from the Available Fields window and click the Add icon to the Create a
separate graph for each value of this field box.
or
Click and hold the left mouse button, and drag the field to the Create a separate graph
for each value of this field box.
or
Press Alt+A to go the Create a separate graph for each value of this field box. Then
press Alt+M to go to the Available Fields window, tab to the field and press Enter to add
the chosen field.
3. If you want to change the title of the field name, click Show graph field option if hidden.
4. In the Axis label text box located under the General subtab, type the new field title name.
Merging Multiple Graphs
How to:
Merge Multiple Graphs
When you create a graph with a second horizontal category, multiple graphs are generated.
You can merge these graphs into a single graph.
You can do this from the Field selection tab in the Graph Assistant.
Procedure: How to Merge Multiple Graphs

2. Add a field to the Create a separate graph for each value of this field box.
358 WebFOCUS

4. Click the Merge graphs into a single graph option button. When you run your graph, the
display shows an X, Y, and Z axis to represent the dual X-axis and the Y-axis.
Example: Merging Multiple Graphs

The following illustrates a graph with two categories (Manufacturing Plant and Product Name)
that have been merged.
Displaying Multiple Graphs in Columns
How to:
Display Multiple Graphs in Columns
When you create a graph with a second horizontal category, multiple graphs are generated.
You can display these graphs in columns.
Procedure: How to Display Multiple Graphs in Columns

2. Add a field to the Create a separate graph for each value of this field box.

Working With Joins
4. Select the Display graphs in number of columns option button. This is the default
selection.
5. Select the number of columns to display the graphs. The default value of 1 displays all
of the graphs in one single column, one underneath the other. Selecting a number greater
than 1 places the graphs in an HTML table, with the number of cells across the table
corresponding to the number of columns specified.
Example: Displaying Multiple Graphs in Columns

The following image shows a graph that has a second horizontal category. The multiple
graphs that are generated appear in 2 columns since the Display graphs in columns option
button was selected when creating the graph.
Working With Joins

How to:
Create a Join
Create a Define-based Join
Create Multi-field Joins
Delete a Join
Edit a Join
A join is a temporary connection between two or more data sources that share at least one
common field. Once you join two data sources, each time WebFOCUS retrieves a record from
the first data source (host file), it also retrieves the matching records from the second data
source (target file).
You use the Join tool to link data sources in both Report Assistant and Graph Assistant.
The Join tool provides a graphical method for creating and manipulating joins. You can also
create define-based joins and multi-field joins.
360 WebFOCUS
When you access the Join tool, the window displays a field list for the host data source
(which you specified when you created the Standard Report or Reporting Object), and a field
list for any target data source you add to the window.
Important:
Only Managed Reporting Administrators and Developers have access to the Join Options
tab. The Join Options tab is only available to Analytical Users with the Advanced privilege
when creating a Custom Report. The Join Options tab is not available in self-service mode.
The Join Options tab is not available in the HTML Report or Graph Assistant for Developer
Studio. You can only create joins using the Join tool available in Reporting Objects.
Procedure: How to Create a Join

1. Click the Join Options tab in Report Assistant or Graph Assistant and click New.

The following image shows the Join settings window where you select fields from the
Host field and the Target field lists to create a join.

Working With Joins
3. Select the fields you want to join from the Host field list and the Target field list and
add them to their respective Selected Fields boxes.
or
Press Alt+T to go to the Target Fields list. Tab to the field and press Enter to add the
chosen field to the Selected Fields box.
create joins.
4. Select your join properties:

Unspecified. This option is selected in the Join properties when a join that was
created in a release earlier than Version 7, Release 1 is opened in the Join tool. In
versions prior to Version 7 Release 1, the defaults for join type and other operators
were assumed and not specified in the generated code. Since the Join tool cannot
determine the type of join that was created and if there were other commands set
to control the join, select the appropriate options (Inner Join, Left Outer Join, Multiple
Instances, Single Instances) from the Join tool to upgrade the generated code.
Inner Join. A join that results when a report omits host rows that lack corresponding
cross-referenced rows.
Left Outer Join. Extends the results of an Inner Join and retrieves records from both
host and cross-referenced tables, including all records from the left table (host) and
any records from the right table (cross-referenced) where the condition values match.
If there are no matching values in the cross-referenced table, the join still retrieves
records from the host table.
Multiple Instance (formerly Non Unique). A one-to-many join structure that matches
one value in the host data source to multiple values in the cross-referenced field.
Joining employee ID in a company's employee data source to employee ID in a data
source that lists all the training classes offered by that company would result in a
listing of all courses taken by each employee, or a joining of the one instance of
each ID in the host file to the multiple instances of that ID in the cross-referenced
file.
Single Instance (formerly Unique). A one-to-one join structure that matches one
value in the host data source to one value in the cross-referenced data source. Joining
an employee ID in an employee data source to an employee ID in a salary data source
is an example of a unique join.
5. To see the join syntax, click View.

6. Click OK.
362 WebFOCUS

Procedure: How to Create a Define-based Join


3. Click the down arrow of the Define icon and then click New define field.
The following image shows the list of Define field options.

Working With Joins
The following image shows the Define field creator dialog box where you create the
Define expression.
4. Create the defined field. The new define field appears in the Available fields list. The
field is prefixed with the define symbol as shown in the following image.
5. Add the defined field and the target field to their respective Selected Fields boxes.
create joins.
6. If you want to see the syntax, click View to display the define-based join syntax.
7. Give the join a meaningful and unique name in the Description box.
8. Click Save & Create. The new join appears in the Joins list.
Procedure: How to Create Multi-field Joins


3. Enter multiple fields in the Host field list box and one field in the Target field list box.
364 WebFOCUS
4. If you want to see the syntax, click View to display the multi-field join syntax.
Procedure: How to Delete a Join

2. Click Delete.
Procedure: How to Edit a Join

2. Make your desired changes.

How to:
Display Missing Values in a Graph
Reference:
Displaying Missing Values as Zero in a Graph
Displaying Missing Values as a Gap
Displaying Missing Values as a Dotted Line to Zero
Displaying Missing Values as an Interpolated Dotted Line
You can display missing data values (in a bar graph, line graph, area graph, or any variation
of these graph types) in one of the following formats:
Graph as zero. In bar graphs, a bar appears on the zero line. In line graphs, a solid line
connects the missing value with the succeeding value. In area graphs, the area appears
on the zero line.
Graph as gap. In all graph types (bar, line, or area), missing values appear as a gap in
the graph.

Dotted line to zero. In line graphs, a dotted line connects the missing value with the
succeeding value. In 3D bar graphs, solid lines outline the flat bar corresponding to the
missing value. In 2D bar graphs, a gap appears in the graph. In area graphs, a transparent
area extends down to the zero line and then up to the succeeding value.
Interpolated dotted line. In a line graph, missing values appear as an interpolated
dotted line that connects the plot points immediately preceding and succeeding the
missing value. In bar and area graphs, missing values display as an interpolated
(transparent) bar or area.
Procedure: How to Display Missing Values in a Graph

1. In the Graph Assistant, click the Properties tab.
2. Click the Y-axis subtab.
3. From the Missing values display list box, select one of the following values:
Graph as zero.
Graph as gap.
Dotted line to zero.
Interpolated dotted line.
366 WebFOCUS
Reference: Displaying Missing Values as Zero in a Graph

The following image illustrates how missing values are represented in a bar graph when
designated to appear as zero. The CURR_SAL values for McCoy and Stevens are missing.

Reference: Displaying Missing Values as a Gap

The following image illustrates how missing values are represented in a bar graph when
designated to appear as a gap. The CURR_SAL value for McCoy is missing.
368 WebFOCUS
Reference: Displaying Missing Values as a Dotted Line to Zero

The following image illustrates how missing values are represented in a line graph when
designated to appear as a dotted line to zero. The CURR_SAL value for McCoy is missing.

Reference: Displaying Missing Values as an Interpolated Dotted Line

The following image illustrates how missing values are represented in a line graph when
designated to appear as an interpolated dotted line. The CURR_SAL value for McCoy is
missing.

You can add further value to your graph by using conditional styling to highlight certain defined
data with specific styles and colors.Conditional styling, also referred to as stoplighting,
enables you to define conditions that determine when to apply particular fonts, point size,
text style, foreground and background color, and drill down procedures to your report's data
when the report is run.
For example, you can apply the color red to all departments that did not reach their sales
quotas and apply the color black to all departments that did reach their sales quotas. In
this example, the user can view quickly which departments did or did not reach their quotas.
To examine how the results of one department may impact the results of a second
department, you may want to provide a drill-down to a report that examines this possibility.
370 WebFOCUS
You can apply color to the following graph types:

Bar graphs.
Three-dimensional graphs with noncontinuous plot points.
Pie graphs.
Stack charts.
Conditional styling is only supported for Y-axis values.
Example: Applying Conditional Styling to a Graph

The following illustrates how you can apply conditional styling to a graph. In this example:
Blue is specified as the default color for all data in the graph.
Firebrick is specified as the color for data in the DOLLARS column.
Silver is specified as the color for data in the DOLLARS column when the value is greater
than five million.
Lime is specified as the color for data in the UNITS column when the value is less than
two hundred thousand.
The output is shown in the following image:

Linking Graphs to Other Resources

In this section:
Creating Parameters
How to:
Link a Graph to Other Resources
To drill down to a more detailed level of information in a graph, you can link a procedure
(FOCEXEC) or a URL to one or more values in your graph. When you run your graph, the
selected values become "hot spots" that invoke the underlying procedure or URL.
Procedure: How to Link a Graph to Other Resources

1. Click the Field selection tab in the Graph Assistant.
2. Select a field from the Field value(s) plotted on Y-axis list.
4. Click the Drill down button. The Drill Down dialog box opens.
5. Select either Execute Procedure (FOCEXEC) or Execute URL option button.
You can select the No action option button to disable a drill-down link.
6. If you are linking your graph to a:

URL, type the URL in the URL text box. If you do not want the URL to appear when a
user moves the mouse over a link in the graph, you can enter different text in the
Alternate Comment for Hyperlink text box.
Procedure, select the procedure from the hierarchy.
7. Use the Add button to add any parameters. For details, see Creating Parameters on
page 373.
8. Click OK.
Note: You can disable drill-down by following steps 1-3 and then selecting the No Action
option button from the Drill Down dialog box.
372 WebFOCUS
Creating Parameters
How to:
Create a Parameter in the Main and Drill Down Procedures
Parameters enable you to specify criteria and conditions for the associated (drill-down) report.
By defining parameters, you can control the amount and type of information to retrieve when
you click on a hot spot.
Note: To avoid conflicts, do not name variables beginning with Date, IBI, or WF, as variables
beginning with these values are reserved for Information Builders use.
Procedure: How to Create a Parameter in the Main and Drill Down Procedures
2. Create an expression (WHERE statement) that defines a parameter. For details on
creating WHERE statements, see Selection Criteria Tab in HTML Graph Assistant on page
415.
3. Select the Field selections tab.
4. Select the Sort by field that you want to drill down on, for example, Product.
5. Click Drill down. The WebFOCUS Drill Down dialog box opens.
6. Click Execute Procedure (FOCEXEC) or Execute URL.

The following image shows a sample drill down dialog box with Execute Procedure
(FOCEXEC) option selected.
374 WebFOCUS
7. Click Add. The Drill Down Parameter dialog box opens as shown in the following image.
8. Enter the name of the parameter you created in the drill down procedure in the Parameter
Name text box, for example, Coffee.
Note: When passing parameters to a drill-down procedure, you must use local variables
(&variables). Global variables (&&variables) cannot be used as drill-down parameters.
Also, it is not necessary to type an ampersand (&) before the parameter name. This will
create a global variable that cannot be used as a drill-down parameter.
9. When you pass the parameter to the drill down procedure, you must set a value for it
in the Drill Down Parameter Dialog box. If you select:
Field, the parameter will be set to the corresponding value of the object the user
drills down on in the specified field.
Constant value, the parameter is set to the specified value.
Note: If the drill-down report contains a -DEFAULTS statement that sets a default value
to the same variable passed from the main report, the variable value passed down
overwrites the -DEFAULTS statement in the target procedure.

10. Once a value has been supplied, click OK to return to the Drill Down Dialog box. The
parameter is added to the With Parameters list box as shown in the following image.
376 WebFOCUS
Adding Labels to a Graph

In this section:
Adding Vertical (Y-axis) and Horizontal (X-axis) Labels to a Graph
How to:
Add a Heading or Footing to Your Graph
Add a Field to a Graph Heading or Footing
Add Titles, Subtitles, and Footnotes to a Graph
Reference:
Location of Headings and Footings in Graph Output
Adding labels to your graph helps provide important information about what the data in your
graph represents. You may choose to add headings and/or footings to your graph, as well
as style legend text and horizontal (X) and vertical (Y) axis labels.
From the Headings tab of the Graph Assistant, you can add titles, headings, and footings
and customize them. For details on customizing, see Customizing Fonts in a Graph on page
382.
Note:
There is a 95-character limit for Graph Titles.
Dragging and dropping items, including images, is not supported in the HTML Graph
Assistant.

The following image shows the Headings tab with a list of available fields on the left and
the Page Heading and Page Footing fields on the right.
Note: If your graph labels or legends do not appear correctly when you run your graph, see
How to Change Color Settings on page 389 for details on correcting this.
378 WebFOCUS
Reference: Location of Headings and Footings in Graph Output

The following image illustrates where FOCUS Titles and Graph Titles appear in graph output.
Note that none of the headings in this sample have been formatted and appear in their
default format. Also note that the Graph Titles chart title will appear in the graph output as
well as in your browser's title bar.
Note: The graph preview reflects all display changes to the graph. FOCUS Titles are not
shown in the graph preview.
When you use the Graph Assistant to create a graph and add it to a report in the Document
Composer, if the graph contains FOCUS Titles (Page Heading, Page Footing), they are
automatically removed from the graph. To utilize headings or footings in a graph you intend
to add to the Document Composer, use the Graph Assistant to create Graph Titles (Chart
Title, Chart Subtitle, Chart Footnote). You can also add Text objects to a graph in the
Document Composer and position them to function as a heading or footing.
Procedure: How to Add a Heading or Footing to Your Graph

1. Click the Headings tab of the Graph Assistant.
2. Click the Page subtab.

3. Click in the text box or press Alt+H to enter a page heading title.
or
Click in the text box or press Alt+F to enter a page footing title.
Note:
If you change the font size of your heading (FOCUS titles), the code may not properly
reflect the font size you specified when you open the procedure in a text editor. This does
not affect functionality. You can edit the procedure manually to correct the size.
If you run a graph procedure that was created prior to Version 5 Release 2.1, the default
headings (large and bold) will be generated. However, after you access the procedure in
the HTML Graph Assistant, the heading is generated exactly as it appears in the headings
tab (normal size, no styling). (This happens because the HTML Graph Assistant adds the
TYPE=HEADING,$ syntax to the StyleSheet. This code does not generate any styling, but
it tells the server not to use the old default styling. To use the old styling, the administrator
must delete the TYPE=HEADING,$ syntax.)
When selecting a font for the page heading or footing, be sure to click in the text box
before you select the font name, otherwise the font may return to the original font
selection.
Procedure: How to Add a Field to a Graph Heading or Footing

3. Select a field from the Available Fields window and drag the field to the Page heading
or Page footing box.
or
Click and hold the left mouse button, and drag the field to the text box you chose.
The following table lists the shortcut keys you can use to quickly go to one of the text
boxes. The first column specifies the text box you go to when using the shortcut keys
and the second column shows the shortcut key combination.
Text Box Shortcut Keys
Page Heading Alt+H
Page Footing Alt+F
380 WebFOCUS
the chosen field.
Procedure: How to Add Titles, Subtitles, and Footnotes to a Graph

3. Enter the text for the Chart Title, Chart Subtitle, and Chart Footnote in the respective
boxes.
Note: There is a 95-character limit for Graph Titles.
Adding Vertical (Y-axis) and Horizontal (X-axis) Labels to a Graph

Vertical (Y-axis) and horizontal (X-axis) graph labels are placed on the graph according to the
display fields and sort fields specified in the request. The titles that appear on the graph
are the titles that appear in the Master File for that particular field.
The vertical (Y-axis) title of the graph is determined by the display field. Note that when the
number of Y-axis labels is greater than one, the labels do not appear along the Y-axis.
Instead, the labels appear in a legend that provides the names of the fields being graphed.
The horizontal (X-axis) title of the graph is determined by the sort field.
You can change the titles for the X and Y-axis from the Graph tab in the Headings tab in the
Graph Assistant.

In this section:
Selecting Graph Orientation and 3D Effects
Using Predefined Templates
Customizing Fonts in a Graph
Setting the Graph Height and Width
Using the Graph Assistant, you may customize your graph using the subtabs (Options,
Settings, X-axis, Y-axis, Pie) on the Properties tab. The customizations you can apply to your
graph include customizing fonts, output destination, graph on server, label locations for all
graph types, legend location, and much more.
You can also select the orientation of the X- and Y- axes and 3D effects as well as choose
a predefined template using the Graph types tab.

Selecting Graph Orientation and 3D Effects

You can select either vertical or horizontal orientation for your graph on the Graph types tab.
The default selection is vertical. If horizontal is selected, the X-axis appears along the side
of the graph while the Y-axis appears along the bottom. You can choose vertical or horizontal
orientation for Bar, Line, and Area graphs.
You can apply 3D effects to your graph, also on the Graph types tab. This option is not
supported for histograms, spectral, stock, or radar graphs. To display bubble help when
using 3D Effects, markers must be checked under Settings in the Properties tab.
Some graph types and graph styles require vertical and horizontal orientations, with and
without 3D effects. In such cases, the relevant option buttons are selected and grayed out.
You will only be able to make changes to orientation and 3D effects by changing the Graph
Type and Graph Style. For example, if you select the 3D Graph Type and Bar Graph Style,
the vertical option button is selected and grayed out.
Using Predefined Templates

When you check the Use a predefined template check box on the Graph types tab, you can
choose one of the color and texture templates from the drop-down list: Pastels, Beveled on
Tan, Color to White, Cylinder on Grey, Fade to Grey, Bumps, Greys, Plum On White, Red
Accent, Speckled, and True colors.
Customizing Fonts in a Graph
How to:
Arrange X-Axis Property Data Styles
Change X-Axis Label Fonts
Change Y-Axis Label Fonts
Change Graph Legend Fonts
Change Graph Title Fonts
You can change the font for the X and Y-axis data and labels, legend text, headings, footings,
subheadings, and footnotes. From the text properties dialog box you can customize the:
Font. Select the font type. Note that depending on what fonts you have installed on your
machine, some fonts in the text properties dialog box may not be distinguishable from
other fonts. In particular, Monospaced and Dialog Input may look the same as well as
Dialog and San Serif.
Style. Select the text style from normal, italic, bold, underline, or a combination of these.
382 WebFOCUS
Size. Select the font size.

Set Style for. Select either Title or Data to apply style changes.
Text Color. Select the font color.
Text Justification. Select left, center, or right justification.
Autofit. Automatically adjusts the font size to fit the graph and disables the Size
drop-down list. To select a different font size, uncheck this box and select the font size
in the Size drop-down list.
Wrap. Check this box to wrap the text.
Text Rotation. Select the data label to display horizontally, vertically (from top to bottom
or from bottom to top), and at a 45-degree angle.
Procedure: How to Arrange X-Axis Property Data Styles

1. Click the Properties tab and then the X-axis tab.
2. Click the Style Labels button to open the X-axis properties dialog box.

3. To enable the text rotation features, select the check box at the top of the X-axis
properties dialog box as shown in the following image.
Note: This option is grayed out if the Automatic Arrangement option is de-selected on
the Graph Types tab.
384 WebFOCUS
4. Under Text rotation, choose one of the following:

Horizontal
Vertical - Bottom to top
Vertical - Top to bottom
45-degree bottom to top
In this case, 45-degree bottom to top is highlighted. Accordingly, the Data Style label
is positioned at a 45-degree angle.
As you make changes to the text properties, sample text appears to the right and reflects
all selections. If you leave the Autofit check box checked for a particular object, the font size
will be automatically adjusted to fit your graph. You can also wrap the text by checking the
Wrap check box. Note that when you select the Wrap option, text only wraps to the next line
if there is not enough room to display the entire text in the chart.
The text properties dialog box can be invoked from many places in the Graph Assistant.
Depending on where it is invoked from, different options are available.
Note: You can choose Background and Frame colors in the Options tab in the Properties
tab.
Procedure: How to Change X-Axis Label Fonts

2. Click the X-Axis subtab.
3. Click the Style Labels button. The X-Axis Properties dialog box opens.
4. Select the font properties. You can change the fonts for the data text and for the x-axis
title text by selecting either the Data or Title option button.
5. Click OK.
Procedure: How to Change Y-Axis Label Fonts

2. Click the Y-Axis subtab.
3. Click the Style Labels button. The Y1 Axis Label Properties dialog box opens. If you are
selecting fonts for the Y2 axis, the Y2 Axis Label Properties dialog box opens; it contains
the same style options.
4. Select the font properties. You can change the fonts for the data text and for the y-axis
title text by selecting either the Data or Title option button.

5. Click OK.
Procedure: How to Change Graph Legend Fonts

2. Click the Settings subtab.
3. Click the Style legend text button.
The Legend Properties dialog box opens.
4. Select the font properties.

5. Click OK.
Procedure: How to Change Graph Title Fonts

2. Click the Graph subtab.
3. Click Style Title, Style Subtitle, or Style Footnote for Chart title, Chart subtitle, or Chart
footnote.
Depending on the option you select, the Heading Properties, Subheading Properties, or
Footnote Properties dialog box opens.
4. Select the font properties.

5. Click OK.
Setting the Graph Height and Width
How to:
Set the Graph Height and Width
The width (or horizontal axis) of each graph, which includes any surrounding text, is
automatically set to 770 pixels. When setting the graph width, you should allow for the
inclusion of any text required for the vertical axis and its labels along the left margin.
The height (or vertical axis) of your graph is automatically set to 405 pixels.
The vertical axis is automatically set to cover the total range of plotted values. The height
of the axis is set as high as possible (taking into consideration the presence of any headings
or footings and the need to provide suitably rounded vertical class markers). The range is
divided into intervals called "classes." The scale is normalized to provide class values
rounded to the appropriate multiples and powers of 10 for the intervals plotted on the axis.
386 WebFOCUS
Procedure: How to Set the Graph Height and Width

2. Click the Options subtab.
3. In the Graph Size field, select the Custom size option button.
4. Enter the horizontal (width) value and the vertical (height) value, both in pixels.
The horizontal value can be any number between 20 and 985.
The vertical value can be any number between 20 and 518.

In this section:
Graph Display Formats
How to:
Save Your Graph From the Graph Assistant
Save Your Graph to a File
Run Your Graph
Print Your Graph
Send Graph Output Directly to a Printer
Change Color Settings
Reference:
Saving Options
When you run your graph, you may print the output directly from the browser.
Note: If your graph labels or legends are not appearing correctly when you run your graph,
see How to Change Color Settings on page 389 for details on correcting this.
If you log off Managed Reporting without first closing the HTML Graph Assistant, you must
manually close the tool.
Procedure: How to Save Your Graph From the Graph Assistant

1. Click Save or Save As from the Graph Assistant.
2. From the Save New Standard Report dialog box, enter a name for the graph.

Note: If you are editing an existing graph, clicking Save will automatically save the edits to
the current graph file. You will not be prompted to name the file again.
Procedure: How to Save Your Graph to a File

Note: You must create a FileDef before you save a graph to a file. This is where the file will
be saved to. For details, see the Developing Reporting Applications manual.
2. Click the Options subtab.
3. Select File from the Output to list box.
4. Type the filename in the Name text box.
5. Select either HPNG, JPEG, GIF, PDF/SVG, or PDF/GIF from the format list box. The default
is PNG.
6. Click Run. The output file is saved in the directory specified in the FileDef if the
IBIJAVAPATH has been set as a system environmental variable. Otherwise, the output
appears in the browser in the specified format. From the browser you can save the graph
on your local system.
Note: You may open your output file by selecting Open from the File menu in your browser.
When saving a graph as a GIF file, if the graph contains a second horizontal category (that
is a horizontal field that produces multiple graphs), the value in the HEADING will not be
saved as part of the GIF file. Instead, the horizontal field name will be embedded in the
graph's page heading to identify the graph.
Reference: Saving Options

When you click the Save or Save As button you save your report (procedure). If you make
changes in your report without subsequently saving them and then click Quit, you are
prompted with the following options:
Yes. Click to save your changes and exit the report.
No. Click to discard your changes and exit the report.
Cancel. Click to return to your report to continue working or use Save or Save As to save
your changes and then click Quit to exit your report.
Note: In the HTML Graph Assistant, if you close the window by clicking the X, your changes
will not be saved.
388 WebFOCUS
Procedure: How to Run Your Graph

After creating your graph in the Graph Assistant, click Run from any tab in the Graph Assistant
to view your graph output.
When running graphs in GIF format on a UNIX platform with the HEADLESS configuration,
the graph may not appear properly. You may see a red X instead of your image. This is due
to Sun's methodology of creating images without a head, which does not currently support
GIF images.
Note: Running applet graphs in the HTML Graph Assistant with the setting
GRAPHENGINE=OLD works with both Sun's and Microsoft's VM. Applet graphs with the
setting GRAPHENGINE=NEW work only with Sun's VM. If you have a graph with the setting
GRAPHENGINE=NEW and you are using Microsoft VM, you should either update your Java
Plug-in or change your GRAPHENGINE setting.
GRAPHENGINE=NEW and GRAPHEDIT=ON are mutually exclusive. If you specify
GRAPHEDIT=ON and GRAPHENGINE=NEW, you get an error message stating that
GRAPHEDIT=ON is not supported with GRAPHENGINE=NEW.
Procedure: How to Print Your Graph

1. Run your graph.
2. From the browser, select Print from the File menu.
Procedure: How to Send Graph Output Directly to a Printer

1. From the Properties tab, click the Options subtab.
2. Select Printer from the Output list box.
You do not need to provide a name or select a format.
3. Click Run.
The graph prints to your default printer setting.
Procedure: How to Change Color Settings

1. From the Windows Control Panel, select Display.
2. Click the Settings tab.
3. In the Color palette box, click the drop-down arrow and select True Color (32 bit) or a
higher color count.
4. Click OK.

If you use different color settings from this recommended value, your graphs may appear in
grayscale format.
Graph Display Formats
Reference:
Choosing Formats for Output to the Screen, a File, or Printer
Following are descriptions of the graph display formats:

PNG (Portable Network Graphics). PNG graphs are bitmapped and can support 16
million colors. In addition, PNG graphs have lossless compression (data is decompressed
100% back to the original). Therefore, saving, altering, and resaving a PNG does not
degrade its overall quality. The PNG graph appears in the browser.
GIF (Graphics Interchange Format). GIF compresses well but only supports 256 colors.
The GIF graph appears in the browser.
JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group). A compressed file format.
SVG (Scalable Vector Graphics). SVG is a text-based graph file format that enables
Web application developers to design powerful, interactive graphs. SVG is compact and
generates high quality images on any media regardless of resolution. The SVG is viewable
with an Adobe plug-in.
Note: To include a graph in the Document Composer, the graph must be saved in .SVG
or .GIF format.
PDF/SVG (Portable Document Format/Scalable Vector Graphics). The SVG graph
is automatically embedded into a PDF and shown only on the screen. Drill down is not
available with this format.
PDF/GIF (Portable Document Format/Graphics Interchange Format). The GIF graph
is automatically embedded into a PDF and shown only on the screen. Drill down is not
available with this format.
Reference: Choosing Formats for Output to the Screen, a File, or Printer

When you create or edit a graph in Graph Assistant, you can choose among these formats
in the Output section in the Options tab. If you are designating Output To the Screen, all
options listed in Graph Display Formats on page 390 are available, as shown in the Format
drop-down list.
390 WebFOCUS
The following image shows the Options subtab.
If you are designating Output to File, the PNG, JPEG, GIF, and SVG options are available.

The following image shows the Output section of the Options subtab with the Output to File
option selected.
If you are designating Output to a Printer, the PNG, GIF, and SVG options also are available.
392 WebFOCUS
The following image shows the Output section of the Options tab with the Output to Printer
option selected.
Graph Types Tab

Reference:
Graph Types Tab: Graph Types Window
The Graph Types tab is used to create and view a graph type and style.

Graph Types Tab
Reference: Graph Types Tab: Graph Types Window

The following image shows the Graph types tab with a sample cluster bar chart.
In the Select Graph type component:

Select from the following graph types
Displays Line, Bar, Pie, Scatter, Area, 3D, Bubble, Polar, Radar, Spectral Map, Stock,
Histogram, Multi-Y, Waterfall, and Miscellaneous graph types.
Select from the following Graph Styles
Displays several graph styles customized for each graph type.
General options:
Vertical
Displays the data vertically, along the Y-axis.
Horizontal
Displays the data horizontally, along the X-axis.
394 WebFOCUS
Use 3D effect
Applies a three-dimensional look to either the vertical or horizontal data.
Apply
Displays the Pastels, Beveled on Tan, Color to White, Cylinder on Grey, Fade to Grey,
Bumps, Greys, Plum on White, Red Accent, Speckled templates, and True colors.
Reset button
Resets all styling information back to the default values.
Automatically arrange the chart elements so that they make the best use of
available space
Specify this option with a check in the check box.
The Graph type description component of the Graph Types tab includes a description of the
Graph type and style you have chosen, along with a sample graph. In addition, you have the
following options:
Show Graph Preview button
Displays the actual graph in a separate window with the options you specified.
Update button
Updates a graph after you make changes.
Automatic Update check box
Check to have your graph automatically updated each time a change is made.


Reference:
Field Selection Tab: Available Fields
Field Selection Tab: Graph Fields
Field Selection Tab: Field Options
Field Selection Tab: Field Creator Dialog Box
The Field selection tab, shown in the following image, is used to choose the fields you want
to use in a graph.
396 WebFOCUS
Reference: Field Selection Tab: Available Fields

The following image shows the Available fields area of the Field selection tab. The Available
fields area in the Field selection tab, as shown in the following image, provides the following
functionalities and options for selecting available fields in a graph.
Available fields
Displays a list of field names from the selected data source.
Define button
Click the Define button to select from New define field, Edit define field, or Delete define
field. If you select the New define field or Edit define field, the Define field creator dialog
box opens where you can create or edit a defined field. For more information, see Field
Selection Tab: Field Creator Dialog Box on page 406.
Tree button
When this button is selected, field names are displayed in a tree structure. Optionally,
data can be displayed in different ways by clicking the adjacent down-arrow to open a
drop-down list that provides options to Show name, Show alias, Show title, or Show
description. The Show Field Tree display type is the default value, and for some database
structures, the Show Dimension Tree option can be selected.

List icon
This button is selected by default to display a list of all field names. Additional related
information can be displayed by clicking the adjacent down-arrow to open a drop-down
list that provides options to display Name, Alias, Title, Format, Description, Segment,
and Filename. You can also choose the option to Sort by file order.
Reference: Field Selection Tab: Graph Fields

The Graph fields area in the Field selection tab, as shown in the following image, provides
the following functionalities, including many options, for selecting and displaying fields in a
graph.
You can view the selected fields with the following options:
Prefix with the segment name prefixes the selected fields with the segment name.
Prefix with the filename prefixes the selected fields with the name of the data source.
Show the field's alias instead of name displays the aliases defined in the Master
File instead of the field names.
Show field's title displays the titles defined in the Master File instead of the field
names.
Show field’s description displays the descriptions defined in the Master File instead
of the field names.
398 WebFOCUS
Field Value Plotted on X axis

Displays the horizontal (X-axis) field that was selected from the Available fields area.
Add button
Adds a field to the X-axis.
Remove button
Removes a field from the X-axis.
Create a separate graph for each value of this field
Displays the second horizontal (X-axis) field (formerly referred to as an Across field) that
was selected from the Available fields area.
Add button
Adds a second field to the X-axis.
Remove button
Removes a field from the X-axis.
Field value(s) plotted on Y axis
Displays the vertical (Y-axis) field that has been selected from the Available fields area.
Sum
Creates a graph that aggregates data by the X-axis field. This is the default.
Print
Creates a graph that plots each Y-axis field value on a record-by-record basis. If the
selected X-axis value is numeric, a scatter graph is generated; if the selected X-axis
value is alphanumeric, a line graph is generated.
New computed field button
Opens the Computed Field Creator dialog box where you can define the parameters
for a new computed field. You can also click the adjacent down-arrow to open a drop-
down list to select the Edit computed field option. For more information, see Field
Selection Tab: Field Creator Dialog Box on page 406.
Add button
Adds a field to the Y-axis.
Remove button
Removes a field from the Y-axis.

Move Up or Move Down buttons

Moves the position of the field within the graph.
Reference: Field Selection Tab: Field Options

Below the Graph fields area in the Field selection tab is the Field options panel you can
display by clicking Show - Field options or hide by clicking Hide - Field options. A different
Field options panel is displayed depending on whether you have a Y-axis, X-axis, or secondary
X-axis field selected in the Graph fields area.
For the Y-axis Field options Display tab:
The Display tab appears by default when the Field options panel is displayed for Y-axis fields
and provides the buttons, fields, and options described after the following image.

Check to temporarily hide the display of the selected Y-axis field.
Y axis field label
The selected Y-axis field name is automatically displayed. You can edit this field to
display a different label for the Y-axis field.
Summary Type
Select a summary type for the selected Y-axis field. The choices are: Plain field value,
Average Square, Average, Count, Distinct, Show first in group, Show last in group,
Maximum, Minimum, Percentage, Count Percentage, Row Percentage, Sum, and Total.
400 WebFOCUS
Field Color
Select to open a pop-up color palette, shown in the following image, where you can select
the display color for the selected Y-axis field.

Click to open the conditional styling dialog box, as shown in the following image, which
you can use to add conditional styling in a graph.
OK
Returns to the Field selection tab after the conditional styling is added to the graph.

Drill Down
Click to open the drill-down dialog box, which provides the fields and options listed after
the following image, that you can use to add drill down capability to a graph.
No action
This option is selected by default. (No procedure will be executed.)
Execute procedure (FOCEXEC)
Select this option to access procedures in the Standard Reports folder of the default
domain. Click the procedure you want to execute.
Show all domains
When Execute procedure (FOCEXEC) is selected, click this check box to gain
access to procedures in the Standard Reports folders of all available domains.
Execute procedure
The procedure you selected appears in this text box.
402 WebFOCUS
Execute URL
Select this option to enter the URL you want to execute.
With parameters
When a parameter is created, it is automatically added to this list box.
Alternate comment for hyperlink
Type text here to display in place of the hyperlink specified in the Execute URL field.
Add button
Click to open the drill-down parameter dialog box, which provides the fields and options
listed after the following image.
Parameter name
Enter the parameter name you created in the drill down procedure.
Parameter value: Field
The parameter will be set to the corresponding value of the object the user drills
down on in the specified field.
Parameter value: Constant value
The parameter is set to the specified value.
OK button
Returns to the drill down dialog box. The parameter is added to the With parameters
list box.

For the Y-axis Field options Visualize tab:

The Visualize tab appears when the Field options panel is displayed for an X-axis field and
provides the options described after the following image.
Force the values of this field to be plotted as:

Choose Bar, Line, or Area.
Place this field on the specified axis
You can choose 1st axis or 2nd axis. (Available for dual axis graph types only.)
For the X-axis Field options:
The General tab appears when the Field options panel is displayed for an X-axis field and
provides the fields and options described after the following image.
Sorting order
Click Ascending or Descending.
X-axis field label
The X-axis field name is automatically displayed. You can edit this field to display a
different label for the X-axis field.
404 WebFOCUS
For the Secondary X-axis (Across) Field options:

The General tab appears when the Field options panel is displayed for a second X-axis
(Across) field and provides the fields and options described after the following image.
Sorting order
Click Ascending or Descending.
Display graphs in number of columns
Merge graphs into a single graph
Click this option button to activate merge functionality.
Axis label
The selected field name is is automatically displayed. You can edit this field to display
a different label for this Across field.

Reference: Field Selection Tab: Field Creator Dialog Box

Use the Field Creator dialog box to create or edit Defined and Computed fields, as shown
Field
Enter a name for the computed or defined field.
406 WebFOCUS
Format
Click to display the Change Format dialog box, as shown in the following image.
Format types
Choose:
Alphanumeric
Floating point
Integer
Decimal
Packed
Date (opens additional date related fields in the dialog box)
Date-Time (opens additional date related fields in the dialog box)
Length
Choose an available number based on the format type you chose.
Select options
Choose options based on the format type you chose.
Tree or List mode buttons
Opens the field list in either tree or list mode.

Expression box
To create an expression, double-click fields or functions, select items (operators,
numbers, characters) from the Field Creator keypad, or type directly in the expression
box.
Functions button
Displays a list of predefined functions grouped into categories that include Character,
Data Source and Decoding, Date and Time, Format Conversion, Numeric, and System.
If you hover your cursor over a function, a brief description appears. The following image
shows the list of predefined functions that populate the Field Creator dialog box when
you select the Functions button.
Double-click the desired function to add it to the expression box in the Field Creator
dialog box. In the expression box, replace each of the function’s arguments with the
desired value or field name. Note that each of the available functions is a program that
returns a value. For more information about functions, see the Using Functions manual.
Concatenation operators
Concatenates two or more alphanumeric constants and/or fields into a single character
string. The concatenation operator has two forms: | (weak concatenation, which preserves
trailing blanks) and || (strong concatenation, which moves trailing blanks to the end of
a concatenated string).
408 WebFOCUS
IF... THEN... ELSE... operators

Creates a conditional expression. A conditional expression assigns a value based on
the result of a logical expression. The assigned value can be numeric or alphanumeric.
IF, THEN, ELSE logic expressions take this form:
IF expression1 THEN expression2 ELSE expression3
ELSE is an optional operator. All alphanumeric values in conditional expressions must
be enclosed in single quotation marks. For example, IF REGION EQ 'West'.
Logical operators
Used to create relational and Boolean expressions. A relational expression returns a
value based on a comparison of two individual values (either field values or constants)
and a Boolean expression returns a value based on the outcome of two or more relational
expressions.
The following logical operators are available:
adds the less than (LT) operator to the expression. This operator returns a value
if the value on the left is less than the value on the right.
adds the greater than (GT) operator to the expression. This operator returns a
value if the value on the left is greater than the value on the right.
adds the less than or equal to (LE) operator to the expression. This operator
returns a value if the value on the left is less than or equal to the value on the right.
adds the greater than or equal to (GE) operator to the expression. This operator
returns a value if the value on the left is greater than or equal to the value on the
right.
adds the equal (EQ) operator to the expression. This operator returns a value if
the value on the left is equal to the value on the right.
adds the not equal to (NE) operator to the expression. This operator returns a
value if the value on the left is not equal to the value on the right.
AND returns a value if both operands are true.
OR returns a value if either operand is true.
NOT returns a value if the operand is false.

Arithmetic operators
Click any of the arithmetic operators to use them in your expression: + (addition), -
(subtraction), * (multiplication), / (division), ** (exponentiation). Note that two operators
cannot appear consecutively.
Parentheses
Adds parentheses to the expression box. Parentheses affect the order in which the
specified operations are performed. Note that WebFOCUS performs numeric operations
in the order of parentheses, exponentiation, division and multiplication, and addition
and subtraction.
Quotation marks
Adds quotation marks to the expression box. Use single quotation marks to enclose
alphanumeric and date literals.
Uppercase (U key)
Converts entries in the expression box to uppercase. Note that field names are case-
sensitive.
410 WebFOCUS
Headings Tab
Reference:
Headings Tab: Page
Headings Tab: Graph
Chart Title, Subtitle, and Footnote Properties Dialog Box
The Headings tab shown in the following image is used to create headings and footings. It
has Page and Graph subtabs.
Reference: Headings Tab: Page

The Page subtab of the Headings tab shown in the following image is used to create report
headings and footings.
Report Heading
Enter the text for the heading in the Page Heading box.

Headings Tab
Report Footing
Enter the text for the footing in the Page Footing box.
Center
Center aligns the selected text. The Center option is available for upward compatibility.
Formatting tool bar
Cut, copy, paste. Cut or copy and paste a selection.
Select all. Select all highlighted text.
Remove formatting. Remove formatting from selection.
Font styles. Select from bold, italic, and underline.
Alignment. Select left, center, right, or bottom alignment.
Font. Select a different font from the drop-down list.
Font size. Select a font size from the drop-down list.
Text color. Select the text color from the color menu.
Background color. Select the background color from the color menu.
412 WebFOCUS
Reference: Headings Tab: Graph

The Graph subtab of the Headings tab shown in the following image is used to create chart
titles, subtitles, and footings.
Chart Title
Enter text for the chart title here. The chart title will appear in the graph output as well
as in your browser's title bar.
Chart Subtitle
Enter text for the chart subtitle here.
Chart Footnote
Enter text for the chart footnote here.

Headings Tab
Style Title, Style Subtitle, Style Footnote

To change the properties, click the Style Title, Style Subtitle, or Style Footnote button for
the respective text box (Chart Title, Chart Subtitle, Chart Footnote). For details, see Chart
Title, Subtitle, and Footnote Properties Dialog Box on page 414.
Reference: Chart Title, Subtitle, and Footnote Properties Dialog Box

Click Settings in the Headings tab in the Chart Title, Chart Subtitle, and Footnote areas to
open the Heading properties dialog box as shown in the following image.
Font
Select the font type.
Style
Select the font style.
Size
Select the text size.
Text Color
Select a text color from the drop-down list.
414 WebFOCUS
Text Rotation
Horizontal. Displays text in a horizontal orientation that reads left to right.
Vertical - Bottom to top. Displays text in a vertical orientation that reads from bottom
to top.
Vertical - Top to bottom. Displays text in a vertical orientation that reads from top to
bottom.
Text Justification
Indicate whether the text will be left, center, or right justified.
Autofit
Checked. Automatically adjusts the heading font size to fit the graph and disables the
Size drop-down list.
Unchecked. This is the default. To select a different heading font size, select the font
size in the Size drop-down list.
Wrap
Check this box to wrap the text.

Reference:
Selection Criteria Tab - Screen Conditions Window
Parameter Properties Dialog Box (Dynamic Parameters)
Parameter Properties Dialog Box (Static Parameters)
You can create WHERE and WHERE TOTAL statements from the Selection Criteria tab in the
Graph Assistant.

Reference: Selection Criteria Tab - Screen Conditions Window

The Screening conditions window shown in the following image allows you to drag and drop
a field from the Available Fields window.
WHERE/WHERE TOTAL
Use WHERE to select records based on the values of an individual field.
Use WHERE TOTAL to select records based on the aggregate value of a field, for example,
the sum or average of a field's values.
Fieldname
Is the field you initially chose.
Operator Expression
Select an operator from the drop-down list, for example, EQUAL to.
416 WebFOCUS
Select Values
Click to open the Values dialog box to select or enter values for the WHERE or WHERE
TOTAL statement you are creating. The following image shows the Values dialog box.
Constant
Type a constant value. To use multiple constant values, click the plus sign in the
Multiple values entered list box after each constant value that you type.
Select from file (Import) button
Opens the Select file dialog box. For more information, see Importing Values From
External Files for WHERE Statements on page 351.
Parameter
Type a parameter name. To use multiple parameter values, click the plus sign in the
Multiple values entered list box after each parameter name that you type.
Auto Prompt button
Opens the Parameter Properties dialog box. For details, see Parameter Properties
Dialog Box (Dynamic Parameters) on page 418 and Parameter Properties Dialog Box
(Static Parameters) on page 420.
Field
Select a field from the Field list box.

Values
Select a field value from the Values list box. To use multiple field values, click the
plus sign in the Multiple values entered list box after each field value that you select.
Multiple values entered
Displays the constants, imported values, parameters, or field values you added to
the Multiple values list box. Use the available buttons to add, remove, and change
the order of the selected values.
Reference: Parameter Properties Dialog Box (Dynamic Parameters)

The following image shows the Parameter Properties dialog box with the Dynamic option
selected.
Name
Name is the parameter name. This field is automatically filled in with information from
the selected field. You can change the name if desired.
Description
418 WebFOCUS
Note:
Selection
change them.
list.
Data Source
Select a data source that contains the values for the parameter. The data source must
be on your APP PATH.
Field
Select the field from the data source whose values will populate the selection list.

Reference: Parameter Properties Dialog Box (Static Parameters)

The following image shows the Parameter Properties dialog box with the Static option
selected.
Name
Is the parameter name. This field is automatically filled in with information from the
selected field. You can change the name if desired.
Description
Note:
420 WebFOCUS
Selection
change them.
list.
Constant
Enter one or more constant values.
Show field values
Shows the values in the selected field. Move the values you want in the selection list
to the Prompt values list.
Prompt values
Prompt Values are the values that appear in the selection list. You can use the available
buttons to add, remove, and change the order of the Prompt values.
Join Options Tab

Reference:
Join Options Tab: Add or New
Join Options Tab: Existing Join
The Join Options tab is used to create joins.

Join Options Tab
Reference: Join Options Tab: Add or New

The following image shows the Join Options tab.

Enter the name of a join you have previously created.
New
Press the New button to create a new join.
OK button
Click OK to select a Master File.
Cancel
Click Cancel to return to the Add/New Join window.
422 WebFOCUS
Reference: Join Options Tab: Existing Join

The following image shows the Join Options tab with an existing join selected.

Use the drop-down list to select the join with which you want to work.
Delete
Click to delete the join.
New
Click to create a new join.
Join Settings:
Description
Enter a description for your join.
Internal name
WebFOCUS assigns an alphanumeric name for the join, for example J001.

Join Options Tab
Unspecified
This option is selected in the Join properties when a join that was created in an earlier
release is opened. In prior versions, the defaults for join type and other operators were
assumed and not specified in the generated code. Since the HTML Graph Assistant
cannot determine the type of join that was created and if there were other commands
set to control the join, select the appropriate options (Inner Join, Left Outer Join, Multiple
Instances, Single Instances) from to upgrade the generated code.
Inner Join
A join that results when a report omits host rows that lack corresponding cross-referenced
rows.
Left Outer Join
Extends the results of an Inner Join and retrieves records from both host and cross-
referenced tables, including all records from the left table (host) and any records from
the right table (cross-referenced) where the condition values match. If there are no
matching values in the cross-referenced table, the join still retrieves records from the
host table.
Multiple Instance (formerly Non Unique)
A one-to-many join structure that matches one value in the host data source to multiple
values in the cross-referenced field. Joining employee ID in a company's employee data
source to employee ID in a data source that lists all the training classes offered by that
company would result in a listing of all courses taken by each employee, or a joining of
the one instance of each ID in the host file to the multiple instances of that ID in the
cross-referenced file.
Single Instance (formerly Unique)
A one-to-one join structure that matches one value in the host data source to one value
in the cross-referenced data source. Joining an employee ID in an employee data source
to an employee ID in a salary data source is an example of a unique join.
Save & Create
Once you have selected your host and target fields, click Save & Create to create the
join.
View
Click to view the syntax of your join, which displays the code sent to the WebFOCUS
Reporting Server to validate the join, but may not be the same code required to run the
report. This is the case for a DEFINE based JOIN where only the JOIN statement is
displayed for validation, but both the JOIN and DEFINE statements are needed when the
report is run.
424 WebFOCUS
Host Field List:

Define icon
Click the Define icon to select: New define field, Edit define field, or Delete define field.
If you select the New define field or Edit define field, the Define field creator dialog box
opens where you can create or edit a defined field.
Tree icon
Displays a tree structure of field names by segment with, segment, alias, title, description,
click on the field.
List icon
that opens a drop-down list: name, alias, title, remarks, format, description, segment,
and file name. You can also choose to sort by file order.
Add button
Adds a field.
Remove button
Removes a field.
Target Field List:
Select Target
Click to select a target Master File.
Tree icon
Displays a tree structure of field names by segment with, segment, alias, title, description,
click on the field.
List icon
that opens a drop-down list: name, alias, title, remarks, format, description, segment,
and file name. You can also choose to sort by file order.
Add button
Adds a field.

Properties Tab
Remove button
Removes a field.
Properties Tab
Reference:
Legend Properties Dialog Box
X-Axis Label Properties Dialog Box
Y-Axis Label Properties Dialog Box
Graph Assistant Properties Tab (Options)
Graph Assistant Properties Tab (Settings)
Graph Assistant Properties Tab (X-Axis)
Graph Assistant Properties Tab (Y-Axis)
Graph Assistant Properties Tab (Pie)
The Properties tab is used to set properties options for one or more components of a graph.
426 WebFOCUS
Reference: Legend Properties Dialog Box

Click the Style Legend Text button on the Settings tab in the Properties tab to open the
Legend properties dialog box as shown in the following image.
Font
Style
Size
Text Color

Properties Tab
Text Rotation
Horizontal. Displays legend text in a horizontal orientation that reads left to right.
Vertical - Bottom to top. Displays legend text in a vertical orientation that reads from
bottom to top.
Vertical - Top to bottom. Displays legend text in a vertical orientation that reads from
top to bottom.
Text Justification
Autofit
Checked. This is the default. Automatically adjusts the legend font size to fit the graph
and disables the Size drop-down list.
Unchecked. To select a different legend font size, uncheck this box and select the font
Wrap
Checked to enable wrapping the text.
428 WebFOCUS
Reference: X-Axis Label Properties Dialog Box

Click the Style Labels button on the X-axis tab of the Properties tab to open the X-axis
Font
Style
Size
Text Color

Properties Tab
Text Rotation
to top.
bottom.
45-degree bottom to top. Displays text in a diagonal that reads from bottom to top.
Text Justification
Set Style For
Select to style Title or Data.
Autofit
Checked. This is the default. Automatically adjusts the X-axis font size to fit the graph
and disables the Size drop-down list.
Unchecked. To select a different X-axis font size, uncheck this box and select the font
Wrap
430 WebFOCUS
Reference: Y-Axis Label Properties Dialog Box

Click the Style Labels button on the Y-axis tab of the Properties tab to open the Y-axis
Font
Style
Size
Text Color
Text Rotation

Properties Tab
to top.
bottom.
45-degree bottom to top. Displays text in a diagonal that reads from bottom to top.
Text Justification
Set Style For
Select to style Title or Data.
If you have selected more than one Y-axis field, the Title option will not be available in
the Label Properties dialog box. The Data option will be selected by default.
Autofit
Checked. Automatically adjusts the Y-axis font size to fit the graph and disables the
Size drop-down list.
Unchecked. This is the default. To select a different Y-axis font size, select the font
Wrap
432 WebFOCUS
Reference: Graph Assistant Properties Tab (Options)

The following image shows the Options subtab of the Properties tab.
Graph Size
Select the WebFOCUS default size, let the applet application choose the size, or set a
custom size for horizontal and vertical, both in pixels. For more information about graph
size, see How to Set the Graph Height and Width on page 387.
Output
Select Screen, File, or Printer from the list box. If you select:
Screen, the output appears in the browser. Choose: PNG, SVG, GIF, JPEG, PDF/SVG,
PDF/GIF.
File, enter a file name and select a file type: PNG, SVG, GIF, or JPEG.

Properties Tab
Printer, graph output is sent directly to your browser's default printer. Choose: PNG,
SVG, GIF, JPEG.
Note: To include a graph in the Document Composer, the graph must be saved in .SVG
format.
Background Color
Select a background color from the color picker for the current graph.
Frame Color
Select a frame color from the color picker for the current graph.
Stop retrieving records after the specified number have been included in the report.
Record limits are used to limit the amount of data that appears or is used in your graph.
Limit the number of read operations performed during report generation.
Read limits are used to limit the amount of records retrieved (or read) from the data
source. The Read Limit option is not available with FOCUS data sources.
Summary Text for Graph
Provides a SUMMARY attribute for reports and graphs that maps to the HTML <TABLE
SUMMARY> tag. A description of the graph is placed into a summary object inside the
HTML table in the source code. This complies with section 508 accessibility.
The description of the graph can be no longer than 500 characters.
434 WebFOCUS
Reference: Graph Assistant Properties Tab (Settings)

The following image shows the Settings subtab of the Properties tab.
Graph Settings
Show Data Values
Check this box to display data values in your graph. If this box is unchecked, data values
will not be included.
FOCUS Grid
Grids are parallel lines drawn across a graph at the vertical and horizontal class marks
on the axes. Check this box if you wish grid lines displayed. This option is only available
on connected point plots, histograms, bar charts, and scatter diagrams.

Properties Tab
Graph on Server
Runs the graph on a server (rather than your local machine) and produces the graph as
an HTML file with a GIF image. Graph on Server cannot be used when the Enable
Zoom/Pan box is checked.
Note: This option is only available if the server was configured for server side graphics.
Enable Zoom/Pan
Enables you to zoom on a graph. This feature is available for all graphs except radar,
polar, 3D, pie, spectral, and stock graphs. Enable Zoom/Pan cannot be used when the
Graph on Server box is checked.
Legend Settings
Show Legend
Check this to display the legend in your graph.
Legend Style
Select the position of the legend's text. You may select to have the legend's text on the
right or left side, above or below the legend marker, or inside the legend marker.
Reverse Legend Order
Enables the display of the graph legend in reverse order. This is generally most helpful
when Reverse Order of Groups is selected.
Style Legend Text
Opens the Legend properties dialog box where you can select and style the font for the
legend text.
Markers
Select how you want markers (shapes that represent data points) to appear on your
graph.
Show Markers
Will show marker shapes at the data points on line graphs. You must have this option
set to on in order for values to appear when you hover your cursor over an area or
line graph.
Use on Legend
Will show marker shapes on the graph legend.
Show Lines
Is the default in the Markers group. When this check box is deselected, marker
shapes show on a line graph, but connecting lines are not drawn.
436 WebFOCUS
Reference: Graph Assistant Properties Tab (X-Axis)

The following image shows the X-axis subtab of the Properties tab.
Show axis labels

Top - X-axis labels appear above vertically oriented graphs and to the right of horizontally
oriented graphs.
Bottom - X-axis labels appear below vertically oriented graphs and to the left of
horizontally oriented graphs. (This is the default.)
Top and Bottom - X-axis labels appear both above and below vertically oriented graphs
and to both the left and right of horizontally oriented graphs.
Stagger Labels - When this box is checked, X-axis labels will be staggered.
Hide first label - When this box is checked, the first X-axis label will not appear.
Hide last label - When this box is checked, the last X-axis label will not appear.

Properties Tab
Value Format
Enables you to select a format for the display of X-axis values. You can only change the
display format if your x-axis values are numeric and the graph style is bubble, histogram
(bar), or scatter.
Style Labels
Opens the X-axis properties dialog box where you can select and style the fonts for the
X-axis.
Reverse order of groups
When checked, enables the display of the groups (X-axis) data in reverse order. When
unchecked, the graph will display groups in natural order.
Major grid lines
Divide a graph at regular intervals according to the scale. Major grid lines cross their
axis line at the exact location of the scale label. Styles include:
Regular Grids - Normal grid lines that are the height of the frame.
Grids and Ticks - Normal grid lines that extend outside the frame.
Inner Ticks - Small tick marks from the frame edge inward.
Outer Ticks - Small tick marks from the frame edge outward.
Spanning Ticks - Small tick marks that span the frame edge.
Minor grid lines
Divide a graph at regular intervals according to the scale. Minor grid lines cross their
axis line at equal intervals between major grids/ticks; they never align directly with a
scale label. Styles include:
438 WebFOCUS
Reference: Graph Assistant Properties Tab (Y-Axis)

The following image shows the Y-axis subtab of the Properties tab.
Axis Selection List Box

If you have more than one Y-axis, select which axis you would like to apply properties to
here, either Y1 Axis or Y2 Axis.
Show axis labels
Left Side - Y-axis labels will appear on the low (bottom or left) side of the graph.
Right Side - Y-axis labels will appear on the high (top or right) side of the graph.
Both Sides - Y-axis labels will appear on both the low and high sides of the graph.
Hide Maximum Value - When checked, the largest Y-axis label will not appear.
Hide Minimum Value - When checked, the smallest Y-axis label will not appear.

Properties Tab
Always include Zero on Scale - Includes zero on the Y-axis scale when checked. If
you have manually set your scale range to exclude zero, this property will be ignored.
Log Scale - When checked, the Y-axis scale will use logarithmic scaling. When unchecked,
the Y-axis scale will use linear scaling.
Value Format
Enables you to select a format for the display of Y-axis series values. Value Format
cannot be used in combination with Slice Label.
Style Labels
Opens the Y-axis properties dialog box where you can select and style the fonts for the
Y-axis.
Reverse order of series
When checked, enables the display of the series (Y-axis) data in reverse order. When
unchecked, the graph will display its series in natural order.
Descending Axis
Inverts the direction of the Y-axis so values of zero or less appear at the top of the graph,
while values greater than zero appear at the bottom of the graph.
Axis Line
Enables the display of the Y-axis base line.
Zero Line
Enables the display of the Y-axis Zero line when zero is within the Y-axis range.
Missing Values Display
Displays missing data values (in a bar graph, line graph, area graph, or any variation of
these graph types) in one of the following formats:
Graph as zero.
Graph as gap.
Dotted line to zero.
Interpolated dotted line.
Major Grid Lines
Divide a graph at regular intervals according to the scale. Major grid lines cross their
axis line at the exact location of the scale label. Styles include:
440 WebFOCUS
Minor Grid Lines
Divide a graph at regular intervals according to the scale. Minor grid lines cross their
axis line at equal intervals between major grids/ticks; they never align directly with a
scale label. Styles include:
Reference: Graph Assistant Properties Tab (Pie)

The following image shows the Pie subtab of the Properties tab.
Show Axis Labels

When checked, enables the display of feelers and data text in a pie graph.
Feeler Lines and Labels - Shows both feelers and data text.
Labels Only - Shows only data text.
Labels on Slices - Shows data text on slices.
A feeler is a line or set of lines that stretch from a pie slice label to its pie slice. Feelers
are visual aids that help you know that a particular number belongs to a particular pie
slice.

Properties Tab
Slice Label
When this option button is selected, the Y-axis label will appear at the end of the feeler.
Percent Value
When this option button is selected, the Y-axis value expressed as a percentage appears
at the end of the feeler.
Slice Label and % Value
When this option button is selected, the Y-axis label, and its value expressed as a
percentage, appear at the end of the feeler.
True Value of Slice
When this option button is selected, the Y-axis value appears at the end of the feeler.
Value Format
Enables you to select a format for the display of Y-axis series values. Value Format
cannot be used in combination with Slice Label.
442 WebFOCUS
WebFOCUS
8 Analyzing Data in an OLAP Report
WebFOCUS Online Analytical Processing (OLAP) enables you to view and quickly analyze data in order to
make critical business decisions.
Topics:
Limiting Data
We Do It Every Day: Typical Web Query Visualizing Trends
OLAP Reporting Requirements Displaying Graphs and Reports
Characteristics of an OLAP Report Controlling the Display of Measures in a Report
Three Ways of Working With OLAP Data Adding and Removing Dimensions
Drilling Down On Dimensions and Measures Saving OLAP Reports
Sorting Data Saving and Displaying OLAP Reports and
Graphs in Other Formats
Performing a Calculation on a Measure

We Do It Every Day: Typical Web Query

In this section:
Running OLAP Examples
Suppose that you own a small business in New York and are exploring a partnership with a
company in Oakland, California. You need to get to a Monday morning meeting. How do you
go about arranging your flight?
Most likely, you go online.
First, you check available flights on the airline that holds your frequent flyer miles. You
discover that your frequent flyer carrier requires a change of planes and you would prefer a
direct flight, so you look at routes and fares for other airlines.
In New York, you can get to LaGuardia, JFK, and MacArthur airports on Long Island. In
California, you can fly into Oakland or San Francisco.
While you would prefer to fly out on Sunday and return Tuesday morning, you could consider
a Saturday flight to California and a return flight on the red-eye Monday night, if fares and
schedules are better.
You begin your search by airline and then look at options for each departure point and
destination, by day, time and price.
Another approach is to start with an online consolidator, enter the times you can fly, and
see what flights and fares are available.
There are a lot of variables to play with, but in ½ hour you have done your research and can
make a good decision based on all available factors.
The Web sites you access are designed to facilitate your queries. Various menus and selection
panes make it easy to pursue each line of inquiry. Required and optional information is
identified for you. You can move forward down a path of choices, backtrack and start down
a different path, or resume the original path with different selections.
You need to keep track of the question you want to answer, but a well-designed site makes
your investigation easy. For most of us, this process has become intuitive.
The same process works when analyzing the data in an OLAP-enabled WebFOCUS report.
444 WebFOCUS
8. Analyzing Data in an OLAP Report
Running OLAP Examples

You can run all of the examples in this chapter using several OLAP-enabled Standard Reports.
If the reports are not already available in your sample repository, ask your Managed Reporting
administrator to provide them for your use. There are 9 reports named olaprep1.fex through
olaprep9.fex. and are located in the \ibinccen directory. If you have installed a non-English
version of the 'ibincc' directory, you will need to install the English version (ibinccen) in order
to access these files.
Each example indicates which Standard Report to run. After the report appears in your
browser, you can perform the analytic task shown, or pursue your own line of inquiry.
Suppose that you are an analyst for the fictional Century Corporation, which manufactures
electronics equipment. You need to determine which of the stores that sells your products
had the highest sales in 2002, and whether there is a pattern in sales periods and/or best
selling products that should be considered when planning manufacturing schedules and
parts inventories.
You have created a base report that shows sales data only for 2002. You have also OLAP-
enabled the report to permit quick analysis of the data.
1. Run the Standard Report OLAPREP1.
Before you begin your analysis, the OLAP report looks like the following image.
The Quarterly information is spread out over the left-most column. You can try a horizontal
display to make comparison easier.

2. Drag and drop QUARTER above the report.

The report changes immediately and appears, as shown in the following image, across
the top of the report with the Quantity and Line Cost of Goods Sold columns repeating
for each quarter. The store information is more compact, but it is no easier to identify
the store with the best sales record, so drag QUARTER back to its original position.
446 WebFOCUS
3. Right-click Line Cost of Goods Sold and choose Visualize as shown in the following image.
This applies a data visualization bar graph to each value in the column.
Note: The options available may vary, depending on your OLAP format settings. For more
information, see Setting OLAP Reporting Options on page 454.
The display changes as shown in the following image. The bar graphs still do not reveal
a trend.
4. Sort the data by highest value by either right-clicking Line Cost of Goods Sold and choosing
Sort by Highest, or clicking the Up arrow (the tool tip reads Sort LINE_COG highest to
lowest).

As shown in the following image, the report shows Audio Expert has the highest sales in
the digital product lines in Quarters 1 and 2, with eMart trailing slightly. Each value under
the QUARTER, Store Name and PRODTYPE column is hyperlinked for more details.
5. Click Q2 for Audio Expert to check the monthly breakdown.

In the monthly report, both stores recorded their highest sales in June (06). Filter out the
other stores and focus on Audio Expert in June.
448 WebFOCUS
6. Click Audio Expert as shown in the following image.
You now see information for digital and analog sales at Audio Expert. Since the significant
sales for Audio Expert are in the digital area, let's see which digital products contributed
to the June figures.
7. Click Digital as shown in the following image.
The breakdown shows clearly that PDAs drove Audio Expert digital sales.

8. Click PDA Devices to see the details as shown in the following image.
As shown in the following image, ZT Digital PDA - Commercial was by far the top seller.
Let's now see what drove digital sales at eMart, the second highest producer.
9. Click the browser's Back arrow until you return to the following window. This time, click
eMart, as shown in the following image.
Once again, the digital category leads sales.
450 WebFOCUS
10. Click Digital as shown in the following image.
PDA is the strong seller here too.

11. Click PDA Devices as shown in the following image to examine the models that comprise
these sales.
The report shows sales figures for the two digital models as shown in the following image.
ZT Digital PDA - Commercial far outsells ZC Digital PDA -Standard.

This information from the two top selling stores suggests that Century Corporation should
evaluate and adjust available parts inventories for each model and consider shifting
production schedules of plants to produce more Commercial units.
You have done all of your data manipulation from the report. But, because of the options
you selected when OLAP-enabling this report, it is easy to expose the OLAP Selections
pane where you can review the selections that are currently in effect, and make additional
selections if you like. For details on OLAP set-up options, see OLAP-Enabling a Report on
page 453.

OLAP Reporting Requirements
12. To expose the OLAP Selections pane, right-click Product Name and select Show Panel
from the menu as shown in the following image.
The selection panel appears above the report as shown in the following image.
Notice that STORENAME is eMart, PRODTYPE is Digital, and PRODCAT is PDA Devices.

In this section:
OLAP-Enabling Data
OLAP-Enabling a Report
OLAP Terminology
OLAP reporting requires some preparation both of the data to be reported against and of
the report itself. In many instances, this preparation is entirely transparent, having been
done before a user encounters an OLAP report. However, for developers who are charged
with OLAP-enabling data and reports and for users who wish, and are authorized, to OLAP-
enable their personal reports, the following summary will be useful.
452 WebFOCUS
OLAP-Enabling Data
Behind the scenes of any WebFOCUS OLAP report is a hierarchical data structure. For
example, a typical hierarchy of sales regions might contain a GEOGRAPHY category including
the fields (in descending order) Region, State, and City. Region, the highest level in this
hierarchy, would contain a list of all available regions within GEOGRAPHY. State, the second
highest level in the hierarchy, would contain a list of all available states within those regions,
and so on.
In WebFOCUS, the hierarchical structure is generally built into the Master File for a data
source, where it becomes active for any report that uses that data source. Developers or
administrators who are responsible for describing data in a Master File can use WebFOCUS
language. The keyword WITHIN defines the elements in each dimension in the hierarchy.
In addition, those working in Developer Studio have access to a variety of graphical tools
that make it easy to drag and drop fields into position to form a hierarchy. The hierarchy
may be global to all procedures or local to one procedure. To define a:
Global hierarchy in a Master File for use with multiple procedures, use the Dimension
Builder.
Local hierarchy as a component of a particular procedure, use the Dimension tool. The
hierarchy you define with this tool does not affect the source Master File.
For details about these related tools, see the Describing Data With Graphical Tools manual.
OLAP-Enabling a Report
Reference:
Setting OLAP Reporting Options
In addition to using OLAP-enabled data, a report must be enabled to support OLAP analysis.
OLAP-enabling a report consists of specifying how a user will interact with and drill down on
OLAP data.
The primary interactions occur in the report itself. In addition, you can choose to expose two
supplementary tools, the OLAP Selections pane and the Control Panel.

Reference: Setting OLAP Reporting Options

Developer Studio
In Developer Studio, OLAP options are available on the Report Painter's Report Options
Features tab. The relevant options—Enable OLAP and Automatic Drill Down—are located in
the OLAP section of tab, as shown in the following image.
Tip: In the Report Painter, you can also make OLAP selections from the OLAP option on the
Report menu.
OLAP Interface Options
The Enable OLAP options in Developer Studio control how users can interact with an OLAP
report and access OLAP tools.
454 WebFOCUS
For Standard Reports delivered to Managed Reporting users, these decisions are made by
Managed Reporting content developers. However, users who are creating their own reports
can OLAP-enable them and control the OLAP interfaces and following drill-down options.
Disabled. OLAP options are disabled and not shown in the OLAP report.
Off. Turns off the OLAP Control Panel and the OLAP Selections pane, but allows OLAP
functionality from the report itself. You can access options on right-click menus, drag
and drop columns within the report, and use up and down arrows to sort columns from
high to low or vice versa.
On. Provides access to the OLAP Selections pane from a square button to the left of the
column titles. You can open the Control Panel by clicking the OLAP button in the OLAP
report.
Top Panel. Opens the OLAP Selections pane above the report. The Measures, Graph,
and Dimension controls, as well as the band containing the OLAP, Run, and Reset buttons
appear above the report output. You can open the Control Panel by clicking the OLAP
button on the Selection pane.
Bottom Panel. Opens the OLAP Selections pane below the report. The Measures, Graph,
and Dimension controls, as well as the band containing the OLAP, Run, and Reset buttons
appear below the report output. You can open the Control Panel by clicking the OLAP
button on the Selection pane.
Hidden Panel. Opens the OLAP report with the OLAP Selections pane hidden. You can
perform a variety of analytic tasks from the report itself. Selection Criteria is shown next
to the OLAP button.
Show Tabbed. For OLAP reports that have multiple dimensions, this option groups the
dimension elements under a tab labeled with the dimension name.
Drill Down options
These options enable you to sort instantly from high to low or low to high for selected report
columns:
None. Disables automatic drill downs.
Dimensions. Enables automatic drill downs on dimensions in both reports and graphs.
Dimensions and Measures. Enables automatic drill downs on dimensions in both
reports and graphs and, also, on measures in reports.
Note: Explicit drill downs in a StyleSheet (if they exist) take precedence over OLAP-enabled
hyperlinks. If you click a hyperlink associated with an explicit drill-down, the behavior will be
defined by the StyleSheet rather than by the AutoDrill On or All settings.

OLAP Terminology
The following table describes OLAP terms that may be useful as you work in the WebFOCUS
OLAP tools. Some of these terms are directly reflected in the interfaces of the OLAP Selections
pane and the OLAP Control Panel. Others provide useful background information.
The first column of the following table provides the term and the second column provides
the definition.
Term Definition
Dimension Group or list of related elements, usually structured in a hierarchy. For

example, a Location dimension could include the elements Country, Region,
State, and City arranged in a hierarchy where Country is the top level and
City is the base level. Dimensional data usually describes the measured
item.
Hierarchy Logical parent-child structure of elements within a dimension.
Measure Type of item that specifies the quantity of another element with which it is
associated. A measure typically defines how much or how many. For example,
Units, Revenue, and Gross Margin are measures in the Account dimension
and specify how many units were sold, how much revenue was generated,
and at what profit margin, respectively.
Pivot Manipulating (or rotating) the view of a report by moving a field (or a group
of fields) from a column to a row, or vice versa.
456 WebFOCUS
Characteristics of an OLAP Report

An OLAP-enabled report has a number of features that distinguish it from other WebFOCUS
reports.
A basic OLAP report is shown in the following image.
Every OLAP user can take advantage of the analytic features that are built into the OLAP
report:
Hyperlinks. The values in an OLAP report are usually hyperlinks from which you can drill
down to related information.
Depending on your OLAP settings, the hyperlinks may be active for both the dimension
fields (by which the report is sorted) and the measures fields (which display quantitative
data), or only for the dimension fields. For related information, see OLAP-Enabling a Report
on page 453.
Context menus. You can right-click any column title to access a menu of options that
facilitate analysis. The options vary slightly to suit the tasks associated with dimensions
and measures.
Sorting diamonds . The measures (fields that make up the body of the report) have
blue diamonds adjacent to them. You can click either the top or bottom of the diamond
to instantly sort data from high to low or low to high.

Characteristics of an OLAP Report
Drag and drop capabilities for dimensions and measures.

You can drag and drop sort fields to shift sorting from vertical (By) to horizontal (Across)
or vice versa.
You can change the order in which sorting occurs by dragging sort fields from inner
to outer positions (and vice versa).
You can drag measures from one position to another to affect the order in which data
appears.
Beyond the features in the report itself, your OLAP options depend on the interface and drill
down settings that are in effect for a particular report. Those choices determine whether
you have access to the following tools:
Selections Pane. When this tool is available, a pane may appear above, as shown in
the following image, or below your report. For details, see Selections Pane on page 460.
458 WebFOCUS
OLAP Control Panel. When this tool is available, the square icons adjacent to the
sort fields (By or Across) in the report become active. You can click a square or the OLAP
button to open the Control Panel, as shown in the following image. For details, see OLAP
Control Panel on page 462.

Three Ways of Working With OLAP Data

In this section:
The Report
Selections Pane
OLAP Control Panel
There are three ways to work with OLAP data: from the report itself, from the Selections
pane, and from the Control Panel. This documentation is organized to help you understand
what you can do from each location and which method is most suitable and efficient for your
particular OLAP settings.
The Report
You can perform a wide range of basic analytic functions from the report itself. Changes you
make in the report are implemented instantly. Every OLAP user can perform these tasks:
Sort the data in measures in either ascending (lowest value to highest) or descending
order (highest value to lowest).
Drill down on measures, dimensions, or both (depending on the settings described in
Setting OLAP Reporting Options on page 454).
Hide fields in the current report.
View hidden fields in the dimensions hierarchy and add them to the report.
Change a vertical (By) sort field to a horizontal (Across) sort field and vice versa.
Delete sort fields.
Add a column of small bar graphs that help you visualize trends in numeric data
(measures).
Display a graphical representation of your data in a frame above the tabular report.
For an illustration of report-powered OLAP analysis, see We Do It Every Day: Typical Web
Query on page 444.
Selections Pane
When the OLAP Selections pane is turned on, you can quickly limit the data in the report by
selecting specific values for the dimensions in the hierarchy. A drop-down list is available
for each dimension. You can multi-select values from one or more dimension lists to refine
your report output.
460 WebFOCUS
If you wish to add a dimension element to the report you can drag it from the Selections
pane into the report frame. (The cursor changes to a + sign to indicate an acceptable
location.)
Each dimension has a relational operator button located to its left. This button toggles
through a selection of basic numeric operators that enable you to quickly define your selection
criteria. The operators are: Equal to, Not equal to, Less than or equal to, Less than but not
equal to, Greater than or equal to, Greater than but not equal to. For details, see Selection
Criteria Relational Operators on page 507.
The following image shows the Equal to operator as the selection for each dimension in the
Selection Pane.
The name of the dimension field appears as defined in the Master File, even if an alternate
column title has been specified.
In addition, you can customize the display of the measures in your report from the Selections
pane. You can click either the Measures or the Graphs arrow in the upper left corner of the
pane to list the measures.
From the Measures arrow, you can display or hide the selected measure(s) or request a
column of simple bar graphs to reveal trends.
From the Graphs arrow, you can choose the measure(s) you wish to graph and specify
one of seven basic graph types: vertical and horizontal bar, line, area and pie charts.
Note that the Selections pane is resizable; the controls for dimensions, measures, and
graphs float as you resize the report window so that they continue to be visible in the frame.
Five buttons appear below the Selections pane: OLAP, Run, Reset, Save, and Help.
OLAP opens the OLAP Control Panel (OCP).
Run executes the report with the current set of selections.

Reset resets all the controls in the report to their previous state (that is, before the
current set of selections was made and after the last execution of the report).
Save opens a list of options from which you can save or view the document.
Help opens up the WebFOCUS online help.
OLAP Control Panel

From the Control Panel you can perform every analytic function available to a WebFOCUS
OLAP user as shown in the following image.
462 WebFOCUS
The main window of the Control Panel contains the following components:
Dimensions pane reflects the hierarchical structure of the data source being used by
the current report (for example, the Location dimension contains the Region, State, and
City fields; the Region is made up of several States, and each State contains several
Cities). You click the arrow to the left of a dimension name to view the elements that
comprise it. (The fields shown here are also listed in the Selections pane.)
Drill Down and Drill Across panes list the fields being used to sort the report. You can
'pivot' a Drill Down field to a Drill Across field and vice versa, and shift their positions in
the report. (You can also accomplish these tasks by dragging fields within the report.)
Measures Properties pane contains the body of your report (usually numeric fields).
You can change the display mode of a measure by clicking the check pane next to the
measure; the options are display, hide, and show a column of associated bar graphs.
(This is equivalent to the options available from the Measures control in the Selections
pane.)
Although the most frequently used functions are available directly from an OLAP report and/or
from the Selections pane, several can only be performed from the Control Panel.
Unique Control Panel operations include:
Sorting options for dimensions: from highest to lowest and vice versa (A>Z or Z>A);
restricting sort field values to a specified number of either highest or lowest values;
assigning a rank number to each row in the report. For details, see Sorting Data on page
475.
Options for grouping numeric data by tile (for example, percentile, decile, quartile, etc.).
For details, see Grouping Numeric Data Into Tiles on page 499.
Defining selection criteria based on omitted or existing characters, dates, and range
specifications. For details, see Limiting Data on page 507.
Saving OLAP output in PDF and Excel formats. In Managed Reporting, users can also
save OLAP output in the My Reports folder. For details, see Saving and Displaying OLAP
Reports and Graphs in Other Formats on page 561.
Stacking multiple measures to limit the width of the report. For details, see Stacking
Measures on page 542.
Drilling Down On Dimensions and Measures

You can drill down on dimensions in OLAP reports and graphs and, also, on measures in
reports. The settings activate the required hyperlinks:
Dimensions enables automatic drill downs on dimensions in reports and graphs.

Dimensions and Measures enables automatic drill downs on dimensions in both reports
and graphs and on measures in reports.
None disables automatic drill downs. This is the default.
In Developer Studio, you can set drill down options from the Report Options Features tab.
For details about this setting, see Setting OLAP Reporting Options on page 454.
Example: Drilling Down on Dimensions in a Report

This report you are about to run uses data from a hierarchy that contains three dimensions,
each of which has three elements. The report is sorted by the specified field from each
dimension. The following table outlines three dimensions, Time Period, Location and Product
Dimension to which each contains three elements.
Time Period Location Product Dimension
Year Manufacturing Plant PRODTYPE
Quarter State PRODCAT
Month Store Name PRODNAME
The report will show data at different levels in each dimension: Quarter is down one level in
its dimension; Store Name is at the lowest level in its dimension; PRODTYPE is the top level
in its dimension. This determines how much farther you can drill down within each dimension.
If you drill down on a value of Quarter, the report shows information broken down by Month
within that Quarter. The Quarter column itself will no longer appear.
In this quarterly report, drill down hyperlinks are active for both dimensions and measures.
464 WebFOCUS
2. Click Q1 in the quarterly report, shown in the following image, to see a monthly report.
The monthly report looks like this. Since Month is the bottom level in its dimension, if
you drill down on a month value, you will no longer see the month column; however, you
will see the data that relates to the selected month in subsequent columns.

3. Click the 01 in the monthly report, shown in the following image, to see details for January.
466 WebFOCUS
As shown in the following image, the January report shows product type, quantity, and
line cost of good sold for each store.
Next, see what happens when you drill down in the Location dimension—in this case,
on a value of Store Name in the second column of the report. When you drill down on a
dimension column other than the first, output is affected to the right and left of that
column.
4. Click the browser's Back button to return to the monthly report, then click AV VideoTown
in the second column.
Since Store Name is the lowest level in its dimension, the Store Name column no longer
appears, nor does the Time Period column to its left. Nevertheless, both the store name
(AV VideoTown) and the current time period (January) set the context for the information
you see, which now consists of types of products sold, quantity sold, and line cost of
sold goods for AV VideoTown in January, as shown in the following image.

Example: Drill Down on Measures in Reports

By drilling down on a measure, you expose the next level of detailed information associated
with that measure for each displayed dimension in the hierarchy. In other words, when you
drill down on a measure, the current dimension is used as a limiting criterion; the rest of
the hierarchy is then expanded based on that limitation.
Remember that a measure contains quantitative information about fields in each dimension.
In this example, Quantity and Line of Sold Goods provide data about products at particular
stores during particular time periods.
Notice that quantity of sales for all digital products at AV VideoTown in the first quarter
of the year is 22,206. You want to find out how much each digital product contributed
to the total quantity.
2. Click 22,206 under Quantity as shown in the following image.
468 WebFOCUS
As shown in the following image, the report now shows total quantity for digital products
sold at AV VideoTown broken out by month, product category, and product name. Notice
that Store Name no longer appears; since it is the lowest level of the Location dimension,
there is no lower level of detail.
Since all relevant information is now visible, no further drill downs are possible and the
measure is no longer represented as a hyperlink.
Next, verify this behavior at another level in the hierarchy.
3. Click the Back button in your browser to return to the original report.
4. Click Q1 to see the monthly breakdown for that quarter.
5. Click AV Video Town. You are now looking at types of products sold, quantity sold, and
line cost of goods sold at AV Video Town.
6. Drill down on 1, 426 under Quantity as shown in the following image.
PRODTYPE Digital serves as the limiting criterion. Therefore, the expanded hierarchy
shows the next level of detail for each digital product. This level is comprised of digital
product categories (PRODCAT) and the names of the products in each category (Product
Names).

The report displays, as shown in the following image, the detailed data for each element
in the PRODTYPE dimension—in this case, the product categories and product names
that comprise the quantity figure of 1,426. The total quantity and, correspondingly, the
line cost of goods data, is now broken down by product.
Note that when you drill down on a measure value, results may differ depending on the
combination of sort fields in the report. The examples that follow show several variations.
Example: Drilling Down on a Measure in a Report With ACROSS Fields

When you drill down on a measure in a report with at least one dimension Across field and
no By fields, all Across fields are removed from the report and all of the dimension elements
under the removed Across fields become By fields from left to right in the resulting report.
(This convention ensures that the maximum number of Across values supported by WebFOCUS
is not exceeded.)
The values that appear for the new By fields are controlled by internally generated selection
criteria. The measure values in the resulting report depend on the values of the new By
fields.
In the report, RISK_CLASS and Continent are dimension Across fields on which you can
drill down.
470 WebFOCUS
2. Click the Balance value 671,290 under RISK_CLASS Low and Continent AMERICAS as
The report now looks like the following image.
In the new report, the RISK_CLASS and Continent fields are removed based on two
internally generated criteria: IF RISK_CLASS EQ 'Low' and IF Continent EQ 'AMERICAS'.

The only dimension element under RISK_CLASS is Risk_Factor; the dimension elements
under Continent are Region and Country. These become By fields in the new report, from
left to right. The data displayed for the measures in the resulting report are those that
satisfy the values in the current By fields.
Example: Drill Down on a Measure When BY/ACROSS Fields Are Under the Same Dimension
When you drill down on a measure in a report with at least one By and one Across dimension
field under the same root dimension, both the By and Across fields are hidden and the
subordinate element(s) in the same dimension becomes By fields in the new report. In effect,
the report is filtered based on the values of the dimensions. As a result, the sorting controlled
by both hidden and visible dimensions remains in effect.
In the report, Continent is a By field and Region is an Across field; both are in the
Geographic Area dimension.
2. Click the CANADA_DOLLAR value of 56,280,934 in the Continent row for AMERICAS under
the Region CENTRAL AMERICA as shown in the following image.
472 WebFOCUS
The report now looks like the following image.
The new report, data is filtered based on the internally generated criteria: IF Continent
EQ 'AMERICAS' and IF REGION EQ 'CENTRAL AMERICA.' (Continent and Region are no
longer visible.)
REGION is replaced by the last element in the Geographic Area dimension, Country, which
becomes the controlling By field in the report. The data displayed for the measures are
those that satisfy the values in the current By field.
Example: Drill Down on a Measure When BY/ACROSS Fields Are Under Different Root
Dimensions
When you drill down on a measure in a report with at least one By and one Across dimension
field from different root dimensions, the By fields are broken down to their last dimension
level, then the Across fields are broken down.
The original By and Across fields are removed. The dimension elements under the removed
By fields become the first set of By fields from left to right. The dimension elements under
the removed Across fields follow the first set of By fields from left to right.
In the report, Continent is a By field from the Geographic Area dimension and Risk Class
is an Across field from the Risk dimension.

2. Click the CANADA_DOLLAR value of 67,021,020 in the Continent row for EUROPE under
the RISK_CLASS High as shown in the following image.
The report looks like the following image.
In the new report, the Continent and RISK_CLASS fields are removed based on the
internally generated criteria: IF CONTINENT EQ 'EUROPE' and IF RISK_CLASS EQ 'High'.
The By field (Continent) is broken down to its last dimension element. Then, the Across
field (RISK_CLASS) is broken down to its last dimension level. The resulting By fields in
the report, from left to right, are Region, Country, and Risk Factor. The data displayed
for the measures satisfy the values in the current By fields.
474 WebFOCUS
Sorting Data
In this section:
Sorting Measures
Sorting Dimensions
Grouping Numeric Data Into Tiles
You can sort the data in an OLAP report based on the values of dimensions in the hierarchy
and/or the values of the quantitative measures that constitute the body of the report. Sorting
options vary depending on the nature of the data being sorted. For details, see Sorting
Measures on page 475 and Sorting Dimensions on page 482.
You can also group numeric data into any number of tiles (percentiles, quartiles, deciles,
etc.). See Grouping Numeric Data Into Tiles on page 499.
Sorting Measures
How to:
Sort Measures High to Low/Low to High in an OLAP Report
Sort Measures High to Low/Low to High From the Control Panel
View a Subset of Data for Sorted Measures
Remove Sorting Criteria for a Measure
You can apply aggregation and sorting simultaneously to a numeric measure in an OLAP
report, and sort the data from high to low (descending order) or from low to high (ascending
order). All other columns are sorted correspondingly.
For the measure being sorted, you can restrict the report to a specified number of highest
values (when sorting high to low) or lowest values (when sorting from low to high).
When you sort a measure, any subtotals, subheadings, or subfootings in the report are
automatically suppressed since these elements relate to a specific sort field and are not
meaningful when the report is resorted by the values in a measure column. For an illustration,
see Applying a Percent Calculation to a Measure on page 504.
Note: Sorting by measures is not available in a report in which measures have been stacked.
See Hiding and Displaying Measures on page 547.

Sorting Data
Procedure: How to Sort Measures High to Low/Low to High in an OLAP Report

To sort the values of a measure from high to low:
Click the top half of the diamond button.

or
Right-click the measure and select Sort By Highest from the menu.
The report runs automatically. The highest value is now first in the column. The top of the
diamond button becomes solid blue to indicate the current sort direction.
To sort the values of a measure from low to high:
Click the bottom half of the diamond button.

or
Right-click the measure and select Sort By Lowest from the menu.
The lowest value is first in the column. The bottom of the diamond button becomes solid
blue.
Tip: After a measure has been sorted, clicking the upper or lower half of the diamond button
inverts the sort order of that measure. Place your mouse over either half of the diamond to
see a message that indicates the next sort order that will occur if you click that half of the
diamond.
Example: Sorting a Measure From High-to-Low in the Report

The following is an example of sorting a measure from high-to-low in the report.
The OLAP report shows sales information sorted by quarter, store, and product type.
You are interested in seeing where the greatest quantity of goods have been sold.
476 WebFOCUS
2. Click the top half of the diamond button next to the Quantity measure, as shown in the
following image, to sort the values from high to low.

Sorting Data
As shown in the following image, the report now shows data values for the Quantity
measure in descending order. The top half of the diamond next to Quantity is blue and
solid to indicate the current sort order of the measure. This is now the controlling sort
in the report; all other values are reordered correspondingly.
Tip: To invert the sort order, click either the solid or hollow part of the diamond button.
Procedure: How to Sort Measures High to Low/Low to High From the Control Panel
1. Open the OLAP Control Panel.
2. Click a measure in the Measures pane to open the sort options pane (do not click the
Measures check pane which controls the display of a measure, not its sorting).
Verify that the Sort panel is checked (this setting is required to apply sorting specifications
to the selected measure).
3. Select the High-to-Low or Low-to-High options button to specify the sort order you wish
to apply. The default sort order is high to low.
4. Click OK.
The sort pane is replaced by the Measures pane, where the measure becomes blue to
indicate that sorting specifications have been defined.
478 WebFOCUS
5. Click Run to display the report with sorting applied to the selected measure.
The diamond button next to the sorted measure changes to reflect the sort order: if High
to Low, the top half of the diamond is solid blue; if Low to High, the bottom half is solid
blue.
Note:
Report execution is automatic when you sort a measure in an OLAP report. However, if
the Control Panel is open, all current changes in the Control Panel are applied.
If an OLAP request contains a horizontal (Across) sort field, the measures appear several
times in the report, once for each Across value. If you apply sorting to a measure, the
sort is performed on the first column occurrence of the measure, and reflected in all
subsequent instances. The appropriate half of the diamond button becomes solid only
for the first instance. Any additional sorting you wish to perform must be done from the
first occurrence of the measure.
Procedure: How to View a Subset of Data for Sorted Measures

You can select to view only a subset of the total number of records in your report.
2. Click a measure name in the Measures pane to open the sort options pane (do not click
the Measures check pane which controls the display of a measure, not its sorting).
Verify that the Sort check panel is selected (this setting is required to apply sorting
specifications to a measure).
3. Select the Rank check pane, then specify the number of sort field values to be included
in the report. (Notice that Highest or Lowest appears to the left of the input pane to
reflect the current sort order.)
Use the spin buttons located to the right of the word Highest or Lowest to increase
or decrease the number of sort fields.
or
Position the cursor in the input pane and type a number.
The default number of sort fields values is 5.
4. Click OK.
The sort pane is replaced by the Measures pane, where the measure becomes blue to
indicate that sorting specifications have been defined.
5. Click Run to display the report with the designated number of sorted values.

Sorting Data
Example: Displaying a Subset of Sorted Data for a Measure

The following is an example of displaying a subset of sorted data for a measure.
The report shows sales information sorted by quarter, store, and product type.
2. Click the square icon next to QUARTER to open the Control Panel (notice that the original
report is open on the left).
3. Click Quantity in the Measures pane.
The sort pane opens, as shown in the following image, in front of the report.
480 WebFOCUS
4. If not already selected, click the Sort check pane.

High to Low sorting is selected by default.
5. Click the Rank check pane.
Because the report is being sorted from high to low, you can indicate the number of
values you wish to see, beginning with the highest.
6. Specify Highest 4.
7. Click OK.
The main Control Panel window appears. In the Measures pane the Quantity measure is
blue to indicate that sorting specifications have been defined.
8. Click the Run button at the bottom of the Control Panel.
As shown in the following image, the report now shows Quantity sorted from high to low
with the highest four values appearing.
Procedure: How to Remove Sorting Criteria for a Measure

You can remove sorting specifications for a measure whether the measure is appears or
hidden.
2. In the Measures pane, click the measure for which you want to remove sorting
specifications.
3. Clear the Sort check pane.
4. Click OK.

Sorting Data
Sorting Dimensions
How to:
Change Sort Order for a Dimension
Restrict the Display of Sort Values
Rank Rows in a Vertically Sorted Report
Reposition Sort Fields in an OLAP Report
Reposition Sort Fields From the Control Panel
Pivot Rows and Columns In an OLAP Report
Pivot Rows and Columns From the Control Panel
Sort by a Field Without Displaying the Sort Column
There are several ways in which you can sort dimensions in an OLAP hierarchy. You can:
Control the order in which data is sorted: ascending or descending.
Restrict sort field values to a specified number of either highest or lowest values.
Assign a rank number to each row in a vertically sorted report.
Shift the positions of sort fields in the report. For example, you can change from sorting
by State and then by Product to sorting by Product and then by State.
Pivot a vertical (By) sort field to make it a horizontal (Across) sort field and vice versa.
Hide a sort field in the report while retaining the sorting associated with it. For example,
you can sort data by quarters without showing the Quarter column.
Group numeric data in tiles (for example, percentile, decile, etc.).
Procedure: How to Change Sort Order for a Dimension

1. Open the Control Panel.
2. Select a field from the Drill Down or Drill Across pane.
3. Click the Sort button.

The sort pane opens.
4. Under Sort Order, choose the Low to High or High to Low options button (Low to High is
the default for a dimension).
482 WebFOCUS
5. Click OK.
The main Control Panel window reopens.
6. Click Run to execute the report.
Example: Inverting the Sort Order of a Dimension

The following is an example of inverting the sort order of a dimension.
In the report, the values of both sort fields— Continent and Region— are sorted from
low to high (A to Z) as shown in the following image.
2. To sort the report in reverse alphabetical order, click the OLAP button on the band below
the Selections pane to open the Control Panel.
3. Select Continent in the Drill Down pane and click the Sort button.

Sorting Data
4. Under Sort Order, choose the High to Low options button as shown in the following image
on the OLAP Control Panel.
5. Click OK.
6. Repeat the process for Region: select Region in the Drill Across pane and click the Sort
button. When the sort pane opens, select the High to Low options button and click OK.
The main Control Panel window opens.
7. Click the Run button.
484 WebFOCUS
Both dimensions are now sorted in inverse alphabetical order (Z to A) as shown in the
following image.
Procedure: How to Restrict the Display of Sort Values

To restrict the display of sort field values to a certain number of highest or lowest values:
2. Select a field from the Drill Down pane.

The sorting pane opens.

Sorting Data
4. Under Sort Order, choose the Low to High or High to Low options button as shown in
the following image on the OLAP Control Panel.
5. Under Limit Output, click the Limit check pane and choose or type a value in the input
area.
6. Click OK.
7. Click Run to execute your report.
486 WebFOCUS
Procedure: How to Rank Rows in a Vertically Sorted Report

2. Select a field from the Drill Down pane.

4. Under Sort Order, choose the Low to High or High to Low options button.
5. Click the Rank check pane.
6. If you wish to place a restriction on the number of sort field values to rank, click the
Limit check pane, choose or type a value in the input area.
If the High to Low option button is selected, you can rank a specified number of
Highest values.
If the Low to High option button is selected, you can rank a specified number of
Lowest values.
7. Click OK.
Example: Ranking and Restricting the Number of Sort Values

The following is an example of ranking and restricting the number of sort values.
Information for all stores is shown for each quarter. You want to see quarterly information
for only the first two stores in alphabetical order (low to high).
2. Click the square icon next to QUARTER to open the Control Panel (notice that the original
report is open at the left).
3. Choose Store Name in the Drill Down pane and click the Sort button.

Sorting Data
The following image shows these three selections on the OLAP Control Panel.
a. Accept the default sort order: Low to High.

b. Click the Limit check pane and choose 2 from the input area.
c. Click the Rank check pane.
4. Click OK to return to the main Control Panel window.

488 WebFOCUS
Notice that only two values now appear for each Quarter and ranked low to high within
each group as shown in the following image.
Procedure: How to Reposition Sort Fields in an OLAP Report

You can change the order in which data is sorted and presented in the report. For example,
you can change from sorting by State and then by Product to sorting by Product and then by
State. If you want to reposition:
Vertical (By) sort fields, drag and drop a field into a new column position.
Horizontal (Across) sort fields, drag and drop the lower field above the higher one or vice
versa.
In each case, the cursor changes to a plus (+) sign to indicate acceptable places into which
you can drop the field. Unacceptable positions are shown by a circle with a slash across the
center.
Example: Repositioning Sort Fields in an OLAP Report

The following is an example of repositioning sort fields in an OLAP report.
2. Click the top half of the diamond button next to Quantity to sort values from high to low.

Sorting Data
The dimension values adjust accordingly. The report now shows the Quantity values from
high to low but according to the QUARTER sort order as shown in the following image.
You would like to change the sort order in the report, making Store Name the first sort
field, followed by PRODTYPE and QUARTER.
3. Drag QUARTER after PRODTYPE.
The cursor changes to a plus (+) sign to indicate acceptable places into which you can
drop the field.
The report changes immediately as shown in the following image with the Store Name
being the first sort order.
Procedure: How to Reposition Sort Fields From the Control Panel

2. Select a field in the Drill Down or Drill Across pane.
3. Click the Shift Up or Shift Down arrow until the field is in the desired position.
Repeat for other fields as needed.
Example: Repositioning Sort Fields From the Control Panel

The following is an example of repositioning sort fields from the Control Panel.
490 WebFOCUS
2. Click the top half of the diamond button next to Quantity to sort values from high to low.
The dimension values adjust accordingly. The report now shows the Quantity values from
high to low but according to the QUARTER sort order as shown in the following image.
You would like to change the sort order in the report, making Store Name the first sort
field, followed by PRODTYPE and QUARTER.
3. Click the square icon button next to QUARTER to open the Control Panel.
4. Select Quarter from the Drill Down pane.
5. Click the Shift Down arrow twice.

Sorting Data
QUARTER is now the third item in the Drill Down list as shown in the following image.

QUARTER appears in the third column of the report as shown in the following image.
Procedure: How to Pivot Rows and Columns In an OLAP Report

You can quickly change a field from one that sorts data vertically, creating rows, to one that
sorts data horizontally, creating columns, or vice versa.
492 WebFOCUS
To change a:
Vertical (By) sort field to a horizontal (Across) sort field, drag and drop a field above the
row of column titles.
Horizontal (Across) sort field to a vertical (By) sort field, drag and drop the field into the
desired location in the row of column titles.
In each case, the cursor changes to a plus (+) sign to indicate acceptable places where you
can drop the field. (Unacceptable places have a circle with a slash across the center.)
Example: Pivoting Rows and Columns in a Report

The following is an example of pivoting rows and columns in a report.
2. Click Q1.
The report is now sorted vertically, by month, store, and product type as shown in the
following image.

Sorting Data
You want to create a matrix in which data is sorted horizontally by month, and vertically
by store and product type.
3. Drag Month above the report to sort data horizontally (Across).
The cursor changes to a plus (+) sign to indicate acceptable places where you can drop
the field.
In the new report, Quantity and Line Cost of Goods Sold are repeated horizontally for
each month as shown in the following image.
Procedure: How to Pivot Rows and Columns From the Control Panel
You can change a field from one that sorts data vertically, creating rows, to one that sorts
data horizontally, creating columns, or vice versa.
2. Select the title of the row or column you want to pivot in the Drill Down or Drill Across
pane.
3. Click the Pivot button. The title appears in the new location.
494 WebFOCUS
Example: Pivoting Rows Into Columns From the Control Panel

The following is an example of pivoting rows into columns from the Control Panel.
2. Click Q1.
The report is now sorted vertically, by month, store, and product type as shown in the
following image.
You want to create a matrix in which data is sorted horizontally by month, and vertically
by store and product type.
3. Click the square icon next to MONTH to open the Control Panel.
4. Select Month in the Drill Down pane and click the Pivot button.

Sorting Data
Month moves into the Drill Across pane as shown in the following image.
5. Click the Run button on the Control Panel.
496 WebFOCUS
In the new report, Quantity and Line Cost of Goods Sold are repeated horizontally for
each month as shown in the following image.
Procedure: How to Sort by a Field Without Displaying the Sort Column

To use a field to sort your data, but not show the sort field as a column in the report:
2. Select a field in the Drill Down or Drill Across pane.

4. Under Sort Order, click the Hide check pane.

5. Click OK.
6. Click Run to execute the report.

Tip: To expose the hidden sort field, repeat the process and deselect the Hide check pane.

Sorting Data
Example: Sorting by a Hidden Field

The following is an example of sorting by a hidden field.
The first sort field in the report is QUARTER. You want to retain the sorting but not display
this field.
2. Click the square icon next to QUARTER to open the Control Panel.
3. Select QUARTER in the Drill Down pane, then click the Sort button.
4. Select the Hide check pane as shown in the following image.
5. Click OK.
6. Click the Run button in the Control Panel.
498 WebFOCUS
Report sorting is unchanged, but the QUARTER column no longer appears as shown in
Grouping Numeric Data Into Tiles
How to:
Group Data Into Tiles in an OLAP Report
You can group numeric data into any number of tiles (percentiles, deciles, quartiles, etc.)
in tabular reports. For example, you can group students’ test scores into deciles to determine
which students are in the top ten percent of the class.
Grouping is based on the values in the selected vertical (BY) field and data is apportioned
into the number of tile groups you specify.
The following occurs when you group data into tiles:
A new column (labeled TILE by default) is added to the report output and displays the
tile number assigned to each instance of the tile field. You can change the column title
in the Tiles section of the OLAP Control Panel.

Sorting Data
Tiling is calculated within all of the higher-level sort fields in the request and restarts
whenever a sort field at a higher level than the tile field's value changes.
Instances are counted using the tile field. If the request displays fields from lower level
segments, there may be multiple report lines that correspond to one instance of the tile
field.
Instances with the same tile field value are placed in the same tile. For example, consider
the following data, which is to be apportioned into three tiles:
1
5
5
5
8
9
In this case, dividing the instances into groups containing an equal number of records
produces the following table:
Group Data Values
1 1,5
2 5,5
3 8,9
However, because all of the same data values must be in the same tile, the fives (5)
that are in group 2 are moved to group 1. Group 2 remains empty. The final tiles look
like the following table:
Tile Number Data Values
1 1,5,5,5
3 8,9
500 WebFOCUS
Procedure: How to Group Data Into Tiles in an OLAP Report

2. Select a numeric or date field from the Drill Down pane.
3. Click the Sort button. Click the Tiles tab.
4. Click the Tile the Report check pane.

5. In the In Groups Of input area, select the number of tiles to be used in grouping the
data. For example, 100 tiles produces percentiles or 10 tiles produces deciles.
6. In the Name of Tile Group input pane, type a name for the Tile column.

7. In the Restrict Report to only the Top input area, select the number of tile groups to
display in the report.
8. Optionally, select a Sort Order option button:
Choose High to Low to sort data in descending order so that the highest data values
are placed in tile 1.
Choose Low to High to sort data in ascending order so that the lowest data values
are placed in tile 1. This is the default.
9. If you wish to specify the highest tile value to appear in the report, select a value from
the Limit input area. For example, if you enter a Limit of 3, the report will not display
any data row that is assigned a tile number greater than 3.
10. Click OK to accept the selections and return to the main Control Panel window.
11. Click Run to re-execute and view the report.

How to:
Apply a Calculation to a Measure
Reference:
Calculations You Can Perform on a Measure
You can perform standard calculations, such as average, percent, and summarize, on the
numeric data in measures on an OLAP report.
Procedure: How to Apply a Calculation to a Measure

1. Run the Standard Report.
3. Click a measure in the Measures pane.
The sort options pane opens. Do not click the Measures check pane, which controls
the display of a measure, not its sorting.
4. Click the arrow under Measure Calculations and select a calculation from the list.
None is the default value. For details, see Calculations You Can Perform on a Measure
on page 503.
5. Click OK.
502 WebFOCUS
The sort pane is replaced by the Measures pane, where the selected calculation appears
as a prefix to the measure.
6. Click Run, and the applied calculation is added to the column title.
Reference: Calculations You Can Perform on a Measure

The following table lists the types of calculations in the first column and describes their
functions in the second column.
Calculation Function
Average Sum Computes the average sum of squares for standard deviation in statistical
of Squares analysis.
Average Computes the average value of the field.
Count Counts the number of occurrences of the field.
Count Counts the number of distinct values within a field when using -REMOTE.
Distinct For other modes of operation, this behaves like Count.
Maximum Generates the maximum value of the field.
Minimum Generates the minimum value of the field.
Percent Computes a field's percentage based on the total values for the field.
The Percent can be used with detail as well as summary fields.
Percent Computes a field's percentage based on the number of instances found.

Count
Row Computes a field's percentage based on the total values for the field
across a row.
Summarize Sums the number of occurrences of the field.
Total Counts the occurrences of the field for use in a heading (includes
footings, subheads, and subfoots).

Example: Applying a Percent Calculation to a Measure

The following is an example of applying a percent calculation to a measure.
The report shows Quantity and Line Cost of Goods Sold sorted by plant and product
category, with a subtotal at each sort break.
You want to create a report column that shows the percent of total sales for each plant.
2. Click the square icon next to PLANT to open the Control Panel as shown in the following
report image.
3. Click Line Cost of Goods Sold in the Control Panel's Measures pane.
504 WebFOCUS
4. Under Measures Calculations, choose Percent from the drop-down list as shown in the
following image, then click OK to see the calculation as a prefix for the measure in the
Measures pane.

The report now breaks down sales for each product at each plant by as a percentage of
total sales as shown in the following image.
Notice that the subtotals have been removed from the report because the breakdown by
plant is no longer suitable for the data.
506 WebFOCUS
Limiting Data
In this section:
Applying Selection Criteria to Date Elements
How to:
Apply Selection Criteria From the Selections Pane
Apply Selection Criteria From the Control Panel
Change Selection Criteria From the Control Panel
Remove Selection Criteria From the Control Panel
Reference:
Selection Criteria Relational Operators
An OLAP report is limited to values belonging to the parent categories in the dimensions
hierarchy. There are several ways to further limit the data that appears in the report.
From the Selections pane or the Control Panel, you can explicitly limit the data in an
OLAP report by selecting dimension values and relational operators (such as =, >, <). For a
list of the relational operators, see Selection Criteria Relational Operators on page 507.
The Selections pane provides the easiest approach since you can choose both dimension
values and relational operators with a few mouse clicks, while the report is fully exposed to
view.
Changes made in the Selections pane are implemented immediately in the Control Panel
(even if the Control Panel is closed), and changes made in the Control Panel are reflected
immediately in the Selections pane.
From the report, you can limit data indirectly by drilling down on measures and dimensions
to hone in on subset of information. For details, see Drilling Down On Dimensions and
Measures on page 463.
Reference: Selection Criteria Relational Operators

You can define selection criteria in the Selections pane or Control Panel using several
relational operators, which are shown in the following tables. The first column displays the
operator and the second column provides a description of the operator.

Limiting Data
Operator Displays Records That...
Are equal to the criteria you specified.

- Equal to
This is the default operator.
Are not equal to the criteria you specified.

- Not Equal to
Are less than or equal to the criteria you specified.

- Less than or equal to
Are less than, but not equal to, the criteria you
- Less than specified.
Are greater than or equal to the criteria you specified.

- Greater than or equal to
Are greater than, but not equal to, the criteria you
- Greater than specified.
Contain the criteria you specified.

- Contains
Note: This operator is available only for alphanumeric
fields.
Do not contain the criteria you specified.

- Not contain
Note: This operator is available only for alphanumeric
fields.
Note: You can select more than one value using the same relational operator.
The following table lists and describes relational operators that are available for selecting
a range of dates.
Operator Displays Records Where...
The value in the indicated date field falls within the

- Within range
specified range.
Note: To use this relational operator, you must select the
Range check pane in the Date Selection panel.
508 WebFOCUS
Operator Displays Records Where...
The value in the indicated date field does not fall within
- Not within range
the specified range.
Note: To use this relational operator, you must select the
Range check pane in the Date Selection panel.
Procedure: How to Apply Selection Criteria From the Selections Pane

When the Selections pane is turned on, there is one control (drop-down list) for every
dimension in the OLAP hierarchy. (Note that the name of the dimension field appears as
defined in the Master File, even if an alternate column title has been specified.)
To limit data for the dimensions that are included in the report:
1. Click the arrow to the right of the dimension to open the list of values.
2. Select one or more values from the list (All is the default value).
To select multiple values, click the desired values while holding the Ctrl key on the
keyboard.
3. Select a relational operator from the button to the left of the dimension to indicate the
basis for selection (equals (=) is the default).
You can toggle through a list of operators. See Selection Criteria Relational Operators
on page 507.
4. Repeat steps 1-3 for each dimension whose values you wish to limit.
5. Click the Run button on the band below the Selections pane.
Tip: To change or eliminate selection criteria, reopen the values list and choose another
value or choose All.
Example: Limiting Continents and Regions From the Selections Pane

The following is an example of limiting continents and regions from the selections pane.

Limiting Data
As shown in the following image, the Selections pane above the report, the controls for
Continent and Region are set to All to show all values of each dimension. You wish to
focus on the data for one continent and one region.
2. In the Selections pane, click the arrow to the right of CONTINENT and select AMERICAS
from the list of values. Use the default operator = to limit the data.
3. Next, click the arrow to the right of REGION and select NORTH AMERICA. Once again,
accept the default operator =.
510 WebFOCUS
The output is now limited to data for the selected continent and region as shown in the
following image.
Procedure: How to Apply Selection Criteria From the Control Panel

2. Click the Selection Criteria button at the bottom right of the window.
The Selection Criteria pane opens.
3. In the Dimensions pane above the Selection Criteria pane, expand a dimension and
click Values.
A secondary window opens; select one or more values (press the Ctrl key to multi-select).
4. Click OK to return to the Selection Criteria pane, where the selected values appear in
the drop-down lists.
If a Developer has applied selection criteria to the Reporting Object from which you
create an OLAP report, you only see the selected acceptable values of the field.
If no selection criteria have been applied, you see all the values of the field in the
drop-down lists.
5. In the Selection Criteria pane, click a relational operator next to the dimension to specify
the relationship that you want to base selection on—for example, =, >, or <. For a
complete list, see Selection Criteria Relational Operators on page 507.
6. Repeat the process for other dimensions whose values you wish to limit.

Limiting Data
Example: Limiting Continents and Countries From the Control Panel

The following is an example of limiting continents and countries from the Control Panel.
Tip: If you have access to the Selections pane, it provides the quickest way to limit data.
For an illustration, see Limiting Continents and Regions From the Selections Pane on page
509.
The report shows data for continents and countries. You want to restrict the information
to the Countries ARGENTINA and BRAZIL in the Continent AMERICAS.
2. Click the square icon next to Continent to open the Control Panel as shown in the following
image.
3. Click the Selection Criteria button at the bottom right to open the Selection Criteria pane.
4. In the Dimensions pane above the Selection Criteria pane, expand the Geographic Area
dimension and click Values under Country.
A secondary window lists the acceptable values.
512 WebFOCUS
5. In this window, choose ARGENTINA and BRAZIL as shown in the following image (hold
down the Ctrl key to multi-select values).
6. Click OK to return to the Selection Criteria pane.

7. Repeat step 3, but click Values under Continent and choose AMERICAS, then click OK.

Limiting Data
The selected values now appear in the drop-down lists in the Selection Criteria pane as
8. Verify that you want to use the default operator =, then click the Run button at the bottom
of the Control Panel.
514 WebFOCUS
The new report displays the data by Continent, Americas followed by Country as shown
Procedure: How to Change Selection Criteria From the Control Panel

Tip: If you have access to the Selections pane, it provides the easiest way to adjust or
remove selection criteria. See How to Apply Selection Criteria From the Selections Pane on
page 509.
From the Selections Criteria pane in the Control Panel:
1. Click the Select button next to the dimension value you wish to modify.
A secondary window opens.
To change a value, type the new value in the text pane or select one or more values
from the list. (The value you type must be in the same case as the value in the data
source.)
You can input only one value in the text pane. If you select more than one value from
the list, only the first value appears. However, all values appear in your report.
To deselect a value, hold down the Ctrl key while clicking the value.
2. Click OK to return to the Selection Criteria pane where you can verify the revised value
and/or change the relational operator if required.
3. Click OK again to confirm your choice and return to the main Control Panel window.
Procedure: How to Remove Selection Criteria From the Control Panel

Tip: If you have access to the Selections pane, it provides the easiest way to adjust or
remove selection criteria. See How to Apply Selection Criteria From the Selections Pane on
page 509.
From the Selections Criteria pane in the Control Panel:
1. Select the criterion you want to remove.

Limiting Data
2. Click the Delete button.

The selection category is removed from the list.
3. Click Run to execute your report with all values.
Applying Selection Criteria to Date Elements
How to:
Apply Selection Criteria to a Date Field
Apply Selection Criteria to a Date Range
Add Dates to the Selections List pane
Delete Dates From the Selections List pane
Reference:
Date Format Limitations
You can apply selection criteria to date elements just as you apply them to other types of
elements. The results are limited by the date(s) you select. For example, you can select to
view data associated with a particular date or to exclude data from the specified date.
Note: Like other dimension elements, date fields must have been defined in the Master
File by a Managed Reporting developer. The Master File specifies the date formats available
for selection criteria.
In the Control Panel, you can choose the selection criteria from a Date selection pane that
contains the appropriate controls for the date format.
You can also select a range of dates in a designated year by specifying a From and To date.
Two relational operators are available for selecting a range of dates:
The Within range operator displays records when the value in the indicated date
field falls within the specified range.
The Not within range operator displays records when the value in the indicated date
field does not fall within the specified range.
For more information on supported date formats, see Date Format Limitations on page 530.
For more information on specifying date formats, see the Describing Data With WebFOCUS
Language manual.
516 WebFOCUS
Procedure: How to Apply Selection Criteria to a Date Field

2. Click the Selection Criteria button.
3. In the Dimensions pane above the Selection Criteria pane, expand the dimension that
includes the date field, and click the Values button.
A secondary window displays controls for the dimension's date format. For example, if
the date format is YYM, only the year and month controls appear. If the format is YYMD,
year, month, and day controls appear.
Note: The date selection pane appears only when a supported date format is provided.
See Date Format Limitations on page 530.
4. Specify a date using the spin controls, drop-down lists, or by typing the value.
If your date format includes edit masking such as Y.M.D, the date appears with forward
slashes in the Date selection list pane, the Selection Criteria pane, and the drop-down
list at the bottom of the report. However, the date edit mask appears as specified within
the body of the report.
5. Click Add to display the date in the Selections list pane.

6. Click OK to return to the Selection Criteria pane and verify the selected date.
7. In the Selection Criteria pane, click a relations button to the left of the date field (for
example, =, >, or <) to indicate a basis for record selection.
8. Optionally, define additional date selection criteria by repeating steps 2-7.
Example: Applying Selection Criteria to a Date Field

The following is an example of applying selection criteria to a date file.

Limiting Data
As shown in the following images, the multi-page OLAP report shows several years of
data about reported problems falling into five categories: incorrect labeling, missing
components, physical damage, power failure, remote failure.
518 WebFOCUS
You want to investigate problems reported on June 6, 2001. You can limit data based
on a single date from the Control Panel.
Note: To show the selection of a particular date, a dimension component has been
added to the procedure. This dimension places Date Prob. Reported in the Time Period
dimension hierarchy directly below the root.
2. Click the OLAP button below the report to open the Control Panel.
The OLAP button appears at the bottom of this report because the OLAP CONTROL setting
was selected. For details, see Setting OLAP Reporting Options on page 454.
3. Click the Selection Criteria button at the bottom of the Control Panel.
4. In the Dimensions pane above the Selection Criteria pane, expand the TIMEPERIOD
hierarchy.
5. Click Values under Date Problem was Reported.

Limiting Data
The pane replaces the Selections Criteria pane, with a drop-down list for each selectable
value (Year, Month, and Date) based on the date format of the selected field as shown
520 WebFOCUS
6. Select values. For example:

a. Change the year to 2003 in the Year pane by using the spin buttons or typing the
value.
b. Select May from the Months drop-down list.
c. Select 15 from the Days drop-down list.
d. Click Add to enter these criteria in the input pane.
7. Click OK to return to the Selection Criteria pane, which now reflects your entries as shown

Limiting Data
The relational operator to the left of the Date pane indicates that your report will contain
data only for those rows where date is equal to (=) the values you entered. This default
operator is correct for this example.
8. Click Run to see the problem report for the specified date.
Your selection criteria are listed beside the OLAP button at the bottom of the report as
Procedure: How to Apply Selection Criteria to a Date Range

2. Click the Selection Criteria button.
3. In the Dimensions pane above the Selection Criteria pane, expand the dimension that
includes the date field, and click the Values button.
A secondary window displays controls for the dimension's date format. For example, if
the date format is YYM, only the year and month controls appear. If the format is YYMD,
year, month, and day controls appear.
Note: The Date selection pane appears only when a supported date format is provided.
See Date Format Limitations on page 530.
522 WebFOCUS
4. Click the Range check pane.

Inclusive and Exclusive options buttons appear:
Choose Inclusive to show the range including the dates specified.
Choose Exclusive to show the range excluding the dates specified.
Note:
You can select only one range of dates at a time.
You can apply selection criteria to a range of dates only if the date format contains
a year. See Date Format Limitations on page 530.
From and To drop-down lists open for all selectable options. By default, the current date
appears.
5. Specify a From date and a To date by using the spin controls and drop-down lists.
7. To view both the From and To dates of the range selected, click the down arrow on the
drop-down list.
8. Click a relational operator to the left of the date element in the Selection Criteria pane:
Choose Within range operator to display records when the value falls within the
specified range.
Choose Not within range operator to display records when the value does not fall
within the specified range.
Example: Applying Selection Criteria to a Range of Date Fields

The following is an example of applying selection criteria to a range of date fields.

Limiting Data
As shown in the following images, your report shows problem information reported over
the course of several years.
524 WebFOCUS
The information falls into the following categories: incorrect labeling, missing components,
physical damage, power failure, remote failure.
You want to restrict the information to problems reported between June 6, 2001 and July
6, 2001. From the Control Panel, you can limit data based on a range of dates.
2. Click the OLAP button below the report to open the Control Panel.
3. Click the Selection Criteria button at the bottom right of the Control Panel.
4. In the Dimensions pane above the Selection Criteria pane, expand the TIMEPERIOD
hierarchy.
5. Click Values under Date Problem was Reported.
The PROBLEM_DATE pane opens over the Selections Criteria pane, with a drop-down list
for each selectable value (Year, Month, and Date) based on the date format of the
selected field.

Limiting Data
6. Select the Range check pane:

Inclusive and Exclusive options buttons appear. To show the range including the dates
specified, choose Inclusive (the default).
From and To drop-down lists open for all selectable options. By default, the current
date appears.
7. Specify values for the From date. For example:

a. Change the current year to 2001 by using the spin buttons.
b. Select June from the Months drop-down list to change the current calendar month.
c. Select 6 from the Days drop-down list to change the current calendar day.
8. Specify values for the To date. For example:

a. Change the current year to 2001 by using the spin buttons.
b. Select July from the Months drop-down list to change the current calendar month.
c. Select 6 from the Days drop-down list to change the current calendar day.
526 WebFOCUS
The following image shows the selections.

Limiting Data

a. To view the range of dates, click the down arrow in the drop-down list, then click OK
again.
b. To report on information within the specified range of dates, accept the default, Within
range operator.
10. Click Run to execute the report, which now only displays problem information from June
6, 2001 to July 6, 2001 as shown in the following image.
The date element appears at the bottom of the window.
528 WebFOCUS
11. To view the range of dates, click the arrow in the drop-down list.
Procedure: How to Add Dates to the Selections List pane

2. Click Selection Criteria to open the Selection Criteria pane.
3. Click the Select button to open the Date selection pane.
4. Specify the date you want to add by using the spin buttons, drop-down lists, or by typing
the value.
5. Click Add.
The date appears inside the Selections list pane.
Procedure: How to Delete Dates From the Selections List pane

2. Click Selection Criteria to open the Selection Criteria pane.
3. Click Select to open the Date selection pane.

Visualizing Trends
4. Select one or more dates that you want to remove from the Selections list pane.
5. Click Delete to remove the date.
Reference: Date Format Limitations

Note the following limitations when applying selection criteria to date elements:
The Date selection pane does not support Julian dates. However, if you are using Julian
dates, the Date controls still open.
Dates containing only a day format (D, I2D, A2D) are not supported from the Date selection
pane. Instead, the data source provides a list of values.
The Range check panel is enabled on the Date selection pane when the date format
contains one of the following formats:
Any smart date format—for example, YMD, MDY, YYMD, MDYY, Q, M.
A4YY
I4YY
I8YYMD
A8YYMD
I6YYM
A6YYM
Visualizing Trends
How to:
Add a Column of Bar Graphs for a Numeric Measure
To make your reports more powerful, you can insert visual representations of selected data
directly into the report output. These visual representations, which appear as a column of
vertical or horizontal bar graphs adjacent to the numeric data, make relationships and trends
among data more obvious.
You can apply data visualization graphs to selected measures from:
Context menus in the report itself.
This is the quickest way to apply data visualization bar graphs to numeric measures.
530 WebFOCUS
The Measures control in the Selections pane.

Check panes in the Measures pane on the Control Panel.
For details about data visualization graphs, see Visualizing Trends in Reports on page 565.
Procedure: How to Add a Column of Bar Graphs for a Numeric Measure

The quickest way to apply data visualization graphics is from the report itself:
1. Right-click the title of a measure column.
2. Choose Visualization from the menu.
The report runs automatically, displaying a column of bar graphs following the selected
measures column.
Tip: To remove the bar graphs, right-click the measure column title and choose Remove
Visualization from the menu.
For other methods of applying bar graphs to columns, see Visualizing Trends in Reports on
page 565.
Displaying Graphs and Reports

How to:
Graph a Measure From the Selections Pane
Create a Pie Chart From the Selections Pane
Graph a Measure From the Control Panel
Reference:
Combining Graph Styles and Measure Styles in OLAP Graphs
When you graph a measure in an OLAP report, you select the specific data elements to
include and view the tabular report and a graphical representation of the identical information
simultaneously in a split window. The graph appears in a frame in the top half of the window
to facilitate comparison.
To be graphable, the data in the report must include at least one numeric measure and one
sort field (By or Across). The Graph control is activated in the Selections pane or the Control
Panel when these basic requirements are met.

As shown in the following image, it includes three sort fields (PRODCAT, Store Name, and
Manufacturing Plant) and three numeric measures (Quantity, Our Cost, and Price), displayed
as horizontal bar charts for quick comparison.
You can request a graph from an OLAP report, from the Selections pane, or from the Control
Panel:
From an OLAP report, you can create a vertical bar chart to represent the data in a
selected measure.
From the Selections pane or the Control Panel, you can create seven different types
of graphs and apply them to one or more measures:
Vertical Bar (This is the default graph type.)
Vertical Line
Vertical Area
Horizontal Bar
Horizontal Line
Horizontal Area
Pie
532 WebFOCUS
If you choose to graph more than one measure, you can employ different graph types to suit
the data in each column, with the following restrictions:
When you select Vertical or Horizontal Bar, Line, or Area as the controlling graph style
for a measure, you can apply any combination of these styles to other measures. For
example, the first measure can appear as bars, the second measure as lines, and the
third measure as areas. All measures must have the same orientation (vertical or
horizontal).
When you choose Pie as the controlling graph style, you can use only pie charts for other
measures.
For details about supported combinations, see Combining Graph Styles and Measure Styles
in OLAP Graphs on page 533.
Note: If drill down capability has been enabled for the dimensions in a report, the same
functionality is automatically enabled for graphs. You can, therefore, drill down from one
graphical representation of your data to another.
Reference: Combining Graph Styles and Measure Styles in OLAP Graphs

The following table lists the available style combinations in the second column for each
graph style in the first column.
Controlling Graph Style Potential Measure Styles
Vertical Bar (default) Vertical Bar (default)
Vertical Line
Vertical Area
Vertical Line Vertical Line (default)
Vertical Bar
Vertical Area
Vertical Area Vertical Area (default)
Vertical Bar
Vertical Line

Controlling Graph Style Potential Measure Styles
Horizontal Bar Horizontal Bar (default)
Horizontal Line
Horizontal Area
Horizontal Line Horizontal Line (default)
Horizontal Bar
Horizontal Area
Horizontal Area Horizontal Area (default)
Horizontal Line
Horizontal Area
Pie Pie
Procedure: How to Graph a Measure From the Selections Pane

1. Click the down arrow to the left of the Graph control to open a pane that contains all
the numeric measures in the current report.
There is a check pane to the left of each measure and a graph button to the right of
each measure. All check panes are unchecked by default and all graph buttons are
grayed (inactive) by default.
2. Select a check pane associated with a measure.

The graph button to the right of the measure becomes active. The default graph style
is Vertical bar.
3. Toggle through the seven graph style icons until you reach the one you want to apply to
the selected measure.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for any other measures you want to graph.
For a list of graph types that can be defined, see Combining Graph Styles and Measure
Styles in OLAP Graphs on page 533.
The graph opens in a separate frame above the report and Selections pane.
534 WebFOCUS
Example: Graphing Multiple Measures From the Selections Pane

This example contains two measures, BALANCE and CANADA_DOLLARS, sorted by Continent.
You would like to see graphical representations of both measures. To contrast the graphical
information, you use a different graph type for each one.
2. Right-click the Region field and select Delete from the menu to limit the report to the
fields you want to graph—one dimension, Continent, and two measures, BALANCE and
CANADA DOLLARS.
3. In the Selections pane above the report, click the arrow to the left of the Graph control
to list the measures.
Click the BALANCE measure check pane, then choose the vertical bar icon to the right
of the measure. (This is the default graph type.)
Click the CANADA_DOLLAR measure check pane, then toggle through the graph icons
until you see the vertical area graph.
As shown in the following image, the Selections pane has the Graph control listing
BALANCE represented as a vertical bar and CANADA_DOLLAR represented as a vertical
area.
4. Click the Run button on the band below the Selection pane to generate the graphs.

The following image shows the results of the graph selections.
Procedure: How to Create a Pie Chart From the Selections Pane

The following procedure is an example of creating a pie chart from the Selections pane.
The report shows order information for stores that sell Century Corporation's electronic
products. Audio Expert shows the highest numbers, with orders of digital products
significantly exceeding analog.
You want a clearer picture of how the digital orders breakdown by product so you decide
to create a pie chart.
536 WebFOCUS
2. Click Digital for Audio Expert in Q2 to hone in on the data you want to graph as shown
The report now shows the Quantity and Line Cost of Goods sold for several digital
products sold at Audio Expert in Q2 as shown in the following image.
3. Right-click Quantity and choose Show Panel to open the Selection pane.

4. In the Selections pane, click the arrow to the left of the Graph control, then click the
check pane for Quantity and toggle through the graph options until you reach the pie
icon as shown in the following image.
538 WebFOCUS
As shown in the following image, the graph appears in a pane above the report. You can
see at a glance that PDA Devices constituted about 1/3 of digital sales at the Audio
Expert store in Q2.
Procedure: How to Graph a Measure From the Control Panel

3. Select the Show Graph check pane located below the Measures Properties pane.
Note that the contents of the Drill Down and Drill Across panes determine the X-axis
fields. When there are multiple drill (X-axis) fields, multiple graphs appear vertically
stacked in the same frame. The measures appear as Y-axis fields on the graphs you
display.
4. Click the Graph icon adjacent to the Show Graph check pane.
The Measures and GraphStyle pane opens.
Check panes associated with the available measures are unchecked by default.
5. Click one of the seven icons at the bottom of the window to set a controlling graph style.

6. Select the check pane(es) for the measure(s) you wish to graph.
The graph icon corresponding to the controlling graph style appears next to each selected
measure.
7. Click the icon next to a measure to choose a different graph style from the supported
combinations as shown in the following image.
8. Click OK to return to the main Control Panel window with all the graph settings retained.
9. Click Run to display the graph(s) and the tabular report in a split window.
540 WebFOCUS
Note:
If you select the Show Graph check pane and click Run without selecting a controlling
graph style, the default style (Vertical Bar) is applied.
If you click Run without selecting the Show Graph check pane, a tabular report appears
without a graph.
If you select at least one measure in the Measures and GraphStyle pane without selecting
the Show Graph check pane, when you click OK the system automatically selects the
Show Graph check pane. The tabular report appears with a graph.
You cannot choose to graph alphanumeric or date fields. If there are no numeric measures,
the Show Graph check pane and the Graph button are disabled (grayed out).
Controlling the Display of Measures in a Report

In this section:
Stacking Measures
Changing the Order of Measure Columns
Hiding and Displaying Measures
While you cannot add new measures to an OLAP report without returning to the original report
request, you can adjust the display of the measures in the report in several ways. You can:
Stack measures in rows.
Change the order of measure columns.
Hide and expose measures.
Add a column of data visualization bar graphs following any numeric measure.

Stacking Measures
How to:
Display Stacked Measures
When you have more than one measure in an OLAP report, you can stack the measures in
separate rows within the same column to reduce the width of the report.
You cannot apply data visualization bar graphs to stacked measures.
Procedure: How to Display Stacked Measures

2. Select the Stack Measures check pane to display measures in separate rows under one
column.
Tip: To restore the standard display, deselect the Stack Measures check pane and rerun the
report.
Example: Displaying Stacked Measures

The following is an example of displaying stacked measures.
Initially, this report is sorted vertically by Continent and Risk_Class and horizontally by
Region, and the measures—Balance and CANADA_DOLLARS—appear as separate
columns.
2. For this example, you will not need the Region dimension, but you will need the Country
dimension. You can quickly make these changes to the report:
a. Right-click Region and select Delete from the menu.
b. Right-click Continent and select Unhide from the menu, then select Country from the
secondary menu.
542 WebFOCUS
The report now displays data by Continent followed by Country as shown in the following
image.
You wish to show the measure titles and data values in rows.
3. Click the OLAP button on the band below the Selections pane to open the Control Panel.

4. Click the Stack Measures check pane below the Measures pane as shown in the following
image.
544 WebFOCUS
5. Click Run to execute the report and display the titles and values of the measures stacked
over each other in separate rows as shown in the following image.
Changing the Order of Measure Columns
How to:
Reposition Measure Columns in an OLAP Report
You can change the order in which measure columns are presented in the report.
Procedure: How to Reposition Measure Columns in an OLAP Report

To reposition a numeric column, drag and drop the field into a new column position.
The cursor changes to a plus (+) sign to indicate acceptable places into which you can drop
the field. (Unacceptable positions are indicated by a circle with a slash cross the center.)
Example: Repositioning Measure Columns

The following is an example of repositioning measure columns.

As shown in this image, the column for the Quantity measure precedes the column for
the Line Cost of Goods Sold measure.
2. To change the order of columns, drag and drop Line Costs of Goods Sold before Quantity.
The cursor changes to a + sign to designate where you can drop the field. The report, as
shown in the following image, now displays the Quantity column as its last column.
546 WebFOCUS
Hiding and Displaying Measures
How to:
Hide or Expose a Measure From the Report
Hide or Display a Measure From the Selections Pane
Display or Hide a Measure From the Control Panel
You can hide and expose measures from an OLAP report, the Selections pane, or the Control
Panel.
Procedure: How to Hide or Expose a Measure From the Report

To hide a measure column, right-click the column title and choose Hide from the menu.
The column is automatically removed from the display.
To expose a hidden measure column, right-click a displayed measure and choose Unhide
from the menu. A secondary menu lists any hidden measures.
Choose the one you want to re-expose in the report.
Tip: If you want to add a new measure to the report, you must return to the original request
and add the field there.
Example: Hiding and Exposing a Measure From the Report

The following is an example of hiding and exposing a measure from the report.
The report includes two measures: Quantity and Line Cost of Goods Sold.

2. Right-click the Line Cost of Goods Sold and choose Hide from the menu as shown in the
following image.
The report runs and displays only the Quantity measure.
3. Right-click Quantity and select Unhide.
A secondary menu displays the hidden measure.
548 WebFOCUS
4. Select LINE_COGS to redisplay Line Cost of Goods Sold as shown in the following image.
The report now displays the Line Cost of Goods Sold column as shown in the following
image.
Procedure: How to Hide or Display a Measure From the Selections Pane

1. Click the down arrow to the left of the Measures control to display a list of the measures
in the report.
2. Click the check pane next to a measure to display or hide it. The check pane toggles
through three positions.
To hide the measure, click the check pane until it is blank.
To expose a hidden measure, click the check pane until you see a check mark.

Tip: You can use the same check pane to display a column of data visualization bar graphs
for numeric measures. This setting is represented as a graph in the check pane. For details,
see Visualizing Trends on page 530.
Example: Hiding and Exposing a Measure Column From the Selections Pane
The following is an example of hiding and exposing a measure column from the Selections
pane.
Because of the OLAP settings selected for this report, the Selections pane is hidden.
For this example, you will need to expose it.
2. Right-click QUARTER and select Show Panel from the menu.
As shown in the following image, the report now looks like this: two measures—Quantity
and Line Cost of Goods Sold—appear.
3. In the Selection pane, click the arrow to the left of the Measures control to list the
measures in the report. Notice that both measures are checked.
550 WebFOCUS
4. To hide Line Cost of Goods Sold, click the check panel until it is blank as shown in the
following image.
Only Quantity now appears as shown in the following image.

6. Open the Measures control again and recheck Line Cost of Goods Sold as shown in the
following image.
7. Run the report again.

The output now looks as it originally did.
Procedure: How to Display or Hide a Measure From the Control Panel

2. In the Measures pane, click the check pane next to a measure to display or hide it. The
check pane toggles through three positions.
To hide the measure, click the check pane until it is blank.
To expose a hidden measure, click the check pane until you see a check mark.
Tip: You can use the same check pane to display a column of data visualization bar
graphs for numeric measures. This setting is represented as a graph in the check pane.
For details, see Visualizing Trends on page 530.
552 WebFOCUS
Adding and Removing Dimensions

How to:
Add a Dimension Element From the Control Panel
Delete a Dimension Element From the Report
Delete a Dimension Element From the Control Panel
Since all of the values in a dimensions hierarchy are available in an OLAP report, you can
add dimensions to the OLAP report at any time, without returning to the original report
request. You can add dimensions from:
An OLAP report.
The Control Panel.
Procedure: How to Add a Dimension Element From the Control Panel

2. Select a report layout pane(Drill Down or Drill Across) to indicate how you want the new
sort dimension to be used in the report.
3. Expand a dimension in the Dimensions pane at the top of the window, then click the
dimension element you want to add to the designated layout pane. The new dimension
is added to the bottom of the list.
4. If you wish to change the position of the new sort field, click the up arrow to reposition
it.
5. Click Run to execute your report with the new settings.
Example: Adding a Dimension Element From the Control Panel

The following is an example of adding a dimension element from the Control Panel.

Initially the report is sorted by quarter, store, and product type as shown in the following
image.
You want to sort by month within each quarter.

2. Click the square button next to QUARTER to open the Control Panel.
554 WebFOCUS
3. In the Control Panel:

a. Click in the Drill Down panel to activate the buttons immediately above the pane.
b. Expand the Time Period dimension and click MONTH. It is added to the bottom of the
Drill Down list.
c. Click the Shift Up arrow twice to move MONTH below QUARTER as shown in the
following image.

The report is now sorted by quarter, month, store, and product type as shown in the
following image.
Procedure: How to Delete a Dimension Element From the Report

Right-click the dimension column you wish to remove and choose Delete from the menu.
The report runs automatically.
Example: Deleting a Dimension Element From the Report

The following is an example of deleting a dimension element from the report.
Initially the report is sorted by quarter, store, and product type. You wish to remove
PRODTYPE as a sort category.
556 WebFOCUS
2. Right-click the PRODTYPE column and choose Delete from the menu as shown in the
following image.
The report runs automatically. The new report is sorted by quarter and store as shown

Procedure: How to Delete a Dimension Element From the Control Panel

1. Select the element in the Drill Down or Drill Across pane. The buttons above the pane
become active.
2. Click Remove . The element is deleted from the Drill Down or Drill Across pane.
3. Click Run to see the new report.
Example: Deleting a Dimension Element From the Control Panel

The following is an example of deleting a dimension element from the Control Panel.
Initially the report is sorted by quarter, store, and product type. You wish to remove
PRODTYPE as a sort category.
2. Click the square icon button next to QUARTER to open the Control Panel.
558 WebFOCUS
3. Select PRODTYPE in the Drill Down pane as shown in the following image.
4. Click the Remove button.


Saving OLAP Reports
The new report is sorted by quarter and store as shown in the following image.
Saving OLAP Reports

In this section:
Uniform Field Name Referencing in OLAP
The following is related to saving OLAP reports:

Administrators, Users, and Developers can save their reports in Excel, PDF, or Active
Report format.
Field name referencing is uniform throughout the OLAP product. For example, the AS or
TITLE phrases will appear in reports generated using the OLAP Selections pane or the
OLAP Control Panel (OCP).
When saving OLAP reports to Managed Reporting, you must refresh the Domain to see
the newly saved reports. Otherwise, the new reports will not be listed in the Managed
Reporting tree.
560 WebFOCUS
Uniform Field Name Referencing in OLAP

The manner in which a developer designs a report with regard to field referencing carries
through to both the OCP and the OLAP Selections pane. Field referencing does not differ
between the report and the OCP and OLAP Selections pane. Field references by AS, TITLE,
or Field Name, are uniform in the report output and OLAP controls.
Saving and Displaying OLAP Reports and Graphs in Other Formats

In this section:
Saving OLAP Reports and Graphs in the My Reports Folder
How to:
Display an OLAP Report and Graph in PDF Format
Save an OLAP Report and Graph as an Excel File
Display an OLAP Report and Graph as an HTML Active Report
OLAP reports and graphs appear in your browser in HTML format. You can display the report
and corresponding graph in PDF, Excel, and Active Report formats, and in folders within
Managed Reporting.

The following save and/or display options are available:

PDF is useful when you want a report or graph to maintain its presentation and layout
regardless of a user's browser or printer type.
When you choose PDF format, the report appears in Adobe Acrobat Reader; the graph
continues to appear above it in a browser window. If you print from Acrobat, only the
report will be printed.
Excel is useful when you want to convert a large database to a spreadsheet or save a
report and graph in a commonly used Office tool. Two Excel formats are available:
Excel 2000 supports most StyleSheet attributes, allowing for full report formatting.
The computer on which the report is being displayed must have Microsoft Excel 2000
or higher installed.
When you choose Excel 2000, the report and graph are displayed in the same tool
where you can manipulate the data using Excel options. From Excel you can print both
the report and the graph.
When you save in Excel 2000 format, only explicit drill-downs (based on parameters
passed from the base report to the drill-down report) continue to work. Automatic drill
downs on Dimensions and Measures are not supported in Excel.
Excel is a binary display format with limited formatting support. The computer on which
the report is being displayed must have Microsoft Excel installed.
Drill-downs of any kind are not supported.
Active Report is useful when you want to create a self-contained HTML report that is
designed for offline analysis. You can interact with the data, using analysis options similar
to those found in an Excel workbook, without any connection to a server.
In Managed Reporting:
A user can save the HTML output in the My Reports folder.
A developer can save the HTML output in the Other folder, where it can be distributed to
users as a Standard Report. Developers can refer to the WebFOCUS Managed Reporting
Developer's Manual for details on how to save a transformed report as a Standard Report.
Procedure: How to Display an OLAP Report and Graph in PDF Format

2. Click the Options button at the bottom of the window.
3. Select Display as a PDF Report.
562 WebFOCUS
The graph appears in the browser above the report, while a second browser opens and
launches the report output in Adobe Acrobat as shown in the following image.
Tip: If you wish, you can save and print the PDF report from Adobe Acrobat.
Procedure: How to Save an OLAP Report and Graph as an Excel File

3. Select Save the data in an Excel file or Save the data in an Excel 2000 file.
4. Follow the instructions to export the data.
Procedure: How to Display an OLAP Report and Graph as an HTML Active Report
1. Open the Olap Control Panel.
2. Click the Save button at the bottom of the window.
3. Select Display as Active Report (Offline Analysis).
4. The report and graph appear in a separate window as an HTML Active Report.

Saving OLAP Reports and Graphs in the My Reports Folder

In Managed Reporting, you can save an OLAP report and graph in you're my Reports folder.
3. Select Save as My Reports.
A secondary window opens.
4. Enter a descriptive name and click OK to save the graph(s) and the tabular report.
Note: There is no limit to the number of characters in a graph legend's label, but long labels
may appear truncated.
564 WebFOCUS
WebFOCUS
9 Visualizing Trends in Reports
To make your HTML reports more

Topics:
powerful, you can insert visual
representations of selected data directly Applying Bar Graphs
into the report output. These visual
representations are in the form of vertical Associating Bar Graphs With Measures
or horizontal bar graphs that make
relationships and trends among data
more obvious.

Applying Bar Graphs
Applying Bar Graphs

Vertical or horizontal bar graphs highlight relationships and trends among data.
Vertical Bar Graph. You can apply a vertical bar graph to report columns associated
with an ACROSS sort field. The report output displays a vertical bar graph in a new row
above the associated data values as shown in the following image.
Bar graphs that project above the zero line represent positive values, while bar graphs
that project below the zero line represent negative values.
Horizontal Bar Graph. You can apply a horizontal bar graph to report columns. The
report output displays a horizontal bar graph in a new column to the right of the associated
data values as shown in the following image.
Bar graphs that project to the right of the zero line represent positive values, while bar
graphs that project to the left of the zero line represent negative values.
566 WebFOCUS
9. Visualizing Trends in Reports
The length of each vertical or horizontal bar graph is proportional to the magnitude of its
associated data value. The shortest bar graph appears for the value with the minimum
magnitude, the longest bar graph for the value with the maximum magnitude, and bar graphs
of varying length appear for each value within the minimum-maximum magnitude range.
Notice in the figure that a value of 147,490.00 produces a longer horizontal bar graph than
a value of 50,153.00. Therefore, a complete row of vertical bar graphs or a complete column
of horizontal bar graphs forms a bar chart.
You can only apply data visualization bar graphs to numeric report columns (integer, decimal,
floating point single-precision, floating point double-precision, and packed). Bar graphs
applied to alphanumeric, date, or text field formats are ignored.
You can display data visualization bar graphs in OLAP-enabled HTML reports, where bar
graphs are applied to Measures.
Associating Bar Graphs With Measures

In this section:
Data Visualization Bar Graph Attributes
Applying Bar Graphs to Measures in an OLAP Report
Applying Bar Graphs to Measures Using the Selections Pane or Control Panel
You can associate data visualization bar graphs with any numeric measure that appears in
the report output.
The type of bar graph that you can apply depends on the placement of the dimensions
included in the report:
If all report dimensions are vertical (By) sort fields (listed in the Drill Down box in the
OCP), you can apply a horizontal bar graph to the specified measures.
If any dimension is a horizontal (Across) sort field (listed in the Drill Across box in the
OCP), you can apply a vertical bar graph to the specified measures.
For more information about OLAP reports, see Analyzing Data in an OLAP Report on page
443.

Data Visualization Bar Graph Attributes

The following table outlines the default attributes used to display data visualization bar
graphs applied from the OLAP selections pane or the OLAP Control Panel. The first column
lists the bar graph attribute, while the second column lists the default value.
Bar graph attribute Default value
Color Positive values: Blue

Negative values: Red
Length Vertical bar graph: 60 pixels

Horizontal bar graph: 80 pixels
Width The size of the font in the report output is used to define
a default value for the width of the bar graph.
Note: Currently, you cannot modify bar graph attributes from the OLAP selection panel or
the OLAP Control Panel.
Applying Bar Graphs to Measures in an OLAP Report
How to:
Apply Bar Graphs to Measures in an OLAP Report
The quickest way to apply data visualization bar graphs to numeric measures is from the
report itself.
Procedure: How to Apply Bar Graphs to Measures in an OLAP Report

1. Right-click the title of a measure column.
2. Choose Visualize from the menu.
The report runs automatically, displaying a column of bar graphs following the selected
measures column.
Tip: To remove the bar graphs, right-click the measure column title and choose Remove
Visualize from the menu.
568 WebFOCUS
Example: Applying and Sorting Bar Graphs in a Report

In the following OLAP report:
1. Right-click Line Cost of Goods Sold and choose Visualize to apply a data visualization bar
graph to each value in the column, as shown in the following image.
Note: The options available may vary, dending on your OLAP format settings. For more
The display changes instantly, as shown in the following image.
2. Sort the data by highest value. You can either right-click Line Cost of Goods Sold and
choose Sort by Highest, or click the Up arrow (the tool tip reads Sort LINE_COG highest
to lowest).

The following image shows the results of sorting the data by the highest value.
Applying Bar Graphs to Measures Using the Selections Pane or Control Panel
How to:
Apply Bar Graphs to Measures Using the Selections Pane
Apply Bar Graphs to Measures Using the Control Panel
Remove Bar Graphs Using the Selections Pane or Control Panel
Reference:
Display Modes in the OLAP Control Panel
You can apply data visualization bar graphs to any numeric measure.
To indicate the measures for which you want to display bar graphs, you click the check box
located to the left of each measure. This check box has three states that control the display
modes for the measure.
570 WebFOCUS
In the following table the first column shows the three check box states and the second
column provides descriptions for the display modes.
Check Box State Display Mode for the Measure
Displays the measure.

Check mark
Graph icon Applies a bar graph to the measure and displays both the
measure and its associated bar graph.
Blank box Does not display the measure or an associated bar graph.
You click the check box next to a measure until it reflects the display mode you want.
If an OLAP report contains a measure that does not appear in the report, the Measure control
shows a blank check box. To display the measure, click the check box once. To display the
associated bar graph, click the check box again.
Note: The three-state check box is not active when you apply Stack Measures to your report.
These features are mutually exclusive.
Procedure: How to Apply Bar Graphs to Measures Using the Selections Pane
1. From the OLAP selections pane, click the arrow to the left of the Measures control.
2. Click the check box beside each numeric measure to which you want to add a bar graph.
The check mark in the box is replaced with the Graph icon.
3. Click Run. The new report appears with the associated bar graphs.
Procedure: How to Apply Bar Graphs to Measures Using the Control Panel
1. Click the OLAP button in the OLAP selections pane to open the OLAP Control Panel. The
Measures box appears in the lower right corner.
2. If Stack Measures is applied to the report, click the Stack Measures check box to turn
off this feature.
3. To apply data visualization bar graphs to a measure, click the check box to the left of
the measure.
To apply data visualization graphs to a non-displaying measure, click the check box
twice.

The check mark in the box is replaced with the Graph icon. This icon indicates that data
visualization bar graphs are applied to the measure. (If you have not done so in step
two, this also deactivates the Stack Measures feature.)
You can apply data visualization bar graphs to as many numeric measures as you want.
4. After you select all the measures for which you want to display bar graphs, click Run.
The new report output appears with the associated bar graphs.
5. To continue to modify the report (either data visualization or another OLAP configuration),
click the OLAP button again.
Procedure: How to Remove Bar Graphs Using the Selections Pane or Control Panel
1. From the Measures drop-down list in the OLAP selections pane or the Measures box in
the OLAP Control Panel, click the check box for any measure to which you have applied
data visualization bar graphs.
This removes the Graph icon and displays a blank check box indicating that the measure
will not appear in the report output when you run the report.
2. To display the measure, click the same check box again. A check mark appears in the
box.
3. Click Run to display the new report output, where the measure appears without its
associated bar graph.
Example: Applying Data Visualization Bar Graphs to Measures Using the Selections Pane
Suppose that you want to associate data visualization bar graphs with the Profit column in
the following report in order to represent visually the differences between the Costs for and
the Prices of your various Products.
572 WebFOCUS
You have created the following OLAP report, as shown in the following image, which displays
the report data by Product Name.

To associate data visualization bar graphs with the Profit column:

1. Click the Measures drop-down list in the report (or open the OLAP Control Panel (OCP) by
clicking the OLAP button), as shown in the following image.
The check marks indicate that the measures will appear in the report output.
2. Click the Profit check box again. The following images shows the Measures drop-down
list in the OCP with the Profit check box selected as a Graph icon.
The Graph icon replaces the check mark. This icon indicates that the measure will appear
with its associated bar graph.
3. Click the Run button to display the new report output.
574 WebFOCUS
Notice that the report now contains a new column to the right of the Profit measure. This
column displays a horizontal bar chart comprised of bar graphs that visually represent
the individual data values for the Profit measure, as shown in the following image.

Reference: Display Modes in the OLAP Control Panel

The Measures box, from which you select a display mode, is located in the lower right corner
of the Control Panel, as shown in the following image.
The state of each measure's check box determines how the measure appears in the report
output. In this illustration:
The COST and PRICE measures will appear in the report output (check mark in the boxes).
The Profit measure and its associated bar graph will appear in the report output (Graph
icon in the box).
Note that the Stack Measures option is inactive when a bar graph is applied to a measure.
576 WebFOCUS
WebFOCUS
10 Using the WebFOCUS Viewer
The WebFOCUS Viewer uses the On-

Topics:
demand Paging facility. When On-demand
paging is enabled, WebFOCUS saves the Navigating a Report With the
bulk of your report to your Web server WebFOCUS Viewer
and delivers one page of report output
at a time, decreasing the amount of time Using the Viewer Control Panel
you wait for your report to process. The Creating On-demand Paging Reports
bulk of your report remains on the Web
server until you request it or close the
Viewer.
The WebFOCUS Viewer improves your
ability to handle long reports by allowing
you to view a single page of report
output. You can use the Viewer to:
View single pages of long reports.
Search for specific pages in a report.
Search for specific strings of
information.
Deliver a full report to your Web
server.

Navigating a Report With the WebFOCUS Viewer
Navigating a Report With the WebFOCUS Viewer

When you run a report designated for On-Demand Paging, the WebFOCUS Viewer opens
automatically and displays the first page of the report. The Viewer consists of two panes:
the Report Pane and the Viewer Control Panel as shown in the following image.
The Report Pane is the larger pane and contains one page of report output. When you first
run a report, the Report Pane contains the first page of report output. The Viewer Control
Panel contains the controls that allow you to display specific pages, deliver the entire report
to your Web server, and search your document for particular strings of information.
578 WebFOCUS
10. Using the WebFOCUS Viewer
Using the Viewer Control Panel

In this section:
Searching a Report
How to:
Navigate Through a Report
The Viewer Control Panel, as shown in the following image, (located at the bottom of the
window) contains the controls you use to navigate through the report and to search for a
string in the report. The Viewer Control Panel's navigational controls allow you to display the
next or previous page, the first or last page, or a specific page. You use the searching
function to have the Viewer locate a search string you specify within all report pages.
Note: When specifying a search string, you must specify the actual number of spaces
between characters because HTML displays a single space, even when multiple spaces are
used between characters.
Procedure: How to Navigate Through a Report

The Viewer Control Panel offers several ways to view pages in your report:
To display a specific page:
1. Enter a page number in the Page input box as shown in the following image.
2. Click Go to Page as shown in the following image.
To display the previous or the next page in sequence, click Previous or Next as shown in

To display the first or last page of the report, click First Page or Last Page as shown in
To download the entire report to the browser as a single document, click All Pages as
To close the WebFOCUS Viewer, click Close as shown in the following image.
Searching a Report
How to:
Search the Report
Customize Search Results With a Cascading Style Sheet
The Viewer Control Panel contains controls that offer several ways to search your report.
Using the Viewer's search controls, you can select a string of information, such as a phrase
that occurs in your report or a group of numbers, and search for each occurrence of that
string. You can further customize your search by matching capitalization of words exactly (a
case-sensitive search) or by controlling the direction of your search (either forward or backward
from your starting point in the report). Use these controls to search your report:
To perform a case-sensitive search, click Match Case as shown in the following image.
To search backward in a report, click Search Backward as shown in the following image.
To locate a specific string, type the string you want to search for and click Find as shown
580 WebFOCUS
Procedure: How to Search the Report

1. Enter the string in the Search input box.
2. Click Match Case if you want to perform a case-sensitive search.
Notice that the WebFOCUS Viewer displays the Match Case button with a red line across
it to indicate that it is active.
3. To begin your search, click:

a. Search Backward to search for the string from the current page back to the first
page, or
b. Find to search from the current page to the end of your report.
The WebFOCUS Viewer searches the report and underlines the first occurrence of the
string.
4. Click Find again to search for another occurrence of the string.
Example: Using the Viewer Control Panel to Search

You want to use the Viewer Control Panel to navigate a long report called Coffee Sales to
find occurrences of the string "Kona," a type of coffee that you sell. After you run the report,
WebFOCUS displays the first page of the report in the Viewer.

1. To search for sales of Kona, type Kona in the input box and click Find as shown in the
following image.
582 WebFOCUS
The WebFOCUS Viewer returns your report with the first occurrence of your search string
underlined as shown in the following image.
2. Click Find again to locate the next occurrence of Kona.
Procedure: How to Customize Search Results With a Cascading Style Sheet

The WebFOCUS Viewer searches the report and underlines the first occurrence of the text
string found. You may customize the search results by applying a Cascading Style Sheet
(CSS) with a color and/or style defined.
1. Open a new text file by using a third-party text editor, such as Notepad.

2. Type the following example Cascading Style Sheet (CSS) code:

BODY {
font : x-small Verdana, Arial, Helvetica;
}
U {
background : Blue;
text-decoration : none;
color : White;
font : bold;
}
In the CSS example code above, underlined text in the body of the report will be changed
to have the background color set to Blue, the text set to bold, and the text color set to
White.
3. Save the file as a Cascading Style Sheet (.css).

Note: Type .css as the file extension. For example, findcolor.css.
The location to save the CSS file to depends on the WebFOCUS environment you are
working in.
Note: CSS files are accessed from a Web accessible location. For WebFOCUS and
Developer Studio installations the /ibi_html alias is a location that web accessible
content can be stored.
1. If you are working in Developer Studio local project environment, save the CSS file
to \ibi\DevStudioxx\ibi_html directory. Where xx is the Developer Studio release
number. You may specify the URL to the CSS file within the Report Painter reporting
tool. In the Style tab of the Report Options dialog box (for HTML format), select Style
File Selection and enter the URL value in the External Cascading Stylesheet URL input
field. For example: /ibi_html/findcolor.css.
2. If you are using Developer Studio connected to a remote WebFOCUS Environment,
or not using Developer Studio but coding a self service FEX, then save the CSS file
in \ibi\WebFOCUSxx\ibi_html. Where xx is the WebFOCUS Release number.
3. If you are working in Managed Reporting, the CSS file can be imported into the
Managed Reporting domain. Once imported, it will be located in the Other Files folder.
The reporting tools have an option to select a Cascading Style File within the Managed
Reporting domain. You may select the CSS file in the reporting tools from the Report
Options or Report Properties.
HTML Report Assistant - From the Report options tab, select the Apply an existing
Cascading Style Sheet option from the Global report styling section.
Power Painter – From the Report Properties Stylesheet reference field, browse to
select the file type Cascading Style Sheet.
584 WebFOCUS
4. Open your report with a reporting tool, or the Text Editor, and apply the Cascading Style
Sheet.
In the following code, the findcolor.css Cascading Style Sheet is applied to the report:
TABLE FILE CAR
PRINT CAR MODEL SEATS
BY COUNTRY
ON TABLE SET WEBVIEWER ON
ON TABLE SET STYLE *
CSSURL=/ibi_html/findcolor.css, $
ENDSTYLE
END
Note: Fully qualify the URL to the CSS file when the CSS file is located on a different
web location than the WebFOCUS Environment you are running the report from. For
example: CSSURL=http://hostname[:port]/ibi_html/findcolor.css $, where hostname[:port]
is the host name and port number of the web or application server the CSS file is
accessible from.
5. Run the report.

6. Enter the string in the Search input box and click Find.
The WebFOCUS Viewer searches the report and highlights the first occurrence of the
string found in blue. In the example below, a report using the findcolor.css Cascading
Style Sheet searches and finds DOOR by highlighting the word blue.

Creating On-demand Paging Reports

How to:
Create an On-demand Paging Report
You can create your own On-demand Paging report from Report Assistant. You can run this
report immediately or in deferred mode. Note that On-demand Paging is not currently available
with OLAP-enabled reports. For more information on running a report in deferred mode, see
Using the Deferred Report Status Interface on page 107.
Procedure: How to Create an On-demand Paging Report

1. From the Domains list window, select the Reporting Objects tab.
2. Select a Reporting Object from the list.
3. Click Report Assistant.
Report Assistant opens.
4. Add fields and customize your report. For more information on creating reports with
5. Click the Report Options tab and check the On-demand Paging check box.
6. Click Run to view your report.
WebFOCUS displays your report within the Viewer.
Note: The Viewer is launched over a blank browser window. This window is necessary
for the operation of the Viewer. It must be closed separately from the Viewer.
7. To return to Report Assistant, close the WebFOCUS Viewer and close the blank browser
page.
8. Close Report Assistant.
WebFOCUS prompts you to save your report before exiting.
Example: Creating an On-demand Paging Report

You want to select On-demand Paging for a report on the sale of coffee products called
Coffee Sales.
1. Navigate to the Domains view.
2. Open the Regional Sales domain.
586 WebFOCUS
3. From the Reporting Objects tab, expand the Product Sales group folder and select Coffee
Sales.
4. Open Report Assistant.
Report Assistant displays the Fields dialog box with the fields already selected for the
report.
5. Select the Report Options tab. The Report Options window opens.
6. Check the On-demand Paging check box to enable On-demand Paging.
7. Click Run to run Coffee Sales immediately.
WebFOCUS displays the first page of Coffee Sales in the Viewer as shown in the following
image.
8. Click Close on the WebFOCUS Viewer.

WebFOCUS notifies you that the report has been deleted from the server.

588 WebFOCUS
WebFOCUS
11 Using Two-Way Email
Two-Way Email enables mobile business

Topics:
professionals to request and receive
WebFOCUS reports through e-mail, using Two-Way Email User Steps
a handheld device, laptop, or desktop.
From any location, at any time, users Subscribing for the First Time
have access to their company's Replying to the Confirmation Message
enterprise data.
Receiving Your Templates for the First
To request a report, a user simply replies
Time
to and sends an e-mail that contains a
Two-Way Email template. A template is Requesting a Report
the means by which a request is made
and parameter values are supplied if Updating Your Subscription
required. A Managed Reporting Information
Administrator or Developer creates and Responding to an Alert
maintains templates for a user.
This topic explains the steps a user
performs to enable the Two-Way Email
capability. It also describes how a
template looks, and how to use one to
request a report. Finally, it addresses
alert response for those sites that have
licensed and installed both ReportCaster
and Two-Way Email.

Two-Way Email User Steps
Two-Way Email User Steps

As a user, perform the following steps to enable Two-Way Email:
1. Subscribe to Two-Way Email by accessing and supplying information on an HTML
subscription page. For more information, see Subscribing for the First Time on page 590.
You can also ask your Managed Reporting Administrator to subscribe you from the Two-
Way Email Administrator console.
2. Reply to the confirmation message sent by Two-Way Email. This message acknowledges
your subscription request and validates your Reply-To e-mail address. For more information,
see Replying to the Confirmation Message on page 593.
3. Receive and store your Two-Way Email templates in your inbox, or in a folder on your
e-mail program. The Managed Reporting Administrator or Developer creates these
templates for your use. Each template is associated with a Managed Reporting Standard
Report of interest to you. For more information, see Receiving Your Templates for the First
Time on page 594.
4. Request a report simply by selecting, replying to, and sending a template. For more
information, see Requesting a Report on page 595.
5. Update your subscription information if it changes. For more information, see Updating
Your Subscription Information on page 598.
Subscribing for the First Time

How to:
Subscribe for the First Time
Two-Way Email provides a subscription page accessed from a Web browser. You can display
the subscription page on your desktop, laptop, or any handheld device that supports the
Web.
Use the subscription page to independently subscribe to Two-Way Email for the first time.
On the subscription page, you must supply a valid Managed Reporting user ID and password.
You must also supply a WebFOCUS Reporting Server user ID and password, unless they are
stored for you on the server. If you do not know the required security information, ask your
Managed Reporting Administrator for it.
After you subscribe, you receive a confirmation message through e-mail. After you reply to
it, Two-Way Email sends you all the templates you are authorized to use.
590 WebFOCUS
11. Using Two-Way Email
Procedure: How to Subscribe for the First Time

1. Your site has a Web address for the Two-Way Email subscription page. Ask your Managed
Reporting Administrator for the address if you do not know it.
From your browser, access the subscription page by entering the Web address. For
example,
http://hostname[:port]/rc_context_root/twoway/mobile/twoway.htm
where:
hostname[:port]
default port number) of the Application Server where the ReportCaster Web application
is deployed.
rc_context_root
Is the site-customized context root for the ReportCaster Web application deployed
on your Application Server. The default value is rcaster.
2. Enter your Managed Reporting user ID and password as assigned by the Managed
Reporting Administrator.
Click Subscribing to Two-Way Email for the first time, as shown in the following image.
3. Click Continue.

Subscribing for the First Time
A window similar to the following image opens.
4. If applicable at your site, select Default to use the WebFOCUS Reporting Server user ID
and password stored for you on that server. Otherwise, enter your security credentials
for the WebFOCUS Reporting Server.
5. Enter your e-mail address. Two-Way Email will use this address to send you Two-Way
Email templates and WebFOCUS reports when you request them. The syntax is:
name@domain
where:
name
Is your e-mail user name.
domain
Is the domain name.
Note: You must include the character @.
6. Click Add me to add your new subscription.
592 WebFOCUS
A message informs you that Two-Way Email added your address to the database as
shown in the following image:
7. You have the opportunity to add another e-mail address to your subscription information,
or to view the information already supplied. To do so, click Continue.
Close the Two-Way Email window when you are done.
Replying to the Confirmation Message

How to:
Reply to the Confirmation Message
After receiving your subscription request and validating your security credentials, Two-Way
Email sends you a confirmation message through e-mail, acknowledging your request and
confirming that it has your correct e-mail address.

Receiving Your Templates for the First Time
Procedure: How to Reply to the Confirmation Message

1. Check your mailbox for a message from Two-Way Email. Open the confirmation message
when it arrives. A window similar to the following opens:
2. As prompted, reply to the e-mail. Type your Managed Reporting user ID on the first line
of the reply.
If your device or program has an option to include the body of the e-mail (for example,
Reply with Text or Include Original Text), select it. This option ensures that the content
of the template is included in the reply. Two-Way Email requires the content to correctly
process the reply.
3. Click Send to send your reply to Two-Way Email.
Receiving Your Templates for the First Time

After you subscribe for the first time and reply to the confirmation message, Two-Way Email
sends you all the templates you are authorized to use for your reporting needs.
Check your mailbox for their delivery. When they arrive, store them in your inbox, or in a
folder on your e-mail program.
594 WebFOCUS
Requesting a Report
In this section:
Examples of Requesting a Report and Accepting the Default Value of a Parameter
How to:
Request a Report
After you receive and store your templates, you can request a WebFOCUS report. A template
is the means by which you request a report and supply parameter values if required.
A Two-Way Email template contains information about the associated report. It may also
prompt you for one or more parameter values that define the scope of the report. If a template
prompts you for a value, you must supply one; otherwise, the report will not run.
A report template may request an update to a data source rather than a report.
The following is a sample template requesting a report:
Enter a product category on line 1 of your reply.
Valid product categories are Coffee, Food, Gifts.
----------
<TWOWAY>
YXBwL3RvdGFscmV0LnR4dCwjdGVsbG1ldGVzdHNuLHByb2dyYW1tL3By
b2dyYW1tLmh0bSwwLjE4OTQ5NTI3NDE0NjIxMDky
</TWOWAY>
The tags <TWOWAY> and </TWOWAY> delimit an encrypted Extensible Markup Language
(XML) stream describing the report, including its associated domain. Two-Way Email needs
this information to retrieve the report code from the Managed Reporting Repository and route
it to the WebFOCUS Reporting Server for execution.
The prompt at the top of the sample template instructs you to supply a parameter value on
line 1 of your reply. In this case, you must enter the name of a product category that exists
in the data source, such as Coffee, Food, or Gifts. If you enter Coffee, the report will contain
only data that applies to that category.
Procedure: How to Request a Report

1. Double-click the e-mail containing the template for the desired report.
The subject of the e-mail typically identifies or describes the report.

Requesting a Report
2. Click Reply.
process the reply.
3. If the report requires a parameter value, type it on the first line of the reply. Type multiple
values on successive lines, each on a line by itself.
To accept the default value of a parameter, type a period (.) on the applicable line in
your reply. This action ensures that Two-Way Email will read the value properly.
The e-mail may indicate valid values from which you can choose. If it does not, and you
are not sure how to respond, ask your Managed Reporting Administrator or Developer.
4. Click Send.
Two-Way Email will return the requested report to you.
Examples of Requesting a Report and Accepting the Default Value of a Parameter

The following are examples of requesting a report and accepting the default value of a
parameter.
Example: Requesting a Report With a Parameter

Suppose you want a report that shows the number of units sold, and the total dollar amount
of sales, for a particular product category. The report is associated with a Two-Way Email
template called Sales Report for User-supplied Category : TW. It requires a parameter value
for the product category of interest.
A Managed Reporting Administrator or Developer can create the Standard Report and template
for you, as described in the WebFOCUS Managed Reporting Administrator's Manual.
1. Double-click the e-mail called Sales Report for User-supplied Category : TW.
2. The template prompts you for the product category and shows the possible values:
596 WebFOCUS
3. Click Reply.
process the reply.
4. Enter Food on line 1 as the parameter value.
5. Click Send. Two-Way Email sends the report to you:
PAGE 1
Category Unit Sales Dollar Sales

-------- ---------- ------------
Food 1384845 17229333
Example: Accepting the Default Value of a Parameter

Suppose you want a report that shows the number of units budgeted, and the number of
units sold, for a particular product category and store code. The report is associated with a
Two-Way Email template called Budgeted Units by Category and Store Code : TW.
For the product category, you can supply a value or accept the default. For the store code,
you must accept the value provided by the Administrator.
A Managed Reporting Administrator or Developer can create the Standard Report and template
1. Double-click the e-mail called Budgeted Units by Category and Store Code : TW.
2. The template prompts you as follows:
You can accept the default, which is Gifts.
To accept the default, enter a period (.) on line 1 of your reply.
It also informs you that the only allowed store code value is R1019.
3. Click Reply.
process the reply.
4. You want to accept the default, Gifts. As instructed, enter a period on line 1 of your reply.

Updating Your Subscription Information
5. Click Send.
Two-Way Email sends the report to you:
PAGE 1
Category Store ID Budget Units Unit Sales

-------- -------- ------------ ----------
Gifts R1019 79552 78869

How to:
Access the Subscription Update Page
Add a New E-mail Address
Delete an Existing E-mail Address
Refresh Your Templates
Update Your Security Credentials
Use the subscription update page to perform the following:

Add a new e-mail address to the Two-Way Email database. The address will be associated
with your subscription information.
Delete an existing e-mail address from the Two-Way Email database.
Refresh your Two-Way Email templates (that is, have them resent to you) if you accidentally
delete one, or if the Managed Reporting Administrator or Developer creates or modifies
a template for you.
Update your WebFOCUS Reporting Server security credentials if they change.
598 WebFOCUS
Procedure: How to Access the Subscription Update Page

1. From your browser, access the subscription page by entering the Web address that
applies to your site. For example,
http://hostname[:port]/rc_context_root/twoway/mobile/twoway.htm
where:
hostname[:port]
Is the host name and optional port number (specified only if you ar not using the
default port number) of the Application Server where the ReportCaster Web application
is deployed.
rc_context_root
Is the site-customized context root for the ReportCaster Web application deployed
on your Application Server. The default value is rcaster.
2. Enter your Managed Reporting user ID and password as assigned by the Managed
Reporting Administrator.
3. Click Updating a current Two-Way Email subscription, as shown on the following image.

4. Click Continue. As shown on the following image, the next window allows you to perform
update tasks, as described in the procedures that follow.
Procedure: How to Add a New E-mail Address

1. In the Email address field, type the new address.
600 WebFOCUS
2. Click Add. As shown in the following image, it confirms the email address was added.
3. Click Continue to return to the subscription update page to perform other tasks or review
what you have done. Close the window when you are finished.
Two-Way Email sends a confirmation message to the new e-mail address. After you reply
to the message, the address is activated, and Two-Way Email sends the templates you
are authorized to use.

Procedure: How to Delete an Existing E-mail Address

1. In the list of current addresses, select the one you want to remove, as shown in the
following image.
2. Click Delete. You are asked if you are sure you want to delete the address as shown on
3. Click OK to remove the address from the database.

Click Cancel to discontinue the procedure and return to the previous window.
4. If you attempt to delete the only e-mail address associated with your subscription, the
entire subscription (user account) will be cancelled. You are asked if you are sure you
want to proceed with that action.
602 WebFOCUS
Click OK to delete your subscription, or click Cancel to discontinue the procedure. If you
click OK, Two-Way Email informs you that you are not in its user database as shown on
Procedure: How to Refresh Your Templates

1. From the list of current addresses, select the address to which you want to send the
templates.
2. Click Refresh. A message informs you that fresh copies of your templates will be sent
to the address specified.
Procedure: How to Update Your Security Credentials

1. Enter your new WebFOCUS Reporting Server user ID and password in the appropriate
fields.
2. Click Update. A message informs you that your user ID and password have been updated.
Responding to an Alert
Two-Way Email alert response is available only at sites that have licensed and installed both
ReportCaster and Two-Way Email. For more information on ReportCaster Alerts, see the
WebFOCUS Managed Reporting Administrator's Manual.
A Managed Reporting Administrator or Developer can attach a Two-Way Email template to
a ReportCaster Alert. As a user, you are alerted when certain predefined data conditions are
met. You can use the attached Two-Way Email template to respond to the alert to request
a report for more detail.

Example: Responding to an Alert

A Managed Reporting Administrator or Developer can create the sample alert and template
You are alerted when the total dollar sales for coffee for store code R1019 exceed
$1,000,000. The alert takes the form of a report showing the exact amount of dollar sales.
Attached to the report is a template, prompting you for another store code of interest, for
comparison purposes. You will respond to the alert by supplying a store code value and
sending the template. Your response generates a second report, showing the dollar sales
for coffee for the supplied store code. You can then compare the two reports.
1. Periodically check your inbox for an alert from Two-Way Email, named Coffee Sales Alert.
When it is delivered, open it and view the report. A template will be attached:
PAGE 1
Category Store ID Dollar Sales

-------- -------- ------------
Coffee R1019 1393610
Enter a store code on line 1 of your reply.

Valid store codes are R1088, R1109, R1250.
----------
[TWOWAY]
YXBwL3RvdGFscmV0LnR4dCwjdGVsbG1ldGVzdHNuLHByb2dyYW1tL3By
b2dyYW1tLmh0bSwwLjE4OTQ5NTI3NDE0NjIxMDky
[/TWOWAY]
2. Notice that the template prompts you for a store code.
3. Click Reply.
process the reply.
4. Enter the store code you are interested in.
604 WebFOCUS
5. Click Send.
Two-Way Email sends the comparison report to you. For example, if you requested
information on store code R1088, you receive the following:
PAGE 1
Category Store ID Dollar Sales

-------- -------- ------------
Coffee R1088 1375040

606 WebFOCUS
WebFOCUS
12 Using Java Applet Managed Reporting
WebFOCUS Managed Reporting utilizes

Topics:
Java technology so that you can run
Standard Reports that are defined in Accessing Managed Reporting
advance by an Administrator. You can
also create, edit, and save reports that Using Domains in Java-based
meet your individual needs. You do not Managed Reporting
need to know the complexities of the Running a Report
underlying databases or the FOCUS
language to create and run reports. You Sharing a Report
create reports and graphs using the set
of graphical tools and components Creating a Report or Graph
described in Introducing WebFOCUS Creating Procedures With the Text
Managed Reporting on page 19. Editor
Managed Reporting allows you to run Editing a My Report
WebFOCUS with a Java applet-enabled
browser. Your Administrator selects the Editing a Custom Report and its
Managed Reporting Interface for you and Properties
associates it with your user profile. When
Execution of a Custom Report Using
you sign on, WebFOCUS automatically
-INCLUDE
launches the Java version of Managed
Reporting. Filtering Data
This chapter describes Java applet Searching a Domain
Managed Reporting and provides
procedures for running reports and
creating your own reports using blocks
of data your Administrator has created
for you. You will also learn how to submit
reports to run in deferred mode and how
to apply filters and other parameters.

Accessing Managed Reporting
Accessing Managed Reporting

How to:
Access Managed Reporting
Change Your Password
To access Managed Reporting, the Web server, WebFOCUS Client, and WebFOCUS Reporting
Server must all be started. All three can be started as Windows services by selecting
Administrative Tools and then Services from the Control Panel.
Note: Managed Reporting may be set up with security specific to your site, so you may not
see the logon page or the change password option.
Procedure: How to Access Managed Reporting

1. Launch your Web browser and enter the following Uniform Resource Locator (URL):
http://webserver/ibi_apps/
The WebFOCUS Welcome page opens.
2. Click Managed Reporting (Applet) Interface in the Dashboard and Managed Reporting
section.
The Managed Reporting Logon page opens.
Note: If the Managed Reporting Logon page does not appear, contact your administrator.
Procedure: How to Change Your Password

1. Click Change Password on the Managed Reporting logon page.
The Change Password window opens.
2. Enter your user ID in the User input box.

3. Enter your current password in the Password input box.
4. Enter your new password in the New Password input box.
5. Enter your new password again in the Confirm Password input box.
6. Click Submit to have WebFOCUS change your password and return you to the previous
screen.
608 WebFOCUS
12. Using Java Applet Managed Reporting
Using Domains in Java-based Managed Reporting

In this section:
Using the Toolbar
When Managed Reporting opens, WebFOCUS displays a list of domains available to you in
a tree within the left frame of the dual paned Domains Interface. Before you can produce a
report or graph in Managed Reporting, you must choose a domain from the Domains Interface.
For more information on domains, see Introducing WebFOCUS Managed Reporting on page
19.
The right pane of the Domains Interface remains empty until you select a domain. When you
select a domain, the contents of the domain appear in four tabs on the right - Standard
Reports, My Reports (includes Custom Reports), Shared Reports, and Reporting Objects.
As you navigate within a domain, the domain tree view remains constant. Domains are
developed by an Administrator to provide logical groupings for data and to protect access
to confidential information. Your Administrator also creates group folders or subgroup folders
as subdirectories to further divide information.
The following image shows a Managed Reporter window that has two sections: Managed
Reporter toolbar, and the Domain Interface.
The size of the left and right panes in the domain window can be adjusted by dragging the
bar separating the panes. Horizontal and vertical scrolling is enabled when the content of
a particular tab is too wide or long to fit the screen.
Note: The arrows only bring the tab into view. You must click on the tab to actually select
it and load the information in the frame.

Using Domains in Java-based Managed Reporting
Using the Toolbar
How to:
Choose a Domain
The toolbar buttons shown in the following image enable you to perform tasks and utilize
functionality described in the table and procedures that follow.
The following table lists and describes the buttons in the toolbar:
Button Description
New Adds a new component. For example, if you highlight the Domains
folder and then click New, you create a new domain.
Open/Close Opens/closes a selected object.
Edit Displays the WebFOCUS code for the selected object (report,
procedure, or launch page) in the text editor window.
Report Assistant Opens the Report Assistant.
Graph Assistant Opens the Graph Assistant.
Filter Applies filters.
Save as My Report Saves the report as a My Report.
Search Enables you to search the selected domain, folder, or object.
Refresh Updates the contents of the Managed Reporting Repository window.
Run Executes the selected report or displays the selected launch page.
Run Deferred Executes the selected report in deferred mode.
Deferred Status Displays the Deferred Report Status Interface in a new browser
window.
ReportCaster Enables you to access ReportCaster. For more information, see

the ReportCaster End User's Manual.
610 WebFOCUS
Button Description
Report Library Enables you to access the content in the Report Library.
Cut Removes an object (Standard Report, Reporting Object, launch

page, or Other File) from the domain and copies it to the clipboard.
Copy Copies an object to the clipboard.
Delete Removes the selected folder or object.
Paste Places a clipboard item into a domain.

Note: You must select a group folder within a domain to activate
the Paste button.
Properties Displays the name and data source of the selected object.
Help Displays online help.
Procedure: How to Choose a Domain

1. Access Managed Reporting.
The Domains Interface opens.
2. To open a domain, double-click the folder to the left of the domain name.
The contents of the domain appear in four report tabs in the right pane of the Domains
Interface, as shown in the following image.

Running a Report
The following table lists and describes the tabs in the Domains Interface:
Tab Description
Standard Lists reports or graphs created by your Administrator for you to

Reports run.
My Reports Lists reports or graphs you created and saved. Custom Reports
are located in the Custom Reports folder under the My Reports
tab.
Shared Reports Consists of folders named for the users who contributed Shared
Reports.
Reporting Lists simple views of your company's data that you use to build
Objects reports.
Running a Report
In this section:
Running a Deferred Receipt Report
Saving Deferred Receipt Reports
Reviewing Deferred Request Parameters
How to:
Run a Standard Report
Run a My Report or Custom Report
Run a Shared Report
From the Domain window, you can run Standard Reports, My Reports, Custom Reports, and
Shared Reports. You can run each type of report immediately or as a Deferred Receipt report.
To run a report immediately, see How to Run a Standard Report on page 613. To run a report
in deferred mode, see Running a Deferred Receipt Report on page 615.
You can view a Shared Report, but you cannot edit it when you run it from the Shared Reports
tab. To edit a Shared Report, you must first copy and save it to your My Reports tab, which
includes the Custom Reports folder where applicable. For more information, see How to
Copy a Shared Report on page 622.
612 WebFOCUS
Procedure: How to Run a Standard Report

1. Select a Domain from the left-hand pane of the Domains Interface.
2. In the Standard Reports tab, select the Standard Report you want to run.
3. Click Run on the toolbar.
If your Administrator has defined filters for the Standard Report, WebFOCUS opens the
Filters selection window.
4. If filters are available and you want to use them to limit data displayed in the report,
perform the following steps:
a. Expand the Filters group folders in the Filters Selection window.
b. Select the filters you want to use and click Add. For more information on building
filtering criteria, see Filtering Data on page 644.
WebFOCUS displays the filter icon with a red check mark and adds the selection
criteria to the Filter Criteria box (lower box in the Filter Selection dialog box).
c. Click OK to apply the filters to the report and return to the Standard Reports tab.
Notice that the filters you selected appear below the Standard Report.
5. Click Run.
WebFOCUS displays the report.
6. Close the browser to return to the Standard Reports tab.
Example: Running a Standard Report

Suppose you want to run a report computing salaries in the Sales Department.
1. Open the Corporate Personnel Information domain as shown in the following image.
2. Open the Sales Department group folder under the Standard Reports tab.

Running a Report
3. Select Current Salary Report as shown in the following image.
4. Click Run.
You may be prompted to supply a WebFOCUS Reporting Server ID. For more information,
see Signing on to a Server on page 40.
5. Close Current Salary.

You return to the Standard Reports tab.
614 WebFOCUS
Procedure: How to Run a My Report or Custom Report

1. Click the My Reports tab in the Domain window.
My Reports are listed under the Reporting Object folder from which they were created.
Custom Reports are listed in the Custom Reports folder in the My Reports tab.
2. Select the report or graph name.

3. Click Run.
WebFOCUS displays saved reports.
Procedure: How to Run a Shared Report

1. Click the Shared Reports tab in the Domain window.
WebFOCUS displays folders with the names of users who have contributed reports.
2. Double-click a user name.

The user name expands to display the Reporting Object group folders that were used
to create the Shared Reports.
3. Double-click the Reporting Object group folder and then the subgroup folder that contains
the Shared Report you want to run.
Note that the Shared Report icon appears next to the name of the report.
4. Select the report and then click Run.

WebFOCUS displays the report.
5. Close the browser to return to the Shared Reports tab.
Running a Deferred Receipt Report
How to:
Submit a Report for Deferred Receipt
View Report Properties
Deferred Receipt allows you to submit reports for processing and to retrieve the results later.
You do not have to wait for a report to process and return to your browser. You can submit
a report in any format, including OLAP-enabled reports and reports flagged for On-demand
Paging for Deferred Receipt.

Running a Report
A Managed Reporting Administrator can also designate a Standard Report or Reporting

Object to run only in deferred mode. To determine whether a Standard Report or Reporting
Object is designated as a Deferred Receipt Report, see How to View Report Properties on
page 618.
After you submit a report for Deferred Receipt, use the Deferred Report Status Interface to:
Monitor the status of a Deferred Receipt report.
View the report output.
Delete a report.
Save a Deferred Receipt report.
Review or change parameters in a Deferred Receipt report.
For more information, see Using the Deferred Report Status Interface on page 107.
Procedure: How to Submit a Report for Deferred Receipt

1. Log on to Managed Reporting.
2. Expand the domain containing the report you want to run in deferred mode.
WebFOCUS opens the domain in the right hand pane of the Domains Interface.
3. Select a group folder from the Standard Reports tab, the My Reports tab, or the Shared
Reports tab.
4. Select a Standard Report, My Report, or Shared Report and click Run Deferred.
You may be prompted to supply a WebFOCUS Reporting Server ID. For more information,
see Signing on to a Server on page 40.
5. If the report contains variables, when the intermediate window (HTML form) opens (to
prompt you for a value), enter a value in the input box.
6. Click Submit.
The Deferred Report Notification window opens to display notification of successful or
unsuccessful submission of the deferred request.
7. Close the Deferred Report Notification window to return to Managed Reporting.

8. Click Deferred Status to view the status of the Deferred Receipt request using the
Deferred Report Status Interface.
For more information about monitoring and viewing Deferred Receipt requests, see Using
the Deferred Report Status Interface on page 107.
616 WebFOCUS
Example: Submitting a Deferred Report

Suppose you want to run a report computing salaries in the Sales Department while you
continue to work on other Managed Reporting applications.
1. Open the Corporate Personnel Information domain.
2. Open the Sales Department group folder under the Standard Reports tab.
3. Select Current Salary Report.
4. Click Run Deferred on the toolbar. The Deferred Report Notification window opens,
confirming that Current Salary has been successfully submitted for Deferred Receipt.
The following image shows the Deferred Report Notification window which contains the
day, date and time that the report has successfully been submitted for deferred execution.
5. Close the Notification window to return to the Standard Reports tab.

6. When you want to view Current Salary, access the Deferred Report Status Interface by
clicking Deferred Status. For more information, see Using the Deferred Report Status
Interface on page 107.

Running a Report
The following image shows the Deferred Report Status window containing the day, date
and time displayed in the title bar. To view report status, you can use the Refresh button,
Sort By list box (in ascending or descending order), and Help button. Refresh can also
be automatically scheduled by entering the number of seconds for refresh and selecting
the Enable Refresh check box. The bottom part of the window lists the completed deferred
reports containing Date/Time Submitted, Domains, Description, Expires in, and Options
information.
7. Click View under the Options column to view Current Salary or click Save to save Output
of Current Salary to the Output folder under your My Reports tab.
Procedure: How to View Report Properties

You can view report properties to determine whether your Administrator has designated a
Standard Report or Reporting Object as a Deferred Receipt Report.
1. Select a report from the Standard Reports tab.
2. Click Properties on the Domain window toolbar.
If the report is a Deferred Receipt Report, Run Deferred appears in the Properties dialog
box after the folder name.
3. Click Cancel to exit the Properties dialog box and return to the Domain window.
Saving Deferred Receipt Reports
How to:
Save a Deferred Receipt Report
You can save Deferred Report output when the report status is Completed. When you save
Deferred Report output, WebFOCUS removes the report from the Deferred Report Status
Interface and creates a new group folder, Deferred Reports Output, on the My Reports tab.
WebFOCUS then saves the Deferred Report output to this group folder.
618 WebFOCUS
There is one Deferred Reports Output group folder for each domain. Report output contained
within the Deferred Reports Output folder is static and can only be viewed. WebFOCUS
disables the Run Deferred option for any report contained in the Deferred Receipt Report
Output group.
Procedure: How to Save a Deferred Receipt Report

1. Open a domain.
2. Select the Standard Reports or My Reports tab.
3. Click Deferred Status.
The Deferred Report Status Interface opens.
4. Select a Deferred Receipt report from the Completed tab.

5. Click Save in the Options column for this report.
WebFOCUS saves the Deferred Receipt report results to the My Reports tab and the
Deferred Reports Output group folder, and deletes the Deferred Receipt report from the
Deferred Report Status Interface. The My Report name is the description that WebFOCUS
displayed in the Deferred Report Status Interface as well as the date and time the My
Report was created.
6. Close the Deferred Report Status Interface.
Reviewing Deferred Request Parameters
How to:
Retrieve Deferred Receipt Request Parameters
You can review or change parameters and then resubmit a Deferred Receipt report from the
Deferred Report Status Interface when the report status is Completed. This option allows
you to retrieve specific data contained within the report.
Procedure: How to Retrieve Deferred Receipt Request Parameters

1. Open a domain.
2. Select the Standard Reports or My Reports tab.
3. Click Deferred Status.
The Deferred Report Status interface opens.
Note: Click Refresh to obtain the most current status of deferred requests.

Sharing a Report
4. Locate the report description under the Completed tab.

The Deferred Report Notification window opens to display notification of successful or
unsuccessful submission of the deferred request.
Interface.
Sharing a Report
In this section:
Using the Shared Reports Tab
Designating a Report as Shared
Sharing a Custom Report
Frequently you create reports or graphs that you may want to share with others in your
organization. The Shared Reports feature addresses this need by enabling you to create
reports and make them available to other users who access the same domain.
By designating a report as shared, you allow others to run it. The report is run from the
Shared Reports tab in the Domain window. Another user cannot edit a Shared Report in the
Shared Reports tab. However, users can copy and save a Shared Report to their own My
Reports tab. After saving the report to the My Reports tab, users can then edit it without
affecting the original report.
The Administrator designates who may make reports and graphs available to others. All
users who access the Domains window have the ability to view shared reports. All users
who access the same domain may run and copy reports designated as shared from the
Shared Reports tab. Note that this does not include users with the User role, who cannot
copy reports.
Using the Shared Reports Tab

The Shared Reports tab is in the Domains Interface. The tab consists of folders named for
the users who contributed Shared Reports. When you expand a folder, all the reports
contributed by a particular user appear under a Reporting Object group folder or subgroup
folder. These reports are available to all other Managed Reporting users who can access
the domain.
You can use the Deferred Status, Help, Open, and Refresh buttons without selecting a report.
To use the other buttons, you must expand a folder and select the report you want to run
or save.
The Shared Reports tab enables you to:
620 WebFOCUS
Run a Shared Report immediately by clicking Run and following the procedure in How to
Run a Shared Report on page 615.
Run a Shared Report at a later time by clicking Run Deferred.
Check the status of a Shared Report that has been run deferred by clicking Deferred
Status to open the Deferred Status window and view information.
Save the report to your My Reports tab by clicking Save As My Report and following the
procedure in How to Copy a Shared Report on page 622.
Ensure that you are viewing the most current list of Shared Reports and graphs by clicking
Refresh to update the list.
View the file name, date, time, and other information by clicking Properties.
Designating a Report as Shared
How to:
Share a My Report
Share a New Report
Copy a Shared Report
Edit a Shared Report
When you share a report, other users with access to the domain (except users with the User
role) can run the report or copy it to their My Reports tab. The My Reports that you contribute
appear in the Shared Reports tab. These reports also appear in your My Reports tab with a
shared icon to denote that they have been made available to others.
You can share a report using one of the following methods:
Designate a My Report as a Shared Report by clicking the Share Report check box in the
report's Properties dialog box. See How to Share a My Report on page 622.
Designate a new report as a Shared Report when you save the report from Report Assistant
or Graph Assistant. This can be done by clicking the Share Report check box in the Save
dialog box when you are ready to save a new My Report. See How to Share a New Report
on page 622.
Only users who have been granted the Shared privilege by their Administrator can share a
My Report.

Sharing a Report
Procedure: How to Share a My Report

To make an existing report available:
1. Click the My Reports tab.
2. Double-click the Reporting Object group folder and the subgroup folder that contains the
report you want to share.
3. Select the report.
4. Click Properties to open the Properties dialog box.
5. Click the Share Report check box near the bottom of the Properties dialog box.
6. Click OK.
The dialog box closes, and the report becomes available to every user who accesses the
domain. You return to the My Reports tab.
Procedure: How to Share a New Report

To make a report or graph that you are creating available to others:
1. Click Save after you make your selections in the reporting tool.
2. When the Save New Report dialog box opens, enter a descriptive name for the report.
3. Click the Share Report check box.
4. Click OK.
The dialog box closes, and the report becomes available to every user who accesses the
domain. You return to the My Reports tab.
Procedure: How to Copy a Shared Report

To copy a Shared Report to your My Reports folder:
1. Click the Shared Reports tab in the Domain window.
WebFOCUS displays folders with the names of users who have contributed reports.
2. Double-click a user name.

The user name expands to display the Reporting Object group folders that were used
to create the Shared Reports.
Shared Report you want to copy.
4. Select the report and then click Save As My Report on the toolbar.
622 WebFOCUS
The Save As My Report dialog box opens.

You can keep the original name or you can change the name of the report by deleting
the original and typing a new name.
5. Click OK.
WebFOCUS copies the report to your My Reports tab.
After you copy a Shared Report to your My Reports tab, you can edit or delete the report
without affecting the original one.
Procedure: How to Edit a Shared Report

1. After you copy a Shared Report, click the My Reports tab.
report.
3. Select the report and then click Open.
WebFOCUS opens the reporting tool used to create the report or graph and displays the
report or graph you copied from the Shared Reports tab.
You can make your modifications and save the current changes or you can delete the report
if you wish.
Sharing a Custom Report

You can share a Custom Report with other users. If the other user does not have the
Advanced privilege, the user can run the report deferred, but cannot save it.
A user that has been granted the Advanced privilege can run, run deferred, and save reports.
Saved reports can also be edited.

Creating a Report or Graph

In this section:
Duration of Custom Reports and My Reports Folders
How to:
Choose a Reporting Object
Choose Your Reporting Tool
Create a Custom Report
A Reporting Object is the basis for every report or graph you create. Reporting Objects contain
the fields that you select in a reporting tool to build your report or graph. After you select
fields for your report or graph, you can manipulate and style the data to suit your needs.
The fields you select determine the data displayed in the output of your report or graph. A
Reporting Object may also contain a template, created by your Administrator, that defines
the formatting styles for your report or graph.
Note: Custom Reports are not created with Reporting Objects. For more information, see
How to Create a Custom Report on page 626.
624 WebFOCUS
When creating a report or graph:

1. Choose the Reporting Object.
When you create a new report or graph, you must choose a data source to build your
report. Data in Managed Reporting is stored in Reporting Objects and organized within
group folders or subgroup folders. The Reporting Object group folders and the Reporting
Objects they contain are designed by a developer or your Administrator. Reporting Objects
are the information sources that you report from.
2. Choose a reporting tool.
After you select the data source, you must choose a reporting tool:
a. Choose Report Assistant to create basic reports quickly and easily. You must specify
a minimum of one field in order for Report Assistant to save the report.
b. Choose Graph Assistant to create graphs and charts in a wide range of colors and
styles. You must choose a field for both the X- and Y-axis in order for Graph Assistant
to save the report.
Procedure: How to Choose a Reporting Object

From the Reporting Objects tab, select a Reporting Object from the list window.
or
From the My Reports tab, click New and select a Reporting Object from the list window.
Procedure: How to Choose Your Reporting Tool

To open Report Assistant, click Report Assistant.
To open Graph Assistant, click Graph Assistant.
The chosen tool opens, and you are ready to create a report or graph. For more information
on using Report Assistant, click Help or see Creating a Report With Report Assistant on
page 205.
Example: Using a Reporting Object

The following example assumes you create a report with Report Assistant. You can also
select Graph Assistant to create a graph. For more information on using Graph Assistant,
see Creating a Graph With Graph Assistant on page 329.
1. Open the Regional Sales Domain.
2. Select the Reporting Objects tab.

WebFOCUS displays a list of group folders.

3. Expand the Product Sales group folder.
4. Select Regional Product Sales.
5. Click Report Assistant to open the reporting tool.
6. Select the data and options you want to apply to your report.
7. To save your report, click Save in the Report Assistant window.
Your report will be saved to the My Reports tab under the Product Sales group folder.
8. To return to Managed Reporting, click Quit in the Report Assistant window.
Procedure: How to Create a Custom Report

1. Right-click the Custom Reports folder and select New.
The following image shows the My Reports window displaying the pop-up menus that
appear when you right-click the Custom Reports folder and choose New.
2. Select the tool for creating your report or graph.

The Master File dialog box appears. If you choose New Folder, you can specify a subfolder
name and then create a Custom Report using Report Assistant, Graph Assistant, or the
Editor.
Note: Custom Reports can only be created and edited with the HTML version of Report
or Graph Assistant, even if you have set the flag for the Java Report or Graph Assistant.
626 WebFOCUS
The following image shows the Masters List window containing a list of available database
descriptions.
Note: The list of Master Files is determined by the Default Reporting Server's profile
settings, or the Server and Application Path settings on the Domain if applicable. You
do not have the ability to set the Server and Application Path at the Custom Report level
at this time.
3. Select your Master File and click OK to open the tool of your choice.
Note: You can scroll through the Master File list quickly by typing the first letter of a
data source. For example, if you type 'T' the list will advance to the Training data source.
4. Design your Custom Report.

5. Click Save As to open the Save My Reports window as shown in the following image.
6. Enter a name for your report and select the options of your choice. For example, select
the Share report check box to share your report with other users.
7. Click OK to save your report as a Custom Report.
8. You can access your Custom Report under the Custom Report folder in the My Reports
tab as shown in the following image.
628 WebFOCUS
9. If you share your Custom Reports, they will be available to other users in the Shared
Reports tab as shown in the following image.
Duration of Custom Reports and My Reports Folders

Users with the Advanced privilege can create Custom Reports, and will always have a Custom
Reports folder under the My Reports tab, even if the Custom Reports folder is empty. When
a user with the Advanced privilege logs on to Managed Reporting for the first time, a Custom
Reports folder is created and remains for the duration of all sessions. This user
The folders that appear under the My Reports tab are based on existing Reporting Objects
folders, and are only added you create a My Report from a Reporting Object. When the last
My Report for a Reporting Object is deleted, the corresponding folder is automatically
removed. The Custom Reports folder cannot be removed because it only exists under My
Reports for that particular user.
Creating Procedures With the Text Editor

In this section:
Text Editor
WebFOCUS provides a text editor that you can use to create, view, edit, and run the source
code for procedures and HTML files required by your applications. The text editor enables
you to use familiar Windows editing techniques, such as cut, copy, and paste. You can also
find and replace text and specify case. Changes you make to source code in the text editor
are immediately reflected in the graphical tools.

This chapter contains information about the capabilities of the text editor when working in
the applet. For details about using the text editor in Developer Studio, refer to Editing
Application Components as Text in Developer Studio in the Developing Reporting Applications
With Graphical Tools manual.
Text Editor
Reference:
File Menu
Edit Menu
Help Menu
The text editor facility includes:

The editor window where you enter code as shown in the following image.
630 WebFOCUS
The editor toolbar contains the File, Edit, and Help menus with their options as shown
Reference: File Menu

The File menu options are:
Run. Select to run your report and view the output.
Save. Select to save your report.
Save As. Select to save your report with a new filename that you choose.
Exit. Select to exit the text editor.
Reference: Edit Menu

The Edit menu options are:
Cut. Use to cut text that you have highlighted within the Java Applet. If you want to cut
text from a Windows application, use Ctrl+X.
Copy. Use to copy text that you have highlighted within the Java Applet. If you want to
copy to or from a Windows application or the clipboard, use Ctrl+C.
Paste. Use to paste text that you have either cut or copied within the Java Applet. If you
want to paste to or from a Windows application or the clipboard, use Ctrl+V.

Select All. Use to select all of the text in your procedure.

Upper Case Selection. Use to make all the selected text uppercase.
Lower Case Selection. Use to make all the selected text lowercase.
Upper Case All. Use to make all the text in your procedure uppercase.
Fixed Font. The lowercase letter L, l, and the number one,1, are formatted to look the
same. This also applies to the uppercase letter O and the number zero, 0.
Proportional Font. The lowercase letter L, l, and the number one, 1, are formatted
differently, allowing the user to tell the difference between them. This also applies to the
uppercase letter O and the number zero, 0.
Find. Use to find a text string. Click Find to open the window. The following image shows
a text box with the Find What label and an Ignore Case check box. After text is typed,
three buttons are enabled, Next, Previous, and Cancel.
Find Again F3. Use the function key, F3, to find your text string again.
632 WebFOCUS
Replace. Use to find a text string typed in the Find What text box and replace it with
another text string typed in the Replace With text box. You can choose to Replace all
instances of the Find What text by selecting the Replace All check box. Two check boxes,
located below the Replace With text box, are labeled Ignore Case and Replace All. After
text is types, three buttons are enabled, Next, Previous, and Cancel.
If you select the Ignore Case check box, the text editor will find your text string regardless
of case. If you do not select the Ignore Case check box, you must enter your text string using
the exact case that you want to find. You can search and replace forward and backward
using the Next and Previous buttons respectively.
You can include special characters in your search and replace criteria, for example, paragraph
marks and symbols. You can also search for text using the wildcard characters "*" (matches
any number of characters specified with the "*") and "?" (matches any single character
specified with the "?").
Reference: Help Menu

The Help menu contains the About Editor option. Selecting this option opens the help file
containing information about the text editor.

Editing a My Report
Editing a My Report
How to:
Edit a Saved Report or Graph
When you save a report or graph in a reporting tool, WebFOCUS stores it under the My
Reports tab in the Domain window. This tab lists the saved report or graph under the same
Reporting Object group folder that contains the Reporting Object used to create the report
or graph. WebFOCUS stores deferred report output in the My Reports tab under the Deferred
Output group folder.
Procedure: How to Edit a Saved Report or Graph

1. From the Domains window, click the My Reports tab.
2. Select the report or graph you want to edit from the Report and Graphs list box.
3. Click Open.
The reporting tool used to create the report or graph opens, showing your previous
specifications.
4. Make your modifications and save the changes.

5. Exit the reporting tool.
WebFOCUS returns you to the My Reports tab.
Editing a Custom Report and its Properties

How to:
View and Edit Properties of a Custom Report
Reference:
About Comments in the Code
To edit an existing Custom Report, right-click a Custom Report and select Open. The tool
used to create the report opens.
Note: If you created the Custom Report using the HTML Report Assistant or HTML Graph
Assistant, and then edited the report with the Editor, the Custom Report can only be opened
and edited again using the Editor.
634 WebFOCUS
Procedure: How to View and Edit Properties of a Custom Report

1. Select the Custom Reports folder in the My Reports tab.
2. Right-click the report for which you want to view or edit properties.
The following image shows the Properties dialog box that opens, which contains the
date and time the report was last changed, the folder location, the run type, the filename,
a description, and three check boxes, Share Report, Prompt for Parameters, and Run
with OLAP.
3. View the report, make any desired changes, and click OK.

Execution of a Custom Report Using -INCLUDE
Reference: About Comments in the Code

When you create a procedure with graphical tools, the type of component and the information
contained in it are previewed below the -* icon. The characters -* are required to identify
text as a comment.
By default, comments contain the name of the procedure. This comment is not necessary
for your application, and if you wish, you can delete it. You can also choose to type additional
comments. For example, you may want to introduce each new line with the comment
characters -*, or you may want to insert comments to describe different sections of code.

How to:
Incorporate a Custom Report or My Report With -INCLUDE
Incorporate a Shared Report With -INCLUDE
Incorporate a Standard Report With -INCLUDE
Reference:
Considerations When Using -INCLUDE With ReportCaster
You can insert a procedure within another procedure using the -INCLUDE command.
When you name a Custom Report, Managed Reporting creates the file name in the format
of username:userfolder/fexname, which tells Managed Reporting where to find the file. The
file name appears in the Properties dialog box and is the value to specify when you reference
a Custom Report with -INCLUDE. Note that there are file naming rules that replace most
non-alphanumeric characters and modify the file name when necessary. For more information,
see Repository File Name Processing in the Additional Administration Topics chapter of the
WebFOCUS Managed Reporting Administrator's Manual.
Note: Only Analytical Users (that have been granted Advanced capability), Administrators,
and Developers (who have the Advanced capability by default), can create Custom Reports.
636 WebFOCUS
The following image shows the Properties dialog box for a Custom Report with a file name
of admin:admin/custom3.fex.
Shared Custom Reports are named in the format of the shared user's name:shared user's
folder/shared procedure name.

The following image shows the Properties dialog box for a Shared Custom Report with a file
name of admin:admin/custom2.fex.
638 WebFOCUS
The following image shows the Properties dialog box for the Standard Report, graph.fex.
Syntax: How to Incorporate a Custom Report or My Report With -INCLUDE

-INCLUDE :filename
where:
filename
Is the name of a Custom Report or My Report. For example,
:salesreport.fex

Syntax: How to Incorporate a Shared Report With -INCLUDE

-INCLUDE username:userfolder/filename
where:
username:userfolder/filename
Is the user's name who has access to the report, the folder where the report resides,
and the name of the report. For example,
admin:admin/carsales.fex
Syntax: How to Incorporate a Standard Report With -INCLUDE

-INCLUDE [domain/]app/filename
where:
domain
Is the domain where the Standard Report resides. This value is only required if the
Standard Report resides in a different domain.
filename
Is the file name of the Standard Report, including the extension. This value is prefaced
by app/, for example,
app/yrsales.fex
Example: Incorporating a Custom Report Within Another Custom Report Using -INCLUDE
The following is an example of incorporating a custom report within another custom report
using -INCLUDE.
2. Click the Domains tab on the blue toolbar.
3. Select the domain you want to work with in the left frame.
4. Select MyReports in the right frame.
5. Under MyReports, select the Custom Reports folder.
640 WebFOCUS
6. Enter the following to create a new Custom Report using the Editor:
TABLE FILE CAR
PRINT CAR
END
-INCLUDE :filename
where:
filename
Is the name of a Custom Report you have previously created.
7. Run the request.
The output of the request displays two tabular reports.
8. Save the new report and exit the Editor.
9. Right-click the file and select Run.
The output of the request displays the same two tabular reports.
Example: Including a Server Procedure Within a Custom Report Using -MRNOEDIT and
-INCLUDE
The following is an example of incorporating a server procedure within a Custom Report
using -MRNOEDIT and -INCLUDE.
2. Click the Domains tab on the blue toolbar.
3. Select the domain you want to work with in the left frame.
4. Select MyReports in the right frame.
5. Under MyReports, select the Custom Reports folder.
6. Enter the following to create a new Custom Report using the Editor:
TABLE FILE CAR
PRINT SALES
BY MODEL
END
-MRNOEDIT -INCLUDE :filename
where:
filename
Is the name of a procedure located on the WebFOCUS Reporting Server.
7. Run the request.

The output of the request displays two tabular reports, one from the Custom Report and
one from the server procedure.
8. Save the new report and exit the Editor.
9. Right-click the file and select Run.
642 WebFOCUS
The output of the request displays the same two tabular reports, which are shown in the
following image.
For more information on -MRNOEDIT, see the WebFOCUS Managed Reporting Developer's
Manual.

Filtering Data
Reference: Considerations When Using -INCLUDE With ReportCaster

ReportCaster does not support the scheduling of procedures that return multiple reports.
ReportCaster can only accept a single answer set.
You cannot use procedures with -INCLUDE syntax. However, you can use StyleSheet (.sty),
Cascading StyleSheet (.css), or GIF (.gif) files with -INCLUDE in a procedure that will be
scheduled using ReportCaster. For example, the following procedure will return a report
displaying the GIF image (cars.gif) issued with the -INCLUDE parameter:
TABLE FILE CAR
PRINT CAR
BY COUNTRY
END
-INCLUDE :cars.gif
Note: If you need multiple reports within a single document, Information Builders recommends
using the Compound Report feature.
Filtering Data
In this section:
Filters enable you to determine the data you want to display in a report, without creating
selection criteria. You can select pre-defined filters to limit data. Data must match the filtering
criteria to be included in your report. You can select one or more filters from the same
filtering group to create a simple filtering expression. You can also select multiple filters
from multiple filtering groups to create complex filtering expressions.
The Filters tab is divided into two sections, the (top) selection box and the (bottom) filtering
criteria box. The selection box displays the filter groups (in boldface type) and the filters they
contain. The filtering criteria box displays the filters that you select.
See Simple Filtering Criteria on page 644 and Complex Filtering Criteria on page 645 for
information on the types of filtering criteria you can create and how the criteria limits data.

Simple filtering criteria consist of one or more filters from the same filter group. If you select
only one filter, the data must match that filter to be included in the report. If you select
multiple filters from the same filter group, data must match at least one filter to be included
in the report.
644 WebFOCUS
The following image shows the Filters window containing the Regional Product Sales folder
where a product and a region can be chosen for filter selection.
For example, if you select the Gifts and Food filters from the Choose a Product filter group,
data would only have to match one of the filters for WebFOCUS to include it in the report.
Therefore, any Product sold that is in either the Gifts or Food category would satisfy the
criterion for this report.
The filtering criteria box at the bottom of the Filters window displays the logical relationship
between criteria. Notice that the word "or" is added to clarify this relationship.
How to:
Run Procedures With Filters
Complex filtering criteria consists of selecting at least one filter from multiple filter groups.
Data must match one filter from each filter group to be included in a report.

Filtering Data
For example, if you select the Gifts filter from the Choose a Product filter group and the West
filter from the Choose a Region filter group, data must match both filters to be included in
your report. Therefore, only Gifts purchased in the West will be displayed by WebFOCUS. In
this example, the phrase "And any of the following: West" is added to the filtering criteria
box to clarify the logical relationships in the filtering criteria.
Procedure: How to Run Procedures With Filters

To run a procedure with a filter in Managed Reporting, your Administrator must create a
report with filters attached. The filters that your Administrator attaches are grouped in
categories and displayed under the filter group folders.
1. From the Domains Interface, double-click the desired Domain name.
WebFOCUS displays the contents of the selected Domain in the right pane of the Domains
Interface.
2. In the Standard Reports tab, expand the group folder containing the report with filters
attached.
3. Select the Standard Report and click Filters.
The Filter Selection window opens.
4. Expand the filter group folders.

WebFOCUS displays a list of filters that your Administrator has created.
5. Select the desired filter and click Add in the panel on the right side of the Filter Selection
window.
The selected filter appears with a check mark in the upper section of the Filter Selection
window, and the filter name is added to the filtering criteria box.
6. When you are finished selecting filters, click OK.

You return to the Standard Reports tab. The filters you selected are displayed under the
report name and will be applied automatically when you run the report.
7. To run your report, click Run.

WebFOCUS displays your report in a new browser window displaying only the data that
matches the selected criteria.
Note: If you want to change your filter selections, return to the Filter selection window, select
the filters you want to Add or Remove, and click the appropriate button.
646 WebFOCUS
Example: Running Reports With Filters

You want to run a report with attached filters named Product Sales. From the Domains
Interface:
1. Double-click the folder next to the Sales Domain.
WebFOCUS displays the contents of the Sales Domain in the right pane of the Domains
Interface.
2. From the Standard Reports tab, expand the Regional Sales group folder.
3. Select Product Sales from the list displayed beneath the group folder and click Filters on
the toolbar.
The Filters Selection window opens.
4. Expand the Choose a Product and Choose a Region filter groups as shown in the following
image.

Filtering Data
5. Select the Gifts filter from the Choose a Product filter group and click Add to apply it to
your report as shown in the following image.
Notice that the Gifts filter is added to the filter criteria box.
6. Select the West filter from the Choose a Region filter group and click Add to apply it to
your report.
648 WebFOCUS
Notice that WebFOCUS displays the criterion you selected as "Gifts And any of the
following: West" in the filtering criteria box as shown in the following image.
7. Click OK to return to the Standard Reports tab.

8. To run Regional Product Sales, select the report and click Run.
9. Close the browser window to return to the Standard Reports tab.
Searching a Domain
How to:
Locate an Item Using the Search Engine
As repositories increase in size, it can become difficult to quickly locate a specific item
within a domain. WebFOCUS includes a search engine that can scan different components
of a domain to locate particular items.
The Managed Reporting search engine allows you to search Managed Reporting for all
instances of any character string within a chosen domain. A search string can consist of
several words, a single word, part of a word, or any other combination of characters.

Searching a Domain
By default, searches are not case sensitive, but you can select a Match Case option to
execute a case-sensitive search. Search results include instances of the search string within
item descriptions at all levels of the Managed Reporting tree, which includes the domain
name, groups, subgroups, report names, and Reporting Objects.
By default, the search engine looks for instances of the search string that occur at the same
or lower level of a selected object. If you select a group folder, search results include
instances of the search string only within that group, not within the entire domain.
In the Domains view, search results apply only to a selected tab. For example, searches
executed from within a domain in My Reports do not include results for that domain in
Standard Reports. The search engine is available in the Standard Reports, My Reports
(including Custom Reports folder), and Reporting Objects tabs, but not in the Shared Reports
tab.
Note: The WebFOCUS search engine is also available in the Domain Builder.
Procedure: How to Locate an Item Using the Search Engine

1. Access Managed Reporting.
2. Select the domain you want to search.
3. From the Domains view, select the Standard Reports, My Reports, or Reporting Objects
tab, and select an item in the tab (including Custom Reports which have their own folder
under My Reports).
4. To access the Search dialog box, from the Domains view, click Search.
650 WebFOCUS
The Search Within Component (where Component is the description you selected) dialog
box opens as shown in the following image.
5. Enter a search string, which can include any combination of words or characters. Select
the Match Case check box if you want the search to be case sensitive.
6. Click Find.
The Number Found counter in the Search dialog box displays the search results. The
first instance of the string appears highlighted in the Managed Reporting tree.
7. Click Next to find the next instance of the search string.

or
Click Previous to move to the previous instance of the search string.
The Remaining counter changes to indicate how many items are left in the search. (If
only one item is found, Next and Previous are disabled, and the Remaining counter reads
0.)
8. To start a new search, select the item you want to search within and click New Search.
9. To close the Search dialog box, click Cancel.

Searching a Domain
652 WebFOCUS
WebFOCUS
Index
-INCLUDE 636 Alternate Comment for Hyperlink 372

amper auto-prompting 56, 57, 58
customizing launch pages 58
3D graphs 334
launch page 57
launch page templates 58
A report options 57
amper variables 58, 372, 373
ACCEPT list 511
analyzing report data 445, 460
Across field 370
And/Or keyword 265, 355
ACROSS fields 215, 217, 470, 472, 473
OLAP and 470 application objects 219
selecting 470, 472, 473 applying selections criteria in OLAP 507, 516
sorting with 470 to dates 516
Across tab 358 area graphs 334, 437, 439
styling 437, 439
Active Reports 284
formatting 284 arithmetic operations 235
adding a column 104 arranging graphic elements 338
adding color to graphs 370, 371, 381 ascending order 237
adding fields 377, 380 assigning prefix operators 346, 347
to footings 377, 380
to headings 377, 380 auto prompt button 353
adding footings to graphs 377, 379 Auto Prompt button 263
adding headings to graphs 377, 379 auto-prompting 56, 57, 58
launch page templates 58
adding labels to graphs 377, 381
AutoDrill 455, 463
adjusting work area 198
automatic drill down 280, 453, 455
Advanced privilege 623
automatic refresh 114, 115
alert events 603
AutoSort 475, 477
alert response 603, 604
Available Fields window 291
ALL. prefix 235, 236
available objects 219, 295
alphanumeric formats 226, 227

Index
B btnunderline 312
BY fields 210, 215, 470, 472, 473
banner links 70 OLAP and 470
bar graphs 334, 437, 439, 565, 566, 567, 568, selecting 472, 473
571, 572, 573, 576
associating with columns 566
associating with dimensions and measures
C
567, 571, 573, 576
calculated values 222, 230
attributes 568
deleting from measures 572 Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) 253, 276, 278, 280
horizontal 565, 566 generating internal CSS code 280
styling 437, 439 case sensitive searches 580, 581
vertical 565, 566
changing color settings 377, 387, 389
bid-config.xml 37
changing fonts 377, 381, 382, 385, 386
bipolar graphs 334
changing formats 226, 407
block names 67
changing passwords 28
browser settings 29, 30, 31
Temporary Internet Files option 30 changing the display title for a field 236
btnBackColor 312 chart elements 338
btnbold 312 charts 334
btnCopy 312 color settings 387, 389
changing 389
btnCut 312
column fields 210, 215
btnFldListList 312
column titles 282
btnFldListTree 312 displaying field descriptions 282
column values in OLAP reports 463, 475, 478,
btnForeColor 312
479, 480, 481, 542
btnitalic 312 displaying stacked 542
sorting by 475, 478, 479, 480, 481
btnJustifyCenter 312
columns 104, 105, 566
btnJustifyRight 312 adjusting width 105
applying graphs to 566
btnLeftJustify 312
positioning 104
btnModDefine 312 columns in OLAP reports 490, 494
pivoting 494
btnPaste 312
repositioning 490
btnRemoveFormat 312 combining expressions 265, 355
btnSelectAll 312 commands 222
COMPUTE 222
654 WebFOCUS
Index
commands (continued) Control Panel (continued)

DEFINE 222 ordering data 482
comments in code 636 pivoting data elements 494
selection criteria pane 511
comparing graphs 338 sorting data elements 482
complex filtering criteria 645 unique functions 463
Create Conditional Style Rule dialog box 164
COMPUTE command 222
creating a Favorites list 75
COMPUTE fields 230
creating graphs 330
computed fields 222
conditional styling 240, 244, 370, 371, 401 creating joins 269, 271, 272, 361, 363, 364
graphs and 370, 371 creating multiple graphs 358
connected point plot graphs 334
creating OLAP graphs 531
content blocks 67, 89, 90, 96, 97, 98, 99, 100,
101, 102, 103, 104, 105 creating parameters 246
adding items 98 creating parameters for drill downs 373
adding items from domain search 96
and EXL2K PIVOT format 96 creating temporary fields 222
changing names of 100 creating WHERE statements 258, 259, 347, 348
creating 90
deleting 97 cross-century dates 530
deleting items 98, 100 CSS (Cascading Style Sheets) 280
editing 98, 99 generating internal CSS code 280
hiding 101 custom reports 40, 43, 44, 45, 118, 615, 623,
hiding the toolbar 102 626, 636
layout 103, 104 -INCLUDE 636
maximizing 67 comments in code 636
types 89 creating 626
content page names 67 creating folders 44
creating in Dashboard 40
content pages 92, 93, 103
deleting folders 44
creating multiple 92
executing with -INCLUDE 636
rearranging 92
in Dashboard 43, 44, 45
selecting layout 103
running 615
Content window 90 sharing 623
Control Panel 455, 459, 461, 462, 463, 478, customizing Dashboard 32, 90
482, 494, 511, 516, 539
analysis and 462 customizing graphs 370, 371, 377, 437, 439, 441
Date Selection pane 516
graph pane 539
graphing results of a report request 539
opening 455, 461

Index
D date fields in OLAP reports 517

specifying selection criteria 517
Dashboard 20, 23, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 32, date formats 226, 228, 516, 517, 530
34, 46, 61, 62, 71, 73, 90 Julian dates 530
browser settings 29, 30 limitations 530
customizing 90 smart dates 530
logging on 28 specifying 516
opening 27 date ranges in OLAP reports 507, 517, 522, 524
PowerPoint integration 61, 62 applying 507
searching domains 71, 73 applying criteria to 522, 524
selecting domains 34 selecting 507
text editor 46 Date Selection pane 530
Dashboard banner 32 dates 529
Dashboard Domain Tree 38 specifying in OLAP reports 529
decimal formats 226, 227
Dashboard layout 32
Dashboard Properties 37 default parameters 597
dialog 37 DEFCENT value 530
Dashboard toolbars 32 deferred receipt 21
Dashboard user options 85 deferred report delete options 109
data filtering 644, 645, 646 deferred report help options 109
data sources 268, 360 deferred report refresh options 109
data sources for OLAP analysis 453 deferred report sort options 109
Data Style labels 383 Deferred Report Status interface 90, 92, 93, 108,
data visualization 565, 566, 567, 568, 571, 572, 109, 110, 111, 112, 114, 115, 116,
573, 576 119, 120, 615, 619
applying to measures 571, 573, 576 deleting reports 108, 111, 112
bar graphs 568 deleting Unknown tickets 119
deleting from measures 572 expiration setting 112
display modes 571, 576 notification 615
OLAP Control Panel and 567, 571 options 116
OLAP selections panel and 567, 571 parameters 108, 112, 116, 619
data visualization bar graphs 530, 531 refreshing 110
sorting 110
date elements in OLAP reports 516, 517, 522, viewing reports 108, 110, 115
525, 529 deferred reports 65, 108, 110, 111, 112, 114,
adding 529 115, 116, 118, 120, 615, 616, 617,
applying date ranges 516, 522, 525 618, 619
applying selection criteria to 516, 517 Completed 120
deleting 529 deleting 108, 111, 112
656 WebFOCUS
Index
deferred reports (continued) dimension elements in OLAP reports 482, 553,

notification 615, 616 555, 556, 558
parameters 108, 112, 116, 619 adding from the Control Panel 553
Queued 120 deleting from the Control Panel 558
running 111 deleting from the report 556
Running 120 sorting 482
running in Dashboard 65 dimension hierarchy 511
saving 108, 111, 118, 618, 619
dimensions 456, 458, 463, 473, 490, 516, 553,
sorting 108, 110, 114
556, 558
status 110
defining 516
submitting 615, 616, 617
deleting 556, 558
viewing 108, 115
dragging and dropping 458
DEFINE command 222 drilling down on 463
define-based joins 271, 363 exposing hidden 553
repositioning 490
defined fields 222, 271, 363
display modes for measures 571
defining an OLAP hierarchy in a Master File 453
display titles 236
defining an OLAP hierarchy in a procedure 453
displaying graphs for OLAP reports 460
delete confirmation message 120 displaying measures 542
delete option 120 stacked 542
displaying missing values 365, 366, 367, 368,
deleted 120 369, 370, 377
deleting Completed tickets 119 in graphs 366, 367, 368, 369, 370, 377
displaying multiple graphs in columns 359
deleting Expired tickets 119
displaying OLAP graphs 531
deleting joins 273, 365
displaying OLAP reports
deleting Queued tickets 119 as HTML Active Reports 563
deleting reports 108, 111 displaying stacked measures 542
deleting Running tickets 119 displaying subfoots 238
deleting Unknown tickets 119 displaying subheads 238
deletion confirmation message 120 displaying subtotals 237, 251
descending order 237 document properties 198
designating shared reports 48, 621 domain search 71, 72, 73, 74, 96
adding items to content blocks 96
detail fields 235 advanced 73
detail reports 218 basic 72
Date Modified options 74
dimension controls in OLAP reports 460, 510
Selection pane 510 Domain Tree menu options 35

Index
domain trees 32, 34, 35, 52 expressions 259, 265, 266, 309, 348, 355, 356
upload data file 52 combining 265, 266, 355
domains 20, 34, 71, 609, 612, 645, 646, 649, deleting 266, 356
650 grouping 266, 356
running procedures with filters 645, 646 order of evaluation 309
running reports 612
searching 71, 649, 650
F
Domains Interface 609
Favorites link 70, 75, 77
Drill Down Parameter dialog box 304, 373, 403
Dashboard tab 75
drill downs 303, 372, 373, 402 Mobile tab 77
creating parameters for 373
field column titles 235
graphs and 372
drilling down in OLAP reports 460 Field Creator dialog box 222, 306, 406
drilling down on dimensions 280, 453, 455, 463 field display title 236
field formats 226, 227, 228
drilling down on measures 280, 453, 455, 463,
alphanumeric 226, 227
468, 470, 472 date 226, 228
numeric 226, 227
drilling down to new procedures 242
field lists 219, 221
dynamic server signon 40 resetting after a search 221
searching 219
field options 296, 301
E
Field Options tab 346, 400
Edit button 67 fields 210, 214, 215, 217, 223, 224, 235, 236,
Edit window 98 237, 240, 251, 345, 346, 377, 380, 503
adding to footings and headings 377, 380
editing joins 273, 365 applying arithmetic operations 235
editor, in Dashboard 46 displaying 235
hiding y-axis 345, 346
elements in OLAP dimensions 456, 482
including subtotals 237
reversing the order 482
multi-selecting 217
empty blocks 90 numeric 235
end-user reporting environments 23 ordering 237
performing calculations in OLAP reports 503
Execute Wizard 390 qualified names for 214
EXL2K PIVOT format 96 styling 240
in Dashboard 96 subtotals 251
expiration settings for deferred reports 112 suppressing display 235, 236
temporary 223, 224
exposing hidden columns in OLAP reports 460
Fields tab 292, 398
658 WebFOCUS
Index
Fields window 292, 312, 377, 398, 411 G

filtering criteria 267, 268, 644, 645
complex 645 grand totals 215, 292
simple 644 Graph Assistant 21, 219, 329, 333, 338, 340,
filters 39, 160, 267, 356, 612, 613, 644, 645, 341, 358, 383, 416, 621, 624, 625
646, 647 creating multiple graphs 358
in Dashboard 39 Data Style labels 383
running reports with 645, 646, 647 Graph Preview 338
fixed overflow 179 Looks tab 333, 340
Properties tab 341
fixed scales 386 rotating text 383
floating point formats 226, 227 Screening conditions window 416
searching field lists 219
flow margins 185 selecting graph types 340
flowing overflow 182 selecting scales 341
Styles tab 340
flowing reports 188
Graph Assistant Properties tab (Settings) 435
FOCHTMLURL parameter 282
pop-up field descriptions and 282 Graph button 539
FOCUS Titles tab of Heading tab 411 Graph control 461, 531, 535
Control panel 531
folder block items 69 Selections pane 531, 535
folder blocks 32, 89, 98 Graph Editor 21
changing contents 98
fonts 305, 381, 382, 385, 386 graph footings 377, 379, 380
changing 381, 382, 385, 386 adding fields to 377, 380
dialog box 305 location in output 379
graphs and 381, 382, 385, 386 graph headings 377, 379, 380
footings 254, 255, 256, 257, 377 adding fields to 377, 380
aligning 255 location in output 379
customizing 255, 256, 257 graph height 386, 387
for graphs 377 Graph pane 539
styling 257
footnotes 381 Graph Preview 337, 338
formats 226, 227, 228 graph styles 533, 539
alphanumeric 226, 227 controlling in OLAP 533, 539
date 226, 228 graph titles 377
numeric 226, 227 Graph Titles tab of Heading tab 413
formatting graphs 382, 385, 386 graph types 333, 334, 340, 531, 533
fully qualified field names 213 3D 334
area 334
functions 307, 408 bar 334

Index
graph types (continued) graphs (continued)

bipolar 334 setting height and width 386
connected point plot 334 styling 370, 377, 381, 382, 385, 386, 437,
horizontal area 533 439, 441
horizontal bar 533 group views 26, 27
horizontal line 533
line 334 grouping expressions 266, 356
OLAP and 531, 533 grouping numeric data into tiles 499, 501
pie 334, 533
radar 334 grouping WHERE statements 266, 356
scatter 334
selecting 333
vertical area 533 H
vertical bar 533
Heading Properties dialog box 414
vertical line 533
headings 254, 255, 256, 257, 377
graph width 386, 387
aligning 255
graphical elements 338 customizing 255, 256, 257
for graphs 377
graphing OLAP reports 460, 531, 538
styling 257
graphs 329, 330, 340, 341, 342, 344, 345, 357,
Headings tab 312, 377, 411, 413
359, 360, 365, 367, 368, 369, 370,
371, 372, 373, 377, 381, 382, 385, Help link 70
386, 387, 388, 389, 390, 437, 439,
help system for Managed Reporting 20
441, 531, 533, 539, 624, 634
adding labels 377, 381 hiding columns in OLAP reports 460
conditional styling 370, 371
hiding content blocks 101
creating parameters 373
customizing 371, 381 hiding the toolbar in a content block 102
displaying data 342, 344, 345
hiding y-axis fields 345, 346
displaying in OLAP 531, 533, 539
displaying multiple graphs in columns 359, 360 hierarchies 456
drilling down 372
High-to-Low radio button 478
editing 634
formats 390 high-to-low sort 447, 475, 476, 477, 478, 482
formatting 357, 382 for dimensions 482
in OLAP 531 for measures 475, 476, 477, 478
merging multiple graphs 359 horizontal graphs 533
missing values and 365, 367, 368, 369, 370
horizontal labels 381
printing 387, 389
running 387, 389 HTML Active Reports 283, 284, 285
saving 387, 388 creating 284
scales 340, 341 formatting 284
sending output directly to a printer 389 styling 285
660 WebFOCUS
Index
HTML Graph Assistant 219, 331 L

HTML Report Assistant 205, 206, 219, 282 Label Properties dialog box 382, 385, 429, 431
pop-up field descriptions 282
searching field lists 219 Language link 70
self-service applications 206 launch blocks 32, 89, 98, 100
HTML reports 282 changing contents 98, 100
pop-up field descriptions 282 launch pages 58
coding a FOCEXEC 58
settings in Administration Console 58
I
layout of content blocks 103
index page 27 legend fonts 382, 386
inserting page breaks 237 Legend Properties dialog box 427
integer formats 226, 227 Library content in Dashboard 96
Internet links folder options 35 Library Only Users 29
Library Version 35
J LIKE operator 268
Java-based Managed Reporting 607, 609 limiting data 507, 510, 512
from Control Panel 512
JavaScript 282
from Selections pane 510
requirements for pop-up field descriptions 282
in OLAP reports 507
join structures 268, 269, 271, 272, 273, 360,
line graphs 334, 437, 439
361, 363, 364, 365
styling 437, 439
creating 269, 271, 272, 361, 363, 364
deleting 273, 365 linear scales 340, 341
editing 273, 365 links 70
Join tool 268, 360
list block items 69
joining data sources 268, 360 list blocks 32, 89, 98, 100
Julian dates 530 adding items 98
deleting items 98, 100
justifying fields 280
entire reports 280 logarithmic scales 340, 341
logging on to Dashboard 28
K logical operators 308, 409
key fields 213, 343 Logoff link 70

Logon link 70
Looks tab 333, 340

Index
Lotus format 328 measures box 478

low-to-high sort 475, 476, 477, 478, 482 Measures check box 478
for dimensions 482
Measures control 461, 509, 512, 549, 550
for measures 475, 476, 477, 478
Control Panel 512
Selections pane 509, 549, 550
M merging multiple graphs 358, 359
Managed Reporting 20, 48, 50, 51, 108, 608, missing values 365, 366, 367, 368, 369, 370,
611, 612, 620, 621, 622, 649 377
choosing domains 611, 649 displaying 366, 367, 368, 369, 370, 377
passwords 608 Mobile Favorites 77, 78, 79, 81
running reports 612 accessing 78
sharing reports 48, 50, 51, 620, 621, 622 accessing from a mobile device 79
adding report items 77
Managed Reporting Repository 111, 118
browser settings 81
Master Files 206, 230, 282, 453, 516, 530 sending e-mail 78
calculated values 230
MS Office output options 61, 62
defining dimensions 453, 516
DESCRIPTION attribute 282 MSChart object 61
specifying date formats 516
multi-field joins 272, 364
specifying values for DEFCENT and YRTHRESH
530 multi-selecting fields 217
Maximize button 67 multiple content pages 92
measure-based sorting 475, 478, 479, 480, 481 multiple graphs 357, 358, 359, 539
ranking values 478 creating 358
removing sorting criteria 481 displaying in columns 359
measures 456, 457, 458, 463, 468, 470, 472, merging 358
473, 475, 531, 535, 539, 542, 549, OLAP and 539
550, 567, 568, 571, 572, 573, 576 My Reports 20, 42, 50, 59, 60, 577, 615, 622,
applying bar graphs to 567, 571, 573, 576 634
bar graphs and 568, 571, 573, 576 creating in Dashboard 42
Control Panel properties box 539 deleting in Dashboard 42
deleting bar graphs from 572 editing 634
displaying 571 on-demand paging 577
dragging and dropping 458 running 615
drilling down on 463, 468, 470, 472 saving parameter selections 59, 60
exposing hidden 549, 550 sharing 50, 622
graphing 531, 535
My Reports folder options 35
hiding 549, 550
in different dimensions 472, 473
NOPRINT 549, 550, 571
sorting 457, 475
stacking 542
662 WebFOCUS
Index
N OLAP hierarchies 453, 456

defining in a Master File 453
new columns 222, 223, 224 defining in a procedure 453
OLAP hyperlinks 455
NOPRINT measures 549, 550, 571
OLAP interface options 455
NOT LIKE operator 268
OLAP reports 456, 460, 472, 473, 475, 478, 479,
numbering pages 275, 277 480, 481, 482, 483, 494, 497, 511,
numeric data grouped in tiles 499, 501 530, 531, 539, 553, 556, 558, 561,
562, 563, 564
numeric fields 235 adding data 553
numeric formats 226, 227, 228, 229 applying data visualization graphs 530, 531
adding a percent sign 228, 229 applying selection criteria 511
deleting data 553, 556, 558
displaying a HTML Active Report 563
O displaying as graphs 539
OCP (OLAP Control Panel) 21, 568 displaying in PDF format 562, 564
data visualization and 568 hiding sort fields 497
OLAP 560 pivoting data 456, 494
saving reports 560 removing sort criteria 481
reversing the order of data 482, 483
OLAP (Online Analytical Processing) 443 saving 561, 562
OLAP analysis in reports 460 saving as Excel files 563
saving as My Reports 564
OLAP button 461 saving in Managed Reporting folders 564
OLAP Control Panel 21, 455, 459, 461, 462, 463, sorting 472, 473, 478, 479, 480, 482
478, 482, 494, 511, 516, 539, 567, 568 OLAP sample files 445
analysis and 462
data visualization and 567, 568 OLAP save options 463
Date Selection pane 516 OLAP searches 445
graph pane 539
graphing results of a report request 539 OLAP Selections pane 454, 458, 461, 509, 538
opening 455, 459, 461 applying criteria from 509
ordering data 482 OLAP selections panel 21, 445, 567
pivoting data elements 494 data visualization and 567
selection criteria pane 511 OLAP sorting options 463
sorting data elements 482 OLAP syntax summary 453
unique functions 463
OLAP tools 280, 453, 454, 455, 458, 459, 462
OLAP data 453, 475 Control Panel 462
OLAP data selection options 463 selecting 280, 453, 455
Selections pane 454
OLAP examples 445
OLAP-enabled reports 280, 445
OLAP graphs 531

Index
OLAP-enabled Standard Reports 445 percentiles 499, 501

OLAP-enabling a data source 453 performing calculations on fields 503
OLAP-enabling reports 453, 455 Personalize link 70
on-demand paging 280, 577, 578, 579, 586 Personalize Options window 85, 86
creating reports 586
deferred reports 586 personalizing Dashboard 32
displaying a specific page 579 pie graphs 334, 441, 533
navigating in reports 579 styling 441
viewing reports 578 pivoting sort fields in OLAP reports 456, 460
Online Analytical Processing (OLAP) 443 pop-up field descriptions 282
opening Dashboard 27 JavaScript requirements 282
ReportCaster and 282
opening HTML Graph Assistant 331
positioning columns 104
order of evaluation in expressions 309
positioning options 176
ordering data 482, 483
PostScript reports 279
organizing Dashboard content 92 Power Painter 123, 124, 125, 126, 127, 129,
output blocks 32, 89 130, 131, 132, 133, 134, 137, 140,
144, 147, 149, 150, 152, 153, 155,
output options 275, 276 156, 157, 158, 160, 161, 164, 168,
overflow options 176, 177 173, 176, 177, 179, 180, 182, 183,
185, 188, 193, 194, 195, 199, 200,
201, 202, 203, 204
P accessing Custom Reports 202
accessing from Domain Builder 203
packed formats 226, 227 accessing from Managed Reporting 200
accessing from MR Applet interface 203
page breaks 237
accessing from User Management tree 203
page heading titles 312 accessing My Reports 200
accessing Reporting Object 201
page numbering 275, 277
adding data sources 124
parameter properties 263, 353 auto prompting facility 173
parameters 59, 60, 246, 373, 390, 597 changing themes 199
creating for graphs 373 chart editor 149
passing to procedures 390 closing data sources 126
saving 59, 60 closing palettes 132
configuring license 204
parenthesis 266, 356
creating a COMPUTE statement 161
passwords 28, 608 creating a DEFINE statement 160
changing 28 creating a Join between data sources 161
PDF reports 279 creating a WHERE statement 168
664 WebFOCUS
Index
Power Painter (continued) PowerPoint integration with Dashboard (continued)

creating conditional styling rules 164 exporting static graphs 62
creating parameters 173 predefined StyleSheets 253
customizing 194
customizing fixed position 180 prefix operators 251, 346, 347, 503
docking palettes 130 private views 26, 28
fixed overflow 179 logging on 28
flowing overflow 182 privileges 623
functions 124, 160 Advanced 623
graph component 144 procedures 390
graph/chart properties 147 calling procedures 390
image component 153 passing parameters 390
image properties 155 procedures with filters 646
layout 195
line component 156 Properties tab of Graph Assistant 381
line properties 157 Properties tab of Graph Assistant (Pie) 441
opening data sources 125
options 127 Properties tab of Graph Assistant (X axis) 437
overflow options 177 Properties tab of Graph Assistant (Y axis) 439
panels 127
pinning palettes 131 public views 26, 27, 90, 92, 93
relative relationships between objects 188
relative relationships rules 193
report component 134 Q
report properties 137, 140
qualified field names 214
resetting the layout 132
setting flowing report overflow 183 quartiles 499, 501
showing palettes 131
sizing and overflow 185
stacking palettes 130 R
subtotal options 158
text component 150 radar graphs 334
text properties 152 Range check box 516, 530
using objects 133
using palettes 129 Rank check box 478
Power Painter canvas 127, 195, 197, 198 ranking options 298
aligning objects 197
showing grids rulers and guides 195 Read Limit box 277
Power Painter license 204 read limits 277
PowerPoint integration with Dashboard 61, 62, 64 Recent link 70
adjusting ActiveX browser settings 64
exporting live graphs 62 Recent reports list 84
exporting reports 62

Index
Record Limit box 277 Report Painter 454, 455

OLAP enabling from 455
record limits 277 OLAP settings 454
records 244, 258, 259, 277, 278, 347, 348, 370 report parameters 597, 619
restricting 277
selecting 258, 259, 347, 348 report requests 596
styling 244, 370 report types 20, 48, 108, 110, 118, 218, 615,
totaling 278 618, 619, 620, 621, 626
Refresh button 67 custom 118, 626
deferred 108, 615, 618, 619
refresh options 67, 109, 114, 115 detail 218
relational operators 503, 507, 511 My Reports 20
shared 48, 620, 621
Relations buttons 509, 511, 516 shared reports 20
relative positioning of objects 176 Standard 110
Standard Reports 20
relative relationship between objects 188 static reports 20
Report Assistant 21, 205, 206, 207, 209, 213, summary 218
219, 275, 277, 280, 288, 621, 624, 625 ReportCaster 21, 90, 92, 93, 603
building reports 209
enabling on-demand paging 280 reporting objects 20, 35, 268, 360, 624, 625
fully qualified field names 213 Reporting Objects folder 35
HTML-based 205
reports 40, 51, 109, 110, 205, 235, 236, 237,
layout 207
238, 240, 255, 256, 257, 266, 275,
OLAP enabling from 280
276, 278, 279, 280, 288, 289, 347,
read limits 277
355, 370, 445, 453, 455, 565, 580,
record limits 277
581, 595, 596, 612, 617, 618, 619,
running reports 288
622, 623, 624, 634
applying arithmetic operations 235
self-service applications 206
combining expressions 266, 355
sharing reports 621
copying 51, 622
styling reports 275
creating in Dashboard 40
warning messages 277
creating temporary fields 612
report columns 566
customizing 255, 256, 257
applying graphs to 566
data analysis 445
Report Frame 578 deferred 109
report headings and footings 256 displaying 275, 276
displaying subtotals 238
Report Library 82, 84, 90, 92, 93, 96
editing 51, 289, 622, 623, 634
content in Dashboard 82
enabling on-demand paging 280
watch list reports 82
justifying 280
watch list tab 84
OLAP-enabling 280, 453, 455
window 82, 84, 90
requesting 595, 596
666 WebFOCUS
Index
reports (continued) scatter graphs 334

running 288, 612
saving 275, 276, 618, 619 scroll bars 33, 102
searching for 580, 581 scroll buttons 102
searching for information 445
sorting 237 scrolling 67
styling 240, 275, 278, 279, 370 scrolling options 98, 101
suppressing display of fields 235, 236
viewing deferred output 110 search engines 649, 650
viewing properties 617, 618 searching domains 71, 72, 73, 74
visualizing trends in 565
searching field lists 219, 294
reports folder options 35
searching for report data 443, 445
repositioning dimensions 490
searching the web 444
resetting a field list 221
second horizontal category 358
reversing order of data in OLAP reports 482
selecting a graph 340
reviewing parameters 116
role trees 32, 33, 66 selecting fonts 382, 385
selecting 66 selecting OLAP tools 280, 453, 455
rotating text 383
selecting records 258, 259, 347, 348
row totals 215, 292
selecting report fields 210
rows 278, 494
pivoting sort fields in OLAP reports 494 selecting StyleSheets 253
totaling 278 selecting values for the x-axis 345
running OLAP examples 445
selecting values for the y-axis 344
selection criteria 377, 461, 507, 509, 510, 511,
S 512, 515, 516, 517, 522, 525
applying 507, 510, 511, 512
sample files for OLAP 445 applying from OLAP Selections pane 509
applying in graph requests 377
save options 288, 388
applying to a date range 507, 511, 522, 525
saving deferred reports 108, 111, 118 applying to date elements 516, 517
saving OLAP reports 561, 562, 563, 564 applying to OLAP reports 511
as Excel files 563 deleting 515
as My Reports 564 OLAP and 461
Selections pane and 510
saving parameter selections 59, 60
selection criteria pane 511
saving reports 288, 388, 560
Selections Criteria pane in Control Panel 512
scales 340, 341

Index
Selections list box 529 specifying date ranges 516

deleting dates 529
Stack Measures check box 542
Selections pane 458
stacking measures 463, 542
self-service applications 206 in OLAP reports 463
setting fixed scales 386 standard reporting functions 160, 161, 168
creating a COMPUTE statement 161
setting graph height 387 creating a DEFINE statement 160
setting graph width 387 creating a JOIN between data sources 161
creating a WHERE statement 168
shared reports 20, 35, 48, 50, 51, 615, 620,
Standard Reports 20, 35, 110, 612, 613
621, 622, 623
filtering 613
copying 51, 622
running 612, 613
editing 51, 622, 623
running 615 static reports 20
Shared Reports folder 35 Styles tab 340
Shared Reports tab 620 StyleSheets 253, 254, 455
OLAP hyperlinks and 455
Show Graph check box 539 predefined 253
smart dates 530 StyleSheets and 455
sort across options 300 styling fields 240
Sort check box 478 styling graphs 382, 385, 386, 437, 439, 441
sort fields 210, 215, 238 styling reports 240, 370
subfoots 238
subheads 238 subfoots 238, 299
sort order 477, 499, 501 subheads 238, 299
grouping numeric data 499, 501
subtitles 381
sorting 475
subtotals 237, 238, 251
sorting by column values in OLAP reports 475, 478,
sum fields 235
479, 480, 481
summary reports 218
sorting by hidden fields in OLAP reports 497
suppressing subtitles 475, 478
sorting deferred reports 108, 109, 110, 114
sorting in OLAP reports 460, 472, 475, 479, 480,
T
481, 497
templates 594, 603
sorting measures 457, 475
refreshing 603
sorting OLAP data 447, 475 temporary fields 222, 223, 224, 309
sorting reports 297, 472 creating 222
OLAP and 472 deleting 222
668 WebFOCUS
Index
temporary fields (continued) U

editing 222
order of evaluation 309 unspecified join 321
text editor 46
in Dashboard 46 uploading data files 52, 55
text properties dialog boxes 382 user options 85
text rotation 383 Utilities link 70
three-state check box 571
TILE column 499, 501 V
tile fields 499, 501 values for x- and y- axes 342
titles 377, 381
adding 381 vertical graphs 533
toolbar 102 vertical labels 381
toolbar options 610 View Library Versions 82, 84
toolbars in Dashboard 32 Viewer Control Panel 579, 581
case sensitive searches 581
Tools link 70 closing 579
totaling records 278 navigating reports 579
searching reports 581
totals 215 viewing deferred reports 108, 115
tree blocks 32 viewing fully qualified field names 214
Tree link 70 viewing recent reports 84
Tree mode 217 viewing sorted OLAP data 479, 480
trends 530, 531
displaying as graphs 530 Views link 70
displaying in graphs 531 virtual fields 160, 222, 223, 224
Two-Way Email 589, 590, 591, 593, 594, 595,
596, 598, 599, 600, 602, 603 Visible check box of Field Options tab 345, 346
adding addresses 600 visualizing trends 530
deleting addresses 602
replying to confirmation messages 593, 594 VZERO parameter 366
requesting reports 595, 596
security and 593
specifying report parameters 596
W
subscribing 590, 591
warning message in heading 277
updating security credentials 603
updating subscription information 598, 599 watch list 32, 70, 82, 89, 90, 92, 93, 95
Two-Way Email templates 594, 603 blocks 32, 89
refreshing 603 interface 82, 90, 92, 93

Index
web queries 444 WITHIN attributes in a Master File 453

web searches 443, 444 working with OLAP reports 460
WebFOCUS Browser Version 453, 455 Wrap check box 382
OLAP and 453, 455
WebFOCUS Business Intelligence Dashboard 20,
X
23, 25, 26
x-axis 342, 345, 357, 358, 386
WebFOCUS client configuration 120
setting fixed scales 386
WebFOCUS Developer Studio 453, 455
X-axis properties 383
OLAP and 453, 455
WebFOCUS Managed Reporting 20
WebFOCUS server 120 Y
WebFOCUS Viewer 21, 577 y-axis 292, 342, 344, 386, 398
setting fixed scales 386
WebFOCUS Viewer search results 583 y-axis fields 345, 346
WHERE statements 258, 259, 265, 347, 348, hiding 346
355 y-axis values 346, 347
combining expressions 265, 355
creating 258, 347, 348 YRTHRESH value 530
WHERE TOTAL statements 258, 259, 347, 348
670 WebFOCUS
WebFOCUS
Reader Comments
In an ongoing effort to produce effective documentation, the Documentation Services staff

at Information Builders welcomes any opinion you can offer regarding this manual.
Please use this form to relay suggestions for improving this publication or to alert us to
corrections. Identify specific pages where applicable. You can contact us through the following
methods:
Mail: Documentation Services - Customer Support

Information Builders, Inc.
Two Penn Plaza
New York, NY 10121-2898
Fax: (212) 967-0460
E-mail: books_info@ibi.com
Web form: http://www.informationbuilders.com/bookstore/derf.html
Name:
Company:
Address:
Telephone: Date:
Email:
Comments:
Information Builders, Two Penn Plaza, New York, NY 10121-2898 (212) 736-4433
WebFOCUS Managed Reporting End User's Manual DN4500811.1208
Reader Comments
Information Builders, Two Penn Plaza, New York, NY 10121-2898 (212) 736-4433
WebFOCUS Managed Reporting End User's Manual DN4500811.1208

WF 761 Mruser

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

WF 761 Mruser

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

WebFOCUS Managed

1. Introducing WebFOCUS Managed Reporting..................................................19

WebFOCUS Managed Reporting End User's Manual 3

Working With Shared Reports...................................................................................48

3. Creating Dashboard Content..........................................................................89

Selecting Scrolling Options.....................................................................................101

4. Using the Deferred Report Status Interface................................................107

5. Using Power Painter....................................................................................123

WebFOCUS Managed Reporting End User's Manual 5

Setting Field Display Options..................................................................................195

6. Creating a Report With Report Assistant....................................................205

Aggregating and Sorting Fields................................................................................249

7. Creating a Graph With Graph Assistant.......................................................329

WebFOCUS Managed Reporting End User's Manual 7

Field Selection Tab in HTML Graph Assistant...................................................................396

8. Analyzing Data in an OLAP Report...............................................................443

WebFOCUS Managed Reporting End User's Manual 9

Uniform Field Name Referencing in OLAP.................................................................561

9. Visualizing Trends in Reports......................................................................565

10. Using the WebFOCUS Viewer.....................................................................577

11. Using Two-Way Email.................................................................................589

12. Using Java Applet Managed Reporting......................................................607

Using the Shared Reports Tab................................................................................620

WebFOCUS Managed Reporting End User's Manual 11

How This Manual Is Organized

1 Introducing WebFOCUS Describes Managed Reporting and the end-user

2 Using Dashboard Describes the Dashboard, which automatically

WebFOCUS Managed Reporting End User's Manual 13

9 Visualizing Trends in Describes how to insert visual representations of

12 Using Java Applet Managed Describes Java-based Managed Reporting and

underscore Indicates a default setting.

this typeface Represents a placeholder (or variable), a cross-reference, or an

this typeface Highlights a file name or command.

Key + Key Indicates keys that you must press simultaneously.

[ ] Indicates a group of optional parameters. None are required,

| Separates mutually exclusive choices in syntax. Type one of

WebFOCUS Managed Reporting End User's Manual 15

. Indicates that there are (or could be) intervening or additional

Information You Should Have

WebFOCUS Managed Reporting End User's Manual 17

Information Builders Consulting and Training

1 Introducing WebFOCUS Managed Reporting

This documentation provides an overview

WebFOCUS Managed Reporting End User's Manual 19

WebFOCUS and Managed Reporting Overview

Managed Reporting Concepts

Managed Reporting Features

WebFOCUS Managed Reporting End User's Manual 21

Lowercase Directory Names and File Names in WebFOCUS From UNIX

Managed Reporting Interface

The following options are available for accessing Managed Reporting.

Business Intelligence Dashboard

Dashboard offers you the ability to:

WebFOCUS Managed Reporting End User's Manual 23

WebFOCUS Managed Reporting End User's Manual 25

There are several views in the Dashboard environment:

Reference: Considerations When Logging On to Dashboard

Procedure: How to Open a Public or Group View

WebFOCUS Managed Reporting End User's Manual 27

2. Click Public Views or Group Views.

Procedure: How to Log On to a Personalized View of Dashboard

2. Enter a valid Managed Reporting user ID and password.